COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


A UIST OF -REBK ERENCES IN 
THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


COMPILED BY 


WILLIAM BURT GAMBLE 
Chief of the Science and Technology Division 


WITH INTRODUCTION BY 


E. J. WALL 


Associate Editor of ‘*American Photography”’ 


NEW YORK — 
1924 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


AEST SOT ARE EER ENCES 7UN 
ELLE NE Wee ORK PRUBUCIGYVELBRARY 


COMPILED BY 


WILLIAM BURT GAMBLE 


WITH INTRODUCTION BY 


Ee oWALL 


Associate Editor of ‘‘American Photography’’ 


NEW YORK 
1924 













es. yaa 5 
, Lh AL iy ( Bethe bee 2 
' a ; Tig a Pt pate we i 7 
Yr - ¥ 1 
ACs ede, SEN stall , aay cK 
‘ f B he® ? ty v 
Ne 
\? 
* 
NOTE T* 

This list includes books and periodical 
articles available in the Reference Depart- 
ment of The New York Public Library on 

_ June 1, 1924. They may be consulted in the 
Central Building at Fifth Avenue and Forty- 
second Street. No attempt has been made to 
cite references to patent records. 
. 
o< 
24 
4 - REPRINTED OCTOBER 1924 
mi FROM THE . 
] BULLETIN OF THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
5 JUNE, JULY, AUGUST AND SEPTEMBER, 1924 
PRINTED AT THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY : 
form p188 [x-29-24 3c] _ eee 
. . ae 
f 
e rh) BAe jot : a 4 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
A LIST OF REFERENCES IN THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 





INTRODUCTION 





T is interesting to note that a print in the approximate colors of nature was 

obtained before photography, as we now understand it, had become an 
accomplished fact. J. T. Seebeck sent to the poet Goethe a note: “On the 
chemical action of light and colored illumination,” in which he described the 
reproduction of a spectrum in colors on damp silver chloride. This was pub- 
lished by Goethe as an appendix to his “Zur Farbenlehre” (Tiibingen, 1810, 
Bd. 2, p.717). Descriptions of Daguerre’s and Fox Talbot’s processes of 
photography were published in 1839. 

The Seebeck process attracted some attention in the early days, notably 
from Sir John Herschel, E. Becquerel, Niepce de Saint Victor and Poitevin. 
But excellent as are the results thus obtainable this process has become more 
of a pretty laboratory experiment than a working method, because no means 
have been found of making such pictures permanent. The process is based 
on the fact that the “‘subchlorides”’ of silver, that is, the dark-colored products 
of the action of light on white silver chloride, assume the colors of the incident 
light. When silvered plates or homogeneous films of silver subchloride on 
reflective surfaces are used, the colors are partly due to the formation of silver 
in laminae, separated from one another by half the wave-length of the incident 
light. Using paper supports involving no regular reflection, the colors become 
the so-called “body colors,’ which may be looked upon as light-formed pig- 
ments. Fixation of such pictures destroys in the former case the ordered sep- 
aration of the laminae, and in the latter case the surface color and chemical 
nature of each body pigment are altered. 

J. Clerk Maxwell, the famous English physicist, was the first to suggest 
the possibility of obtaining photographs in natural colors by splitting up the 
subject into its three component colors, red, green, and blue-violet, in accord- 
ance with the Young-Helmholtz theory of trichromatic vision. He actually 
attempted (Proc. Roy. Soc. 1859, v. 60, p. 404, 484) to reproduce a subject in 
this manner by photographing it through liquid color filters of the above named 
hues and projecting transparencies from the negatives through similarly 
colored filters by means of three lanterns. The result was, of course, but an 
evanescent picture and by no means perfect, for at that time there was no known 
means for rendering the silver salts responsive to colors other than blue and 
violet. Maxwell seems to have confined his attention solely to a projected 
screen picture. 

[aa 


4 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


To Ducos du Hauron and Charles Cros, two Frenchmen, belongs the 
honor of having first outlined the possibility of producing prints in colors. 
Though working quite independently of one another, they practically laid the 
bases of modern practice, in two papers presented to the Société Frangaise de 
Photographie on the same day (Bull. Soc. frang. Phot. 1869, tome 15, p. 122, 
152). Du Hauron had, however, sent a paper to the Académie des Sciences as 
early as 1862, in which he outlined his theory, but unfortunately this was re- 
jected because no proofs of the correctness of his arguments were adduced. 

The basis of these processes was again the splitting up of the subject into 
the three fundamental colors and printing from the negatives in the comple- 
mentary colors. Of recent years all that has been done is the perfection of 
minor details of the process; the basic facts were determined once for all by 
the above experimenters, who seem to have been entirely ignorant of Clerk 
Maxwell’s work. 

The sensitive surfaces of that time were very slow, initially sensitive only 
to blue, violet and the ultra-violet, and the means for color-sensitizing, which 
was mainly effected with chlorophyll, not very effective. It was not till H. W. 
Vogel’s discovery of the theory of optical sensitizers (Berichte, 1873, Jahrg. 6, 
p. 1305) that marked color-sensitivity was possible. Vogel discovered that 
the addition of certain anilin dyes to a photographic emulsion considerably 
enhanced its sensitiveness to the less refrangible spectral rays. Up to this time 
two collodion processes, either the wet or emulsion methods, were alone used, 
and their comparative insensitiveness was a serious handicap. The introduc- 
tion of the gelatine plate and the recent discovery of new and much more potent 
color sensitizers, the isocyanins, have placed all three-color processes on a prac- 
tical basis. 

The superposition of aerial colored images, as in the chromoscope, the 
principle of which was clearly outlined by du Hauron and Cros in their early 
papers, is by no means sufficient from a practical point of view. A print in 
colors is the great desideratum and although the many processes so far worked 
out are in most cases satisfactory, yet the fact that three negatives and three 
colored superposed pulls are required has undoubtedly militated against the 
more general adoption of these methods by the average worker, for obviously 

the chances of failure are increased sixfold. 

Du Hauron outlined a possible method by means of which the three ex- 
posures might be reduced to one. This was effected by the application of the 
three selective color filters in microscopic dimensions to one surface, so as to 
form a color mosaic of the subject, the color elements being of sufficient minute- 
ness as to present, when viewed at the distance of normal vision, a homogeneous 
grey. This is the principle of the screen-plate process, which was brought to 
perfection by MM. Lumiére in 1907, in their Autochrome plate. In this, potato 
starch grains, stained in accordance with the theoretical requirements, are dis- 
tributed over a glass surface, there being approximately 4,000,000 per square 
inch of surface. This color-mosaic is coated with an emulsion and the camera 
exposure made through the color grains. The primary negative image thus - 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 5 


obtained, which appears in the complementary colors, is dissolved and a posi- 
tive is obtained in the colors of the original. Here again one meets with the 
great disadvantage that the results are on glass. Nor is there any really satis- 
factory method of making paper prints from Autochrome. If more than one 
result is required a separate exposure has to be made for each. It is true that 
it is possible to use the mosaic color filters on a separate surface and obtain an 
ordinary negative, broken up into minute areas of varying density according 
to the colors of the subject and from this to make any number of glass posi- 
tives and bind the latter in register with a color mosaic filter and thus obtain 
satisfactory reproductions; but they are still on glass. 

The ideal process of color photography would possibly be one which would 
give us a stable color image in the camera, from which any number of replicas 
could be made. ‘The feasibility of some such process is proved by the fact that 
many inorganic and organic colors fade or bleach out under the action of their 
complementary colored rays. This is a fact known from the very earliest days 
and many attempts have been made to work out a practicable process, using the 
brilliant anilin colors as bases. Distinct and marked advances have been made. 
But even at its best the camera exposures are inordinately long, extending over 
many hours, and the fact that no means of completely ‘fixing’ the colors (that 
is, destroying the fading properties), has made the bleach-out process more of 
an interesting laboratory experiment than a work-a-day one. 

Wilhelm Zenker (“Lehrbuch der Photochromie,” Berlin, 1868) outlined 
the possibility of obtaining photographs in natural colors by the regular reflec- 
tion from silver laminae, deposited in a film at a separation of half the wave- 
length of the incident light, whereby interference would be set up with color 
formation. Otto Wiener (Wiedemann’s Annal. 1890, Bd. 40, p. 203) proved 
experimentally that the formation of “standing waves” in a silver emulsion film, 
by reflection of the incident light back on its own path from a mirror surface, 
was possible. But to Gabriel Lippmann, of Paris, belongs the honor of having 
first produced in a grainless film the laminary deposit of metallic silver 
(Comptes rendus, 1891, tome 112, p. 274), showing the brilliant interference 
colors that reproduced those of the original. The essentials for this process are 
an emulsion of a silver salt in which the latter is in such a finely divided state 
that the vehicle looks quite transparent. If such an emulsion on its glass sup- 
port be placed in contact with a reflecting surface, metallic mercury being gen- 
erally employed, the incident light is reflected back on the same path and gives 
rise to the stationary waves, in which the ether particles vibrate to and fro with- 
out any progressive movement. That is, the incident and reflected rays inter- 
fere with one another and where their phase motions coincide there is increase 
of ether vibration and consequent increase of light, while when they interfere 
regularly with one another the vibrations are annulled, consequently there is 
absence of light and no chemical action on the sensitive silver salt. 

When these interference heliochromes are examined under suitable con- 
ditions of lighting, they show an accuracy and brilliancy of coloring which is 
very remarkable. Unfortunately this, too, remains but a laboratory experi- 


6 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


ment, for the extreme slowness of the emulsion (about 2,000 times less than 
that of the normal slow plate) as well as the necessity of making the plates for 
oneself, have barred the process from general practice. 

The diffraction process, devised by Professor R. W. Wood, of Johns 
Hopkins University (U. S. Patent 755, 983, 1904), involving the splitting up 
of white light by diffraction gratings, although beautiful from a theoretical 
point of view, is again only a laboratory process. ‘The results are on glass and 
must be viewed in a particular manner in order that the colors may be seen. 
These are superimposed spectral, not pigmentary, colors. To the same category 
belong the prismatic dispersion process of Drac (English Patent 1,008, 1904) 
which is actually based on a suggestion of Charles Cros (Les mondes, Feb., 
1869); the micro-spectra methods of Lanchester (English Patent, 16,548, — 
1895); and Rheinberg (Photographic journal, 1912, v. 52, p. 162), and others. 

The future of color photography, from the amateur worker’s point of 
view, lies on the laps of the Gods. There are, exclusive of the screen-plate 
process, excellent methods which will give practically correct reproductions 
of the colors of nature. But they are too tedious and call for more 
care than the average worker will expend. The extraordinary facility with 
which an ordinary black-and-white photograph can be obtained has completely 
jaundiced the outlook of the average worker as regards color methods. He 
must have one that will give him his color record with the same ease as in black 
and white. : 

The future of color photography lies in two directions: the one, in its more 
widespread use in illustration; the other in the moving picture. The recent 
advances in photomechanical printing processes, as in rotary-gravure and off- 
set, should open up a still wider field for book illustration; for with these 
methods the mechanical grain is so much reduced as to give a much more pleas- 
ing and delicate reproduction than with the ordinary half-tone block, the grain 
or network of which becomes, unless extreme care be used, very offensive in 
three-color printing. 

It is no exaggeration to state that the photographic end of these processes 
is perfected — that there is practically no improvement to be made. The ad- 
vance which must be made lies with the printing ink makers. Exactly how 
improvement and perfection are to be attained is not easy to see. If perma- 
nency of the colors in the pictures were not a vital point the problem could be 
solved; but as it is demanded, and rightly too, that the inks shall be permanent 
(that is, stable to light) the ink maker is heavily handicapped from the start. 
The theoretical requirements for the three inks, red, yellow, and blue, are well 
established and it is known that by the use of the brilliant coal tar colors these 
requirements can be met. But though the advances of recent years in over- 
coming the fugitiveness of the anilin lakes have been great, the problem has 
not yet been solved and the ink maker has perforce to use more stable pigments, 
which will not fulfill the fundamental requirements. Hence, unless handwork 
or retouching, both expensive and tedious, are resorted to, the photographic — 
work is unsatisfactory. . 


ay t es, 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 7 


It is more than probable that many will not agree with the writer in his 
views as to motion pictures in colors. But that we shall have them in a few 
years is a foregone conclusion. Many attempts have been made and there are 
one or two methods which are theoretically perfect, but these are not commer- 
cially adaptable and their adoption would necessitate a revolution in the method 
of showing pictures in every theater. One or two processes are being tried out 
at the present time with more or less success; but they are two-color methods 
and are, therefore, so incomplete in color rendering as to seriously handicap 
advances in this direction. Many will be able to recall the old Kinemacolor 
process, a two-color process of projection in which the pictures were shown in 
red and green in rapid succession, the effect depending upon the fusion of the 
color in the brain of the observer. All the methods based on this persistence 
and fusion of vision are hopeless, as one soon becomes conscious of an eye- 
strain and retinal fatigue that is extremely trying. Those in which each pro- 
jected picture appears as a complete color composite are not commercial 
methods, because special apparatus is required for showing them. The future 
of the motion picture in colors lies in a process which will give each minute pic- 
ture complete in all the colors, and adaptable to any ordinary projector. 

Many have advanced as an argument against the use of color in motion 
pictures that it would detract from the picture — that is from the acting. This 
always seems to me a weak argument, or else it shows a poor standard of act- 
ing. Would it not be as legitimate to argue that the ordinary properties and 
stage settings militate against the acting and the lines of the legitimate or speak- 
ing drama? Yet one does not become conscious of these. If color is used, as 
it should be, merely as a subsidiary and not the essential in the motion picture, 
it should not detract from the silent drama. 

It is impossible to omit some few words as to the value of this compila- 
tion of references available in The New York Public Library. It is incalculable. 
It places in the hands of the student of the subject a ready means of knowing 
what has been done and said by others. And by its means it is possible to start 
out on a line of research primed with past efforts, past successes, past failures, 
so that months of useless and costly spade-work can be saved. — E. J. W. 


8 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


ay me 8 


EIS 





1761 


1. Tiphaigne de la Roche, Charles Fran- 
cois. Giphantia; or, A view of what has 
passed, what is now passing, and, during 
the present century, what will pass, in the 
world. Translated from the original French 
fof C. F. Tiphaigne de la Roche), with ex- 
planatory notes. London: Robert Hors- 
field, 1760-61. 2v.in 1. 12°. SB 

See [part 1], p. 95-98 for a fanciful account of a 
process suggesting Lippmann’s. These passages also 
printed, with comments, in British journal of photog- 
raphy, May 29, 1891, v. 38, p. 342, MFA. 

“Thou knowest that the rays of light, reflected 
from different bodies, make a picture and paint 
the bodies upon all polished surfaces, on the retina 
of the eye, for instance, on water, on glass. The 
elementary spirits have studied to fix these transient 
images; they have composed a most subtile matter, 
very viscous, and proper to harden and dry, by the 
help of which a picture is made in the twinkle of an 
eye.” 


1792 


2. Wuensch, Christian Ernst. Versuche 
und Beobachtungen tiber die Farben des 
Lichtes... Leipzig: J. G. I. Breitkopf und 
Comp,., 1792. xii, 114 p: illus,..8°. PES 

Wiinsch (born 1744, died 1828), a professor in 
the University of Leipzig, was probably the first to 
prove the theory of the three visual primary colors. 
An abstract of this section of the book may be found 
in J. C. Fischer’s Geschichte der Physik, v. 7, 1806, 
p. 50, of which the Library has a copy, PAB. There 
is an abstract in English in British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photogra- 
phy supplement, p. 34-36, MFA. 


1810 


3. Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von. Zur 
Farbenlehre. Titibingen: J. G. Cotta, 1810. 
2v.andatlas. 8° and 4°. PEX and f PEX 


“Goethe took great interest in the work of Seebeck 
and the best account of the experiments in question 
is preserved in Goethe’s treatise on colour.” — Bolas. 


4. Seebeck, Johann Thomas. Von der 
chemischen Action des Lichts und der 
farbigen Beleuchtung. (In: J. W. von 
Goethe, Zur Farbenlehre. Ttibingen, 1810. 
8°. Bd. 2, p. 716+720.) PEX 


1820 


5. Seebeck, Johann Thomas. Uber die un- 
gleiche Erregung der Warme im prisma- 
tischen Sonnenbilde. (Ko6onigliche Akade- 
mie der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen. 
Berlin, 1820. Jahren 1818-19, p. 305-350.) 
* EE 
Also in Journal fiir Chemie und Physik, Halle, 
1824, Bd. 40, p. 129-176, PAA. 


1833 


6. Brewster, Sir David. <A treatise on op- 
tics. 1st American edition... Philadel- 
phia: Carey, Lea, & Blanchard, 1833. 323; 
OS pe iles ed aay PEB 


Seebeck’s and Wollaston’s experiments on coloring 
power of the spectrum described on p. 83. 


1840 


7. Herschel, Sir John Frederick William. 
A letter to the Rev. William Whewell... 
on the chemical action of the solar rays. 
(British Association for the Advancement 
of Science. Report of the 9th meeting, 
Birmingham, August, 1839. London, 1840. 
part 2, p. 9-11.) * EC 

‘When a slip of sensitive paper is exposed to a 
highly concentrated spectrum, a picture of it is rapidly 


impressed on the paper, not merely in black, but in 
colours.” 


8. On the chemical action of the rays 
of the solar spectrum on preparations of 
silver and other substances, both metallic 
and non-metallic, and on some _ photo- 
graphic processes. illus. (Royal Society 
of London. Philosophical transactions, 
London, 1840, part 1, p. 1-59.) * EC 


“The result was equally striking and unexpected. 
A very intense photographic impression of the spec- 
trum was rapidly formed, which, when withdrawn 
and viewed in moderate daylight, was found to be 
coloured with sombre, but unequivocal tints, imitating 
those of the spectrum itself... I have not succeeded 
in fixing these tints. They are, however, susceptible 
of half fixing by the mere action of water, and may 
be viewed at leisure in moderate daylight, or by 
candlelight.” 





1841 


9. Herschel, Sir John Frederick William. 
Letter...dated July 31, 1841. (British As- 
sociation for the Advancement of Science. 
Report of the 11th meeting, Plymouth, 
July, 1841, London, 1842, part 2, p. 40.) 
. bod EM 
Submits a number of photographs tinted with vege- 
table coloring matters which have been eaten away 
by the luminous rays of the spectrum. “A circum- 
stance which, considering the great command of colour 
which this new variety of the photographic art affords, 
holds out no slight hope of a solution of the problem 
of a photographic representation of natural objects 
in their proper colours.” 


10. Waller, Augustus. Experiments on the 
coloured films formed by iodine, bromine, 
and chlorine upon various metals. (Lon- 
don, Edinburgh, & Dublin philosophical 
magazine, London, 1841, v. 21, p. baer sy 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 9 


1843 


11. Herschel, Sir John Frederick William. 
On the action of the rays of the solar spec- 
trum on vegetable colours, and on some 
new photographic processes. illus. (Royal 
Society of London. Philosophical trans- 
actions, London, 1842, part 1, p. 181-214.) 
* EC 
Also printed in London, Edinburgh & Dublin philo- 


sophical magazine, London, 1843, v. 22, p. 5-21, 107— 
115, 246-252, OA. 


12. Talbot, H. F. On the coloured rings 
produced by iodine on silver, with remarks 
on the history of photography. (London, 
Edinburgh, and Dublin philosophical maga- 
zine, London, 1843, v. 22, p. 94-97.) OA 


Also printed in Daguerreian journal, New York, 
May 1, 1851, v. 1, p. 357-359, MFA (Humbphrey’s). 


1848 


13. Becquerel, Edmond. De l’image photo- 
graphique colorée du spectre solaire. (An- 
nales de chimie et de physique, Paris, 1848, 
série 3, tome 22, p. 451-459.) PAA 

German translations in Dinglers polytechnisches 
Journal, Jahrg. 1848, Bd. 110, p. 25-30, 3-VA, and in 
Journal fiir praktische Chemie, Jahrg. 1848, Bd. 2, 
p. 358-365, PKA. Abstracted in the Comptes rendus 
of the Académie des sciences, Paris, 1848, tome 26, 
p. 181-183, *EO. English translation in Photographic 
NEWS, London, 1859, v. 2, p. 302-303; v. 3, p. 14-15, 
27-28, 62-63, MFA. 


1849 


14. Becquerel, Edmond. De l’image photo- 
chromatique du spectre solaire et des images 
colorées obtenues a la chambre obscure. 
(Annales de chimie et de physique. Paris, 
1849, série 3, tome 25, p. 447-474.) PAA 


German translations in Dinglers polytechnisches 
Journal, Jahrg.. 1849, Bd. 114, p. 44-56, 118-122, 
3-VA, and in Journal fiir praktische ° Chemie, Jahrg. 
1849, Bd. 3, p. 154-175, PKA. 


1850 


15. Colors produced by photography. (Da- 
guerreian journal, New York, Dec. 2, 1850, 
ae MFA (Humphrey’s) 


Brief notes on the Becquerel process. 


1851 


16. The Daguerreian journal: devoted to 
the daguerreian and photogenic arts. Also, 
embracing the sciences, arts, and literature. 
S. D. Humphrey, editor and publisher. v. 
mieseno. 3 (Nov. 1, 1850—Dec. 15, 1851). 
New York, 1850-51. 8°. MFA (Humphrey) 


‘Reprints papers by famous experimenters. See 
articles on L. ill. For a commentary on Hill 
see British journal of photography, March 6, 1903, 
p. 184-185, MFA. 


Dispel slzevie Ls. The natural colors. 





(Photographic art journal, New York, 
Feb:, 185], v.°1, p. 116-118.) MFA 
18. Photographic researches and ma- 


nipulations; including the substance of the 

author’s Treatise on daguerreotype. New 

Nor: Holman & Gray, 1851iv 15sp, “833 
* C p.v.1036 


19. The Hillotype. (Photographic art 
journal, New York, Aug:, 1851, v.2, p. 76— 
81.) MFA 


20. Hunt, Robert. Heliochrome. (Hum- 

phrey’s journal, New York, Nov. 15, 1851, 

v. 8, p. 21-25.) MFA 
From the London art journal. 


Also printed in Photographic art journal, 
York, Nov., 1851, v. 2, p. 291-294, MFA. 


21. New and valuable discovery. Hillo- 
types. (Daguerreian journal, New York, 
1850-51, v. 1, p. 209-211, 241-242, 273-274, 
SOP PaN ie, 1 L718, 20—2on 00k, hom Lae 
145-147, 305, 312-314, 337-338.) MFA 


Titles of articles vary. 


22. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Félix 
Abel. The heliochromotype of M. Niepce 
dexSt.-Victor. -( Photographic. art joutnatl: 
New York, July,-1851,. v.e2ip7" 32-37.) 
MFA 


New 


Translation from La Lumiére. 


23. Snelling, H. H. The Hillotype. |(By 
H. H. Snelling. (Photographic art jour- 
nal, New York, April, 1851, v2 1, pi-333— 
340.) MFA 
24. On taking daguerreotypes in the 


natural colors. ,By H. Snelling.; 
(Photographic art journal, New York, 





April, 1851, v. 1, p. 208-211.) MFA 
Comments on Hill process. 
1852 

25. La Chromo-photographie.; (Cosmos, 

Paris, 1852, tome 1, p. 372-373.) VA 


Briefly describes experiments of Niepce de Saint 
Victor. 
26. ,La Fixation des couleurs.; (Cosmos, 
Paris, 1852, tome 2, p. 39-44, 89-91, 341- 
343.) VA 
Editorial discussion of the claims of Niepce de 
Saint Victor, Becquerel, Campbell, and Hill. 
27. The Hillotype.. (Photographicwgas: 
journal, New York, Nov., 1852, v. 4, p. 293- 
296.) MFA 


28. ;Hillotypes.; (Photographic art jour- 
nal, New York, Feb., 1852, v. 3, p. 131-132.) 
MFA 
Copy of defence published by the editor of the 
Prattsville Advocate. 
29. Hunt, Robert. On the possibility of 
producing photographs in their natural 
colours. (In his: Photography; a treatise 
on the chemical changes produced by the 
solar‘radiation... ~Neweyore 1552."012°. 
p. 219-221.) MFC 


10 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1852, continued, 


30. Mercury, pseud. Communication on 

the Hillotype. (Photographic art journal, 

New York, Dec., 1852, v. 4, p. ay 
MFA 


31. Mr. Hill and his manifesto. (Photo- 
graphic art journal, New York, Oct., 1852, 


v. 4, p. 249.) MFA 
32. Morse, Samuel Finley Breese. Photo- 
graphic colors. (National Intelligencer, 


Washington, Oct. 8, 1852, v. 40, p. 2.) *A 


“First: Mr. Hill has made the discovery of a proc- 
ess for fixing the colors of the camera image, and, 
although not so perfected in all its complicated parts 
as to be equally true in the color of the various ob- 
jects, is sufficiently developed in its results to give 
assurance of its ultimate perfection... Fourth: Mr. 
Hill’s process cannot be like M. Becquerel’s, for it is 
stated that M. Becquerel ‘was never able to fix the 
colors.’ ” 

For discussion see Scientific American, Oct. 23, 
HORE Giarecy genet gen mae! 

Also printed in Humphrey’s journal, New York, 
Nov. 1, 1852, v. 4, p. 217-219, MFA. 


33. A Practical Daguerre, pseud. The Hil- 
lotype; or, Daguerreotypes in the colors 


of nature. (Photographic art journal, 
New York, Jan., 1852, v. 3, p. 47-50.) MFA 


1853 


34. Campbell, James. Heliochromy. 
(Humphrey’s journal, New York, 1853, v. 
4, p. 362-364, 378-380; v. 5, p. 11-12, 41-44, 


74-75, 96.) MFA 
Last two instalments have the title: Hydrogen. 
35. Campbell, James. Heliochromy. (Sci- 


entific American, New York, Feb. 26, 1853, 
v. 8, p. 186.) VA 


Experiments with hydrogen and electricity to 
hasten the Becquerel and Niepce processes. For 
discussions see Cosmos, 1852-53, tome 2, p. 39-44, 
89-91, 341-343, VA, and Dinglers polytechnisches 
Journal, Jahrg. 1853, Bd. 127, p. 143-145; 1853, 
Bd. 128, p. 49-51, 3-VA. 


36. United States. — Patents Committee 
(Senate, 32:2). Report...,on the memorial 
of Levi L. Hill, in reference to his alleged 
discovery in heliochrome, or sun-printing}. 


March 3, 1853. ,;Washington, 1853.; 2 p. 
8°. (U.S. 32. cong., Z. sess. Senate re- 
port 427; serial 671.) * SBF 


“Tt is believed that most of the philosophers, both 
in Europe and America, long since gave up as hope- 
less the search after this branch of science, which 
has now been discovered by one of our citizens in 
one of the wild valleys of the Catskill mountains, far 
removed from the schools of art.’ 

Reprinted in National intelligencer, March 4, 1853, 
v. 4, p. 3. For discussions see Scientific American, 
1853, v. 8, p. 224, 226, 380, VA. 


1854 


37. Becquerel, Edmond. Nouvelles re- 
cherches sur les impressions colorées pro- 
duites lors de l’action chimique de la lu- 


miére (troisigme mémoire). (Annales de 
chimie et de physique, Paris, 1854, série 3, 
tome 42, p. 81-106.) PAA 


Author’s abstract in Académie des _ sciences, 
Comptes rendus, Paris, 1854, tome 39, p. 63-67, *EO. 


38. Hunt, Robert. Researches on light in 
its chemical relations; embracing a con- 
sideration of all the ‘photographic proc- 
esses. London: Longman, Brown, Green, 
& Longmans, 1854. xx, 396 p. 2. ed. illus. 
8°. MFC 

An excellent resumé of early experiments on the 
effects of light upon chemicals. See especially chap- 


ter 13: On producing coloured pictures by the solar 
radiations. 


1855 


39. Henderson, Peter. On_naturally- 
colored photographs. (Humphrey’s jour- 
nal, New York, May 15, 1855, v. 7, p. 23— 
25. ) MFA 


40. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Félix 
Abel. Recherches photographiques. Pho- 
tographie sur verre. Héliochromie.. 
Avec une préface biographique et des 
notes par M. Ernest Lacan. Paris: Alexis 
Gaudin et frére, 1855. xxiv, 140 p., 1 port. 
8°. MFC 
Contains the first three of his memoirs on _helio- 
chromes presented to the French Academy of Sciences. 


41. Ross, William. On naturally-colored 
photographs. (Humphrey’s journal, New 
York, May 15, 1855, v. 7, p. 25-28.) MFA 


A reply to letter by Peter Henderson. 


42. On the probability of producing 
actino-polychrome pictures. (Humphrey’s 
journal, New York, March 1, 1855, v. 6, 
p. 345-349.) MFA 





1856 


43. Hillotypes. (Humphrey’s journal, New 
York, 1852, v. 4, p. 27, 219-224, 267-268, 285, 
298- 301, 361- 362: 1855, v. 6, p. 290, 315-319, 
321, 354; 1856, veGep: 97.) FA 


Various letters and opinions concerning a his- 
toric controversy. 


44. Testud de Beauregard. Colored photo- 
graphs obtained by simple exposure to 
light, and a method of printing positives 
without salts of silver. (Humphrey’s jour- 
nal, New York, 1855, v. 7, p. 141-144, 172- 
174; 1857, v. 9, p. 192.) MFA 

Translated from the Bulletin of the Société fran- 
caise de photographie. 

Also eas: in Journal of photography, London, 
1856, v. 2, p. 195-197, MFA. 


1857 


45. Antisell, Thomas. Hailotype. (Hum- 
phrey’s journal, New York, 1857, v. 8, p. 
324-325, 339.) MFA 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 11 


1857, continued. 


46. Hallotypes. (Humphrey’s journal, 
New York, 1857, v. 8, p. 257-258, 289, 305, 
321-325, 337-339; v. 9, p. 1-2.) MFA 


47. Maxwell, James Clerk. 
on colour, as perceived by the eye, with 
remarks on colour-blindness. illus. (Royal 
Society of Edinburgh. Transactions, Ed- 
mpiren, 185/, vy. 21, p. 275-298.) SEC 


See especially p. 284 for an early realization of 
three-color work. 


1859 


48. Barrett, Thomas. Photographs in nat- 
ural colours. (Photographic news, Lon- 
om 1009, Vv. 2, p..56, 95.) MFA 


Gives formula for developer used. 
49. Garrod, Edward. Colour in photogra- 
phy. (Photographic news, London, Aug. 
foieoe, ¥. 2, p. 287.) MFA 
Secured colors on an ordinary plate. 
50. Photographs in natural colors. (Hum- 
phrey’s journal, New York, 1859, v. 11, p. 


196-197, 286-287.) MFA 
Becquerel process. 
51. Photographs in natural colours. (Pho- 


tographic news, London, March 18, 1859, 
wiae . 1/.) MFA 


Fixing process claimed by a correspondent. 


1860 


52. Clarke, S. On the photogenic action 
of colour. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, Liverpool, Nov. 1, 1860, v. 7, p. 313- 
314.) MFA 


53. Dove, H. W. Das Dichrooscope. (An- 
nalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
1860, Serie 4, Bd. 20, p. 265-278.) PAA 


Studies in light interference. 


54. Gage, F. B. Vegetable and mineral 
photography. (Humphrey’s journal, New 
York, May 15, 1860, p. 22-23.) MFA 


Prediction that photography in natural colors will 
be realized. 
55. Martel, Charles. Colour in its relation 
to photography. illus. (Photographic 
news, London, 1860, v. 4, p. 49-50, 61-62, 
73-74, 97-98, 109-110, 121-122, 133-134, 144— 
146, 157-158, 169-170, 181-182.) MFA 


1862 


56. Maxwell, James Clerk. On the theory 
of three primary colours. (Royal Institu- 
tion of Great Britain. Proceedings, 1858- 
62, London, 1862, v. 3, p. 370-374.) *EC 


“The first idea of three-colour work has always 
“been hitherto ascribed to Collen, but in the 1895 Jahr- 
buch published recently by Dr. Eder, he points out 
that really the eae _ due to Clerk Maxwell, who read 
a paper on May 17, 1861, before the Royal Institu- 
tion, on the theory of the "three primary colours.” 
British journal of photography, July 26, 1895, p. 475. 


Experiments © 


57. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Félix 
Abel. On _ heliochromy. (Photographic 
news, London, Feb. 28, 1862, v. 6, p. 101- 
102.) MFA 


For brief account of ies exhibition see above, 
Sept. 12,1862, v.6, p. 433-434, 


1863 


58. Plé, Charles. Les images. photo- 
graphiques reproduisant les couleurs na- 
turelles des objets représentés. (Académie 
des sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Dept. 
28, 1863, tome 57, p. 584.) * EO 


For comments see Humphrey’s journal, New York, 
Dec. 1, 1863, v. 15, p. 230, MEA. 


59. Tillman, Samuel D. Heliochromy. 
(Photographic news, London, June 5, 1863, 


Were py es0-—27 15) ‘MFA 


Points out obstacles. 


1864 


60. Photographs in natural colours at last. 
(Photographic news, London, July 1, 1864, 
v. 8, p. 319-320.) "MFA 


“Oil of pinks” suggested in a spiritual seance. 


1865 


61. Calvert, F. Crace. On some of the 
most important chemical discoveries made 
within the last two years. Lecture 1, de- 
livered on Tuesday, the 4th of April, 1865: 
On the discoveries in chemistry applied to 
arts and manufactures. (Society of Arts. 
Journal,. London; Sept. 29, 1865. + 33.25; 
689-693.) MFA 


Deals chiefly with the investigations of Niepce de 
Saint Victor. 


62. Chevreul, E. Héliochromie. Com- 
munication...relative a la note de M. 
Niepce de Saint-Victor sur les noirs pro- 
duits en photographie. (Académie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1865, 


tome 61, p. 701-705.) * EO 


63. Collen, Henry. Natural colour in pho- 

tography. (British journal of photogra- 

phy, London, Oct. 27, 1865, v. 12, p. SE 
A 


Suggests a three plate process. 


64. —— Photography in natural colours. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 24, 1865, v. 12, p. 601.) MFA 


Further explains his suggestions published in the 
issue of Oct. 27, 1865. 


65. Fowler, R. J. -Photographing in nat- 
ural colours.; (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Nov. 10, 1865, v. 12, p. 575- 
576.) MFA 


Refers to experiments of Niepce de Saint Victor. 


12 THE NEW ‘YORE PUBLIC LIERARY 


1865, continued. 


66. Henderson, Peter. Photography in 

natural colours. (Photog aD news, 

London, Dec. 29, 1865, v. 9, p. 617-618.) 
MFA 


Account of author’s experiments. 


67. Lacan, Ernest. Photography in col- 


ours. (Photographic news, London, Dec. 

29, 1865, v. 9, p. 616-617.) MFA 
Poitevin process. 

68. Photographs in natural colours. (Brit- 


ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
10, 1865, v. 12, p. 573-574.) MFA 


Refers to investigations of Sir J. F. W. Herschel, 
Robert Hunt, Edmond Becquerel, and Niepce de Saint 
Victor. 


69. Poitevin, L. A. Action simultanée de 
la lumiére et des sels oxygénés sur le sous- 
chlorure d’argent violet; application a 
lobtention par la photographie des cou- 
leurs naturelles sur papier. (Académie 
des sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Dec. 
18, 1865, tome 61, p. 1111-1112.) * EO 


70. Reynolds, Emerson J. MHeliochromy. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Deees, 1865, v: 12°9.616.) MFA 


Reference to the researches of Dr. Reade and 
Walter Crum. 


71. Strutt, J. W. Photography in natural 
colours. (Photographic news, London, 
Nov. 24, 1865, v. 9, p. 564.) MFA 


Obstacles to success stated. 


72..Taylor, J. Trail. Historical notes on 
photography in natural colours. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, Dec. 22, 1865, v. 9, 
p. 604-606.) MFA 


1866 


73. Herschel, Sir John Frederick William. 
Photography in natural colours, etc. 
(Phetographic news, London, Jan. 5, 1866, 
v. 10, p. 5-6.) MFA 


74. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Félix 


Abel. Mémoires sur l’héliochromie. (Aca- 
démie des sciences. Comptes  rendus, 
Paris, 1852-66.) * EO 

Mémoire 1: June 2, 1851, tome 32, p. 834-841. 
Mémoire 2: Feb. 9, 1852, tome 34, p. 215-218. Mé- 
moire 3: Nov. 8, 1852, tome 35, p. 694-697. Mémoire 


4: Feb. 10, 1862, tome 54, p. 281-284. 
Jan. 12, 1865, tome 56, p. 90-93. 
1866, tome 63, p. 567-569. 

Mémoire 1 has the title: Extrait d’un mémoire sur 
une relation existant entre la couleur de certaines 
flammes colorées, avec les images héliographiques 
colorées par la lumiére. 

An English translation of memoir 3 in Scientific 
American, Feb. 19, 1853, v. 8, p. 179, VA; of memoir 
5, in Photographic NEWS, London, Jan. 30; VS637-vaess 
p. 51-52, MFA; of memoir 6, in Photographic news, 
London, "Nov. 13,0 1866.27; 10, p. 557-558, MFA. 

Translation of memoir 3 also in Photographer art 
pe. New York, Feb., 1853, yv. 5, p. 110-112, 


Mémoire 5: 
Mémoire 6: Oct. 1 


ike tLes recherches photographiques.; 
(Cosmos, Paris, Oct. 3, 1866, série 2, tome 
4, p. 389-391.) VA 

English translation in Photographic news, London, 


Oct. 19, 1866, v. 10, p. 497-498, MFA, under title: 
On obtaining black tones in heliochromic processes. 


76. Photographs in natural colours. (Pho- 

tographic news, London, Feb. 16, 1866, v. 

10)-p../ 3-74. MFA 
Poitevin’s process. 


Also printed in Humphrey’s journal, New York, 
March 15, 1866, v. 17, p. 345-347, MFA. 





77. Photography in colours. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, 1865, v. 9, p. 48, 84; 
1866, v. 10, p. 555, 578.) MFA 


M. Chambay of Mauritius claims to have been 
successful in fixing colors. 


78. Photography in natural colors. (Hum- 
phrey’s journal, New York, Nov. 1, 1866, 
¥. 18, 7.201) MFA 


Colors on ordinary plate observed after an eclipse. 


1867 


79. Becquerel, Edmond. La lumiére, ses 
causes et ses effets. Paris: Didot fréres, 
fils et cie, 1867-68. 2v. 8°. PEB 


See v. 2, p. 209-234: Reproduction des couleurs 
par l’action de la lumiére. 


80. Paage, A. Photographs in natural col- 
ours. (Photographic news, London, Aug. 
16, 1867, v. 11, p. 398.) MFA 


Results of author’s experiments. 


81. Van der Weyde, P. H. Coloured da- 
guerreotypes by the reversed action of 
light. (Photographic news, London, July 
19, 1867, v. 11, p. 345.) MFA 


1869 


82. Cros, Charles. M. Cros’s solution of 
the problem of photography in colours. 
(Photographic news, London, Oct. 8, 1869, 
v. 13, p. 483-485.) MFA 


83. Ducos du Hauron, Louis. A new helio- 

chromic process. (Photographic news, 

London, July 2, 1869, v. 13, p. 319-320.) 
MFA 


Paper read before the Société francaise de photog- 
raphie. 


1870 


84. Grune, Wilhelm. Experiences of an 
experimentalist. (Photographic news, 
London, Jan. 14, 1870, v. 14, p. 16.) MFA 


Collodion plates developed in camera. 


85. Thomas, R. W. Is it possible to obtain: 
photographs in colours? (Photographic 
news, London, Dec. 23, 1870, v. 14, 6- 

607.) MFA - 


The author thinks not. 


COLOR PHOFOGRAPHY 13 


1871 
86. Schultz-Sellack, Carl. Photography in 
colours. (Photographic news, London, 
Jiitie 2a) lo7i. v.15, p. 291.) MFA 


Color phenomena with silver salts. 


87. Ueber die Lichtempfindlichkeit 
der Silberhaloidsalze und den Zusammen- 
hang von optischer und chemischer Licht- 
absorption. (Annalen der Physik und 
Chemie, Leipzig, 1871, Bd. 143, p. ery e 

A 





1872 


88. M. Niepce de St. Victor’s photographs 
in colour. (Photographic news, London, 
Feb. 16, 1872, v. 16, p. 84.) MFA 


Brief account of pictures exhibited in London. 


1873 


89. Fowler, J. Bennett. Polychromatic 

printing. (British journal of photography, 

London, Oct. 10, 1873, v. 20, p. 488-489.) 
MFA 


. Reference to Vidal and Edwards processes. 


90. Sutton, Thomas. Photo-polychromy. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 26, 1873, v. 20, p. 464.) MFA 


Brief reference to the Vidal process. 


91. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Ueber die 
Lichtempfindlichkeit des Bromsilbers fiir 
die sogenannten chemisch unwirksamen 
Farben. (Deutsche chemische Gesell- 
schaft. Berichte, Berlin, 1873, Jahrg. 6, 
p. 1302-1306.) PKA 


92. W., A. J. Polychrome photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
167o.V."20, D. 85, 521.) MFA 


Comments on the Vidal and Laroche processes. 


1874 


93. Bow, R. H. Effects of sunlight on the 
colours of pigments. (Photographic news, 
London, 1874, v. 18, p. 183-184, 195-196.) 


MFA 
94. Saint Florent, E. de. Photographs in 
natural colours. (Photographic news, 


London, 1873, v. 17, p. 505-506; 1874, v. 18, 
p. 125, 175-176, 182-183.) MFA 


Chemical formulas for a direct process. From 
Bulletin of the Société francaise de photographie. 
95. Spiller, John. Remarks on the asserted 
influence of colouring matters on the re- 
duction of silver salts. (Photographic 
news, London, May 29, 1874, v. 18, p. 253- 
254.) MFA 


96. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. On the ac- 
tion of colours upon bromide on silver. 
(Photographic news; London, Sept. 18, 
1374,"y, 18; p. 451-452.) MFA 





97. Ueber die chemische Wirkung 
des Sonnenspectrums auf Silberhaloid- 
salze. (Annalen der Physik und Chemie, 


Leipzig, 1874, Bd. 153, p. 218-250.) PAA 


1875 


98. Donisthorpe, Wordsworth. Producing 
colour photographs. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 1875, 
Wi 22, p. 479.) MFA 


A suggested three-color prism process. 


1876 


99. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. Dr. 
Vogel’s colour theory. (Photographic 
news, London, 1876, v. 20, p. 307-308, 323.) 

MFA 





100. Photography of the red and 
ultra-red end of the spectrum. (Nature, 
London, March 30, 1876, v. 13, p. 432.) OA 


101. Cros, Charles. ,La photographie des 

couleurs.; (Académie des sciences. Comptes 
rendus, Paris, 1876, tome 82, p. 1514-1515; 
1876, tome 83, Dp. 291.) EO 


For criticisms of Edmond Becquerel see above, 
tome 83, p. 11, 291-292. 


102. Dumoulin, Eugéne. Les couleurs re- 


produites en photographie. Historique, 
théorie et pratique. Paris: Gauthier-Vil- 
lars, 1876; 63 p., 1 table. 12°. (Actualités 
scientifiques.) MFF p.v.10 


103. Spiller, John. Photography in col- 
ours. (Photographic news, London, July 
21, 1876, v. 20, p. 344.) MFA 


Protests against using the term color photography 
to cover color block printing. 


104. Waterhouse, James. On some facts 
in support of Dr. Vogel’s colour theory. 


(Photographic news, London, June 30, 
1876, v. 20, p. 302-304.) MFA 
1877 


105. Albert, Josef. ,;Photography in nat-. 
ural colors., (Nature, London, Nov. 29, 


IOs fev eee) OA 
Abstract only. 
106. Vidal, Léon. Photochromy. (British 


journal of photography, London, Jan. 5, 
1877, v. 24, p. 6.) MFA 


1878 


107. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
The acceleration of oxidation caused by 
the least refrangible end of the spectrum. 
(Royal Society of London. Proceedings, 
London, 1878, -v. 27, p. 291-292.) * EC 


- apparences 


14 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1878, continued. 


108. Explanation of the action of 
dyes on films. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, July 5, 1878, v. 22, p. 319-320.) MFA 


109. Husnik, Jaroslav. Photo-printing in 
natural colours. (Photographic news, 
London, 1878, v. 22, p. 123-125, SRE IER 





1879 


110. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
On the production of coloured spectra by 
light. (Royal Society of London. Pro- 
ceedings, London, 1879, v. 29, p. fee 


111. Cros, Charles. Les couleurs, le chro- 
momeétre et la photographie des couleurs. 
(Société francaise de physique. Séances, 
Paris, année 1879, p. 35-39.) PAA 


112. Sur la classification des cou- 
leurs et sur les moyens de reproduire les 
colorées par trois clichés 
photographiques spéciaux. (Académie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1879, 
tome 88, p. 119-122.) * EO 





113. Photography in natural colours. 

(Photographic news, London, May 16, 

EEA 25.. 0.220.) MFA 
Cros’s experiments. 

114. Photography in natural colours. 

(Photographic news, London, Aug. 29, 

1879, v. 23, p. 414-415.) MFA 


Comments on work of Abney and of Herr Albert. 


115. Versnaeyen, M. K. Photography in 
colours. (Photographic news, London, 
March 21, 1879, v. 23, p. 140.) MFA 


Bonnaud’s process. 


116. Reproduction of colour by pho- 

tography. (Photographic news, London, 

May 30, 1879, v. 23, p. 254-255.) MFA 
Work of Charles Cros and Ducos du Hauron. 


117. Vidal, Léon. Lecture by M. Cros on 
colour in photography. (Photographic 
news, London, Aug. 1, 1879, v. 23, p. 367- 
368.) MFA 


118. The real state of the question of 
the reproduction of natural colours by 
means of photography. (Photographic 
news, London, June 6, 1879, v. 23, p. 271- 

) MFA 








272 
1880 


119. Photographs in natural colours. (Pho- 
tographic news, London, Feb. 27, 1880, v. 
23,\D. 972) MFA 


French “discovery”? proved not to be genuine. 
120. Photography in natural colours. 
(Photographic news, London, Dec. 3, 1880, 
wees, p. 577.) MFA 


Process of Ducos du Hauron and of Herr Albert. 


1881 


121. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
On the effect of the spectrum on the ha- 
loid salts of silver, and on mixtures of the 
same. (Royal Society of London. Pro- 
ceedings, London, 1881, v. 33, p. ede 


122. On the spectrum impressed on 
silver chloride and its bearing on silver 
printing in photography. (Chemical news, 
London, Oct. 14, 1881, v.- 44, p. pa 


s 





123. Cros, Charles, and J. CARPENTIER. Pho- 
tographie des couleurs, par teinture de 
couches d’albumine coagulée. (Académie 
des sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1881, 
tome 92, p. 1504-1505.) * EO 


1883 


124. Sawyer, J. R. Photography in rela- 
tion to colour. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, June 1, 1883, v. 27, p. 349-351.) MFA 


125. Swinton, A. A. Campbell. The past, 
present, and future of photography in nat- 
ural colours. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Dec., 1883, v. 30, p. 776, 
791-792.) MFA 


Also printed in Photographic news, London, 1883, 
v. 27, p. 805-806, 823-824, MFA; Anthony’s photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1885, v. 16, p. 194-197, 
226-229, MFA. 


1884 


126. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Vogel’s method of colour photography. 
(Photographic news, London, Aug. 8, 1884, 
v. 28, p. 500-501.) MFA 


127. Berkeley, Herbert B. A chapter in — 
the history of coloured images. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 29, 
1884, p. 551-552.) MFA 


Controversial letter to Mr. W. E. Debenham in 
which the author states that he produced various col- 
ors on bromide plates as early as 1877. 


128. Captain Abney, F.R.S. port. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
15, 1884, v, 31) optus MFA 


129. Eder, Josef Maria. Uber das Verhal- 
ten der Haloidverbindungen des Silbers 
gegen das Sonnenspectrum und die Steige- 
rung der Empfindlichkeit derselben gegen 
einzelne Theile des Spectrums durch Farb- 
stoffe und andere Substanzen. illus. 
(Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaf- 
ten. Sitzungsberichte, Math. — naturwis- 
senschaftliche Classe, Wien, 1885, Jahrg. - 
1884, Bd. 90, Abt. 2, p. 1097-1143.) * EF 


English translation in Photographic news, London, 
1885, v. 29, p. 145-146, 162-165, 227-228, 355-357, 
420-421, 452-453, MFA. 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 15 


1884, continued. 


130. The Eosine compound of silver, and 

isochromatic plates. (Photographic news, 

London, July 4, 1884, v. 28, p. ean mn 
F 


131. Léon Warnerke. port. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 18, 1884, 
wend D, 39.) MFA 


132. Pim, Greenwood. ,Color photogra- 
phy.; (Nature, London, March 31, 1884, 
v. 29, p. 470.) OA 


Abstract of paper read before the Royal Society. 


133. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Investiga- 
tions as to the action of eosine on photo- 
graphic films. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, May 23, 1884, v. 28, p. 325-326.) MFA 


134. Vogel’s method of colour pho- 
tography. (Photographic news, London, 
Aug. 1, 1884, v. 28, p. 493-494.) MFA 


135. Woods, C. Ray. The spectroscope 
and its relation to photography. x. Pho- 
tography in natural colours. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, June 27, 1884, v. 28, 
p. 405-406.) MFA 


Historical review. 





1885 


136. Color photography. (Anthony’s pho- 
tographic bulletin, New York, 1885, v. 16, 
p. 97-98.) MFA 


‘Reviews work of Becquerel and Niepce de Saint 
Victor. 


137. Mr. Carey Lea. port. (Anthony’s 
photographic bulletin, ae York, 1885, -v. 
16, p. 513-514.) 


138. Rood, Ogden N. Photography in 
color. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1885, v. 16, p. 353-355.) MFA 


Tells of colors produced by the collodion process. 


139. Stokes, G. G. On a remarkable phe- 
nomenon of crystalline reflection. (Royal 
Society of London. Proceedings, London, 
1885, v. 38, p. 174-185.) * EC 


140. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. A new 
heliochromic principle. (Photographic 
news, London, July 10, 1885, v. 29, p. ees 


Suggestions for improving the Ducos du Hauron 
process. 

Also printed in Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1885, v. 16, p. 547-548, MFA. 


141. —— Uber den Zusammenhang zwischen 
Absorption der Farbstoffe und deren sen- 
sibilisirender Wirkung auf Bromsilber. 
(Annalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
1885, N. F. Bd. 26, p. 527-530.) PAA 


MFA 


1886 


142. Dawson, George. Photography in oil 
colours. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 12, 1886, v. 33, p. 714.) MFA 


Describes Pouncy’s process. 


143. Eder, Josef Maria. Uber die Wirkung 
verschiedener Farbstoffe auf das Verhal- 
ten des Bromsilbers gegen das Sonnen- 
spectrum und spektroskopische Messungen 
uber den Zusammenhang der Absorption 
und photographischer Sensibilisirung. illus. 
(Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaf- 
ten. Sitzungsberichte, Math.-naturwissen- 
schaftliche Classe, Wien, 1886, Jahrg. 1885, 
Ba 92,.Abt.-2, p: 1346-1372.) * EF 


144. Herschel, A. S. On processes of pho- 
tography in natural colours. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, April 30, 
1886, v. 33, p. 271-273.) MFA 


Traces early history with an account of the author’s 
experiments on the effect of screens upon sensitive 
plates. 

Also printed in Photographic news, London, 1886, 
v. 30, p. 283-285, 326-327, MFA. 


Color-sensi- 
illus. (Franklin 


145. Ives, Frederic Eugene. 
tive photographic plates. 





Institute. Journal, Philadelphia, July, 1886, 
v. 122, p. 4446.) VA 
146. Correct color-tone photography 


with ordinary gelatine bromide plates. 
(Franklin Institute. Journal, Philadel- 
phia, Aug., 1886, v. 122, p. 123-124.) VA 


147. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Ueber 
einige Farbenwahrnehmungen und _ tber 
Photographie in natiirlichen Farben. (An- 
nalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
1886, N. F. Bd. 28, p. 130-135.) PAA 


Brief abstract in Nature, London, Aug. 12, 1886, 
Ve04, Dp. 394,04. 

“Vogel proposed to sensitize plates specially for 
each spectrum region...and instead of projecting the 
pictures with colored lights he proposed to make as 
many pigment prints as negatives, each in a color 
complementary to the light which acted to produce 
the respective negative, and to superpose them as in 
the Collen method.” — F. E. Ives. 


1887 


148. Debenham, W. E. Pretended photog- 

raphy in natural colours. (Photographic 

news, London, July 15, 1887, v. 31, p. 437- 

438.) MFA 
Cellerier process. 


Also printed in Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1887, v. 18, p. 493-495, MFA. 


149. Harrison, W. H. Colored chloride of 
silver. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1887, v. 18, p. 723-725.) MFA 


150. Harrison, William Jerome. History 
of photography in colors. (In his: A his- 
tory of photography. New York, 1887. 
8°. p. 117-125.) MFC 


16 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1887, continued. 


151. Lang, William, jr. Carey Lea’s pho- 
tochloride of silver. (Anthony’s photo- 
graphic journal, New York, 1887, v. 18, p. 
495-497.) MFA 


-152. The Latest thing in photography in 
“natural colours.” (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 10, 1887, v. 34, p. 
353-354.) MFA 


Editorial claims that the Cellerier process of back- 
ing a transparency with colored paper was originated 
in a large measure by Aston in 1866. 


153. Lea, Mathew Carey. Combinations 
of silver chloride with other metallic chlo- 
rides, (American journal of science, New 
Haven, 1887, series 3, v. 34, p. Snr hs 


Abstracted in Nature, London, Nov. 24, 1887, v. 
37, p. 88, OA. 


154. On red and purple chloride, bro- 
mide and iodide of silver; on heliochromy 
and on the latent photographic image. 
(American journal of science, New Haven, 
1887, series 3, v. 33, p. 349-364.) OA 


Abstracted in Nature, London, May 19, 1887, 
Vis. ps 64.-0A: 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 1, 1901, v. 48, supplement, p. 9-13, 
MFA; Photographic news, 1887, 
v. 31, p. 337-342, MFA. 


155. Pearce, Charles E. Photography in 
unnatural colours. A chapter from the 
history of the past. (Photographic news, 
London, June 10, 1887, v. 31, p. Se 


Bitter attack on L. L. Hill. 





London, June 3, 


156. Professed photography in natural col- 
ours. (Photographic news, London, 1887, 
v. 31, p. 343, 353-354, 366, 381-382, pias 


Discussions as to the merits of the Cellerier process. 


157. Staats, Georg. Zur Kenntniss der 
photochromatischen Eigenschaften des 
Chlorsilbers. (Deutsche chemische Ge- 
sellschaft. Berichte, 1887, Jahrg. 20, p. 
2322-2323.) PKA 

Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Dec. 9, 1887, MFA; Chemical Society. Journal, 
London, 1887, v. cee Abstracts, lor Ls j 

“When a well polished plate of silver is dipped 
into a five per cent. solution of iron chloride it ac- 
quires a slate colour. The plate is taken out of the 
solution after ten seconds, dried quickly (without 
heating), and covered with red, emerald, orange, and 
cornflower-blue glass. In sunshine the colours ap- 
pear on the plate after a few minutes.” 


1888 


158. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Light and colour. (Society of Arts. Jour- 
nal, London, 1888, v. 37, p. 80-83, 90-93, 99- 
106, 113—123.) VA 


. printed in Photographic news, London, 1889, 
w.Go3, 9-10, 20-22, 69-71, 276-280, 348- 350, 412— 
413, 429- 430, MFA. 


159. Balfour, Graham. The coming pho- 
tography in color — for good or evil. 
(International annual of Anthony’s photo- 
graphic bulletin, New Yous 1888, v. 1, p. 
46-50.) MFA 


Relation of color ere ce: to art. 


160. Harding - Warner, W. Photography 
in colors: (International annual of An- 
thony’s photographic bulletin, New York, 
1888, v. 1, p. 592-595.) MFA 


a ate of the author and Samuel Powel about 
0. 


161. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Chlorophyl 
and gelatine-bromide plates. illus. (Frank- 
lin Institute. Journal, Philadelphia, June, 
1888, v. 125, p. 479-482.) VA 


162. Rayleigh (3d baron), John William 
Strutt. On the remarkable phenomenon of 
crystalline reflexion described by Prof. 
Stokes. (London, Edinburgh, and Dublin 
philosophical magazine and journal of sci- 
ence, London, Sept., 1888, series 5, v. 26, 
p. 256-265.) OA 


1889 


163. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Captain Ab- 
ney on heliochromy. (Franklin Institute. 
Journal, Philadelphia, Nov., 1889, v. 128, p. 
339-341.) VA 


Also printed in British journal of pre 
London, Nov. 8, 1889, v. 36, p. 731-732, MFA 


164. Heliochromy. (British journal 
of photography, London, Dec. 21, 1888, v. 
35, p. 806-807.) MFA 

For corrections see s cteare te news, London, 
Dec. ‘21, 1888, v2 32;3p2.8025 

Also printed in ores news, London, Dec. 
14, 1888, v. 32, p. 789-790, MFA, and in Franklin 
seat. Journal, Philadelphia, 1889, v. 97, p. 54-58, 
40 ‘ 





. 165. Obernetter, E. Some considerations 


of photography with color plates. illus. 
(International annual of Anthony’s photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1889, v. 2, p. 
175-177.) MFA 


Experiments with coal-tar colors. 


166. Rayleigh (3d baron), John William 
Strutt. On achromatic interference-bands. 
(London, Edinburgh, & Dublin philosophi- 
cal magazine and journal of science, Lon- 
don, 1889, series 5, v. 28, p. 77-91, ee 


1890 


167. Bedding, Thomas. Coloured au nat- 
urel. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 3, 1890, v. 37, p. 4.) MFA 


“The paths of science are traversed by innumer- 
able wild geese, whose pursuers appear incapable of 
perceiving the hopelessness of their case. The photo- 
graph in natural colours must, Sy Re ys oy be 
classed with these evasive fowl.’’ 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 17 


1890, continued. 


168. Eder, Josef Maria. Photography in 
natural colours as effected by Herr Franz 
Veress, of Klausenburg. (Photographic 
news, London, May 9, 1890, v. 34, p. ead 
A 


169. Gaedicke, J. Photography in colors. 
(Anthony’s photographic bulletin, New 
York, 1890, v. 21, p. 357-358.) MFA 


His experiments with Poitevin’s process. 


170. Photography in natural colours. 
(Photographic news, London, Aug. 8, 1890, 
wero+; p. 618.) ‘MFA 

A review of early methods; also reference to 
Veress process. 


Also printed in Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1890, v. 21, p. 328-330, MFA. 


171. Gunther, Hermann E. Photography 
in Germany. (Photographic news, Lon- 





don, 1890, v. 34, p. 357, 610-611.) MFA 
Experiments of Veress and Gaedicke. 

172. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Photography 

in natural colours on silver plates. (Photo- 


graphic news, London, Feb. 21, 1890, v. 34, 

pnl53.) MFA 
Differences between his process and those of Cros 

and Ducos du Hauron. 

173. Photography in natural colours. (Pho- 

tographic news, London, 1890, v. 34, p. 217, 

276-277, 448-450.) MFA 


Newspaper Roe eadence regarding the Veress 
process. 


174. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Photo- 
graphien in nattrlichen Farben. (Physi- 
kalische Gesellschaft zu Berlin. Verhand- 


lungen, Berlin, aps 13; 21890, Jahre9-p. 
73-78.) PAA 


(175. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Stehende 
Lichtwellen und die Schwingungsrichtung 
polarisirten Lichtes. illus. (Annalen der 
Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1890, N. F. 
Bd. 40, p. 203-243.) PAA 


Investigations of the retention of colors by a sensi- 
tized plate. 


1891 


176. Becquerel, Edmond. Observations... 
sur la communication de M. Lippmann au 
sujet de la reproduction photographique 
des couleurs. (Académie des sciences. 
Comptes rendus, Paris, Feb. 2, 1891, tome 
tizZ, p. 274-275.) * EO 


177. —— Sur la reproduction photo- 
graphique des couleurs.; (Académie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Feb. 9, 
1891, tome 112, p. 331.) * EO 


; Shows several reproductions taken forty years be- 
ore. 

178. Berget, Alphonse. La photographie 
des couleurs. (Revue scientifique, Paris, 
1891, tome 48, p. 33-40.) OA 


Historical. Lippmann process. 


179. —— Photographie des couleurs par 
la méthode interférentielle de M. Lipp- 


mann. Paris: Gauthier-Villars et fils, 
1891. vi, 58 p. 12°. (Bibliothéque photo- 
graphique.) MFF p.v.5 


Bound with: G. Balagny, L’hydroquinone, Paris, 
oS Ome liee. 


180. Cornu, A. Sur une expérience récente, 
déterminant la direction de la vibration 
dans la lumiére polarisée. (Académie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Jan. 26, 
1891, tome 112, p. 186-189.) * EO 


181-182. Sur les objections faites a l’in- 
terprétation des expériences de M. Wiener. 
(Académie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, Feb. 16, 1891, tome 112, p. 365-370.) 





* EO 
183. Gothard, Eugen von. Ueber die 
neueren Fortschritte der Heliochromie. 


(Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik ftir 1891, Halle a. S., 1891, 
Jahrg. 5, p. 46-50.) MFA 


Veress process. 


184. Green, A. G., and others. Photogra- 
phy in aniline colours. By A. G. Green, 
GF. Gross and E. J. Bevan. / (Society,of 
Arts. Journal, London, Jam, 23, 1891, v. 39, 
p. 150-155.) VA 


185. Harding- Warner, W. Pictures in 
natural colors. (International annual of 
Anthony’s photographic bulletin, New 
York, 1891, v. 4, p. 205-207.) MFA 
Describes Wothly type process of 1863-64. 


186. Hatzfeld, Albert. La reproduction 
photographique des couleurs. (Revue sci- 
entifique, Paris, May 16, 1891, tome 47, p. 
609-613.) OA 


Historical. Lippmann process. 
187. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Photography 
in the colors of nature. illus. (Franklin 


Institute. 
21.) 


“Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1891, v. 38, p. 56-57, 103-104, 118-120, 
137-138, MFA; and Anthony’ Ky photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1891, v. 22, p. 115-118, 146-148, 207- 
210, 239- 242, MFA. 


188. Photography in the colors of na- 
ture. illus. (Anthony’s photographic bul- 
letin, New York, 1891, v. 22, p. at tei 


Argument with H. W. Vogel as to priority of in- 
vention. 


189. —— Professor Lippmann’s helio-— 


chromy. (Franklin Institute. Journal, 
Philadelphia, Aug., 1891, v. 132, p. ata 


Journal, jan, )89love 131,.0-4— 
VA 





190. Labatut. 
raphie des couleurs. 


ences. Comptes rendus, 
1891, tome 113, p. 126-129.) 


L’absorption et la photog- 
(Académie des sci- 
Paris, July 20, 

* KO 


18 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1891, continued. 


191. Lippmann, Gabriel. La photographie 
des couleurs. (Académie des sciences. 
Comptes rendus, Paris, Feb. 2, 1891, tome 
112, p. 274-275.) * EO 

Also printed in Revue scientifique, Paris, Feb. 7, 
1891, tome 47, p. 161-162, OA. 

For an English translation see British journal of 
photography, Feb. 20, 1891, v. 38, p. 121, MFA. 
This also includes account of interview with M. Lipp- 
mann by the representative of the London Daily News. 





192. Photographie des couleurs du 
spectre solaire. (L’Astronomie, Paris, 
1891, année 10, p. 87-88.) OMA 
193. Mascart, Eleuthére Elie Nicolas. Traité 


Paris: Gauthier-Villars et fils, 
Vaan atlas. 6 and 4”, 
PEB and t}} PEB 


See tome 2, p. 577-578 for discussion of color 
effects on photographic plate. 


d’optique. 
1889-93. 


194. The New discoveries in heliochromy. 
illus. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1891, v. 22, p. 216-219.) MFA 


Lippmann process. 


195. Ogonowski, E., conte. La photochro- 
mie. Tirage d’épreuves photographiques 


en couleurs. Paris: Gauthier - Villars et 
mis 1SsOl” 2p.) 30 po.) Ltables 12%.) CBRib- 
liotheque photographique.) MFF p.v.20 


Bound with: C. O’Madden, 
voyage. Paris, 1890. 12°. 
196. Photographing in colours. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 27, 
18915-v. 38;.p.. 135) MFA 


Comments by The Lancet on the Lippmann process. 


197. Photography in colours. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 20, 
1891, v.38, p. 113.) MFA 


Description of and comments on Lippmann process. 


198. Scott, Albert W. Natural colors on 
the lantern screen. (Anthony’s photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1891, v. 22, 
p. 118-119.) MFA 


Verak process. 


199. Some of the difficulties of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, 1891, v. 38, p. 273, 306-307.) 

MFA 


200. Thwing, Charles B. Color photogra- 
phy by Lippmann’s process. .(American 
journal of science, New Haven, Conn., 
1891, series 3, v. 42, p. 388-390.) OA 


Modifications of the process. 


201. Vidal, Léon. Photographic methods 
of obtaining polychromatic impressions. 
(Anthony’s photographic bulletin, New 
York, 1891, v. 22, p. 698-700, 725-728.) 
MFA 


Le photographe en 


Describes well-known methods. 


202. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Dr. Lipp- 


mann’s photographs in natural colors. 
(Anthony’s photographic bulletin, New 
York, 1891, v. 22, p. 166-167.) MFA 


‘(Anthony’s 





203. Photography in natural colors. 
photographic bulletin, New 
York, 1891, v. 22, p. 680-683.) MFA 


Argument with F. E. Ives as to priority. 


204. Winstanley, D. Heliochromy. (An- 
thony’s photographic bulletin, New York, 
1891, v. 22, p. 85-87.) MFA 


Explains his method of printing with silver salt. * 


205. Zenker, Wilhelm. Die Entstehung 
der Farben in der Photochemie. (Jahr- 
buch fiir Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik fiir 1891, Halle a. S., 1891, Jahrg. 5, 
p. 294-303.) MFA 


1892 


206. Boothroyd, Jabez. Backing of plates 
and color sensitive films. (International 
annual of Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1892, v. 5, p. 23.) MFA 


207. Colour in the camera. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, May 6, 1892, 
v. 39, p. 295.) MFA 
Account of lecture by Frederic E. Ives at Associa- 
tion Hall,. Philadelphia, under the auspices of the 
Photographic Society of Philadelphia. 
208. Colour photography “an established 
fact.” (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 8, 1892, v. 39, p. 26-27.) MFA 


Copy of article in Philadelphia Public Ledger re- 
garding an illustrated lecture by Frederic E. Ives at 
the Franklin Institute. 


209. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The helio- 
chromoscope. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
nal, Philadelphia, Jan., 1893, v. 135, p. 35- 
41.) VA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, | 
London, Nov. 25, 1892, v. 39, p. 758-759, MFA. 


210. Krone, Hermann. Ueber Farbenpho- 
togramme von Spectren. (Annalen der 
Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1892, N. F. 
Bd. 46, p. 426-430.) PAA 


Lippmann process. 


211. Lippmann, Gabriel. La photographie 
des couleurs. illus. (Conservatoire des 
arts et métiers. Annales, Paris, 1892, série 
2, tome 4, p. 161-172.) VA 


212. La photographie des couleurs. 
(Revue scientifique, Paris, 1892, tome 50, 
p. 33-35.) OA 


213. ——- La photographie des couleurs, 
son principe, ses progrés les plus récents. 
illus. (Revue générale des sciences, Paris, 
1892, tome 3, p. 41-45.) OA 


214. —— Photographies colorées du spectre, 
sur albumine et sur gélatine bichromatées. 
(Académie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, Oct. 24, 1892, tome 115, p. 575.) * EO 


215; Sur la photographie des couleurs. 
(Académie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, April 25, 1892, tome 114, p. opp! 








COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 19 


1892, continued. 


216. Meslin, G. Sur la photographie des 
couleurs. (Annales de chimie et de phy- 
sique, Paris, 1892, série 6, tome 27, p. 369- 
391.) PAA 
On the theory of the Lippmann process. 


217. Photography in natural colours up to 
date. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 19, 1892, v. 39, p. 114-115.) 
. MFA 
Describes the process of Dr. Raphael Kopp. 
218. Stolze, F. Color effect in the picture 
and photography. (Anthony’s_ photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1892, v. 23, 
p. 680-683, 719-722.) MFA 


General principles of color. 


219. Vidal, Léon. La photogravure en re- 
lief et en creux. La photochromographie 
et leurs applications a l’industrie du livre. 
(Conservatoire des arts et métiers. An- 
nales, Paris, 1892, série 2, tome 4, p. 192- 
211.) VA 


1893 


220. Colour photography, an interview 
with Mr. Frederic Ives. (British journal 
of photography, London, Aug. 4, 1893, v. 


40, supplement, p. 85-87.) MFA 
221. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Composite 
heliochromy. illus. (Society of Arts. 


Journal, London, May 19, 1893, v. 41, p. 
663-672.) VA 
With discussion. 
Reprinted in British journal 7 photography, 1893, 
v. 40, p. 328-330, 344-347, MFA 
222. The ee ere Lipomann col- 
our photography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Dec. 15, 1893, v. 40, p. 
798-799.) MFA 


223. MM. Lumiére’s experiments in ‘“col- 
our photography.” (British journal of 
photography, London, May 26, 1893, v. 40, 
Bozo. ) MFA 
Gives formulae for emulsion and developer. 
224. Mareschal, G. Les progrés de la pho- 
tographie des ‘couleurs. (Le Génie civil, 
Paris, June 24, 1893, tome 23, p. 125-126.) 





Lumiére formulas for working Lippmann process. 


225. Warnerke, Léon. Photographs in 
natural colours produced by the improved 
process of L. Lumiére, after Professor 
Lippmann’s interference method. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 10, 
1893, v. 40, p. 718.) MFA 

oe editorial comments see Oct. 20, 1893, v. 40, 
p. ' 


1894 


226. Dillaye, Frédéric. La chromophotog- 
raphie. illus. (In his: Les nouveautés 
eee prep nidues 1894. Paris, 1894. 8°. p. 
142-154.) MFA 


- Dp. 5-/.) 





UAL, Photochromographie. illus. (In 
his: Les nouveautés photographiques 1894. 
Paris, 1894. 8°. p. 247-258.) MFA 


228. Dunmore, Edward. Colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 10, 1894, v. 41, p. 504.) MFA 


Suggests “suitably coloured films of gelatine, pro- 
duced by the aforesaid triple negatives, superposed on 
each other, and the result examined as a transpar- 
ency.” 


229. Fourtier, H. Photography in colors. 
(International annual of Anthony’s photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 6, p. 
215-216.) MFA 


230. Gitchell, Corwin. Photography in 
colors. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 221-223.) MFA 


Ives’ process. 


231. Hitchcock, Romyn. Photography in 
colors. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 50-51.) MFA 


Lippmann process. 


232. Hopkins. Photography in colors — 
the method as practiced by R. D. Gray. 
illus. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 40-43.) MFA 


233. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Color screens 
for composite heliochromy. illus. (Ameri- 
can annual of photography for 1895, New 
York, 1894, p. 241-244a.) MFA 


234. Composite heliochromy. illus. 
(Technology quarterly, Boston, 1894, v. 7, 
p. 317-323.) VDA 


Abstract in Journal of the Society of Chemical In- 
oe London, Nov. 30, 1895, v. 14, p. 987-988, 








2a5: The Lumiére- Lippmann color 
photography. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
nal, Philadelphia, Jan., 1894, v., 137, p. 16— 


21.) VA 


236. The Lumiére-Valenta-Lippmann 
colour photographs. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 5, 1894, Mey 


Paper read before the Photographic Society of 
Great Britain. 





237. —— Vasenimnengere ute Heliochromie. 
illus. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fiir 1894, Halle a. S., 
1894, Jahrg. 8, p. 215-233.) MFA 


Describes kromoscope. 


238. Ives’s_ stereoscopic photo - chromo- 
scope. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 14, 1894, v. 41, p. 790.) MFA 


239. Joly, John. On colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 20, 1894, v. 41, p. 457-459.) MFA 
Paper read before the Photographic Convention of 
the United Kingdom. 
With discussion. 


20 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1894, continued. 


240. Lectures on colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 4, 1894, v. 41, p. 282-283.) MFA 


Account of two lectures by E. J. Wall in London. 
Contains a brief history of color photography. 


241. Lippmann, Gabriel. Sur la théorie de 
la photographie des couleurs simples et 
composées par la méthode interférentielle. 
(Académie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, Jan. 15, 1894, tome 118, p. celine 8 


Also printed in Journal de physique, Paris, ae 
série 3, tome 3, p. 97-107, PAA. 


242. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. Die 
neuesten Fortschritte der Chromophotog- 
raphie und die Theorie der Lippmann’schen 
Versuche. illus. (Jahrbuch fiir Photog- 
raphie und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1894, 
Halle a. S., 1894, Jahrg. 8, p. 73-82.) MFA 


Theory of Lippmann process. 


243. Valenta, Eduard. Photography in 
natural colors. (Anthony’s photographic 
bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 25, p. ete. 


Lippmann process. 


244. Vidal, Léon. Applications of the 
stereochromoscope to the arts and sci- 
ences. illus. (American annual of pho- 
tography for 1895, New York, 1894, p. 238- 
240.) MFA 


245. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. The his- 
tory of color-sensitive (iso-chromatic or 
ortho-chromatic) photography. (Interna- 
tional annual of Anthony’s photographic 
bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 6, p. ey 


246. Ward, Catherine Weed. Gabriel Lipp- 
mann. port. (Anthony’s photographic 
bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 296- 
299.) MFA 


247. Warnerke, Léon. Photographs in 
natural colors, by the process of L. Lumi- 
ére. (Smithsonian Institution. Report for 
1893, Washington, 1894, p. 163-164.) *EA 


248. Wilson, Edward L. Wilson’s cyclo- 
pedic photography; a complete hand-book 
of the terms, processes, formule and ap- 
pliances available in photography...for 
ready reference. New York: Edward L. 
Wilson, 1894. viii, (1)18-494 p. illus. 8°. 

MFD 


See p. 182-187 for heliochrome processes of Niepce 
de Saint Victor and Becquerel. 


1895 


249. Bayley, R. Child. Emulsion for the 
Lippmann process. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 21, 1895, v. 42, 
p. 388-389.) MFA 


250. —— Lippmann’s process of color pho- 
tography. (Anthony’s photographic bul- 
letin, New York, 1895, v. 26, p. oe 


Bole Lippmann’s process of colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 31, 1895, v. 42, p. 342- 
343.) MFA 





For editorial comment see June 7, 1895, v. 42, p. 
353-355. 


252. Berthier, A. Manuel de photochromie 
interférentielle; procédés de reproduction 
directe des couleurs. Paris: Gauthier- 
Villars et fils, 1895. 2° plo 109m sees 
(Bibliotheque photographique.) MFV 


253. Dillaye, Frédéric. Chassis 4 mercure 
pour la chromophotographie. illus. (In 
his: Les nouveautés photographiques 1895. 
Paris, 1895. 8°. p. 90-95.) M 


Lippmann process. 


254. Du Bois-Reymond, Cl. Eine Demon- 
stration der neuen farbigen Photographien 
von Dr. Joly in Dublin. (Physikalische | 
Gesellschaft zu Berlin. Verhandlungen, 
Berlin, 1895, Jahrg. 14, p. 73-76.) PAA 


255. The First direct portrait in colors. 

(Anthony’s photographic bulletin, New 

York, 1895, v. 26,.p. 309. FA 
Claim of E. Bierstadt for picture taken in 1890. 


256. Gelatine emulsion for the Lippmann 
colour process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 7, 1895, v. 42, p. 
353-355.) MFA 


257. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Feb. 15, 1895, v. 42, p. 103- 
105.) MFA 


Lecture before the Society of Amateur Photog- 
raphers of New York. ‘‘The editor of a well-known 
photographic magazine has quite recently asserted 
that the natural colours have not yet been reproduced 
as seen upon the ground glass of the camera; but, 
if that editor is here tonight, he will have an oppor- 
tunity to see in the photo-chromoscope a more perfect 
reproduction of coloured objects than he ever saw on 
the ground glass of the camera, because it is free 
from granulation, and, being in stereoscopic relief, 
looks like the very object itself.” 


258. Colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 20, 
1895, v. 42, p. 599-600.) MFA 





Abstract of a paper read before the American 
Association for the Advancement of Science. 


259. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
La photographie des couleurs, ses méthodes 
et ses résultats. (Revue générale des sci- 
ences, Paris, 1895, tome 6, p. ee ey 





260. Sur la photographie en couleurs, 
par la méthode indirecte. (Académie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1895, 
tome 120, p. 875-876.) *EO 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 71 


1895, continued. 


261. McFarland, John Horace. Practical 
color-process work. illus. (American 
annual of photography for 1896, New 
York, 1895, p. 209-211.) MFA | 


Has colored plate by Coloritype process. 


262. Neuhauss, Richard. Ueber die Pho- 
tographie in nattirlichen Farben. (Physi- 
kalische Gesellschaft zu Berlin. Verhand- 
lungen, Berlin, Feb. 8, 1895, Jahrg. 14, p. 
17-24.) PAA 

Discusses Zenker’s theory as applied to Lippmann 
process. 

Also printed in Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 


Reproductionstechnik, 1895, Halle a. S., 1895, Jahrg. 
9, p. 186-192, MFA. 


263. Photographs in natural colors — Mc- 
Donotype process. (Anthony’s photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, March 1, 1895, 
v. 26, p. 73-75.) "MFA 


264. Snappschotte, J. Focus, pseud. The 
heliogabotype. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 25, 1895, v. 42, p. 
680-681.) MFA 


Facetious account of proceedings of the Turkey- 
town Hypo Club. From the American journal of pho- 
tography. 


265. Wall, Edward John. A note on col- 
our-sensitive plates and screens. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 14, 
1895, v. 42, p. 375-376.) MFA 


266. —— Photography in colours. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1895, v. 42, p. 474-476, 484.) MFA 


Describes the Joly process, the Niewenglowski 
heliochromoscope, Nachet’s stereochromoscope, Zink’s 
photo-polychromoscope, and _ the poly-photochromo 
stereoscopic camera. 


267. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Farbenpho- 
tographie durch Korperfarben und me- 
chanische Farbenanpassung in der Natur. 
(Annalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
1895, N. F. Bd. 55, p. 225-281.) PAA 


Discusses Seebeck, Becquerel, Poitevin, and Carey- 
Lea processes. 

Also printed in Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fiir 1896, Hal lem ava 11996; 
Jahrg. 10, p. 55-107, MFA. 


1896 


- 268. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Becquerel’s colour photographs. (Nature. 
London, June 11, 1896, v. 54, p. 125.) OA 


Comments on article by Meldola, which see. 


269. Bothamley, C. H. Becquerel’s and 
Lippmann’s colour photographs. (Nature, 
London, May 28, 1896, v. 54, p. 77.) OA 


Comments on article by Meldola, which see. 


270. Direct trichromatic half-tone nega- 
tives. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 9, 1896, v. 43, p. le RRS 


271. Eder, Josef Maria. Coloured screens 
for orthochromatic and three-colour work. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 16, 1896, v. 43, p. 660.) MFA 


272. Gibson, J. Stewart. Photography of 

color. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 

New York, 1896, v. 27, p. 184-191.) MFA 
General principles. 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1896, v. 43, p. 345-346, 362-363, MFA. 


273. Glan, Paul. Zur Photographie in 
naturahnlichen Farben. (Annalen der 
Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1896, N. F. 
Bd. 58, p. 402-404.) PAA 


Use of the spectrotelescope. 


274. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The perfected 
photo-chromoscope. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 17, 1896, 
v. 43, p. 38-41.) MFA 


oe of lecture delivered before the Camera 
ub. 


275. Joly, John. On a method of photog- 
raphy in natural colours. illus. (Royal 
Dublin Society. Scientific transactions, 
Dublin, 1896, series 2, v. 6, p. 127-138.) 3 
E 


276. Joly’s translucent coloured screens. 

(British journal of photography, London, 

May 1, 1896, v. 43, supplement, p. 39-40.) 
MFA 


277. Kelvin (1st baron), William Thom- 
son. On Lippmann’s colour photography 
with obliquely incident light. (Nature, 
London, May 7, 1896, v. 54, p. 12-13.) OA 


278. Lippmann, Gabriel. Colour photog- 
raphy. (Royal Institution of Great Brit- 
ain. Proceedings, London, April 17, 1896, 
Vorkoe Ds cLol—156.) EC 


Abstracted in British journal of photography, 
April 24, 1896, v. 43, p. 265, MFA. 


Also printed in Nature, London, April 30, 1896, 
v 53, p. 617-618, OA. 


279. On colour photography by the 
interferential method. (Royal Society of 
London. Proceedings, 1896, v. 60, p. 10- 
13°) * EC 


280. McDonough’s improvements in pho- 
tographic coloured screens. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Aug. 28, 1896, 
v. 43, p. 551-552.) MFA 


Quotes his patent claims. 





281. McDonough’s improvements in and 
relating to colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 14, 
1896, vi 43 p25235 MFA 


Quotes his patent claims. 


282. Meldola, R. Becquerel and Lipp- 
mann’s colour photographs. (Nature, Lon- 
don, May 4, 1896, v. 54, p. 28.) OA 


Believes that effects shown in these processes are 
due to the same cause. For comments see p. 77, 125 


ae THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1896, continued. 


283. Neuhauss, Richard. Die Photogra- 
phie in natirlichen Farben. (Jahrbuch fir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fiir 1896, Halle a. S., 1896, Jahrg. 10, p. 20- 
23.) MFA 


Lippmann process. 


284. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. Anew 
stereochromoscope. illus. (International 
annual of Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1896, v. 8, p. 221-222.) MFA 


285. Photographs in colours: Lumiére’s 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 20, 1896, v. 43, p. on 


286. Photographs in natural colours: Selle’s 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 20, 1896, v. 43, p. 182-183.) 

MFA 
287. Photography in colours at Newquay. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 18, 1896, v. 43, p. 602-603.) MFA 

Comments on Mr. J. W. Bennetto. 


288. “Photography in natural colours” (?) 

—a challenge. (British journal of photog- 

raphy, London, Aug. 7, 1896, v. 43, p. He 
M 


A challenge to Bennetto ‘‘to make good.” 


289. Richard, Georges Adolphe. Photog- 
raphie en couleurs; substitution de cou- 


leurs organiques a l’argent réduit des 
épreuves photographiques. (Académie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1896, 
tome 122, p. 609-611, 687.) * EO 
290. Sachse, Julius Friedrich. The Joly 
process of color photography. (American 
Philosophical Society. Proceedings, Phila- 


delphia, 1896, v. 35, p. 119-122.) * EA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 28, 1896, v. 43, p. 553-554, MFA. 


291. Schuett, F. Innerer Bau und optisches 
Verhalten der Lippmann’schen Photo- 
graphien in natiirlichen Farben. illus. 
(Annalen der Physik und Chemie, Leip- 


zig, 1896, N. F. Bd. 57, p. 533-554.) PAA 


292. Wall, Edward John. Chromatic pho- 
tography. illus. (Society of Chemical In- 
dustry. - Journal, London, June 30, 1896, 
v. 15, p. 400-404.) VOA 


Carey Lea, Lippmann, and three-color processes. 


1897 


293. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
peer eta DF in colours. (Nature, Lon- 
don, Feb. 4, 1897, v. 55, p. 318-319.) OA 

Discusses Chascaane process. Partly reprinted in 


British journal of photography, London, Feb. 12, 
1897, v. 44, p. 102-103, MFA. 


Also printed in Photographic news, London, Feb. 
12, 1897, v. 41, p. 103, MFA. 





294. The scientific requirements of 
colour photography. (Nature, London, 
June 24, 1897, v. 56, p. 186.) OA 


Abstract of lecture before the Oxford University 
Junior Scientific Club. 


295. The sensitiveness of the return 
to light and colour. illus. (Royal Society 


of London, Philosophical transactions, 
London, 1897, series A, v. 190, p. mar 





296. Bonacini, Carlo. La fotografia a 
colori... Milano: U. Hoepli, 1897. xxxii, 
422° p95. 11 pl. 4? MFV 


297. Chassagne’s colour process described. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 9, 1897, v. 44, p. 226-227.) MFA 


298. Colour photography: Baumgartner’s 
improvements. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 1, 1897, v. 44, p. 11- 
12.) MFA 


299. Colour photography: Brasseur and 
Sampolo’s process. illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, April 2, 1897, v. 
44, p. 217-219.) MFA 


Description of their patent which involves a sensi- 
tive film, sensitised as far as may be for the visible 
rays of the spectrum, exposed under and in close con- 
tact with a taking screen, having minute, closely ad- 
jacent or adjoining areas of transparent colours of 
the required or desired light-selecting absorption 
powers. 


300. “Colour without colour.” (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 10, 
1897, v. 44, p. 793-794.) MFA 


Describes Charles Henry’s experiments with thin 
membranes and the effects of surface tension of 
liquids. 


301. A Criticism of M. Chassagne’s colour 
photographs. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 5, 1897, v. 44, p. 146- 
147.) MFA 


302. Gamble, William. M. Chassagne’s 
colour process. <A possible explanation. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 19, 1897, v. 44, p. 118-119.) MFA 


303. Graby, A. Positifs instantanés en 
deux teintes. (Société francaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1897, série 2, 
tome 13, p. 229-231.) MFA 


304. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Le photo- 
chromoscope. (Société francaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1897, série 2, 
tome 13, p. 451-456.) MFA 


305. 





Photochromoscope and stereo- 


scopic folding chromogram. illus. (Pho- 
tographic journal, London, Sept., 1897, 
new series, v. 22, p. 35.) MFA 


Brief description, with illustrations. 


306. Ives’s method of illuminating photo- 
chromoscope pictures. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 15, 
1897, v. 44, p. 665-667.) MFA 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 22 


1897, continued. 


307. The Joly process of natural colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Nov. 5, 1897, v. 44, supple- 
ment, p. 84.) MFA 


Instructions issued by the Natural Colour Photog- 
raphy [Co.] of Dublin. 


308. Lambert, F. C. Photography in nat- 
ural colors —a comparative sketch. (An- 
thony’s photographic bulletin, New York, 
1897, v. 28, p. 108-110.) MFA 


Historical. 


309. A New process of colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 15, 1897, v. 44, p. 661.) MFA 


Dittmar process. 


310. Photographic reproduction of colours. 
(Nature, London, March 4, 1897, v. 55, p. 
422.) OA 


Account of exhibition of Hennekta. 


311. Pretzl, A. D. Three colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1897, v. 44, p. 293-294, Beate 


An excellent outline of Hibl’s Die Dreifarbenpho- 
tographie. 


312. Saint-Florent, E. de. Photographie 
des couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, April 
25, 1897, année 7, p. 101.) MFA 


Celloidine paper and gum solution for direct ex- 
posure to sun. Not suitable for camera. 


313. Smith, Stephen. The application of 
the theory of colour. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 10, 1897, v. 44, 
p. 791-793.) MFA 


From the Transactions of the Edinburgh Photo- 
graphic Society. 


314. Vidal, Léon. Le chromoscope C. Na- 
chet, instrument propre a la synthése des 
couleurs obtenues analytiquement par la 
photographie. (Société francaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1897, série 2, 
tome 13, p. 225-229.) MFA 


315. Du role des écrans colorés dans 
le chromographe et le chromoscope. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1897, série 2, tome 13, p. aaa 


Le photochromoscope. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1897, série 2, tome 13, p. 546-547.) MFA 


317. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Beobach- 
tungen an farbigen Interferenzphotogra- 
phien. (Physikalische Gesellschaft zu Ber- 
lin. Verhandlungen, Berlin, 1897, Jahrg. 
16, p. 176-178.) PAA (Deutsche) 


318. Wallon, Etienne. La découverte de la 





316. 





“méthode indirecte” (reproduction des 
couleurs). (Société francaise de photog- 
raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1897, série 2, tome 


13, p. 547-550.) MFA 


319. What is photography in natural col- 
ours? (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 12, 1897, v. 44, p. 98-99.) 
MFA 
320. Wood, Sir Henry Trueman. Colour 
photography. (Nature, London, July 8, 
1397,:v.206;p. 223.) OA 


Dansac-Chassagne process. 


321. —— Photography in colours. (So- 

ciety of Arts. Journal, London, Jan. 29, 

1897, v. 45, p. 158-159.) VA 
Dansac- Chassagne process. 


Also printed in Nature, London, Feb. 4, 1897, 
Soaps ole. OA, and Photographic news, London, Feb. 
5, 1897, v. 41, p. 89, -MFA. 


22. The production of colour by 
photographic methods. (Society of Arts. 
Journal, London, Feb. 26, 1897, v. 45, p. 
278-287.) VA 
With discussion. 
Well written history of various experiments. 





1898 


323. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Colour photography at the Camera Club. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 8, 1898, v. 45, p. 218.) MFA 


An abstract of his lecture on the Joly process. 


324. The theory of colour vision ap- 
plied to modern colour photography. illus. 
(Royal Institution of Great Britain. Pro- 
ceedings, London, 1898, v. 15, p. 802-809.) 

*TEC 
325, Three-colour photographic print- 
ing. (Society of Arts. Journal, London, 
April 29, 1898, v.46, p. 548-553.) VA 

With discussion. 


Ives process. Reprinted in British journal of Fis 
tography, supplement, May 6, 1898, p. 35-37, MFA 








326. The Bennetto process of colour pho- 
tography. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1898, v. 45, p..776, 783, 
799, 814.) MFA 


327. Colour photography. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Sept. 30, 1898, 
¥, 45-4 035.) MFA 


Describes pictures by the Bennetto process but tells 
nothing of process. 


328. Colour photography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Dec. 16, 1898, v. 
45, p. 808-809.) MFA 


Experiments by E. J. Wall and T. E. Freshwater; 
also a discussion of Clerk Maxwell color theory. 


329. Gamble, William. Colour processes. 
(Photographic journal, London, Feb. 28, 
1898, new series, v. 22, p. 167-170.) MFA 


Special dark-slide for Lippmann process. Joly - 
process. 


330. Gibson, J. Stewart. Color photogra- 
phy —the Joly process. illus. (American 


annual of photography for 1899, New 
York, 1898, p. 84-89.) MFA 


24 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1898, continued. 


331. Graby, A. Direct instantaneous posi- 
tives in two colours. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 28, 1898, v. 45, 
p. 53-54.) MFA 


Abstract of a paper in Helios. ‘He endeavored 
to substitute the mercuric mirror in the Lippmann 
process by emulsifying silver in the film, thus pro- 
viding each grain of bromide of silver with its own 
mirror.’ 


332. Gravier, Gras Les impressions en 
couleurs et les méthodes photographiques 
dites orthochromatiques. (Photo-gazette, 
Paris, 1898, année 9, p. 26-30, 54-58, 84-88, 
207-211, 229-232.) MFA 


Processes of Cros and Ducos du Hauron. 


333. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
theory of three-colour printing. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1898, v. 
45, p. 133-135, 167-168.) MFA 


334. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Colour pho- 
tography. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 7, 1898, v. 45, sup- 
plement, p. 4-7.) MFA 
Fundamental principles discussed in a paper read 
before the Croyden Camera Club. 
CELE The photochromoscope. illus. 
(Royal Scottish Society of Arts. Transac- 
tions, Edinburgh, 1898, v. 14, p. eae 





336. Joly, John. On a method of photog- 

raphy in natural colours. illus. (Royal 

Dublin Society. Scientific transactions, 
Dublin, 1898, series 2, v. 6, p. 127-138.) 

* EC 

Has interesting colored facsimiles. Abstracted in 


Nature, v. 53, p. 91-93, OA, and in British journal 
of photography, v. 42, p. 774-776, MFA. 


337. Joly’s changing back for colour screen 
photography. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 19, 1898, v. 45, 
p. 539.) MFA 


338. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
Colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 16, 1898, v. 45, 
p. 815.) MF 

Very brief references to the work of Clerk Max- 
well, Dr. Joly, Lord Rayleigh, Zenker, Wiener, Cornu, 
and Mascart. 


339. Lippmann, Gabriel. Colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 7, 1898, v. 45, supplement, p. 
2-4.) MFA 

Abstract of paper read before the Royal Photo- 
graphic Society. 


340. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
Photographies en couleurs par la méthode 
indirecte. (Société francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1898, série 2, tome 
14, p. 316-317.) MFA 


Abstract in Photographic ays. London, Feb. 28, 
1899, new series, v. 23, 173-174, MFA, and 
British journal of bhoreoreea a London, "July 29, 1898, 
v. 45, p. 486-487, MFA. 


341. Mareschal, G. La photographie des 
couleurs. (Photo- -gazette, Paris, Feb. 25, 
1898, année 8, p. 61-62. MFA 


Geisler process. 


342. Meyer’s camera for producing nega- 
tives for use in three-colour printing. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 13, 1898, v. 45, p. 310.) MFA 


343. Monpillard, Félix. Impression tri- 
chrome: paysage obtenu d’aprés nature par 
triple sélection. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1898, série 
2, tome 14, p. 534-535.) MFA 


344. Note sur les épreuves imprimées 
en trois couleurs dans les ateliers de M. 
Prieur, a Puteaux. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1898, série 





2, tome 14, p. 409-412.) MFA 
345. Neuhauss, Richard. Nachweis der 
dinnen Zenker’schen Blattchen in den 


nach Lippmann’s Verfahren aufgenom- 
menen Farbenbildern. (Annalen der Phy- 
sik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1898, N. F. Bd. 
65, p. 164-172.) PAA 


346. Neuen Untersuchungen tiber das 
Lippmann’sche Farbenverfahren. (Jahr- 
buch fiir Photographie und Reproduc- 
tionstechnik ftir 1898, Halle a. S., 1898, 
Jahrg. 12, p. 179-184.) MFA 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1898, v. 45, supplement, p. 50-51; 1899, 
v. 45, supplement, p. 57-58; 1900, v. 47, Journal, p. 
26-27, 167, MFA. ' 
347. Ueber die Photographie in natiir- 
lichen Farben nach Lippmann’s Verfahren 
und den Nachweis der dtinnen Zenker’- 
schen Blattchen. (Physikalische Gesell- 
schaft zu Berlin. Verhandlungen, Berlin, 
1898, Jahrg. 17, p. 94-95.) PA 


348. A New colour process. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Oct. 21, 1898, 
v. 45, p. 678.) MFA 


Brief description of the Dittmar process, which, it 
is stated, “‘is hardly likely to be of much use, but is 
of theoretical interest as a confirmation of Wiener’s 
theory of ‘Korperfarben.’ ” 

349. Noack. A three-colour printing proc- 
ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Dec. 23, 1898, v. 45, p. 822.) MFA 


350. La Photographie des couleurs et la 
photochromie des métaux. (La Revue 
technique, Paris, Oct. 10, 1898, vy. 19, p. 
451.) VA 
Abstract in Photographic news, London, Dec. 23, 
1898, v. 42, p. 838, MFA. 
351. Photography in colours. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 24, 
1898, v. 45, p. 406.) MFA 


Brief reference to the claims of Herr Reichel. 


352. Photography in natural colours. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 9, 1898, v. 45, p. 787.) MFA 

Brief reference to the Grenier-Villerd process. 
“The colours appeared to be absolutely fixed, and, 
if M. Grenier-Villerd is to be believed, the cost of the 
same is considerably less than that of ordinary wall 
paper.” 








COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 25 


1898, continued. 


353. Swan, J. W. Professor Joly’s process 
of colour-photography: (English mechanic 
and world of science, London, March 25, 
1898, v. 67, p. 119.) VA 

Reprinted in British journal of photography, April 
1, 1898, supplement, p. 29-30, MFA. 


354. Tallent, Alexander A. K. On rapid 

dry plates for process work. Combined 

screen and colour negatives for three col- 

our printing. (Photographic journal, Lon- 

don, Dec. 23, 1898, new series, v. 23, p. 8l- 

84.) MFA 
With discussion. 


Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Nov. 25, 1898, v. 45, p. 764, MFA. 


355. Valenta, Eduard. Untersuchungen 
iiber das Sensibilisirungsvermogen ver- 
schiedener Theerfarbstoffe. (Jahrbuch fir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fiir 1898, Halle a. S., 1898, Jahrg. 12, p. 255- 
265.) MFA 


356. Vidal, Léon. Moyen de préparer les 
écrans colorés pour les reproductions tri- 
chromes et de régler leur saturation. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1898, série 2, tome 14, p. 85-89.) 
MFA 


357. Vieuille, G. The chromographoscope. 
illus. (American annual of photography 


for 1899, New York, 1898, p. 156-157.) MFA 


358. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 28, 1898, v. 45, Be 


Describes different color effects produced by the 
Lippmann process. 


359. A review of triple printing 


methods. (Photographic journal, London, 
April 28, 1898, new series, v. 22, p. ? ae 





360. Wallon, Etienne. Le chromographo- 
scope de M. Louis Ducos du Hauron. illus. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1898, série 2, tome 14, p. 80- 
83.) MFA 


361. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Color pho- 
tography by means of body colors, and 
mechanical color adaptation in nature. 
(Smithsonian Institution. Annual report 
for 1896, Washington, 1898, p. Sy Sepa 


1899 


362. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
The colour sensations in terms of luminos- 
ity. (Photographic journal, London, June 
30, 1899, new series, v. 23, p. etna 


Abstract of paper read before the Royal Society. 





363. Colours for tri-chromatic photo- 
graphic printing. illus. (Photographic 
journal, London, 1899, new series, v. 23, 
p. 192-198, 288.) MFA 


364. Becquerel, Edmond. The researches of 
Edmond Becquerel on direct heliochromy. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1899, v. 46, p. 292-294, 309-311.) MFA 


Except for a short introduction this article is a 
translation of Becquerel’s paper before the Société 
francaise de photographie in 1857. 


365. Blanc, A. Procédés pour l’étude de 
la photochromie interférentielle. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1899, série 2, tome 15, p. 469-471.) MFA 


366. Boothroyd, Jabez. A few thoughts 
on photographing in natural colors. (In- 
ternational annual of Anthony’s photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1899, v. 11, 
p. 72-76.) MFA 


Difficulties to be overcome. 


367. Brothers, Alfred. Photography: its 
history, processes, apparatus, and materi- 
als. Comprising working details of all 
the more important methods. London: 
Charles Griffin & Co., 1899. xviii, 367 p. 
Zr ederey ptllusace.. MFE 
oielEs history, p. 142-151. Kromoskop, p. 300- 


368. C.. R. H. W. Vogel. (Société fran- 

caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 

1899, série 2, tome 15, p. 165.) MFA 
Obituary notice. 

369. Clerc, Louis Philippe. La photogra- 

phie des couleurs, avec une préface de 


Gabriel Lippmann. Paris: Gauthier-Vil- 
lars ,1899;. 190 p. 12°. (Encyclopédie 
scientifique des aide-mémoire.) MFV 


370. Fuerst Brothers. The Lippmann proc- 
ess. (Professional photographer, Buffalo, 
April, 1899, v. 4, p. 171-172.) MFA 


Directions for working. 


371. Grebe, C. On increasing the sensitive- 
ness of substances by colouring. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, March 30, 1899, 
new series, v. 23, p. 205-207.) MFA 


372. Hermann Wilhelm Vogel. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Jan. 31, 1899, new 
series, v. 23, p. 113-114.) MFA 


Obituary notice. 


373. The Ives Kromskop and color pho- 
tography. (Professional photographer, 
Buffalo, Oct., 1899, v. 4, p. 413-416.) MGA 


374. Jones, Chapman. The Royal Photo- 
graphic Society’s exhibition. (Nature, 
London, Sept. 28, 1899, v. 60, p. 539.) OA 
Brief reference to medal awarded to E. Sanger 
Shepherd for his trichromatic light filters. 
375. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
The application of the diffraction grating 
to photochromy. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, April 14, 1899, v. 46, p. 
232.) MFA 


26 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1899, continued. : 


376. The fundamental principles of 
photochromy. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 28, 1899, v. 46, p. 262- 
263.) MFA 


Discusses the use of the terms “direct”? and ‘“‘in 
direct”? as applied to color processes. 





377. Kromskop color photography. (Pho- 
tographic times, New York, 1899, v. 31, p. 
164-167.) +MFA 


378. Lambert, F.C. English notes — 
recent-advances in three-color photogra- 
phy. illus. (Anthony’s photographic bul- 
letin, New York, 1899, v. 30, p. Sea 


Abstract of lecture by E. Sanger Shepherd, describ- 
ing his process. 


Gabriel. Photographie 


379, Lippmann, 
(Société frangaise 


directe des couleurs. 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, 
série 2, tome 15, p. 116-118.) MFA 


Translation in Photographic news, London, March 
30, 1899, v. 22, p. 207, MFA. 


380. The Melano chromoscope. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 29, 
1899, v. 46, p. 822.) MFA 


381. Monpillard, Félix. Sur la photogra- 
phie indirecte des couleurs appliquée a la 
microphotographie. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 
2, tome 15, p. 467-468.) MFA 


382. Namias, Rodolfo. Obtention d’images 
colorées monochromes et polychromes par 
voie chimique. (Société francaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 2, 
tome 15, p. 565-573.) MFA 


383. Neuhauss, Richard. Neue Untersu- 
chungen tiber das Lippmann’sche Farben- 
verfahren. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik fiir 1899, Halle 


a. S., 1899, Jahrg. 13, p. 70-74.) MFA 
384. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. Prog- 
ress in color photography. (Smithsonian 


Institution. Annual report for 1898, Wash- 
ington, 1899, p. 209-215.) * EA 


385. Photography in natural colours. 
(Photographic news, London, March 10, 
1899, v. 43, p. 154-155.) MFA 


Formulas for Lippmann process. 


386. Photography in natural colours — Mr. 
Friese-Greene’s system. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 17, 
1899, v. 46, p. 729-730.) MFA 


Copy of specifications. 


387. Shepherd, E. Sanger. Colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 3, 1899, v. 46, supplement, 
p. 85-86.) MFA 


Describes operation of the Cadett plates. 


1899, new series, v. 23, p. 316-326.) 





388. The photography of wer 
(Photographic journal, London, Aug. 
fire 


With discussion. 
Deals principally with the Cadett plates. 


389. Practical three-colour lantern- 
slide making. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Dec. 23, 1899, new series, v. 24, p. 95— 
101. ) é MFA 


With discussion. 


390. Vidal, Léon. Application des réseaux 
de diffraction a la reproduction photo- 
graphique des couleurs, par M. le profes- 
seur Wood. illus. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 
2, tome 15, p. 267-272.) F 


391. ——- Chromoscope Nachet a vision 
simple. (Société francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 2, tome 
15, p. 103-106.) MFA 


392. Photographie trichrome. Re- 
marques relatives a la production du vert. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1899, série 2, tome 15, p. 538- 











541.) MFA 
393. Photographie trichrome, procédé 
pelliculaire. (Société francaise de photog- 
raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 2, tome 
15, p. 486-489.) MFA 
394. —— Procédé pelliculaire d’impres- 


sions trichromes pour projections et sté- 
réoscope. (Société francaise de photog- 
raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 2, tome 
15, p. 306-311.) MFA 


395. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Ursache und 
Beseitigung eines Fehlers bei der Lipp- 
mann’schen Farbenphotographie, zugleich 
ein Beitrag zu ihrer Theorie. illus. (An- 
nalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
1899, N. F. Bd. 69, p. 488-530.) PAA 


396. Wood, Robert Williams. An applica- 
tion of the diffraction grating to colour 
photography. (London, Edinburgh & 
Dublin philosophical magazine & journal 
of science, London, April, 1899, series 5, 
v. 47, p. 368-372.) OA 


Also printed in British journal of pagent, 
London, April 14, 1899, v. 46, p. 229-230, MFA 


1900 


397. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
On the estimation of the luminosity of 
coloured surfaces used for colour discs. 


illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
July 31, 1900, new series, v. 24, p. ele, 
FA 


Paper read before the Royal Society. 


398. Screens for three-colour work. 
illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
Jan. 27, 1900, new series, v. 24, p. 121- ayn 


With discussion. 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY | 27 


1900, continued. 


399. Barbieri, D. The history of photog- 
raphy in natural colours. (British journal 
of photography, London, July 27, 1900, v. 
47, p. 474-475.) MFA 


Also printed in American architect, Boston, 1900, 


v. 69, p. 62-63, MQA. 
400. Bolas, Thomas, and others. A hand- 
book of photography in colours. Section 


meisy) i nomas Bolas... Section mu. By 
miexander A. K. Tallent... Section m1. 
By Edgar Senior... London: Marion & 
ere 3 D.1,, vill, 343 p., 3 pl. 12°. 
MFV 


401. Capt. Lascelles Davidson’s improve- 
ments in cinematographs for taking and 
projecting photographs in colours. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 7, 1900, v. 47, supplement, p. 94-95.) 
MFA 


402. Colour fallacies. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1899, v. 46, p. 114— 
115, 190, 226-227, 290-291, 322-323; 1900, v. 
47, p. 143, 159, 175.) MFA 


Editorial discussion of papers by Messrs. aioe 
cock and Zerban, as well as the claims of J. W. Ben 
netto. 

“An ordinary film of sensitive silver haloid in 
gelatine, exposed and developed in the usual manner, 
is just as likely, either itself to register the colours 
of the original or to transmit them to a prepared 
printing surface, as the moon is to yield a supply of 
green cheese to Sir. Thomas Lipton for his many 
shops, or the obese inhabitants of the farmyard pig- 
stye are to take unto themselves wings and fly.” 


403. Colour photography: Krayn’s system 
of viewing the pictures. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 19, 
1900, v. 47, p. 40.) MFA 


404. Colour screens. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 13, 1900, v. 47, 
p. 229.) MFA 


405. Cundall, J. Tudor. The Joly, Wood, 
and ‘Lippmann processes for producing 
photographs in colour. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 6, 1900, v. 47, 
supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 


406. A Dark slide for the Lippmann proc- 
ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, June 1, 1900, v. 47, supplement, ree 


Apparatus sold by Penrose & Co., 


407. Fawcett, E. Douglas. Amateurs and 
the Lippmann process. illus. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, 1900, v. 44, p. 248- 
249, 266-267, 279.) MFA 


408. Forrest, Mark. The MacDonough 
process of colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 7, 
1900, v. 47, Colour photography supple: 
ment, D; 69.) MFA 


London. 





409. The MacDonough process at 
Milwaukee convention. (Anthony’s pho- 
tographic bulletin, New York, 1900, v. 31, 
p. 292-293.) MFA 


Also printed in Professional & amateur photog- 
rapher, Buffalo, Aug., 1900, v. 5, p. 267-269, MFA. 


410. Graby, A. Development of colour 
photography. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, June 15, 1900, v. 44, p. 378.) MFA 


411-412). Nouvelle méthode de pho- 
tographie des couleurs. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1900, 
série 2, tome 16, p. 274-276.) MFA 


Translated in Camera craft, San Francisco, Oct., 
1900, v. 1, p. 358, MFA. 





413. Hinchley, J. W. Colour photography: 
the Joly process. (Society of Chemical 
Industry. Journal, London, Jan. 31, 1900, 
v. 19, p. 5-6.) VOA 
With discussion. 
Devotes_ some space to the theory of color as laid 
down by Clerk Maxwell. Part of this paper is re- 


printed in British journal of photography, Feb. 23, 
1900, p. 119-121, MFA. 


414. Howdill, Charles B. The Joly proc- 
ess for reproducing stained-glass windows. 
(Photographic news, London, May 4, 1900, 
v. 44, p. 285-286.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 4, 1900, v. 47, supplement, Dp. 30, JIRA: 

Author’s name misspelled in British journal of 
photography. 


415. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
combination of colours. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 12, 
1900, v. 47, p. 23-25.) MFA 


416. Procédé trichrome produisant 
des images transparentes pour projections 
et stéréoscopes. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 
2, tome 15, p. 511-519, 587-594; 1900, série 
2, tome 16, p. 31-35.) MFA 





417. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The optics 


of trichromatic photography. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Nov. 30, 1900, 
new series, v. 25, p. 99-120.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
1900, v. 47, p. 742-746, 757-759, 773-776, 788-790; 
LOOT. 48, p. 47, 127, 141- 143, 190-191, 223-224, 
430, 511- Hes MFA; Photographic NEWS, London, 
1900, v. 44, p. 764- 765, 781-782, 795-— 797, 809-811, 
830- 832, 842— 844, MFA. 


418. Ives improvements in photochromo- 
scopic apparatus. illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, Sept. 7, 1900, v. 

) MFA 


47, supplement, p. 71-72 
Describes the patent. 


419. Jones, Chapman. The effect of wave- 
length on gradation. illus. (Photographic 
journal, London, June 30, 1900, new series, 
v. 24, p. 279-286.) MF 


28 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1900, continued. 


420. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
On the recent progress in direct photo- 
chromy. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1900, v. 47, p. 566, 597-598.) MFA 


“To Zenker is due the principle, to Rayleigh is also 
due independently the principle and also the idea 
(lacking with Zenker) of a transition from principle 
to method; to Lippmann is due the final method.” 


421. Photography in natural colours. 
(Nature, London, Aug. 2, 1900, v. 62, p. 
316.) OA 


A review of Zenker’s Lehrbuch der Photochromie, 
1900. 





422. Kromskop color photography. Phila- 


delphia: Ives Kromskop Co. ,;1900.; 32 p. 
Gace lO. MFF p.v.52, no.5 
423. Kromskop color photography. illus. 


(Professional and amateur photographer, 
Buffalo, May, 1900, v. 5, p. 166-168.) MFA 


424. L. Neue Farbenphotographie. (Pho- 
tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., Dec. 9, 
1900, Jahrg. 7, p. 631-632.) +MFA 


Hesekiel process. 


425. Loescher, Fritz. Photographie in na- 
tiirlichen Farben unter Anwendung von 
Beugungsgittern. (Photographische Chro- 
nik, Halle a. S., 1900, Jahrg. 7, p. 295-296, 
307-308.) +MFA 


Wood’s process. 


426. Lueppo-Cramer. Untersuchungen iiber 
das Lippmann’sche Farbenverfahren. (Jahr- 
buch fiir Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik fiir 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, Jahrg. 
15, p. 23-37.) MFA 


Reprinted from Photographische Korrespondenz, 
00. 


English translation in Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Oct. 31, 1900, new series, v. 25, p. 82-85, MFA, 
and British journal of photography, London, Sept. 14, 
1900, v. 47, p. 583-584, MFA. 


427. The McDonough-Joly process of pho- 
tography in natural colours. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, Dec. 21, 1900, v. 44, 
p. 825.) MFA 


428. Mareschal, G. Photographie des cou- 
leurs: petit appareil d’amateur par M. L. 
Ducos du Hauron. illus. (La Nature, 
Paris, 1900, année 28, semestre 1, p. 188- 
189.) OA 


429. The Melano -chromoscope. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 12, 1900, v. 47, p. 25-26.) MFA 


430. Monpillard, Félix. Note sur quelques 
perfectionnements apportés par MM. Prieur 
et Dubois dans l’industrie des impressions 
trichromes. (Société francaise de photog- 
raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1900, série 2, tome 

16, p. 320-327.) MFA 


431. Namias, Rodolfo. Color pictures by 
reaction, after exposure, and by substitu- 


tion. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1900, v. 31, p. 90-93.) MFA 
432. ——— Printing in natural colors. (An- 


thony’s photographic bulletin, New York, 
1900, v. 31, p. 126.) MFA 


433, Panchromatic emulsion for) eslour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 23, 1900, v. 47, p. 122.) 

; MFA 


Use of glycinroth as a sensitizer for red. 


434. Quentin, H. Notes pratiques sur 
V’orthochromatisme. Emploi des plaques 
orthochromatiques avec et sans écrans. 


Paris: C. Mendel ,1900?). 45 pieiZ: 
(Bibliothéque de la Photo-revue. no. 16.) 
MFF p.v.44, no.11 


435. Recent patents in colour photography. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1900, v. 47, p. 327-329, 539-540, 
556-557, 572; supplement, p. 23-24.) MFA 


Specifications: Thorpe, Selle, Garchey, Butler, 
Lascelle, Pollock. 
436-437}. Shepherd, E. Sanger. The pho- 
tography of colour. Cantor lectures. (So- 


ciety of Arts. Journal, London, 1900, v. 48, 
p. 758-766, 769-776, 781-788, 793-797.) VA 


438. Thorp, Thomas. Grating films and 
their application to colour photography. 
illus. (Manchester Literary and Philo- 
sophical Society. Memoirs, Manchester, 
1900, v. 44, no. 12, p. 1-8.) * EC 


439. Trichromatic photography by Hof- 
mann’s process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 22, 1900, v. 47, 
p. 389.) MFA 


440. Trillat, A. Transformation de l’image 
photographique d’un cliché en un état 
lamellaire et phénoménes de colorations 
qui en dérivent. (Académie des sciences. 
Comptes rendus, Paris, 1900, tome 130, p. 
170-172.) *EO 


By chemical treatment colors may be produced on 
a negative; these, however, bear no true relation to 
the colors photographed. Abstract in Photographic 
journal, London, March 31, 1900, new series, v. 24, 
p. 205-206, MFA. 


Also printed in Société frangaise de photographie. 
Seana Paris, 1900, série 2, tome 16, p. 137-139, 


441. Valenta, Eduard. Some more colour 
sensitisers. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, March 2, 1900, v. 47, p. 133- 
134.) MFA 


442. Wallon, Etienne. Mélanochromo- 
scope de M. Louis Ducos du Hauron. 
illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1900, série 2, tome 16, p. 5 
62.) MFA 

Abstract in Journal of photography, London, Feb. 
28, 1900, new series, v. 24, p. 180-182, MFA. 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 29 


1900, continued. 


443. Ward, Henry Snowden. The Mc- 
Donough-Joly process of colour photog- 
raphy. (Photographic journal, London, 
Dec. 31, 1900, new series, v. 25, p. bares 

FA 


Has a list of related patents. 


444. Watkins, Alfred. Hydroquinone and 
colour impressions. (Photographic jour- 


nal, London, June 30, 1900, new series, v. 
24, p. 287-290.) MFA 


445. Wood, Robert Williams. The diffrac- 
tion process of color photography. illus. 
(Science, New York, June 23, 1899, new 
series, v. 9, p. 859-862.) OA 

Stated to be a variation of the three-color process. 


Also printed in Nature, London, June 29, 1899, 
v. 60, p. 199-201, OA. 





446. Diffraction process of colour 
photography. illus. (Society of Arts. 
Journal, London, Feb. 16, 1900, v. 48, p. 
285-291.) VA 


Also printed in Photographic news, London, Feb. 
23, 1900, v. 44, p. 120-123, MFA. 


447. Zenker, Wilhelm. Lehrbuch der Pho- 
tochromie (Photographie der nattirlichen 
Farben). Neu hrsg. von B. Schwalbe. 
Braunschweig: F. Vieweg & Sohn, 1900. 
si, tos p. 8°. MFV 


1901 
448. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
The photography of colour. illus. (So- 


ciety of Chemical Industry. Journal, Lon- 
don, Nov. 30, 1901, v. 20, p. SE 
V 


Underlying scientific principles which must be fol- 
lowed to obtain success. 


449. Barstow, Montagu. Colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1901, v. 48, p. 399, 430-431.) MFA 


Two letters referring to the De Lubicz process, 
but no details. 


450. Brasseur, Charles L. A. The Sampolo- 
Brasseur process of indirect colour-pho- 
tography. illus. (Photographic journal, 
London, May 31, 1901, new series, v. 25, 
p. 265-269.) MFA 


Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, April 19, 1901, v. 48, p. 252, MFA. 


451. Buss, Otto. Lippo-Cramer’s Contra- 
blau vom Standpunkte der Zenker’schen 
Theorie. illus. (Jahrbuch fir Photogra- 
phie und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1901, 


Halle a. S., 1901, Jahrg. 15, p. 37-44.) 
MFA 

452. Drecker, J. Referat tiber direkte Far- 

benphotographie. (Physikalische Zeit- 


schrift, Leipzig, 1901, Jahrg. 2, p. 4445.) 
PAA 


' Explains theories of interference and absorption. 


453. Dubois, Louis. La photographie des 
couleurs et ses applications industrielles. 
(Société industrielle du nord de la France. 
Bulletin, Lille, 1901, année 29, p. 485-502.) 

VA 


454. Farmer, Howard. The optics of tri- 
colour photography. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, June 31, 1901, new series, v. 
25, p. 303-308.) 


Abstract in British journal of Ep REID Lon- 
don, June 7, 1901, v. 48, p. 365, MFA 


455. —— The optics of trichromatic pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Dec. 21, 1900, v. 47, p. 815; 
1901, v. 48, p. 63, 68-69, 154.) MFA 


456. Farmer, Howard, and Guy SyMMowns. 


Practical tri-colour photography. illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, June 21, 
1901, new series, v. 25, p. 294-302.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1901, v. 48, supplement, p. 62-64, Journal, 
p. 503-504, MFA. 


457. Fawcett, E. Douglas. Ona suggested 
advance in the practice of the line system 
of three-colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 22, 
1901, v. 48, p. 118-119.) MFA 


Improvement on the Joly-McDonough processes, 
claiming extreme simplicity of working and perfect 
registration. 

For discussion see 1901, v. 48, p. 140-141, 205. 


458. Goddé, G. Photographie directe des 
couleurs par la méthode interférentielle de 
M. G. Lippmann — pratique du procédé. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1901, série 2, tome 17, p. 351- 
306.) MFA 


459. Grant, Thomas K. A practical proc- 
ess of colour photography. (Photographic 
news, London, Dec. 6, 1901, v. 45, p. 794— 
795.) MFA 


3-plate Lumiére process. 


460. Hale, William H. Natural color pho- 
tography — the Sanger Shepherd process. 
(Photographic times, New York, 1901, v. 
33, p. 104-107.) +MFA 


461. Herschel, Sir William James. Colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 12, 1901, v. 48, p. 439- 
441.) MFA 


Presidential address to the sixteenth annual meet- 
ing of the Photographic Convention of the United 
Kingdom, Oxford, July 8, 1901. Describes Ives, 
Shepherd, Joly- McDonough, and Lippmann processes, 
with comments on the work of Zenker and Wiener. 


Also printed in Smithsonian Institution. Annual 
report for 1901, Washington, 1902, p. 313-316, *EA. 


462. Hitchcock, Romyn. Tithonic rays 
and early photographs in color. (Inter- 
national annual of Anthony’s photographic 
bulletin, New York, 1901, v. 13, p. 107- 
109.) MFA 


30 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1901, continued. 


463. Howdill, Charles B. The photogra- 
phy of stained glass windows by the three- 
colour process. (Photographic journal, 
London, Aug. 31, 1901, new series, v. 25, 
p. 342-344.) MFA 


464. Husnik, Jaroslav. On colour sensi- 

tizing in theory and practice. (Photo- 

graphic journal, London, Oct. 31, 1901, new 

series, v. 25, p. 364-365.) MFA 
Abstract from Eder’s Jahrbuch, 1901. 


465. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The optics of 
tri- colour photography. (Photographic 
journal, London, July 31, 1901, new series, 
v. 25, p. 339- 340.) MFA 


Revly to charges of Howard Farmer. 


466. The optics of trichromatic pho- 
tography. illus. (Photographic journal, 
London, Aug. 31, 1901, new series, v. 25, p. 
350-352.) MFA 


467. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
Notes on the development of interference 
photochromy. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, 1900, v. 47, p. 612-613, 693- 
694, 711-712; 1901, v. 48, p. 3-4, 21, 100-101, 
116-117, 180, 230-231, 277-278.) MFA 


Excellent outline with footnote references. Dis- 
cusses the work of Neuhauss, Lippmann, Dittmar, 
Delvalez, Kitz, Zenker, Becquerel, Rayleigh, Wiener, 
Eder, Valenta, Thwing, Meslin, Schiitt. 


468. Kenah, Arthur V. The McDonough- 
Joly process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 1, 1901, v. 48, p. 
140-141.) MFA 


469. On a method of producing pho- 
tographs in colour, suitable to the require- 
ments of the amateur. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 18, 
1901, v. 48, p. 36-39.) MFA 


McDonough and Joly processes exploited by The 
Natural Color Photo. Co. of London. 


470. Kuchinka, Eduard. Neuere Apparate 
zur Herstellung von Farbenphotographien 
nach dem Dreifarbenprocesse. illus. (Jahr- 
buch ftir Photographie und Reproduc- 
tionstechnik fiir 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, 
Jahrg. 15, p. 257-273.) MFA 


Ives and Ducos du Hauron processes. 








471. Lueppo-Cramer. Fine grain and its 
relation to colour sensitiveness. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 15, 
1901, v. 48, p. 675.) MFA 


472. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
Sur la photographie des couleurs. illus. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1901, série 2, tome 17, p. 204— 
211, 303-310, 441-449.) MFA 


473. Miethe, Adolf. Das Heliochromo- 
scope als Hilfsmittel im Dreifarbendrucke. 
illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fiir 1901, Halle a. S., 
1901, Jahrg. 15, p. 461-464.) MFA 


474. Neuhauss, Richard. The Lippmann 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 24, 1901, v. 48, p. Spee Ee 


475. Die Sensibilisirung der Gelatine- 
platten fiir Lippmann’s Farbenverfahren. 
(Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik ftir 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, 
Jahre. 15, po Pis=1264 MFA 





476. A Notable advance in color photog- 
raphy. illus. (Smithsonian Institution. 
Annual report for 1900, Washington, 2901, 
p. 523-526.) * EA 


Brasseur-Sampolo process. 


477. Pfaundler, Leopold. Ueber Farben- 
photographie mittels Beugungsgitter. illus. 
(Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fiir 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, 
Jahrg. 15, p. 177-187.) MFA 


Wood’s process. 


478. La Photographie des couleurs. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, 1901, année 11, p. 165-171, 
189-198, 226-233.) MFA 


Lippmann, Cros, and Ducos du Hauron processes 
in detail. 


479. Shearer, J. S. Screens for the Mc- 
Donough-Joly process. (British journal 
of photography, London, June 7, 1901, v. 
48, p. 367.) MFA 


For a comment by A. V. Kenah see issue for June 
14, 1901, p. 383. 


480. T., H. Herstellung farbiger Positive 
nach Dreifarben - Negativen. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Jan. 9, 
1901, Jahrg. 8, p. 29-30.) +,MFA 


Lumiére process. 


481. Tallent, Alexander A. K. The optics 
of trichromatic photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 4, 
1901, v. 48, p. 15-16.) MFA 


482. Van Beek, H. Wesentliche Verbesse- 
rung der Kamera, ftir gleichzeitige Auf- 
nahme dreier farbiger Teilbilder bestimmt. 
illus. (Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
S., Jan. 27, 1901, Jahrg. 8, p. 58-60.) -_MFA 


. Szezepanik process. 


483. Wall, Edward John. The optics of 
trichromatic photography. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1901, v. 


48, p. 231-233, 244-245.) MFA 
1902 
484. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 


On colour photography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Feb. 7, 1902, v. 
49, p. 111-112.) MFA 


Abstract of paper on lenses read before the Camera 
Club, with discussion. 


a ae ee 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 3] 


1902, continued. 


485. Colour photography. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, July 25, 1902, 


v. 49, p. 581-582.) MFA 
Dr. Miethe’s process. 


486. Colour photography. Dr. Neuhauss’s 

process. (British journal of photography, 

London, Jan. 31, 1902, v. 49, p. 81-82.) 
MFA 


487. Direct colour photographs. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1902, v. 
49, p. 282, 1001.) MFA 


A brief history of progress made. 


488. Eder, Josef Maria. Spectralana- 
lytische Studien tiber photographischen 
Dreifarbendruck. illus. (Kaiserliche Aka- 
demie der Wissenschaften. Denkschrif- 
ten, Mathematisch-naturwissenschaftliche 
Classe, Wien, 1902, Bd. 72, p. 633-663.) 

* EF 


Abstracted by E. J. Wall in British journal of 
photography, London, 1904, v. 51, p. 228-229, 251- 
252, 268-270, MFA, 


489. System der Sensitometrie pho- 
tographischer Platten. illus. (Kaiserliche 
Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungs- 
berichte: Mathematisch-naturwissenschaft- 
liche Classe, Wien, 1899, Bd. 108, Abt. 11a, 
p. 1407-1498; 1900, Bd. 109, Abt. 11a, p. 1103- 
tizo, 1901, Ba. 110, Abt. ma, p. 1103-1124; 
1902, Bd. 111, Abt. ma, p. 888-893.) *EF 


490. Fritsch, Gustav. Trichromatic filters. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 19, 1902, v. 49, p. 1001.) MFA 





491. Goethe and colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, July 4, 
1902, v. 49, p. 522-523.) “MFA 


492. Gravier, Charles. Impressions poly- 
chromes par les procédés photographiques. 
(Société francaise de photographie. 
letin, Paris, 1902, série 2, tome 18, p. 132- 
136.) MFA 


493. Hanneke, Paul. Direkte Farbenphotog- 
raphie. (Photographische Kunst, Wochen- 
Beilage, Miinchen, April 23, 1902, dahror, 
Dp. 17-19.) +MFA 


Vallot, Neuhauss, and Worel processes. 


494. Hitchcock, Romyn. Photographs in 
color. (International annual of Anthony’s 
photographic bulletin, New York, 1902, v. 
14, p. 183-185.) MFA 


General description of McDonough process. 


495. Johnson, George Lindsay. A century’s 
progress in colour photography and the 
knowledge of colour vision. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, March 31, 1902, 
v. 42 new series, v. 26), p. 86-90.) MFA 


Reprinted in Photographic times-bulletin, New 
York, P1902, v. 34, p. 547-552, {MFA 


Bul- - 


496. The Lippmann process and colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 24, 1902, p. 61.) MFA 


Brief abstract of article by R. Neuhauss in Liese- 
gang’s photographischer Almanach, relating to possi- 
bilities of color photography. 


497. The Lumiére process of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Jan. 17, 1902, v. 49, p. 52-53.) 

MFA 


Gives directions for preparing screens and printing 
papers, with formulas for intensifier and reducer. 


498. Miethe, Adolf. A new colour sensi- 

tizer. (British journal of photography, 

London, Dec. 19, 1902, v. 49, p. 1002.) 
MFA 


Abstract only. 


499. —— Plates and light-filters for ortho- 
chromatic and tri-color photography. 
(Camera craft, San Francisco, 1902, v. 4, 


p. 199-207; v. 5, p. 9-11.) MFA 


500. Mr. Sanger Shepherd’s new colour 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 19, 1902, v.49, p. 1004.) MFA 


501. Monpillard, Félix. Sur la formation 
des noirs, des gris et des demi-teintes dans 
les synthéses trichromes industrielles; pro- 
cédés en relief. illus. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1902, sé- 
rie 2, tome 18, p. 169-184.) MFA 


502. Neuhauss, Richard. Direkte Farben- 
photographie durch Korperfarben. (Jahr- 
buch ftir Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik fiir 1902, Halle a. S., 1902, Jahrg. 
16, p. 20-21.) MFA 


Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
S., 1902, Jahrg. 9, p. 79-81, 93-96, MFA. 


503. Nutting, P. G. The effect of light on 
cyanin. (Nature, London, Aug. 28, 1902, 
v. 66, p. 416.) OA 


Abstract in Photographic journal, London, Aug. 30, 
1902, new series, v. 26, p. 197-198, MFA. 


504. The Physiological basis of three-col- 
our work. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Jan. 24, 1902, v. 49, p. ih 


An appreciation of the work of James Clerk Max- 
well. 


505. Plaskett, J. S. Photography in nat- 
ural colors. illus. (Royal Canadian Insti- 
tute. Transactions, Toronto, 1902, v. 7, p. 
371-390.) * EC 


506. Senior, Edgar. Mise en évidence de 
l’existence des lames minces de Zenker 
dans les chromophotographies du procédé 
Lippmann. illus. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1902, série 
2, tome 18, p. 441-446.) MFA 


507. Shepherd, E. Sanger. Colour photog- 
raphy at the London Camera Club. (Pho- 
tographic news, London, Dec. 19, 1902, v. 
46, p. 829-830.) MFA 


32 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1902, continued. 


508. St. Photographie in Satarlichen Far- 
ben auf Papier (Korperfarben). (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., July 6, 
1902, Jahrg. 9, p. 347-349.) +MFA 


Worel’s process. 


509. Thorpe’s Methode der Photographie 
in naturlichen Farben. illus. (Jahrbuch 
fur Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
mix fur) 1902 Halle-a. 5.711902, Jahre. 16; 
p. 229-237.) MFA 


510. Three-colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 11, 
1902, v. 49, p. 281-282.) MFA 


Describes process of A. Miethe on Schelter and 
Giesecke plates. 


511. Verrill’s process for producing photo- 
graphs in colors. (Wilson’s photographic 
magazine, New York, April, 1902, v. 39, p. 
124-127.) MFA 


From an article in the Chicago Chronicle. Also in 
British journal of photography, London, May 2, 1902, 
v. 49, p. 349-350, MFA. 


512. Vidal, Léon. Des pigments colorés 
théoriques et pratiques pour les impres- 
sions photo-trichromes. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1902, série 2, tome 18, p. 200-208.) MFA 


513: A trichromatic carbon process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 19, 1902, v.49, p. 1002-1003.) MFA 


514. Wallace, Robert James. Color pho- 
tography. illus. (Photo-miniature, New 
York, May, 1902, v. 4, p. 57-87.) MFA 


Reviews older methods and gives details of super- 
imposing of stained films. 


515. Wallon, Etienne. Chromoscope a 
vision libre de M. Ducos du Hauron. illus. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1902, série 2, tome 18, p.115- 
118.) MFA 


516. Worel, Karl. 
colours (body colours) on paper. 
graphic journal, London, July 31, 
new series, v. 26, p. 183.) 





(Photo- 
1902, 
MFA 
517. Worel’s experiments in colour photog- 


raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 18, 1902, v. 49, p.562.) MFA 


1903 
518. Adolf Miethe. port. (Photographic 
journal, London, Aug., 1903, new series, 
Vi 2/, 10s MFA 


519. Another Miethe print. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 6, 1903, 
vin, p. 102.) MFA 

“This new plate is said to be about eight times as 
sensitive for green and red as the older plate and 


permits of equal exposures with Miethe’s filters for 
the red and blue, and about one-half for the green.” 


Photography in natural © 


520. Arthur von Hibl. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v.27, p. 207.) MFA 


521. Baker, Thomas Thorne. Notes on 
the adaptation of light filters to plates for 
three-colour work. illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, Dec. 11, 1903, v 
50, p. 987-988.) MFA 


522. Bosch, A. Photography in colors. 

illus. (Scientific American, New York, 

Sept. 12, 1903, v.89, p. 185-186.) VA 
Deals principally with the Miethe process. 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 16, 1903, v. 50, p. 828-830, MFA. 


523. Corke, H. Essenhigh. Further ex- 
periments with the Thames plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 4, 
1903, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 92-93.) MFA 


524. Dalziel, Harvey. Three-colour print- 
ing. (Society of Arts. Journal, London, 
Feb. 20, 1903, v. 51, p. 292-299.) VA 

Interesting comparison of chromo-lithography and 
modern three-colour printing. 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 13, 1903, v. 50, p. 205-208, MFA. 


525. Dr. Miethe’s three-color process. 
(Photo-era, Boston, April, 1903, v. 10, 
p. 138-140.) MFA 


526. Donath, Bruno. Der Projektions- 
apparat der Urania fiir Dreifarbenphoto- 
graphie. illus. (Zeitschrift fir wissen- 
schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1903, 
Bd. 1, p. 94-97.) PLC 


527. Edouard Valenta. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v.27, p. 215.) MFA 


528. The First photo-colour swindle. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 6, 1903, v. 50, p. 184-185.) MFA 


Caustic comments on the Hill process which was 
eerie referred to in the Daguerreian journal of 
850-51. 


529. Florence. Die Farbenphotographie 
nach dem Dreifarbensystem. illus. (Pho- 
tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1901, 
Jahrg. 8, p. 349-352, 399-401, 519-521, 643- 
645; 1902, Jahrg. 9, p. 105-108, 205-207, 320- 
322, 437-439, 657-659; 1903, Jahrg. 10, p. 
118-120, 275-277.) MFA 


530. Frederic Eugene Ives. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v. 27, p. 213.) MFA 


531. Gabriel Lippmann. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v. 27, p. 213.) MFA 


532. Gravier, Charles. 
la chromophotographie. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1903, série 2, tome 19, p. 221-223.) MFA 


Observations sur 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY ate: 


1903, continued. 


533. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Unter- 
suchungen tiber die Sensibilisierung durch 
Farbstoffe. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1903, Halle 
aes, panre. 17, p.. 128-131.) MFA 


534. Josef Maria Eder. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v.27, p. 215.) MFA 


535. Kaiserling, Carl. Three-colour pho- 

tography. (British journal of photogra- 

phy, London, April 10, 1903, v.50, p. ae. 
FA 


536. Kauffmann, Hugo. Uber den Ur- 
sprung der Farbe bei organischen Stoffen. 
(Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photo- 
graphie, Leipzig, 1903, Bd. 1, p. 60-71.) PLC 


537. Louis Ducos du Hauron. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v.27, p. 213.) MFA 


538. Miethe, Adolf. Light-filters for three- 
colour printing. (Photographic journal, 
London, Aug., 1903, new series, v.27, p. 
214-218. ) MFA 


539. Natural colour portraiture. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 15, 
1903, v.50, p. 383-384.) MFA 


A plea to professional photographers to experiment. 


540. Neuhauss, Richard. Weitere Unter- 
suchungen wtber K6rperfarbenphotographie 
(Ausbleichverfahren). (Jahrbuch fiir Pho- 
tographie und Reproductionstechnik fiir 
13, taalle a. S., 1903, Jahrg. 17, p. 47-55.) 


MFA 
541. Norman, Albert. Photomicrography 
in black and white and in colours. (Pho- 


tographic journal, London, March 31, 1903, 
new series, v.27, p. 68-73.) MFA 


Experiments with Sanger Shepherd process. 


542. Photography in colours. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 13, 1903, 
M0.p. 121.) MFA 


Miethe process. 


543. Power, H. D’Arcy. Color photogra- 
phy. A brief resumé of what has been 
done and the future prospects of the proc- 
ess. (Camera craft, San Francisco, April, 
1903, v.6, p. 240-244.) MFA 


544. The Sanger Shepherd process of 

making color photographs. (Camera craft, 

San Francisco, Feb., 1903, v. 6, p. 169.) _ 
MF 


545. Pumphrey, Alfred. Colour photog- 
raphy on paper within the reach of all. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1903, v.50, p. 176-177, 198-199, 218-219.) 


Uses a celluloid gelatine film. Attacks the Sanger 
Shepherd patent. 





546. Sanger Shepherd & Co. Colour pho- 
tography on paper. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 23, 1903, v. 50, 
2/1) MFA 


Abstract of booklet issued by the firm. 


547. Shepherd, E. Sanger. Natural colour 

photography. (British journal of photog- 

raphy, London, Feb. 6, 1903, v. 50, p. 115.) 
MFA 


Abstract of lecture. 


548. Sir W. de W. Abney. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v. 27, p. 205.) MFA 


549. Stolze, F. Dreifarben - Projektions- 


bilder und Dreifarbendruck. diagrs. (Pho- 
tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1903, 
Jahrg. 10, p. 442-444, 455-457.) +MFA 


Miethe’s process. 


550. Talboys, Arthur Obey -Practicala color 


photography. illus. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, 1903, v.6, p.109-115, 141-144, 
192-197.) MFA 


Three-color work for amateurs. 


551. Triplice, pseud. Colour photography 
on paper. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, March 27, 1903, v.50, p. 257.) 

MFA 


Claims that the Sanger Shepherd patent process is 
not identical with that patented by Charles Cros in 
1880. 


552. Vidal, Léon. The Sanger-Shepherd 
colour process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 9, 1903, v. 50, p. 22- 
25%) ' MFA 


553. Wall, Edward John. Colour photog- 
raphy on paper, etc. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1903, v.50, p. 198, 
236.) MFA 


Comments on Mr. Alfred Pumphrey’s paper in 
British journal of photography of Feb. 27, 1903. 
554. Trichromatic photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
9, 1903, v. 50, p. 27-29.) MF A 

A review of Hitibl’s Die Dreifarbenphotographie. 


Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
March, 1903, v. 6, p. 208-210, MFA. 


555. Worel, Karl. Direkte Photographie 
in nattirlichen Farben (Korperfarben) auf 
Papier. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik ftir 1903, Halle a. S., 
1903, Jahrg. 17, p. 68-70.) MFA 


Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
S., Oct. 21, 1903, Jahrg. 10, p. 545-546, » IMA. 





1904 


556. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Some points connected with landscape 
three-colour photography. illus. (British 


journal of photography, London, Jan. 22, 
1904, v.51, p. 63-66.) MFA 


Also printed in Photographic journal, London, 
March, 1904, new series, v. 28, p. 81-88, MFA. 


34 ; THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1904, continued. 


557. Adolf Miethe. port. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, 
p. 449.) MFA 


558. Baker, Thomas Thorne. The com- 
posite print in three-colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 12, 1904, v. 51, p. 707.) MFA 


559. ——- Some notes on three-colour work. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1904, v.51, p. 289-290, 342.) MFA 


Author’s experiments with dyes. 


560. Some peculiarities of dyes which 
produce total spectrum sensitiveness. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
7, 1904, v. 51, p. 867-868.) MFA 


561. Brown, George Edward. Dr. Miethe’s 
methods of colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 10, 
1904, v.51, p. 489-491.) MFA 


562. Bull, A. J. Some spectroscopic ex- 
periments with tricolour filters. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 13, 





1904, v.51, p. 391-393.) MFA 
SO3., bull, A. j:, and7A.. ¢. JOLtey.” | Lhe 
functions of tricolour filters. illus. (Brit- 


ish journal of photography, London, 1904, 
v. 51, p. 47—50, 70-71.) MFA 


564. Chapelain. Sur un nouvel appareil de 
photochromie. (Société francaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1904, série 2, 
tome 20, p. 520-521.) MFA 


3-negative process. 


565. Clerc, Louis Philippe. Papier au char- 
bon de M. Vaucamps pour le procédé tri- 
chrome. (Société francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1904, série 2, tome 
20, p. 86-88.) MFA 


566. Erste internationale Ausstellung fiir 


Farbenphotographie in Paris. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
Jahrg. 41, p. 251-255.) MFA 


Account of exhibits. 


567. Farmer, Howard, and Guy SyMMowns. 
Irradiation in photography and its appli- 
cation to direct screen colour work. illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, Aug., 
1904, new series, v.28, p. 239-248.) MFA 


568. Fritsch, Gustav. Die Retinaelemente 
und die Dreifarbentheorie. 19 p., 1 pl. 
(Koenigliche Akademie der Wissenschaf- 
ten, Berlin. Abhandlungen, 1904: Anhang, 
Physikalische Abhandlung 2.) * EE 


569. Grun, Ernst. Colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 29, 1904, v.51, p. 99.) MFA 


Experiment with the Cooper-Hewitt mercury lamp 
and a red screen. “The undoubted fact remained 
that red light was produced direct from blue, or per- 
haps yellow, owing to change of wave length.” 


570. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. A col- 
our-sensitive collodion emulsion. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 30, 
1904, v. 51, p. 846.) MFA 


571. —— Die Farbenphotographie mit Hilfe 
des Ausbleichverfahrens. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 
103-108.) MFA 


572. Jan Szczepanik. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1904, v. 51, p. 21-22, 
58-59.) MFA 


An attack by Dr. Neuhauss and a defense by 
William Gamble. 


573. Jones, Chapman. Developments of 
three-colour photographic processes. 
(Nature, London, 1904, v. 70, p. 553-555, 
578-580.) OA 


General article. 


574. Klein, Henry Oscar. Eine originelle 
Dreifarbenmethode. (Jahrbuch fiir Pho- 
tographie und Reproductionstechnik ftir 
1904, Halle a. S., 1904, Jahrg. 18, p. 175- 
1/704 MFA 


575. Koenig, Ernst. Uber die Herstellung 


von Pinachrom - Badeplatten. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
Jahrg. 41, p. 116-117.) MFA 


576. Ueber die Lichtempfindlichkeit 
der Leukobasen organischer Farbstoffe 
und ihre Anwendung zur Herstellung pho- 
tographischer Bilder. (Photographische 
Chronik, Halle a. S., Nov. 6, 1904, Jahrg. 
11, p. 591-594.) +MFA 


577, Uber ein neues Kopierverfahren | 
fiir die Dreifarbenphotographie. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
Jahrg. 41, p. 521-525.) MFA 


Experiments with paper at laboratory of Meister 
Lucius & Briining. 


578. —— Ueber praktische Dreifarben- 

Photographie. (Photographische Kunst, 

Miinchen, 1903-04, Jahrg. 2, p. 1-14.) 
+MFA 


579. Weitere Untersuchungen in der 
Reihe der Cyaninfarbstoffe. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
Jahrg. 41, p. 108-116.) MFA 











580. Koenig’s colour filters. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, July 29, 1904, 
v.51, p. 665.) MFA 


581. Kuchinka, Eduard. Fortschritte und 
neue Verfahren auf dem Gebiete der Far- 
benphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fiir 1904, Halle a. S., 1904, Jahrg. 18, p. 201- 
210.) MFA 

Prieur & Dubois,. Fraschbourg, Perscheid, Sanger- 
Shepherd, Lascelles-Davidson cameras; also Gtirtner 
process. 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY a5 


1904, continued. 
582. Lenses for trichromatic work. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 


March 18, 1904, v.51, p. 229.) MFA 


583. Levy, Max. Screens for color work. 
(American annual of photography 1905, 
New York, 1904, p. 235-237.) MFA 


584. The Lippmann process simplified. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 18, 1904, v. 51, p. 990.) MFA 


M. Rothé overcomes the necessity of the mercury 
dark slide. 


585. Loebel, eee aid Un nouveau pro- 
cédé de tirage trichrome par l’emploi des 
leucobases. (Photo- -gazette, Paris, Nov. 
25, 1904, année 15, p. 13-16.) MFA 


586. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
A new method for the production of pho- 
tographs in colours. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, July, 1904, new series, v. 28, 
p. 226-228.) MFA 
Announcement of the Autochrome process. 
Also printed in British journal of pag gdaed 


London, July 8, 1904, v. 51, p. 605, MFA, an 
aoe erayt, an Francisco, Oct., 1904, p. 212, 
FA, 


587. Sur une nouvelle méthode d’ob- 
tention de photographies en couleurs. 
(Académie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, 1904, tome 138, p. 1337-1338.) *EO 


Also printed in Société francaise de photographie. 
eerie Paris, 1904, série 2, tome 20, p. 333-334, 





588. Vorlaufige Mitteilung tuber ein 
neues Verfahren der Farbenphotographie. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 286-287.) MFA 





589. Meister Lucius & Briining. Portrait- . 


studie. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, opp. p. 210.) MFA 


Sample of work with Pinachrome plates back of 
filters als by above firm. 


590. Miethe, Adolf. The composition of 
colour-filters for the production of por- 
traits in natural colours. (British journal 
of photography, London, May 27, 1904, v. 
51, p. 432-435.) MFA 
591. Dreifarbenphotographie nach der 
Natur; nach den am photochemischen La- 
boratorium der technischen Hochschule zu 
Berlin angewandten Methoden. Halle a. 
S.: W. Knapp, 1904. 80p.,1 pl. 8°. (En- 
cyklopadie der Photographie. Heft ae 





592. —— Dreifarbenphotographien auf Pa- 
pier. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 286-287.) MFA 


Formula for his process. 


593. Mitteilung tiber ein neues Verfah- 
ren der Farbenphotographie von August 





und Louis Lumiere. (Photographische 
Chronik, Halle a. S.; Oct. 30, 1904, Jahrg. 
Le esas 576- 578.) +MFA 


Autochrome process. 





594. Zu dem Urtel des Herrn Pro- 
fessor Bruno Meyer iiber Naturfarben- 
Photographien. (Photographische Chro- 
nik, Halle a. S., Dec. 21, 1904, Jahrg. 11, 
p. 681-683.) +MFA 


595. Monpillard, Félix. Les couleurs chi- 
miquement pures de la maison Lucius et 
Bruning. (Société francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1904, série 2, tome 
20, p. 319-323.) MFA 


596. Neuhauss, Richard. Ausbleichverfah- 
ren. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Re- 
productionstechnik ftir 1904, Halle a. S., 
1904, Jahrg. 18, p. 62-65.) MFA 


597. New colour sensitisers. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London,:’April 15, 1904, 
v.51, p. 306-307.) MFA 


Directions for using Pinachrom sensitiser. 


598; Newton, A. J., and A.J. Buri... The 
practical testing of tri-colour filters. 
(Photographic journal, London, Oct., 1904, 
new series, v. 28, p. 263-273.) MFA 


Illustrations in color. 


599. Pfaundler, Leopold. Ueber die Zen- 
kerschen Streifen in nach Lippmanns Ver- 
fahren hergestellten Photographieen sich 
uberdeckender Spektra und ihre Bedeu- 
tung fiir die Leistungsfahigkeit dieses Ver- 
fahrens bei gemischten Farben. illus. 
(Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik ftir 1904, Halle a. S., 1904, 
Jahrg. 18, p. 229-233.) MFA 


600. Power, H. D’Arcy. Worel’s direct 
color photography. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, Feb., 1904, v.8, p.124.) MFA 


601. Precht, J. Dreifarbenprojektionsap- 
parat. (Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche 
Photographie, Leipzig, 1904, Bd. 2, p. 407- 
410.) PLC 


602. —— Einrichtung fir Dreifarbenpro- 
jektion. illus. (Zeitschrift flr wissen- 
schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1904, 
Bd. 2, p. 60-63.) PLC 


603. Precht, J., and Ericnh STENcER. Aus 
der Praxis der Dreifarbenphotographie. 
(Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photo- 
graphie, Leipzig, 1904, Bd.2, p. 410-413.) 


PLC 
604. R., H. Photographie directe des 
couleurs sans appareil spécial. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 1904, année 15, 
p. 3-5.) MFA 


E. Rothé’s adaptation of Lippmann process. 


605. Rheinberg, Julius. A suggested plan 
for photography in colours, without the 
use of colour screens. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 1904, 
v.51, p. 7-8.) MFA 

Substitutes the artificial color screen of the Joly 
process with real spectra. 


36 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1904, continued. 


606. Rothé, E. Photographies en couleurs 
obtenues par la méthode interférentielle 
sans miroir de mercure. (Académie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, mp 
tome 139, p. 565-567.) EO 


Also printed in Société francaise de photographie. 
cae Paris, 1904, série 2, tome 20, p. 548-550, 


607. Saint Florent, E. de. Note sur un 
procédé de photographie en couleurs au 
moyen du sous-chlorure d’argent. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1904, série 2, tome 20, p. 351-352.) 
MFA 


608. Satori, Karl. Einige Untersuchungen 
von panchromatischen Platten fir Drei- 


farbendruck. (Photographische Korres- 
pondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 224-226.) 
MFA 


609. Selle, Gustav. Diaphragms for three- 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 29, 1904, v. 51, 
p. 347.) MFA 


Brief reference to his patent. 


610. Senior, Edgar. Colour sensitometers. 

illus. (British journal of photography, 

London, June 10, 1904, v.51, p. 504-506.) 
MFA 


Has portrait of the author. 


611. South,C. W. ,;The solgram.; (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
16, 1904, v.51, p. 1063.) MFA 


612. Szczepanik, Jan. ,Process of colour 
photography.,; (British journal of photog- 
aie London, Feb. 19, 1904, v.51, p. 142.) 

MFA 


613. Three-colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, March 
18, 1904, v.51, p. 221-222.) MFA 


Pinachrom sensitizer for red rays. Also German- 
English patent for securing accurate registration of 
superimposed images. 


614. Traube, Artur. Lichtechte Farben- 
photographie. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., Dec. 14, 1904, Jahrg. 11, p. 668- 
669.) +MFA 


Reichel process. 


615. Valenta, Eduard. Uber das Sensibili- 
sieren von Kollodionemulsion fir die 
Zwecke des Dreifarbendruckes. Athyl- 
violett als Sensibilisator ftir Bromsilber- 
gelatine - Trockenplatten. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 
125-128.) MFA 


616. Wall, Edward John. Dr. Koenig’s 
colour process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 14, 1904, v.51, p. 
886-887.) MFA 





617. Elementary three-colour work. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1904, v.51, p. 666-667, 684-685.) MFA 


618. Light filters for trichromatic 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 11, 1904, v.51, p. 
208.) MFA 
A translated abstract of article by E. Konig in 
Photographische Mitteilungen. 
619. Some notes on three-colour work. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1904,v.51,"p2 3Z21,8362" MFA 


Disputes T. Thorne Baker’s statements on sensi- 
tisers. 


620. Wall, E. J. port. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 10, 1904, v. 51, 
p. 494.) MF A 


621. Wallon, Etienne. Photographie des 
couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Sept. 25, 
1904, année 14, p. 205-211.) MFA 


Autochrome process. 








622. Waterhouse, James. Experiences with 
red sensitisers. illus. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, June, 1904, new series, v. 28, 
p. 165-171.) MFA 


623. Weidert, Fr. The latest in color 
photography. (Photo-era, Boston, Sept., 
1904, v.13, p. 165-166.) MFA 


Slavik process. 


624. Wood, Robert Williams. Recent im- 
provements in the diffraction process of 
colour-photography. illus. (Nature, Lon- 
don, Oct. 20, 1904, v. 70, p. 614-616.) OA 


1905 


625. Aarland, G. Three-colour photogra- 
phy. (Photographic journal, London, 
May, 1905, new series, v.29, p. Vel 


Abstract in British journal of ey a: 
don, April 14, 1905, v. 52, p. 295, MFA. 


626. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Three-colour work. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 8, 1905, v. 52, 
a 9/on MFA 
Abstract of paper read before the Royal Photo- 
graphic Society. 
627. Why not take three-colour pho- 
tographs? (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Aug., 1905, new series, v.29, p. 280- 
281.) MFA 


Recommends Sanger Shepherd camera to amateurs. 


628. Acland, Sarah A. A visit to Gibraltar. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 9, 1905, v.52, p. 456.) MFA 

“The bulk of the illustrations were three- colour 
slides by the Senne shea pierce, and it is no 


exaggeration to refer to Miss Acland’s work as the 
finest which has ever been publicly shown.” 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 37 


1905, continued. 


629. The Angle of three-colour screens. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 3, 1905, v.52, p. 90-91.) MFA 


630. Another process of color photogra- 
phy. (Camera craft, San Francisco, March, 
1905, v.10, p. 167-168.) MFA 


Process of Rudolph Isenmann. 


631. Baker, Thomas Thorne. Spectro- 
scopic photography in colour. illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, Jan.-Feb., 
1905, new series, v. 29, p. 24-28.) MFA 


Abstract in British journal of eorcarhp Lon- 
Bones lane 16, 1905, v. 52, p. 31, MFA 


632. Barker, Johnson. Colour photogra- 
phy on paper. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Dec. 1, 1905, v. 52, p. 
946-947.) MFA 


Abstract. Superimposes yellow and red images on 
a ferro-prussiate base. Detailed description. 


633. Beckers, Fritz. Ueber Dreifarben- 

photographie. (Photographische Kunst, 

Miinchen, 1904-05, Jahrg. 3, p. 108-112.) 
Pinachrome process. +MFA 


634. Bull, A. J. The principles of trichro- 
matic photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1905, v.52, p.447- 
449, 467.) MFA 


Paper read before the Optical cdnvention. Covers 
color-mixture curves, theories, negative records in- 
tended to follow curves, relation of ordinary colors 
and monochromatic colors as regards their reproduc- 
tion, fundamental requirements of the reproduction 
colors, and the mutual adjustment of filter records 
and reproduction colors. 


635. Butler, Edwin T. Tricolour photog- 
raphy by means of a single exposure 
camera and a simple method of printing. 
illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
June, 1905, new series, v. 29, p. 199-204.) 


Brief abstract in British journal of hy ea eke, 
London, May 12, 1905, v.52, p. 375, MFA 
With Giseussion. 


Sooecaunels. HH, and L. P. Crerc. Sur 
l’accroissement de sensibilité de quelques 
mixtions bichromatées sous l’influence de 
diverses matiéres colorantes. (Société 


francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1905, série 2, tome 21, p. 377-379.) MFA 


637. Colorprinte. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
cisco, 1905, v. 10, p. 295-296, 379.) MFA 


Invented by Dr. von Slavik, perfected by Dr. 
Adolf Hesekiel. 


638. Colour photography mysteries. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
Pento05, v.52, p. 902.) MFA 


Criticism of Solgram process. 


639. Davidson, Lascelles. The latest one- 
plate colour process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 29, 1905, v. 52, 
p. 1030.) MFA 


Bleaches a carbon print carrying proper mono- 
chrome color densities. 


640. Dillaye, Frédéric. Le procédé tri- 
chrome et sa mise a la portée de tous. 


(In his: Les nouveautés photographiques 
1904-1905. Paris, 1905. 8°. p.282-298.) 
MFA 


Cros and Ducos du Hauron processes. 


641. Direct three-colour negatives on dry 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 12, 1905, v.52, p. 368.) MFA 


Loewenstamm and Hoffert experiments. 


642. Dr. Miethe’s colour photography in 
London. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1905, v. 52, p. 268- "369, 
302311.) MFA 


Brief description and photograph of the projection 
apparatus. The titles of the above articles vary. 


643. Dr. Smith’s three-colour plates. (Brit- 


ish journal of photography, London, May 
Sel oU Evade a t05.) "MFA 


644. Eder, Josef Maria. Geschichte der 
Photographie. Dritte ganzlich umgearbei- 
tete und vermehrte Auflage. Halle a. S.: 
Wilhelm Knapp, 1905. 2 pl. (i)vi-xvi, 
484 p. illus. 8°. (Ausftihrliches Hand- 
buch der Photographie. Bd. 1, Teil 1.) 
MFC 


See chapters 14, 46-47. Numerous references to 
early experiments concerning the effects of light upon 
chemicals. 

645. Orthochromatische Wirkung einer 
gefarbten Unterlage auf Bromsilbergela- 
tine. Sensibilisierende Wirkung von Farb- 
stoffen der Kongorot-Reihe. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1905, 
Jahrg. 42, p. 311-315.) MFA 


646. Farmer, Howard. A criticism of 
three-colour photography. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1905, v. 52, p. 
849-850, 868-870.) MFA 


Abstract. “An indictment of three-colour photo- 
graphic processes, so far as they are intended for 
commercial use by professional photographers.’’ 


647. Freshwater, T. E. Recent improve- 

ments in the diffraction process of colour 

photography. (Photographic journal, Lon- 

oe: Jan.-Feb., 1905, new series, v. 29, p. 3- 
) M 





FA 


648. Gamble, William. Cameras and other 
apparatus for three-colour work. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, April, 1905, new 
series, v. 29, p. 150-157.) MFA 


Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, March 31, 1905, v.52, p. 256, MFA. 


649. Gilles, E. Magasin pour procédé tri- 
chrome, pouvant se placer d’une fagon mo- 
bile sur des chambres ordinaires. (Soci- 
été francaise de photographie. Bulletin. 
Paris, 1905, série 2, tome 21, p. 487-488.) 
MFA 


650. Gruen, Edward F. Three-colour prints. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 29, 1905, v. 52, p. 1030-1031.) MFA 


“The gelatine surface of the ordinary lantern slide, 
bromide opal, or bromide paper is capable of receiving 
three printings in successive colors.”’ 


38 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1905, continued. 


651. Hansen, Fritz. Ein Freilicht-Atelier 
fiir Farbenphotographie. (Photographische 
Chronik, Halle a. S., Aug. 13, 1905, Jahrg. 12, 
p. 418-419.) +MFA 


652. Husnik, Jaroslav. Ueber Dreifarben- 
Naturaufnahmen. (Jahrbuch ftir Photo- 
graphie und Reproductionstechnik fiir 
1905, Halle a. S., 1905, Jahrg. 19, p. 222- 
225.) MFA 


Von Hiibl’s process. 


653. Jones, Chapman. The influence of 
gradation on colour reproduction. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
6, 1905 977,52, po: 13.) MFA 


From Penrose’s process year-book, 1904-05. 


654. Kieser, Karl. Uber die sensibillier- 
renden Eigenschaften einiger Farbstoffe 
einer neuen Farbstoffklasse. (Zeitschrift 
fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
zig, 1905, Bd. 3, p. 6-15.) PLC 


655. Klein, Henry Oscar. Colour photog- 
raphy with pigment films. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Sept. 29, 1905, 
v. 52, p. 768-769.) MFA 


Detailed instructions. 


656. Koenig, Ernst. Colour photography 

on paper. (British journal of photogra- 

phy, London, March 10, 1905, v. 52, p. a 
M 


Pinatype process. 


657. Pinachromy, concerning the light 
sensitiveness of the leukobases of organic 
dyestuffs and their application to the pro- 
duction of photographic pictures. (Photo- 
era, Boston, Feb., 1905, v. 14, p. 46-52.) 
MFA 





658. —— The practice of three -colour 
work. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 8, 1905, v. 52, p. aa Ea 


Describes making of filters and the use of pina- 
cyanol. 


' 659. Kuemmell, G. The bleaching out 
process of colour photography. (British 


journal of photography, London, Dec. 29, 
1905,-v. 02, o. 4021.) MFA 


660. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Zum 
Problem der Mischfarbenphotographie 
mittels stehender Lichtwellen. illus. 
(Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photo- 
graphie, Leipzig, 1905, Bd. 3, p. LOS 


Abstract in ss ot aka journal, London, July, 
1905, new series, v. 29, p. 270-271, MFA, and Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. Sh Aug. 9, 1905, Jahrg. 
12, p. 413-415, +MFA, 


661. Lippmann, Gabriel. La photographie 
des couleurs sur plaques sensibilisées aux 
sels de chrome. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
Nov. 25, 1905, année 16, p. 8-9.) MFA 


Use of chromium salts in Lippmann process. 


662. Photographies en couleurs du 
spectre negatives par transmission. (Aca- 
démie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, June 5, 1905, tome 140, p. 1508-1509.) 

* EO 


London, July, 





Abstract in Photographic journal, 
1905, new series, v. 29, p. 271, MFA. 


663. Photographs in colours from 
negatives by the Lippmann process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 30, 1905, v. 52, p. 505.) MFA 


Translation of paper read before the Paris Acad- 
emy of Sciences. 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 
1905, p. 133, MFA 





664. Loebel, Leopold. 
matiques. Ecrans colorés. Négatifs tri- 
chromes. illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
1905, année 15, p. 55-58, 76-79, 96-98.) 
MFA 


Plaques panchro- 


Directions for amateurs. 


665. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louris LuMIéRE. 
Mitteilung tiber ein neues Verfahren der 
Farbenphotographie. (Photographische 
Kunst, Miinchen, 1904-05, Jahrg. 3, p. pk 
339.) +MFA 


Autochrome process. 


666. Lumiére, A., & ses Fils. Sensitized 
plates for colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 6, 
1905, v.52, p. 10.) MFA 


Abstract of their English patent no. 22, 988, 1904, 
for plates prepared with starch grains. 


667. Maldiney. La photographie des cou- 
leurs. Etat présent de la question. illus. 
(Société d’émulation du Doubs. Mémoires, 
Besancon, 1905, série 7, v. 8, p. 177-197.) 
EN 


668. Mareschal, G. Ou en est la photo- 

graphie des couleurs? (Photo - gazette, 

Paris, Dec. 25, 1905, année 16, p. 21-23.) 
MFA 


669. Monpillard, Félix. The accurate pro- 
duction of selective colour filters. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 28, 
1905, v.52, pvaoeen MFA 


670. Etudes et recherches sur les 
écrans colorés. (Société francaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1905, série 2, 
tome 21, p. 364-372.) - MFA 


671. ——- La Pinatype, de la Farbwerke 
vorm Meister Lucius und Briining. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1905, série 2, tome 21, p. 302-308.) 
MFA 


672. Namias, Rodolfo. Quelques observa- 
tions sur la trichromie industrielle. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1905, série 2, tome 21, p. 44-48.) - 





an 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 39 


1905, continued. 


673. Neue Verbesserungen im Diffraktions- 
prozess auf dem Gebiete der Farbenpho- 


tographie. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1905, Halle 
a. S., 1905, Jahrg. 19, p. 213-217.) MFA 


Wood and Joly processes. 


674. Ein Neuer Dreifarben-Projektionsap- 
parat. (Photographische Chronik, Halle 
peeeroian, 1,°1905, Jahrg. 12, py9-11.) 


: +MFA 

Miethe-Goerz apparatus. 

Also printed in Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1905, Jahrg. 42, p. 21-22, MFA. 


675. Neuhauss, Pichard. Ausbleichverfah- 
ren. (Jahrbuch tur Photographie und Re- 
productionstechnik fiir 1905, Halle a. S., 
1905, Jahrg. 19, p. 51-54.) MFA 


Abstract in British journal of pe lass Lon- 
don, May 2, 1905, v. 52, p. 367, MFA 


676. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Die 
Zenkerschen Blattchen und die dZen- 
kerschen Streifen in Farbenphotographien 
nach Lippmann. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1905, Jahrg. 42, p. 493- 


500, 564-568.) MFA 
677. Payne, Arthur. Plates, filters, and 
inks: their relative importance in three- 


colour work. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 6, 1905, v. 52, p. 13-14.) 
MFA 


678. The Pinatype process of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Sept. 22, 1905, v. 52, ne 749- 
753.) MFA 


Directions from the handbook issued by Meister 
Lucius and Brtining. For a discussion see British 
journal of photography, Oct. 13, 1905, v. 52, p. 816. 


679. Powrie, John H. Practical helio- 
chromy for professional and amateur. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 29, 1905, v.52, p. 1029-1030.) MFA 


Use of Powrie-Warner plates in adaptation of Joly- 
McDonough process. 


680. Precht, J.. and Ertcu Stencer. Uber 
die chemische Farbenhelligkeit des Tages- 
lichts. (Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche 
Photographie, Photophysik, und Photo- 
chemie, Leipzig, 1905, Bd.3, p. Ha a 


Translation in British journal of aed Sie 
London, March 24, 1905, v.52, p. 226-227, MFA 


681. Reising, H. Ein neuer Dreifarben- 
projektionsapparat. illus. (Zeitschrift 
fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
zig, 1905, Bd. 3, p. 40-43.) PLC 


Miethe’s apparatus. 


682. Rothé, E. Nouvelles recherches sur 
la photographie des couleurs. (Université 
de Grenoble. Annales, Paris, 1905, v.17, 
p. 511-523.) * EN 


683. Schinzel, Karl. One-plate colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Aug. 4, 1905, v.52, p. 608- 
609.) MFA 


684. Schmidt, Hans. Three-colour nega- 
tives. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 29; 1905, v.52, p. 1025-1026.) 

MFA 


685. Uber Farbenphotographie mit 
besonderer Beriicksichtigung des Systems 
N. P. G. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1905, Jahrg. 42, p. 518-522, 568- 
572.) MFA 


686. Spoerl, Hans. Reichels Dreifarben- 
verfahren. (Photographische Kunst, Miin- 
chen, 1904-05, Jahrg. 3, p. 393-396.) (MFA 


687. Stenger, Erich. Some notes on three- 
colour work. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 8, 1905, v. 52, p./7/10— 





711) MFA 
688. —— Trichromatic work on ordinary 
plates. (British journal of photography, 


London, June 30, 1905, v.52, p.514.) MFA 
689. Ueber das Abstimmen der Licht- 





. filter fir Dreifarbenphotographie. (Photo- 


graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Dec. 6, 
1905, Jahrg. 12, p. 625-629.) +MFA 


690. Stolze, F. Ueber die Moglichkeit der 
Dreifarbenphotographie durch eine einzige 


Aufnahme. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., 1905, Jahrg. 12, p. 528-531, 541- 
543.) +MFA 


691. Three-colour direct on dry plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 19, 1905, v.52, p. 391.) MFA 


Homocol sensitizer for bathing plates during warm 
weather. 


692. Three-colour portraiture from the 
commercial standpoint. (British journal 
of photography, London, Sept. 15, 1905, 
v. 52, p. 723-724.) MFA 


693. Townsend, C. F. Color photography 
and the dark-room. (Camera & dark- 
room, New York, Sept., 1905, v.8, p.279- 
2015) MFA 


694. Traube, Artur. Farbenphotographie. 

(Photographische Chronik, Halle Gaps, 

July 9, 1905, Jahrg. 12, p. 358.) +MFA 
J. H. Smith & Co. process. 


695. Worel, Karl. Forschungen auf dem 
Gebiete der Farbenphotographie. (Jahr- 
buch fiir Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik fiir 1905, Halle a. S., 1905, Jahrg. 
19, p. 7-10.) MFA 


696. Zander, C. G. The complementary 
colour reproduction process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 29, 
1905, v. 52, p. 1028-1029.) MFA 


Zander process. 


40 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1906 


697. “Allochrome” and ‘“Panchromatic 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 14, 1906, v. 53, p. 737.) MFA 


Plates made by Wratten & Wainwright, Croydon, 
England. 


9? 


698. Baker, Thomas Thorne. Das Rot- 
filter im Dreifarbenprozess. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, noe 
Jahrg. 43, p. 167-168.) MF 


Also printed in British journal of a 
London, April 20, 1906, v. 53, p. 310-311, MFA 


699. Spectro-photography and _ the 
making of light filters, including control- 
ling methods by the Abney colour disc. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 18, 1906, v. 53, p. 396.) MFA 


700. Belin, Edouard. Méthode spectro- 
sensitométrique. illus. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1906, 
série 2, tome 22, p. *25-*32.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of eee aa 
London, Aug. 10, 1906, v. 53, p. 630-632, MFA 


701. Boardman, F. R. Artificial light in 
colour portraiture. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 18, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 397-398.) MFA 

Boardman arc lamps adopted by the Rotary Photo- 
graphic Company. 





702. Braham, A. C. Autotype trichrome 

tissues. (Photographic journal, London, 

May, 1906, new series, v. 30, p. 178-181.) 
MFA 


7030.-—— . Lrichrome. Carbon. printing. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 20, 1906, v. 53, p. 566.) MFA 


Detailed instructions. 


704. Butler, Edwin T. Colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1906, v. 53, p. 158, 197.) MFA 


States that after long experiment he has succeeded 


in securing in his camera three-colour negatives of _ 


equal size. 


705. —— A colour-photography society. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 16, 1906, v. 53, p. 219.) MFA 


Suggests organization of a society. 


706. —— Tri-colour work with a single 
exposure camera. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Feb. 23, 1906, v. 53, p. 
145-146.) MFA 


Describes his own process. 


707. Chéron, André. La photographie des 
couleurs par dispersion spectrale prisma- 


tique. illus. (Société francaise de photog- 
raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 
23, Dp. 36-41.) MFA 


, Also printed in La Nature, Paris, 1906, année 34, 

semestre 2, p. 401-403, OA, and in British journal 
of > Na ala London, Nov. 16, 1906, v. 53, p. 904— 
907, MFA 


‘née 16, p. 87-92.) 


708. Cinematography in colours. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 27, 
1906, v.53, p. 584.) MFA 


709. Colour photography. (Photographic 
news, London, 1906, v. 50, p. 976, 1020, 
1040.) MFA 


Lippmann process. Filters. 


710. Colour photography without filters at 
one exposure. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 2, 1906, v.53, p. 87- 
88.) MFA 


Drac process. 


711. Comley, Henry J. Proposed society 
of colour photographers. (British journal 
of photography, London, 1906, v. 53, p. 558— 
559, 599.) MFA 


712. Coustet, Ernest. L’invention du pro- 
cédé trichrome par éléments juxtaposés. 
(Photo- -gazette, Paris, March 25, 1906, an- 
MFA 


713. —— Photographie des couleurs par 
décoloration. (Photo-gazette, Paris, July 
25, 1906, année 16, p. 166-172.) ‘MFA 


Bleachout process. 


714. Dark room illumination for working 
red sensitive collodion emulsion. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 27, 
1906, v. 53, p. 592-593.) MFA 


715. Day, T. Cuthbert. Colour and colour 
photography. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, Feb. 16, 1906, v. 50, p. 128.) MFA 


Resumé of theory and practice. 


716. Donath, Bruno. 
Farbenphotographie. 
Vieweg und Sohn, 1906. 
its s, 


Die Grundlagen der 
Braunschweig: F. 
viii, 166 p., 2 pl. 
(Die Wissenschaft. No. 14.) 
MFV 


Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, May 25, 1906, v. 53, p. 412, MFA. 


717. Eder, Josef Maria. Trichromie und 
Tetrachromie. (Photographische Korres- 
pondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 477-478.) 

MFA | 


718. Farmer, Howard. The exhibition of 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 9, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 198.) MFA 


A plea to keep the London exhibition intact. 


719. Geisler, Louis. La photographie en 
couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 1906, an- 
née 16, p. 230-231; année 17, 1906, p. aa 
26-28, 69- 720) MF 


Nachet-Geisler process. 


720. Three-colour screens and inks. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 24, 1906, v. 53, p. 667-669.) MFA 





' ia 
Raw +; 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY A] 


1906, continued. 


721. Gravier, Charles. Méthode d’impres- 
sion en couleurs la quadrichromie Zander. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1906, série 2, tome 22, p. 273- 
274.) MFA 


722. Grothuss, Theodor, Freiherr von. Ab- 
handlungen tiber Elektrizitat und Licht. 
Hrsg. von R. Luther und A. v. Oettingen. 
Leipzig: Wilhelm Engelmann, 1906. 198 
p., 1 1., 1 port. 12°. (Ostwald’s Klassiker 
der exakten Wissenschaften. No. aes 


During the early part of the nineteenth century 
Grothuss made researches upon the nature of colored 
light. See p. 100 et seq in above volume. 


723. Gruen, Edward F. Colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 2, 1906, v. 53, p. 97-98.) MFA 


Criticizes E. J. Wall’s account of the London exhi- 
bition. 


724. Haberkorn, Fritz. Eine Kamera fir 
Dreifarbenaufnahmen nach der Natur. 


illus. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 430-432.) MFA 


725. Heicke, Richard. Direct enlargements 
in monochrome and three-colour in gum 
bichromate. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 20, 1906, v. 53, p. 305- 
307.) MFA 


726. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The ab- 

sorption and sensitising spectrum of the 

cyanins. illus. (Photographic journal, 

London, March, 1906, new series, v. 30, p. 

133— 137.) MFA 
From Eder’s Jahrbuch, 1905. 


72i. The basis of three-colour photog- 
raphy. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, 1906, v. 53, p. 489-491, 627- 
629, 693-695.) MFA 





“Tt ought to be clear that the Young-Helmholtz. 


theory of colour vision possesses no importance, for 
the theory of three-colour photography, and that it is 
therefore not correct to identify the physiological 
fundamental colours with those of three-colour pho- 
tography.”’ 


728. 





Ein Beitrag zur Photographie 
farbiger Gegenstande. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, 
Jahrg. 43, p. 157-167.) MFA 


Good article on color sensitizing, with a colored 
plate. . 
729. Red sensitive plates. illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
23, 1906, v.53, p. 147-148.) MFA 


730. The “Uto” bleach-out process of 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Oct. 5, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 787-788.) MFA 


Describes his experiences with paper prepared by 
Dr. J. H. Smith & Co., Zirich. 


731. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Improvements 
in the diffraction process of color photog- 








raphy. (Franklin Institute. Journal, Phila- 
delphia, 1906, v. 161, p. 439-449.) VA 


Invention of R. W. Wood of Johns Hopkins Uni- 
versity in 1899. 

Also printed in Physical review, New York, June, 
1906, v. 22, p. 339-344, PAA; Photo-era, Boston, 
Nov., 1906, v. 17, p. 285-295, MFA, and British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Aug. 3. 1906 V20535) DO: 
609-612, MFA. 


732. Koenig, Ernst. Further applications 
of pinatype. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 30, 1906, wees be 
246.) MFA 


T3a% Natural-color photography... 
Translated from the German, with addi- 
tions, original tests and experiments, etc., 
by +E. J. Wall...” With: color-chart, test- 
results, and diagrams. London: Dawbarn 
& Ward, Ltd. (1906.; 94 p. illus. 8°. MFV 


Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, July 13, 1906, v.53, p.556, MFA. 


734. Kunstlicht und Farbenphotographie. 
(Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
Feb. 14, 1906, Jahrg. 13, p. 89-90.) +MFA 


Jupiter lamp. 


735. Légier, Alphonse. Le “photochrome” 
de la Société du photochrome. illus. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1906, série 2, tome 22, p. 184-186.) 
MFA 





Apparatus for exposing three plates. 


736. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Beitrage 
zur Theorie und Praxis der direkten Far- 
benphotographie mittels stehender Licht- 
wellen nach Lippmanns Methode... Frei- 
burger Bris Co Tromer,: 19067 sav, 895. 
tables. illus. 8°. MFF p.v.54, no.5 


Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Nov. 30, 1906, v.53, p. 946-947, MFA. 


737. —— Neue Untersuchungen tiber Lipp- 
mann-Photographie. illus. (Jahrbuch ftir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fiir 1906, Halle a. S., 1906, Jahrg. 20, p. 49- 
53.) MFA 


738. Lippmann, Gabriel. Des divers prin- 
cipes sur lesquels on peut fonder la pho- 
tographie directe des couleurs. Photogra- 
phie directe des couleurs fondée sur 
la dispersion prismatique. (Académie des 


sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, July 30, 

1906, tome 143, p. 270-274.) * EO 
Translation in British ie a phot 

London, Aug. 17, 1906, v. 53, 644-645, 


ae in Nature, London, Gen 30, 1906, v. | 
p. 459, 

739. La photographie des couleurs sur 
plaques sensibilisées aux sels de chrome. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1906, série 2, tome 22, p. 287- 
288.) MFA 


740. A Lumiére one-lens one - exposure 
camera. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, March 9, 1906, v. 53, 
plots) MFA 


Abstract of patent. 





4? THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1906, continued. 


741. Mareschal, G. La pinatypie. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, March 25, 1906, année 16, 
p. 96-97.) MFA 


742. Mees, Charles 
Three-colour at the Croydon Camera 
Club. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 4, 1906, v. 53, p. aE 


Discusses filters, spectrum tests of filters, and 
screens for general work. 


743. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
S. E. SHepparp. The estimation of the 


Edward Kenneth. 


colour-sensitiveness of plates. illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, March, 
1906, new series, v. 30, p. 110-131.) MFA 


744. Monpillard, Félix. Essai d’étalonnage 
des écrans colorés. illus. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1906, série 2, tome 22, p. 231-240.) MFA 


745. Essais du pinacyanol et de la 
dicyanine des Farbwerke vorm Meister 
Lucius et Briining de Hoechst-sur-Mein. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1906, série 2, tome 22, p. 132- 
143.) MFA 


Abstract in Photographic journal, London, June, 
1906, new series, v. 30, p. 260-261, MFA. 


746. Neame, S. E. The _ possibility of 
portraiture in colour. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1906, v.53, p. 259, 
278.) MFA 





Demonstrates Sanger Shepherd process. Abstract 


and comment in Photographic news, London, 1906, 
Teo sates, toy lero Lo. wi A 
747. Neuhauss, Richard. Ausbleichver- 


fahren. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik ftir 1906, Halle a. S., 
1906, Jahrg. 20, p. 11-14.) MFA 


748. A New three-colour printing process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 30, 1906, v.53, p. 944-945.) MFA 


Invention of Dr. Traube of Berlin. 


749. Newton, A. J. Pigments for three- 
colour processes. illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, May 25, 1906, 





v. 53, p. 406-408.) MFA 
750. Three-colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
16, 1906, v. 53, p. 910-911.) MFA 
7451. Three-colour process work. 





(British journal of photography, London, 
March 30, 1906, v.53, p.248-249.) MFA 


752. Norman, Albert. ,;The Sanger Shep- 
herd process.; (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 11, 1906, v. 53, BB, 


Demonstration of making transparencies before 
the Royal Photographie Society. 


753. Novak, Franz. Rapidlichtfilter fiir Drei- 
farbenphotographie. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 285- 


287.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of Lpehoar pene, 
London, June 29, 1906, v. 53, p. 505, MFA 


754. Ozobrome and three-colour work. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 27, 1906, v. 53, p. 581.) MFA 


755. Pector, S. Léon Vidal. port. (So- 

ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 

Paris, 1906, tome 22, p. 457-459.) MFA 
Obituary notice. 

756. Pfaundler, Leopold. © Die Young- 

Helmholtzsche Farbentheorie und die 

Dreifarbenphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch 


fiir Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
nik ftir 1906, Halle a. S., 1906, Jahrg. 20, 
p. 53-58.) MFA 


757. Pfenninger, Otto. Colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1906, v. 53, p. 139, 178-179.) MFA 

Comments on the Jumeaux process. 

Traces patent history of reflector cameras. For 
criticisms of E. T. Butler and E. J. Wall, see above 
publication March 9, 1906, v.53, p. 197. 

758. 
eras, 





Trichromatic one-exposure cam- 
illus. (Photographic news, London, 


April 20, 1906, v.50, p. 308-309.) MFA 
Has list of patents. 
759. Professional colour photography. illus. 


(British journal of photography, London, 
1906, v. 53, p. 366-368, 391, 419, 438.) MFA 


Reference to studios of Heath & Stoneman, the 
Rotary Company, and Otto Pfenninger. 


760. Prokoudine-Gorsky, S. de. Observa- 
tions et remarques sur les travaux photo- 
graphiques en couleurs naturelles. (VI 


Congresso internazionale di chimica appli- 
cata, Roma, 1906. (Atti v26, p. sak a 
P 


Translation in Photographic journal, London, new ~ 


series, v. 30, p. 304-306, MFA. Suggests preservation 
of plates by rapid drying. 


761. Rheinberg, Julius. Photography in 
natural colours. (Nature, London, Nov. 


29, 1906, v.75, pita MFA 


Admits patent priority to F. Cheshire. 


762. Sallwuerk, Edmund von. Farbenpho- 
tographie und Kunst. (Photographische 
Kunst, Mtinchen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 4, p. 243- 
248.) +MFA 


763. Saville-Kent, W. The photography 
of colour as applied to obtaining correct 
colour records of natural history subjects. 
(Royal Asiatic Society. — Ceylon Branch. 
Journal, Colombo, 1906, v. 18, p. 435-445.) 

*OAA 


< a * 
Various well-known processes described. 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 43 


1906, continued. 
764. Schmidt, Hans. Eine Dreifarben- 
Momentkamera. illus. (Photographische 


Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 
579-582.) MFA 


765. Das Dreifarben - Photographie- 
Verfahren, System N. P. G. (VI Congresso 
internazionale di chimica applicata, Roma, 
1906. Atti, v.6, p. 36-52.) PKR 


Process of the Neue photographische Gesellschaft. 
Partial abstract in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
March, 1907, v.14, p. 110-112, MFA. 





766. —— Three-colour prints by the car- 
bon-film process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 15, 1906, v. 53, p. 


469-470.) MFA 
Abstract. 
767. ——— Ueber Farbenphotographie mit 


besonderer Berticksichtigung des Systems 





N. P. G. (Photographische Kunst, Mtin- 
chen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 4, p. 345-350.) } MFA 
768. Uber Kameras fiir Dreifarben- 


photographie. illus. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 
$31-535.) MFA 


769. Scoble, Walter A. The red sensitive- 


ness of dyed films. illus. (Photographic 
journal, London, May, 1906, new series, 
v. 30, p. 190-197.) MFA 


770. Seddig, M. A suggested method of 
colour sensitometry. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 10, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 629-630.) MFA 


771. Smith, John H. The bleach-out proc- 
ess of colour-photography. (British jour- 
nal of ee any: London, June 8, 1906, 
v. 53, p. 459.) MFA 


States that he has Riloned the Szezepanik proc- 
ess in favor of the Smith-Merckens process. 


772. Smith, John H., and W. MERCKENS. 
rNatural-colour printing out paper.; (Pho- 
tographic journal, London, May, 1906, new 


series, v.30, p. 197-200.) MFA 
Abstract only. 

773. —— Uber ein direkt in Farben kopie- 

rendes Papier (Uto-Papier). (Photo- 

graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, 

Jahre. 43, p. 385-388.) MFA 


Also printed me Photographische Kunst, Miinchen, 
1906-07, Jahrg. 5, p. 109-111, MFA. 


774. Smith, J. H., & Co. Direct-colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Oct. 12, 1906, v. 53, core 


Reference to improvements in “Uto” paper; also 


to combination of owners of Smith-Merckens and of 


Szezepanik patents. 


775. The “Solgram” colour process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
2, 1906, v. 53, p. 88.) MFA 


776. Some notes on the bleach-out process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Hep. 23,1906, v.53, p. 146.) MFA 


Brief description of Szczepanik process. 


777. Some notes on the gum _ process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 18, 1906, v.53, p. 388-390.) MFA 


778. Stable colours for three-colour prints. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jane O06 Sr So peli) MFA 


M. Pacini recommends the use of picric acid, car- 
mine, and Prussian blue. 


779. The Szczepanik bleach-out process of 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 12, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 26-27.) MFA 


Translation of manufacturer’s instructions. 


780. The Technics and practice of the 
Lumiére starch grain process. (British 
journal of photography, London, March 9, 
1906, v. 53, p. 190-191.) MFA 


781. Three-colour without filters. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
12, 1906, .¥553, p221.) MFA 


Description of C. J. Drac’s patent. 


782. Three-colour photographs of the solar 
eclipse. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 29, 1906, v. 53, p. 505.) MFA 


Brief paragraph referring to work of Professor 
Mengarini of Rome. 
783. Three-colour prints on “Autotype” 
trichrome tissues. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 9, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 106.) MFA 


784. Three-colour transparencies by the 
pinatype process. (British journal of .pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 5, 1906, v. 53, p. 6- 
7) MFA 


Detailed instructions. 


785. Three -colour transparencies by the 
Sanger-Shepherd process. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, June 29, 1906, 
Ww. 50, Dp, 506)) MFA 


786. A Two-colour printing process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
7806, ve53: ps /05) MFA 


Abstract of German patent of J. K. Henberger. 
787. Valenta, Eduard. Pinachrom and Pina- 


cyanol als Rotsensibilisatoren. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, 
Jahrg. 43, p. 132-134.) MFA 


788. Vidal, Léon. Colour photography. A 
modern pinatype method. (British journal 
of photography, London, May 18, 1906, v. 
53, p. 390-391.) MFA 
Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Nov., 
1906, v. 13, p. 447-448, MFA. 
789. The Lippmann and Lumiére proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 16, 1906, v. 53, p. Cate 





44 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1906, continued. 


790. W., J. Death of M. Léon Vidal. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 24, 1906, v. 53, p. 672.) MFA 


791. The late Léon Vidal. port. (Pho- 

tographic journal, London, 1906, new se- 

ries, v. 30, p. 316-317; port. opp. p. 339.) 
MFA 





792. Wall, Edward John. Another colour 


process. (Photographic news, London, 

July 20, 1906, v.50, p. 574.) MFA 
Brief reference to patent of Mezaro. 

793. —— Colour photography. (British 


journal of photography, London, Feb. 9, 
1906, v.53, p. 117-118.) MFA 


Replies to Dr. Griin regarding disputed features 
of the Color Photography Exhibition. 


794. Colour sensations. (Photographic 
news, London, Sept. 21, 1906, v. 50, eae 
A 





Scientific basis of color photography upset by dis- 
coveries of Professor Raehlmann. 


795. —— An exhibition of colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 26, 1906, v. 53, p. 64-67.) MFA 


796. How to take portraits in natural 
colours. (Photographic news, London, 
1906, v. 50, p. 388-389, 426-427, ri 











797. Natural colour P. O. P. (Photo- 

graphic news, London, May 4, 1906, v. 50, 

D351 MFA 
Smith process. 

798. A new process of three-colour 

printing. (Photographic news, London, 

Dec. 7, 1906, v.50, p. 983.) MFA 


Traube process. 


799. The pinatype camera. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 9, 1906, v. 53, p. 105.) MFA 


800. —— Pinatype and Rotary Co.’s super- 
imposed carbon colour tissues. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, April, 1906, new 
series, v.30, p. 144-146.) MFA 

Abstract of lecture delivered before the Royal 
Photographic Society. 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 9, 1906, v. 53, p. 195, MFA. 





801. —— The present status of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy. London, July 27, 1906, v.53, p. 588— 
592.) MFA 


Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Dec., 1906, v. 
17, p. 352-364, MFA. 


802. A treatise on Lippmann colour 
photography. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 30, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 946-947.) MFA 

Review of Hans Lehmann’s book on color photog- 
raphy. 





Die Pietznersche 
(Photographische 


803. Walter, Gustav. 
Farbenphotographie. 


Kunst, Miinchen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 5, p. 321- 
323.) +MFA 
804. Worel, Karl. Farbenphotographie. 


(Photographische Kunst, Mtinchen, 1905- 
06, Jahrg. 4, p. 400-404, 425-434.) +MFA 


Historical outline. 


805. Yerbury, S. G. The “Sinop” process 
in colour photography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Jan. 26, 1906, v. 
53, “p. 78.) MFA 


Recommends “Sinop’” simplified collotype plates 
to obviate “blobby” appearance of prints. 
806. Three-colour printing by the Si- 
nop process. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 9, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 106-107.) MFA 


807. Zander, C.G. The Zander four-colour 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 18, 1906, v. 53, p. 397.) MFA 
Claims that his process is not based on Hering’s 
theory. 
808. The Zander four-colour process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 7, 1906, v. 53, p. 719.) MFA 


809. The Zander complementary colour 
reproduction process. ae journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 5, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 14.) MFA 
810. Zander’s four-colour process. (Brit- 


ish journal of photography, London, May 
11, 1906, ¥°53, "pear MFA 








1907 


811. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
The autochrome process. (British journal 
of photography, London, Oct. 25, 1907, 
v. 54, p. 804-805.) - MFA 


_ From the Journal of the Royal Photographic So- 
ciety. 


812. The Achromatism of lenses for colour 
work. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 7, 1907, v.54, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 42-43.) MFA 


813. Albert, E. Three-colour without fil- 
ters. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 5, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 55.) MFA 


814. Alleged anticipations of the Warner- 
Powrie process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 25, 1907, v.54, p. 
812-813.) MFA 


815. Another American discovery in colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 5, 1907, v.54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 53.) MFA 
Invention of Charles Gilbert of Chicago. 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY A5 


1907, continued. 


816. Another well-known worker in colour- 
photography, Dr. Gustav Selle. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 5, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p.55.) MFA 


Brief obituary notice. 


817. Art and colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 18, 
1907, v.54, p. 781-782.) MFA 


818. Atkinson, E. H. C. Section-cut half- 
tone screens. 
raphy, London, Nov. 22, 1907, v. 54, p. 894.) 

MFA 


Brief suggestion for the Warner-Powrie process. 


819. Autochrome items. (British journal 
of photography, London, Nov. 8, 1907, v. 
54, p. 839-840.) - MFA 


Cause of green stains. Reversing, intensification, 
residues. 


820. Autochrome plates under modified 
treatment. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Oct. 11, 1907, v.54, p. 772- 
f73:) MFA 


821. The Autochrome process in a nutshell. 
(Photographic news, London, Sept. 27, 
1907, v. 52, p. 304.) MFA 


From revised book of instructions. 


822. Autochromes from autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
15, 1907, v. 54, p. 858.) MFA 


823. Baker, Thomas Thorne. The colour 
sensitising of gelatine and collodion emul- 
sions and the relation of the colour of a 
dye to its sensitising action. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, April, 1907, new 
series, v.31, p. 207.) MFA 


With discussion. 


824. Bardorf. Uber Jougla’s Autochrom- 
platte “Omnicolor.” (Photographische 
Welt, Leipzig, 1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 147-148, 
167-168.) MFA 


825. Bauer, Otto. A camera for three- 
colour photography. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, April 5, 1907, 
v.54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
Jl.) MFA 


Abstract of specification. 


826. Bayley, R. Child. Color photography. 
(Photo-miniature, New York, Sept., 1907, 
v.7, p. 449-455.) MFA 


Manipulation of autochromes. 


827. Copying autochromes in the 
camera. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 1, 1907, v.54, p. 831.) MFA 


828. Beck, Conrad. ,Lumiére starch grain 
process.; (Royal Microscopical Society. 
Proceedings, London, 1907, p. en; 





Brief reference to examination of plates under the 
microscope. See also Nature, London, Dec. 26, 1907, 
wears, p. 188, OA ; 


(British journal of photog-- 


829. Blackburn, H. E. The pinatype proc- 
ess of color photography. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Dec., 1907, v. 14, p. 515- 519.) 

MFA 


830. A rapid three-color carbon proc- 
ess. (Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 


1907, v. 14, p. 273-276.) MFA 


831. Brasseur, Charles L. A. Weather 
conditions and colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
8, 1907, p. 843.) MFA 


832. Burchardt, Ernest A. Three-colour 
printing with bichromated size. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 5, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 25-26.) MFA 


833. Cajal, S. R. The Lippmann process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 





Sept. 13, 1907, v.54, p. 691-692.) MFA 
Abstract. 
834. Die Struktur der Lippmannschen 





Photochromien. illus. (Zeitschrift ftir 
wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 
1907, Bd. 5, p. 213-245.) PLC 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1907, v.54, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 59- 61, 69- 714 77-79, MFA. 

835. Uber die Polychromie mikro- 
skopischer Metallkérnchen. (Zeitschrift 
fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
zig, 1907, Bd. 5, p. 137-140.) PLC 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 53-54, MFA. 


836. Calmels, H., and Tobe GlERCyeiza te 
production photographique des couleurs. 
Paris. Le Procedé ,1907;. 2. p14 1329p. 
illus. 8°. (Bibliotheque des procédés 
photomécaniques.) MDS 


837. Chéron, André. Improvements in the 
prismatic dispersion process. illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
6, 1907, v. 54, p. 675-677.) MFA 


838. Chevrier, Henri. Observations sur le 
traitement des plaques autochromes. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 477-485.) 





MFA 
839. —— Traitement des plaques auto- 
chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Dec. 25, 
1907, année 18, p. 21-26.) MFA 
840. Claudy, Carl Harry. Autochrome 


color photography. (Bulletin of photog- 
raphy, Philadelphia, Dec. 11, 1907, v.1, p. 
347-348.) +MFA 


Advice to professionals. 


841. Clerc, Louis Philippe. Development 
of three-colour negatives. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, April 5, 1907, 
v.54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
29.) MFA 


46 THE NEW: YORK PUBLIC CISRARY, 


1907, continued. 


842. Colour curves and how to control 
them. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 5, 1907, v.54, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, v.54, p.30.) MFA 


843. Colour photography. (Photographic 
news, London, June 21, 1907, v.51, p. Me 
MF 


Explains difference between Sanger Shepherd fe 
Lumiére processes. 


844. Colour processes. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 8, 1907, v. 54, 
p,. 855.) MFA 


Formulas for pinatype process. 


845. Comley, Henry J. The bichromated 
size process. (British journal.of photog- 
raphy, London, June 7, 1907, v.54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 46.) MFA 


Gives formula for sizing. 


846. Three-colour carbon and the 
autochrome process. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1907, v.54, p.853- 
854, 875.) MFA 


Abstract of paper read before the Southampton 
Camera Club. 


847. Three-colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, June 
21, 1907, v. 54, p. 471.) MFA 


Describes author’s camera and process. Abstract 
of paper read before South London Photographic So- 
ciety. 

Also printed in Photographic news, London, July 
12,1907, v: 52; p. 31, MEA. 








848. The Connection between duration of 
development, fog, and colour rendering. 


(British journal of photography, London, 


March 1, 1907, v.54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 19-21.) MFA 


849. Coustet, Ernest. Photographie des 
couleurs: les plaques a filtres trichromes. 
(Photo-gazette, Paris, April 27, 1907, an- 
née 17, p. 101-107.) MFA 


Lumiére, Krayn, Ramon y Cajal, Berton & Gambs, 
Smith, and Ducos du Hauron processes. 
850. Photographie des couleurs; le 
procédé trichrome par éléments juxta- 
posés. (Revue scientifique, Paris, 1907, 
série 5, v. 8, semestre 2, p. 237-241.) OA 


851. Crémier, Victor. Les plaques auto- 
chromes et la stéréoscopie. (Photo - ga- 
zette, Paris, Aug. 25, 1907, année 17, p. 186- 
189.) MFA 


852. Didier, Léon. A simplified pinatype 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 7, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 43-44.) MFA 


853. Direct half-tone three-colour nega- 
tives. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 1, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 87.) MFA 


Formulas from Klimsch’s Jahrbuch. 





854. The Donisthorpe three-colour print- 
ing process. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Sept. 6, 1907, v.54, Colour 
photography ‘supplement, Dp. 71.) MFA 


855. Duchenne, Paul. Chassis-magasin a 
poses multiples pour la trichromie. illus. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 121- 
122.) MFA 


856. ——- A multiple three-colour back. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 1, 1907, v. 54, p. 23.) MFA 


Abstract of French patent. 


857. Ducos du Hauron, Louis, and R. DE 
Berceco,. The Du Hauron one-plate proc- 
ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, May 3, 1907, v.54, Colour photogra- 
phy supplement, p. 37-38.) MFA 


858. “Ensign” chemical outfit for auto- 
chrome plates. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, 
p. 926-927.) MFA 


859. The “Ensign” viewing stand for auto- 
chrome transparencies. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 6, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 95.) MFA 


860. Exécution de contretypes par la pina- 
type. (Société francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 
189-190.) MFA 


861. The Exhibition of colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, Lon- 


don, Oct. 18, 1907, v. 54, p. 782.) MFA 
Reference to patent of Hans Lehmann. 
862. Exposure with autochromes. (Brit- 


ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
6, 1907, v. 54, p. 918.) MFA 


863. Fairchild, Thomas J. Colour prints 
and transparencies. (British journal of 
photon London, June 21, 1907, v. 54, 
p. 473.) MFA 

Directions for producing greens and yellows from 
ordinary negatives. 


864. Flower studies in colour. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 1, 
1907, v. 54, p. 822.) MFA 


Comments on Lumiére process. 


865. Fraprie, Frank Roy. Simple color 
photography achieved. (American pho- 
tography, Boston, Aug., 1907, v.1, p. 59- 
64.) MFA 


Brief description of autochrome, with formulas. 


866. Frederking, H. Das neue Verfahren 


der Naturfarbenphotographie von A. und 
L. Lumiére. (Dinglers polytechnisches 
Journal, Berlin, 1907, Bd. 322, p. 713-716.) 

VA 


YY oe 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY | 47 


1907, continued. 


867. Gamble, William. Colour photogra- 
phy by the Warner - Powrie screen - plate 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 4, 1907, v. 54, p. 748-750.) 
MFA 


Chromographe Nachet- 
Geisler. illus. (Société francaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 2, 
tome 23, p. 271-276.) MFA 


869. Gill, William. Professional colour 
photography: does it pay? (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, May 3, 1907, 
v.54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
33-34.) MFA 


870. Grant, Thomas K. The autochrome 

process. (Photographic journal, London, 

Dec., 1907, new series, v. 31, p. 395-401.) 
MFA 


Demonstration at the Royal Photographic Society. 
With discussion. 


868. Geisler, Louis. 


871. Gravier, Charles. Observations nou- 
velles sur les plaques autochromes. (So- 
cieté francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 475-476.) 
MFA 





87 1a. La photographie des couleurs 
sur les plaques autochromes. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 415-417.) MFA 


872. Grills, E Notes on the pinatype 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 4, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 


873. Screen-plate colour photography 
by the Warner-Powrie process. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
meyer t), 1907, v.54, p. 763-765.) MFA 


874. The three-colour tissue process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 1, 1907, v.54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 17-18.) MFA 


875. Guébhard, Adrien. Sur le procédé de 
photographie des couleurs de MM. A. & L. 
Lumiere. (Académie des sciences. Comptes 
rendus, Paris, Nov. 11, 1907, tome ek Dp. 
792-795.) EO 

Suggests that by the application of the principle of 
reversal the chemical method used in Lumiére pro- 


cedure might be avoided. Brief abstract in British 
cose of photography, Nov. 29, 1907, v. 54, p. 898, 








876. Sur le rdle de l’inversion dans le 
procédé de photographie des couleurs, de 
MM. A. et L. Lumiére. illus. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 534-537.) MFA 


877. Harberisser. Autochrome filters. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 25, 1907, v. 54, p. 816.) MFA 





878. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
spectrum and three-colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 26, 1907, v.54, p. 315-316.) MFA 


879. An Interview with M. Louis Ducos du 
Hauron. port. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 4, 1907, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 


880. Ives, Frederic Eugene. A color screen 
color meter. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
nal, Philadelphia, Dec., 1907, v. 164, p. 421- 


423.) VA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 19, MFA. 


881. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Improvements 
in the diffraction process of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Feb. 1, 1907, v. 54, p. 89.) 
MFA 
Abstract of paper read before London and Provin- 
cial Photographic Association. 
882.-——— :Chree-,color interference pic- 
tures. (Physical review, New York, Jan., 
1907, v.24, p. 103-107.) PAA 
Also piited in British journal of photography, 


London, Feb. 1, 1907, v.54, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 10-12, MFA. 


883. J.. C. A new method of colour pho- 
tography. (Nature, London, Oct. 24, 1907, 
v. 76, p. 642.) OA 


Warner-Powrie process. 





884. Single-plate colour-photography. 
(Nature, London, Aug. 1, 1907, v.76, p. 
317.) OA 


Simple account of the Lumiére process. 


885. Jougla, J. Nouvelles plaques ‘“Omni- 
colore” reproduisant par développement 
toutes les couleurs de la nature. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 221-223.) MFA 


886. ——- The omnicolore plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 7, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 46.) MFA 


887. Klein, Henry Oscar. Ueber die Be- 
deutung richtiger Expositionsratia in der 
Dreifarbenphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch 
fur Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
nik fir 1907, Halle a. S.) 1907, Jahegagr 
p. 88-91.) MFA 


Penrose ratiometer. 


888. Koenig, Ernst. The keeping proper- 
ties of bathed plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 1, 1907, v. 54, 
Colour photography supplement, p. om 


Experiments with pinachrome and pinacyanol in 
semi-alcohol bath. 
889. A new method for preparing 
three-colour transparencies. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 1, 1907, 
v.54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
13.) MFA 


Uses pinatype process. 





4g THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1907, continued. 


890. Non-screen orthochromatic and 
panchromatic plates by bathing. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 18, 
1907, v. 54, p. 786.) MFA 


Prepared from ordinary plates. 


891. The permanency of pinatype 
prints. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 1, 1907, v.54, p.23.) MFA 


892. The Krayn screen-plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 13, 
1907, v. 54, p. 944.) MFA 


893. The Krayn screen - plate process of 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ee 


San Francisco, 








Also printed in Camera craft, 
March, 1908, v. 15, p. 109, MFA. 


894. Kruegener, R. Die neue Farbenpho- 
tographie von Auguste und Louis Lumiére 
in Lyon. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 45, p. RI aN 


Also printed in Photographische Welt, Leipzig, 


1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 113-115, 131-133, MFA. 


895. Lasareff, P. Uber das Ausbleichen 
von Farbstoffen im sichtbaren Spektrum. 
(Annalen der Physik, Leipzig, 1907, Folge 
4, Bd. 24, p. 661-671.) PAA 

Translation in British journal of photography, 


London, May 1, 1908, v.55, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 38-40, MFA. 


896. Latest developments in screen - plate 

colour photography. illus. (British jour- 

nal of photography, London, Sept. 13, 1907, 

v. 54, p. 688-691.) MFA 
Warner-Powrie process. 


Also printed@in American photography, Boston, 


Oct., 1907, v. 1, p. 186-192, MFA 

Abstract in Camera craft, San Francisco, Nov., 
1907, v. 14, p. 503-504, MFA. 
897. The Latest on Warner-Powrie. (Brit- 


ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
18, 1907, v. 54, p. 783.) MFA 


Experiments; also comparisons with Lumiére plates. 


898. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Uber die 
direkten Verfahren der Farbenphotogra- 
phie nach Lippmann und Lumieére. illus. 
(Physikalische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1907, 
Jahrg. 8, p. 842-849.) PAA 


Also printed in Deutsche physikalische Gesellschaft. 
Berichte, Berlin, 1907, Jahrg. 5, p. 624-638, PAA. 


899. Uber eine neue kornlose Platte 
fiir Lippmann-Photographie. (Zeitschrift 
fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
zig, 1907, Bd. 5, p. 279-283.) PLC 


900. Leiber, Ferdinand. A _ three-colour 
positive transparency process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 1, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 84-85.) MFA 


-Glass transparencies 
process. 





by the triple subtractive 


901. Le Roy, George A. Rectification des 
épreuves sur plaques autochromes. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 473.) MFA 


Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 


don, Feb. 7, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 11, MFA. 


902. Vernis pour plaques autochromes. 

(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 

letin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 472.) 
MFA 


Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 


don, Feb. 7, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 11, A, 





903. Lueppo - Cramer. 
dyes. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 50.) MFA 


Deals with the action of dyes in hydrosols of the 
silver halides. 





904. Zur Photochemie der Photoha- 
loide und Theorie der Poitevinschen 
Photochromie. (Photographische Korres- 


pondenz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 376-382, 
439-444.) MFA 


905. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louris LUMIERE. 
Notice de MM. Lumiére sur le mode d’em- 
ploi des plaques autochromes. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 


1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 358-368.) MFA 
Full directions. 
906. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. Methods 


of control in the development of autochrome 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 6, 1907, v.54, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 90-93.) MFA 

Also printed in American photography, Boston, 
Feb., 1908, v. 2, p. 93-102, MFA. 


907. —— Sur le développement des plaques 
autochromes. (Société francaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 2, 
tome 23, p. 515-528.) MFA 


908. The Lumiére autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 51-53, 65-68.) MFA 


Directions for manipulating. 


909. Lumiéres Verfahren der Photographie 
in nattirlichen Farben mittels Autochrom- 
platten. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. Sn, 


910. Mackenstein, H. Déclenchement auto- 
matique des obturateurs par le déclic auto- 
matique H. B. illus. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 
2, tome 23, p. 386-387.) MFA 


911. Mareschal, G. Photographie des cou- 
leurs par les plaques autochromes Lu- 
miére. (Photo-gazette, Paris, May 25, 
1907, année 17, p. 121-123.) MFA 


The behaviour of ~ 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 49 


1907, continued. 


912. Martin-Duncan, F. Autochromes of 
nature subjects. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 1, 1907, v. 54, p. 
834-835.) MFA 


Abstract of lecture before the Blenheim Club. 


913. The microscopic appearance of 
the Warner-Powrie plate. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 1, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 83-84.) MFA 


914. Some notes on the microscopic 
appearance of the Lumiére autochrome 
plate. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 6, 1907, v.54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 68-69.) MFA 








915. Martiny, Gaston. Quelques consé- 
quences de l’emploi des plaques auto- 
chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, July 25, 
1907, année 17, p. 165-167.) MFA 


Difficulties to be overcome. 


916. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. Mo- 
saic and linear colour plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 5, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 49-50.) MFA 


917. Preparing colour-duplicates by 
the Warner-Powrie process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 20, 
1907, v. 54, p. 708-710.) MFA 


918. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
J. H. Piepcr. Printing and copying from 
screen-plate colour negatives and posi- 
tives. (British journal of photography, 
Lendon, Oct. 4, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 75-76.) MFA 


919. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
S. H. Wratten. Rapid filter blue. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Aug. 
2, 1907, v.54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 62.) MFA 





920. Mente, Otto. Ueber die neue Omni- 
colore Platte. (Photographische Chronik, 
feape a, o., July 3, 1907, Jahre. 14, p. 334— 
387%) +MFA 


921. Millochau, G. Photography of the 
infra-red solar spectrum. (British journal 
of photography, London, May 17, 1907, v. 
54, p. 364-365.) MFA 


922. Monpillard, Félix. Ecrans colorés 
pour la microphotographie. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 177-179.) MFA 


923. Natural colour photographs of inter- 
ference effects in glass under stress. (En- 
gineering, London, Jan. 11, 1907, v. 83, p. 
56.) | VA 


Abstract in Photographic news, London, Jan. 25, 
1907, v.51, p. 71, MFA. 


924. Neuhauss, Richard. History of the 
bleachout process. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 5, 1907, v. 54, 

p. 262.) MFA 


States that process was used as early as 1899 by 
Liesegang. 


925. —— A note by Dr. Neuhauss on the 
bleachout process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 1, 1907, v. 54, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 14-15.) 


MFA 


Refers to new paper introduced by Dr. J. H. Smith 
& Co. of Zurich. 


926. Newton, A. J. The Warner-Powrie 
screen - plate from the photo - engraver’s 
point of view. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 27, 1907, v. 54, say 730- 
731.) MFA 


927. A Note on varnishing autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 15, 1907, v. 54, p. 859.) MFA 


928. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Die 
Farbenphotographie nach dem Warner- 
Powrie-Verfahren. illus. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 
533-538.) MFA 


929. Neuerungen in der Dreifarben- 
photographie. illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Pho- 
tographie und Reproductionstechnik fir 
1907, Halle a. S., 1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 129- 
141.) MFA 


Brief abstracts of periodical articles. 





930. One-plate colour processes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 1, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 13.) MFA 


A review of patents issued. 


931. Le Papier Uto pour obtention d’i- 
mages polychromes par décoloration. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 190-192.) 
MFA 


932. Patents in colour-photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Aug. 
30, 1907, v.54, p. 666, 681-682.) MFA 


Discussion between Frederic E. Ives and Otto 
Pfenninger as to patent priority of refraction com- 
pensator. 


933. Payne, Arthur. Stereoscopic photog- 
raphy with autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1907, v. 
54, p. 784-785, 803-804.) MFA 


934. Pfaundler, Leopold. Ueber ein Mo- 
dell zur mechanischen Versinnbildlichung 
der MHeringschen Farbentheorie. illus. 
(Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fir 1907, Halle a. S., roe 
Jahrg. 21, p. 20-21.) "MF 


935. The Pinatype process. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, March 1, 
1907, v.54, supplement, p. 23.) MFA 


Description of French patent 337,054. 


50 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1907, continued. 


936. Das Pinatype-Verfahren der Hochster 
Farbwerke. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., Aug. 4, 1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 397 
398.) +MFA 


937. Piper, Charles Welborne. Duplicates 
of autochromes by contact printing and 
copying. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 1, 1907, v.54, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 81-82.) MFA 


938. Plauderei tiber die Farbenphotogra- 
phie nach Lumiére. (Photographische 
Chronik, Halle a. S., Aug. 18, 1907, Jahrg. 
14, p. 423-425.) +MFA 


939. Pledge, John H. Photo-micrographs 
of starch grains in the Lumiére auto- 
chrome plates. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Sept. 20, 1907, v. 54, 
no /2l,) MFA 


940. Poirée, Georges. Méthode de photo- 
graphie des couleurs par analyse et synthése 
au moyen d’objectifs non achromatiques. 
illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 
61-66.) MFA 

Translation in British journal of photography, Lon- 


don, March 1, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 21-22, MFA. 


941. A Precaution in the autochrome proc- 
ess. Securing white in autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
11, 1907, v. 54, p. 761-762.) MFA 


942. Precautions in the use of liquid col- 
our-filters. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, May 3, 1907, v. 54, p. Sieg 

FA 


943. “Pyro-Reeb,” révélateur spécial pour 
plaques autochromes. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, 
série 2, tome 23, p. 529-531.) MFA 


944. Quentin, H. Comment on obtient une 
photographie. en couleurs. Procédés tri- 
chromes, méthodes par réseaux poly- 
chromes, procédé par dispersion spectrale. 
Paris: Ch. Mendel ,1907?;. 1 pl, 69 p. 
1253 MFV 


945. The mercury fog in interference 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 5, 1907, v.54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 55.) MFA 


946. The R. P. S. progress medal-award 

for colour photography. port. (British 

journal of photography, London, Feb. 1, 

1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 

ment, p. 12.) MFA 
Award to E. Sanger Shepherd. 


947. Raymond, R. Photography in col- 
ours by prismatic dispersion. illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
4, 1907, v.54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 5-6, 18-19.) MFA 





948. Real color photography. (Outlook, 


New York, 1907, v. 87, p. nue *DA 
Autochromes. 
949. Reducing three-colour negatives. 


(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 6, 1907, v.54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 71.) MFA 


“‘Sanzol”’ process. 


950. Reeb, Henri. De l’estimation du 
temps de pose sur plaques autochromes. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 490- 
495.) MFA 


951. Riley, Phil Madison. Color-photog- 
raphy near. A new one-plate process for 
the ordinary camera. (Photo-era, Boston, 
Dec., 1907, v.19, p. 307-309.) MFA 


Joly process. 


952. Rothé, E Practice of Lippmann’s 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 4, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 3.) MFA 


Does away with mercury mirror. Method of work- 
ing is described. 


953. Schmidt, Hans. Ueber Dreifarben- 
negative. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fir 1907, Halle a. S., 
1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 10-13.) MFA 


954. Screen-plate photography by the War- 
ner-Powrie process. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1907, v. 54, nee 707- 
708, 730.) MFA 


955. Sheppard, Samuel Edward. The col- 
our of dye solutions. (British journal of 
photography, London, Oct. 25, 1907, v. 54, 
p. 819.) MFA 


956. Sims, W. A. Three-colour printing 
process by means of the Rotary Photo- 
graphic Company’s films. (Photographic 
journal, London, Jan., 1907, new series, v. 
31, p. 4-8.) MFA 


With discussion. 


957. Smith, John H. The copying of col- 
our-screen plates on bleach-out paper. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 2, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 62-63.) MFA 


958. Direct colour-photography by the 
Smith screen plate. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 4, 1907, v. 54, 
p. 6.) MFA 


959. Smith, John H., and W. MERCKENs. 
Ausbleichverfahren und direkte Farben- 
photographie. (Jahrbuch fir Photogra- 
phie und Reproductionstechnik fiir 1907, 
Halle a. S., 1907, Jahre. 21) petite ee 


Szezepanik process. MFA 





960. Some points in the manipulation of 
Lumiére’s autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 4, 
1907, v.54, p. 746-747.) MFA 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 54 


1907, continued. 


961. Stark, J. Latente Fluoreszenz und 
optische Sensibilisation. (Physikalische 
Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1907, Jahrg. 8, p. 248- 
Zou.) PAA 


Translation with comments in British journal of 
photography, London, June 7, 1907, v.54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 44-46, MFA. 


962. Steadman, Frank Morris. Color pho- 
tography with Lumiére autochrome plate. 
illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 
1907, v. 14, p. 395-400.) MF 


Portraits of the inventors. 


963. Stenger, Erich. Aus der Praxis der 
Dreifarbenphotographie.' (Photographische 
Kunst, Miinchen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 4, p. 161- 
167, 201-207, 323-329, 361-365; 1906-07, 








Jahrg. 5, p. 173-179.) +MFA 
964. Die Autochromplatte. illus. 
(Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photo- 
graphie, Leipzig, 1907, Bd..5, p. 372-382.) 
PLC 
965. Film thickness and colour sensi- 
tiveness. (British journal of photography, 


London, Dec. 13, 1907, v.54, p. 932-933.) 
MFA 


Brief abstract. Claims increasing color sensitive- 
ness with increasing thickness of film. 


966. Lippmann-Photographie. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Aug. 21, 
1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 431-432.) +MFA 


967. Three-colour cameras. illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
8, 1907, v. 54, p. 99-100.) MFA 


Apparatus of Hans Schmidt and of M. Geisler. 





968. Three-colour Lippmann photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 18, 1907, v.54, p. 36-37.) F 


Brief reference to Herbert E. Ives’ 
duplication. 


969. Tilney, F. C. Colour reproduction 
from the point of view of the man in the 
street. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 7, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 41-42.) MFA 


970. The “Times” on colour processes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 20, 1907, v.54, p. 718.) MFA 


Account of exhibition in which Lumiére pictures 
are compared with some of the older processes. 


971. Traube, Artur. Colored tones by the 
Traube iodide process. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 15, 1907, v. 
54, p. 196-197.) MFA 


972. Three-colour prints by the Traube 
iodide process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, April 5, 1907, v. 54, ‘Col. 
our photography supplement, Dp. 26-28) 


method of 





973. Valenta, Eduard. Sensibilisierungs- 
versuche mit diversen Farbstoffen der 
Cyaningruppe. (Photographische Korre- 
spondenz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 449- 
450.) MFA 


Also ae in British journal of Ree 
London, Oct. 4, 1907, v.54, p. 751, MFA 


974. Wall, Edward John. Another colour 
process. (Photographic news, London, 
Dec. 6, 1907, v. 52, p. 547.) MFA 


Brief description of the Krayn process. 





975. Another three-colour printing 
process. (Photographic news, London, 
Sépt..6, 1907, ve5Z, p. 231.) MFA 


Lieber process. 


. 976. —— The circulating portfolios of the 


Society of Colour Photographers. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, April 
5, 1907, v. 54, p. 31-32.) MFA 


Coanments on work submitted by several colour 
photographers. 


977. ——- Latent fluorescence and optical 

sensitising. (British journal of photog- 

raphy, London, June 7, 1907, v.54, Colour 

photography supplement, p. 45-46.) MFA 
Comments on paper by J. Stark. 


978. 
(Photographic news, 
L907 ots 56) Os O50) 


Brief description. 


979. The Lumiére autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 2, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 57-58.) MFA 
980. A new three-colour camera. 
(Photographic news, London, Jan. gee 


vanced Oe pea BRR 
Schmidt apparatus. 


—-— The Lumiére autochrome plate. 
London, July 19, 
MFA 








981. ——- The omnicolore plate. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, May 10, 1907, v. 51, 
p. 379.) MFA 


982. —— The Powrie-Warner colour proc- 
ess. (Photographic news, London, Oct. 4, 
1907, v. 52, p. 329.) MFA 


Brief ese stom: 


983. A review of the exhibition. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
4, 1907, v.54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. an 5: MFA 


984. A review of recent eae in col- 
our sensitising. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1907, v.54, p. 365-367, 
386-388, 406-407, 464-466.) MFA 


Footnote citations to a number of references. 


985. A simpler method of working 
autochrome plates. (Photographic news, 
London, Nov. 8, 1907, v.52, p.451.) MFA 


Gravier process. 


986. Some notable features of the 
Warner-Powrie process. (British journal 
of photography, London, Sept. 20, 1907, v. 
54, p. 710-711.) MF 














52 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1907, continued. 
987. —— Some notes on colour filter 
making. (British journal of photography, 


London, Jan. 4, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 4-5.) MFA 


988. Three-colour carbon work. (Brit- 
ish journal:of photography, London, Feb. 
1, 1907, v.54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 9-10.) MFA 


989. Three-colour Lippmann pictures. 
(Photographic news, London, Feb. 8, 1907, 
egal Ry. ceny) BO he MFA 


Ives process. 


990. Three-colour negative-making as 
an evening amusement. (British journal 
of photography, London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, 
Colour photography supplement, p. nal 











Suggestion for a panchromatic flashlight. 


991. Wallace, Robert James. Studies in 
sensitometry. illus. (Astrophysical jour- 
nal, Chicago, 1907, v.25, p. 116-150; v. 26, 
Dp. 298-325.) OMA 


1: The daylight sensitometry of photographic plates, 
and a suggested standard dispersion piece. 2: Ortho- 
chromatism by bathing. 


992. Wallon, Etienne. Appareil pour la 
photographie des couleurs par dispersion 
prismatique de M. Chéron. illus. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, série 2, tome 23, p.537-542.) MFA 


993. Paysages autochromes. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, Oct. 25, 1907, année 17, p. 
221-225.) MFA 


994. La photographie des couleurs et 
les plaques autochromes. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 336-358.) MFA 


995. La photographie des couleurs et 
les plaques autochromes; conférence faite 
devant la Société francaise de photogra- 
phie le 27 juin 1907, par E. Wallon; suivie 
d’une Notice sur le mode d’emploi des 
plaques autochromes, par MM. Lumiere. 
Paris: Gauthier-Villars, 1907. 39 p. table. 
4°. MFF p.v.54, no.6 


996. Watkins, Alfred. Actinometers and 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Nov. 1, 1907, v. 54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 82-83.) MFA 


997. Exposure of autochromes by ac- 
tinometer. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Nov. 15, 1907, v. 54, p. Ze 














998. Wolf-Czapek, Karl Wilhelm. Einige 
Beitrage zur Autochromphotographie. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 461-464.) MFA 


999, Einige Versuche mit der neuen 
Autochromplatte. (Photographische Chro- 
nik, Halle a. S., Sept. 1, 1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 
447-448.) +MFA 








1000. Experiments with the bleach- 
out printing process. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 5, 1907, v. 54, 
Colour photography supplement, p. coe 





1001. .Naturfarbige Kopien auf Papier. 

(Photographische Welt, Leipzig, April, 

1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 49-51.) MFA 
Uto paper. 


1002. Worel, Karl. Direkte Farbenpho- 
tographie. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik fir 1907, Halle 


S.,.1907, Jahre. 2) eo. ee MFA 
Describes Uto paper. 
1003. ——- New-comers in colour photog- 


raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 3, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 36-37.) MFA 


Reviews recent advances. 


1004. Wratten & Wainwright. M screens. 
(Nature, London, April 18, 1907, v.75, p. 
592.) OA 


Reference to their booklet on photomicrography and 
plates supplied by them. 


1005. A Year of colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 6, 1907, v.54, p. 918-919.) MFA 


1908 


1006. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
A one-exposure three-colour camera. illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, Oct., 1908, 


new series, v. 32, p. 331-333.) MFA . 


Also Shea in British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. re MFA. 


1007. Auerbach, Herbert. Ein kurzer Ueber- 
blick uber die Entwicklungsgeschichte 
der Photographie in nattirlichen Farben. 
(Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
1908, Jahrg. 15, p.295-298, 323-325, 339- 
341, 347-349.) +MFA 


1008. The Autochromes at the new gallery. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 25, 1908, v.55, p: 734-735.) MFA 


Comments on London exhibition. 


1009. Balagny, Georges. Application du 
diamidophénol en liqueur acide au dé- 
veloppement des plaques autochromes. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 55- 
58.) MFA 


1010. Bayley, R. Child. Lantern slides of 
autochrome plates. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, May, 1908, v.15, p. 177-180.). 
MFA 
1011. Blackburn, H. E. Filters for three- 
plate color photography. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Sept., 1908, v. 15, p. 335—- 
342.) MFA 


ee 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 53 


1908, continued. 


1012. Brown, Edward Lumsden. On di- 
rect colour-photography by the Lumiére 


process. (Royal Scottish Society of Arts. 
Transactions, Edinburgh, 1908, v. 18, p. 
154-157.) VA 


1013. Calmels, H. Ecrans colorés de 
Wratten and Wainwright pour ortho- 
chromatisme, trichromie, photomicrogra- 
phie, usages scientifiques. illus. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 340-343.) MFA 


1014. The Campbell anti-frilling dish. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 16.) MFA 


1015. Carpentier, J. La photographie des 
couleurs par les plaques autochromes de 
MM. Lumiére fréres. (Société des ingé- 
nieurs civils de France. Mémoires, Paris, 
1908, série 6, année 61, p. 962-972.) VDA 


1016. Carrara, Achille. An improved non- 
screen panchromatic plate by bathing. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 6, 1907, v.54, supplement, p. 89-90; 
Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, supplement, p. 7-8.) 
MFA 


1017. Carter, Charles M. Painting and 
color photography. (American annual of 
photography for 1909, New York, 1908, 
v. 13, p. 41-42.) MFA 


1018. Chaboseau, Robert. Observations 
sur l’emploi des plaques autochromes. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 349- 
358.) MFA 
Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Oct. 2, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, MFA. ; 
1019. Chéron, André. A modified appara- 
tus for the prismatic dispersion process. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 


raphy supplement, p. 3-4.) MFA 
1020. Chevrier, Henri. Montage des 
épreuves obtenues sur plaques auto- 
chromes. (Société francaise de photo- 
graphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, série 2, 
tome 24, p. 257.) MFA 


1021. Claudy, Carl Harry. The autochrome 
plate and the microscope. (Bulletin of pho- 
tography, Philadelphia, 1908, v.2, p. 105- 


106, 125-126, 145-146.) +MFA 
1022. Clifton, William E. A_ simplified 
system of developing autochromes. (Brit- 


ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
14, 1908, v.55, p. 130-131.) MFA 


1023. Colour in autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 9, 
1908, v.55, p. 765.) MFA 


Editorial rejoinder to criticism of autochromes at 
the Salon. 


1024. ,Colour photographs of rock sec- 
tions.; (Nature, London, Jan. 2, 1908, v. 
77, p. 206.) OA 


Brief reference to Lumiére photographs taken by 
J. W. Patterson. 


1025. Colour photography and _ crime. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 12, 1908, v. 55, p. 445.) MFA 


Reference to blood-stained garments photographed 
by autochrome process. 


1026. Colour transparencies by artificial 
light. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 12, 1908, v. 55, p. 445.) MFA 


1027. Corke, H. Essenhigh. The “Thames” 
one-exposure colour plate. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 20, 
1908, v.55, p. 884-886.) MFA 


1028. Courtellemont, G. Autochromes on 
tour. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 5, 1908, v.55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 46.) MFA 
A record of 1,300 pictures taken in the Near East. 
Brief reference to exposures required; also of de- 
velopment. 
1029. Coustet, Ernest. Conseils pratiques 
sur lVemploi des plaques autochromes. 
(Photo-gazette, Paris, Feb. 25, 1908, année 
18, p. 72-78.) 


1030. La photographie en couleurs sur 
plaques a filtres colorés. Paris: B. Tignol 
11908). viii, 91 p. 12°.. (Bibliotheque des 
actualités industrielles. no. 118.) MFV 
1031. Le procédé Diachrome. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, Sept. 25, 1908, année 18, p. 
197-200.) MFA 


Traube’s process. 


1032. Le temps de pose des plaques 
autochromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, April 
25, 1908, année 18, p. 111-115.) MFA 


1033. Crémier, Victor. Détermination du 
temps de pose pour autochromes. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 1908, année 19, p. 
5-15.) MFA 


1034. Cundall, J. Tudor. Advances in color 
photography. (American photography, 
Boston, Aug., 1908, v. 2, p. 437-445.) MFA 
_ Paper read before the Edinburgh Photographic So- 
ciety. 

1035. Dawson, Oliver S., and C. L. FInray. 
The examination of the positive of the 
Thames colour plate. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Dec. 4, 1908, 
v.55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
96.) MFA 


1036. A Development accessory for auto- 

chromes, panchromatic plates, etc. (Brit- 

ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 

7, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 

ment, p. 16.) MFA 
Developing tank of Messrs. Beck. 











1037. The Development of autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 79-80.) MFA 


54 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1908, continued. 


1038. Didier, Léon. Pinatype prints from 
autochrome and other screen-plate trans- 
parencies. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, May 1, 1908, v.55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 35-37.) MFA 


1039. Dillaye, Frédéric. Autochromes of 
bluish tones. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 20, 1908, v.55, p. 
ae1.) MFA 


1040. Doncaster, E. D. The latest im- 

provements and applications of the 

Sanger-Shepherd process of colour-pho- 

tography. (British journal of photogra- 

phy, London, March 6, 1908, v.55, Colour 

photography supplement, p. 20.) MFA 
Abstract. 


1041. Dowier, Charles A. Acid amidol for 
the development of autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 3, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 32.) MFA 


1042. Downes, William Howe. 
of the autochrome process upon art. 
(Photo-era, Boston, Jan., 1908, v. 20, p. 41- 
42.) MFA 


1043. Drake-Brockman, H. G. Autochrome 
photography for the tourist. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 5, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 47-48.) MFA 


Suggestions as to developing equipment. 


1044. Blueness with autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 8, 1908, v. 55, p. 371.) MFA 


1045. Yellow light for the develop- 
ment of autochromes. (British journal of 
photography, London, Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. rer 


1046. The Dufay screen-plate process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 51- 52.) MFA 


1047. Dye mordants. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, 
p. 110.) MFA 


1048. Edgson, Hugh. Washing autochrome 
plates. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 3, 1908, v.55, supple- 
ment, p. 32.) MFA 


Influence 








1049. Emery, C. F. Autochrome plates in 
landscape work. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 


MFA: 


Inquires why tones are colder in early summer 
than in September. 
1050. The “Ensign” clock for autochrome 
development. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 56.) MFA 


1051. The Exhibition of colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 12, 1908, v.55, p. 449.) MFA 


Second exhibition of the Society of Colour Photog- 
raphers. 


1052. Exposure with autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
7, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 10-11.) MFA 


1053. Fabry, Charles. La photographie 
des couleurs. (Société scientifique indus- 
trielle de Marseille. Bulletin, Marseille, 


1908, année 36, fascicule unique, p. 7-21.) 

“ VA 
1054. Ferrars, Max. Die Autochrom- 
Platte von Lumiére. (Photographische 


Welt, Leipzig, Jan., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 2.) 
MFA 


Suggestions for exposure. 


1055. Weitere Erfahrungen mit der 
Autochromplatte. (Photographische Welt, 
Leipzig, Jan., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 3-4.) MFA 


1056. Finlay, C. L. ;The Thames colour- 
screen plate.; (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 17, 1908, v. 55, eee 


With discussion. 





1057. Gimpel, Léon. Autochromes from 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 7, 1908, v.55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 61.) MFA 


1058-1059. Reproduction sur plaques 
autochromes des épreuves obtenues sur 
ses mémes plaques. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
Oct. 25, 1908, année 18, p. 222-225.) MFA 


Also in Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 317-320, MFA. 


1060. Goerz. Chassis spécial pour plaques 
autochromes de Lumiére. illus. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 308-310.) MFA 


1061. Goldberg, E. Farbenphotographie 
und Farbendruck. Leipzig: Deutscher 
Buchgewerbeverein, 1908. 84p.,12pl. 16°. 
(Monographien des Buchgewerbes... Bd. 
jy MFV 


La photogra- 





1062. Goldschmidt, Robert. 
phie des couleurs. (Université ;libre; de 
Bruxelles. Revue, Bruxelles, 1908, année 
13, p. 317-336.) * EM 


Also printed in Société chimique de Belgique. 
Bulletin, Gand, 1908, v. 22, p. 20-37, PKA. 


1063. Goutcher, A. Winton. The fixing 
bath in autochrome work. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, March 20, 
1908, v. 55, p. 227.) MFA 


1064. Grant, Thomas K. Autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 20, 1908, v.55, p. 895-896.) MFA 


Lecture before the Croydon Camera Club. Discusses 
exposure, intensification, and avoidance of spots. 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 55 


1908, continued. 


1065. Gravier, Charles. . Daylight develop- 
ment of autochromes by the Gravier 
method. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 10, 1908, v. 55, p. 
34, Colour photography supplement, Jan. 3 
1908, p. 34.) MFA 


1066. Gray, Edward. An amateur’s first 
experience with autochrome plates. (Cam- 
_ era craft, San Francisco, April, 1908, v. 15, 

p. 132-134.) MFA 


1067. Grimsehl, E. Ein eigentiimlicher 
stereoskopischer Effekt. illus. (Physika- 
lische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1908, Jahrg. 9, 
p. 109-110.) PAA 


Professor von Rohr comments upon this effect in 
Physikalische Zeitschrift, 1908, Jahrg. 9, p. 201-202. 
There is a translation of these two contributions in 
British journal of photography, April 24, 1908, v. 55, 
p. 328-329, with comments on p. 338, 350, MFA. 

“Interesting, not only because it suggests a pretty 
way of obtaining stereoscopic diagrams, but also be- 
cause it may explain why the coloured starch grains 
are sometimes so noticeable when viewing autochrome 
pictures in the stereoscope.”’ 


1068. Guébhard, Adrien. Ueber den Lu- 
miéreschen photographischen Farbenpro- 
zess. illus. (Jahrbuch fir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik fiir 1908, Halle 
a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 164-167.) MFA 


1069. Holme, Charles, editor. Colour pho- 
tography, and other recent developments 
of the art of the camera. London, Paris 
and New York: Offices of “The Studio,” 
1908. 4 p.1.,9(1) p., 113 pl. (18 col’d.). 4°. 

+MFV 


1070. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
colour properties of the autochrome plate 
and the processes of producing auto- 
chromes. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 82-85.) 
MFA 


1071. The colours of the autochrome 
pictures in regard to their production. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 93-95.) MFA 


1072. Die Farbenphotographie. (Pho- 
tographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1908, 
Jahrg. 45, p. 446-450.) MFA 


Names various characteristics of the autochrome 
plate. 


1073. On the sensitiveness of the auto- 
chrome plate. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 3, 1908, v.55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 30.) MFA 


1074. Temperature in development. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 88.) MFA 














1075. —— The theory of the autochrome 
plate. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 3, 1908, v.55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 5-7.) MFA 


1076. Zur Charakteristik der modern- 





en Farbenphotographie. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1908, 
Jahrg. 45, p. 496-502.) MFA 


1077. Husnik, Jaroslav. Meine Erfahr- 
ungen mit Lumiéres Autochromplatten. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 49-57.) MFA 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 20, MFA. 
1078. Ueber die gleichmassige Far- 
benempfindlichkeit bei Autochromplatten. 
(Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fiir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, 
Jahrg. 22, p. 127-128.) MFA 


1079. Intensification of the autochrome. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 76.) MFA 


Suggests Monkhoven’s silver cyanide process. 


1080. Ives, Herbert Eugene. An experi- 
mental study of the Lippmann color pho- 
tograph. (Astrophysical journal, Chicago, 
1908, v.27, p. 325-352.) OMA 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1908, v.55, p. 942-944, 965-967, 979-982, 
MFA, and in Zeitschrift fir wissenschaftliche Pho- 
tographie, Leipzig, 1908, v. 6, p. 373-406, PLC. 


1081. Jones, Chapman. Autochrome plates. 
(Knowledge & scientific news, London, 
May, 1908, new series, v. 5, p. 104.) OA 
Method of intensifying apparently useless plates. 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, June 5, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 46, MFA. 
1082. Kinematography in natural col- 
ours. (Nature, London, May 7, 1908, v. 78, 
p. 21 OA 
Brief account of G. Albert Smith’s method. 
1083. The photography of colour. 
(Science progress, London, 1908, v. 2, p. 
349-368. ) OA 


An excellent historical article. 


1084. Jones, T. H. Simplified development 
of autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Feb. 28, 1908, v.55, p 
17) MFA 


1085. Juhl, Ernst. A Hamburg view of the 
work of Miller and the Hofmeisters. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Octé. 2;- 19080 555, pi 752-753a,) MFA 


1086. Koenig, Ernst. Die Autochrom- 
Photographie und die verwandten Dreifar- 
benraster-Verfahren. Berlin: G. Schmidt, 
1908. 3 p.1., 60 p. 8°. (Photographische 
Bibliothek. Bd. 23.) MFV 


1087. Laurvik, John Nilsen. The new color 
photography. illus. (International studio, 
New York, 1908, v. 34, p. xxi-xxiii.) fMAA 











We THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1908, continued. 


1088. Law, E. F. Application 
photography to metallography. 
Steel Institute. Journal, London, 
v. 76, p. 151-154.) 

With discussion. 

For comments see British journal of photography, 
London, July 3, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 54, MFA. 


1089. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Ad- 
vances in the taking, viewing, and projec- 
tion of the Lippmann colour photographs. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 3, 1908, v.55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 


Editorial comment is appended. 


1090. 


of colour 
(Iron and 

1908, 
VHA 


The Purkinje phenomenon in 
photographic plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. a 








1091. Ueber die Abstimmung der 
Lippmann - Platte. illus. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 


fiir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. as 
164.) MF 


1092. Lenses for colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 24.) MFA 


Homocentric lenses from Ross, Ltd. 


1093. Liesegang, Raphael Ed. Zur Ge- 
schichte der Farbenrasterfilms. (Jahr- 
buch fiir Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik ftir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 
22, p. 147-151.) MFA 


1094. Limmer, Fr. Uber Farbenausbleich- 

papiere. (Photographische Korrespon- 

denz, Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. uate 
A 


1095. Litchfield, Charles. Exposure in 
autochrome work and the use of different 
compensation filters. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, pre 


1096. Locquin, René. Autochromes by 
artificial light. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. lee eg 


Recommends a blue viewing screen between the 
autochrome and the source of light. 


1097. ——- Simplifying the handling of 
autochrome plates. (Bulletin of photog- 
raphy, Philadelphia, Oct. 21, 1908, v. 3, p. 
259.) +MFA 


1098. Lohmeyer, R. The gradation of 
plates in different colored lights. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 1, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 40.) MFA 


1105. 


1099. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LuMIERE. 
Chromodiascope. Appareil pour la vision 
des photographies polychromes. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 486-487.) MFA 


1100. A new method of developing 

autochrome plates. (American photogra- 

phy, Boston, July, 1908, v. 2, p. ag 
A 


1101. Lumiére, Auguste, and _. others. 
Screen-plate processes of colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 45-46.) MFA 


1102. Ueber die Entwicklung der 
Autochromplatten. illus. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fiir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 179- 
188.) MFA 


Also printed in Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 197-207, MFA. 








1103. Luther, R. Some points in stereo- 
scopic photography with the autochrome 
plate. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 85-87.) MFA 


1104. McIntosh, J. Along the Thames 
with the autochrome plate. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Sept. 4, 1908, 
v. 55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
65-66. ) MFA 

Interview in which the author gives some details of 
development. 





The light filter in autochrome 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 88.) MFA 


Takes exception to statements of Alfred Watkins 
in above journal, Oct. 2, 1908, v.55, supplement, p. 
4, 


1106. Mareschal, G. La cuvette “Marbach” 
pour développement en plein jour des 
plaques autochromes. illus. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 289-291.) MFA 


1107, Emploi de plaques autochromes 
en voyage. (Photo-gazette, Paris, May 25, 
1908, année 18, p. 130-131.) MFA 


Experiences of Gervais-Courtellemont. 


1108. Nouvelle méthode de développe- 
ment des plaques autochromes. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, June 25, 1908, année 18, p. 
152-1590) MFA 


1109. Marriage, Ernest. Autochrome lan- 

tern slides. (British journal of photogra- 

phy, London, Dec. 16, 1908, v. 55, p. AT 
FA 








‘ ae for correcting deficiency of blue in lime- 
ight 

Also printed in Camera craft, May, 1909, v. 16, 
p. 187, MFA. 


1110. Martin-Duncan, F. The autochrome 
plate applied to natural science. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, April, 1908, new 
series, v. 32, p. 172-178.) MFA 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 57 


1908, continued. 


1111. The autochrome plate in natural 
science. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 1.) MFA 





Suggestions for working plates in a biological lab- 


oratory. 


1112. Massiot, G. Matériel complet pour 
la projection des vues en couleurs sur 
plaques autochromes. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, 
série 2, tome 24, p. 207-208.) MFA 


1113. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
construction of one-exposure cameras for 
three-colour photography. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 7, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 58-60.) MFA 


Abstract of paper read before the Royal Photo- 
graphic Society. 








1114. rA one - exposure three - colour 
camera.; illus. (Photographic journal, 
London, July, 1908, new series, v. 32, p. 
276-280.) MFA 
1115. - The photography of coloured 


objects in principle and practice. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 


1908, v. 55, p. 735-737, 754-756, 770-772, 
MFA > 


788-791.) 
1116. —— Screen-plate colour photogra- 
phy. (Society of Arts. Journal, London, 


Jan. 17, 1908, v. 56, p. 195-205.) VA 
With discussion. 
Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
ce. 1908, v. 55, p. 41-42, supplement, p. 12-15, 


1117. Some measurements of Uto 
paper. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. re ape 


1118. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
S. H. Wratten. Plates sensitised with di- 
cyanin and photography of the infra-red. 
illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
Jan., 1908, new series, v. 32, p. 25-37.) MFA 


1119. A Modified’ method for the assem- 
bling of three-colour prints on rotary 
stripping film. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 1, 1908, v.55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 37.) MFA 


Use of carbon-stripping films supplied by Rotary 
Photographic Co., Ltd. 


1120. Monpillard, Félix. Methods of de- 
velopment and after-treatment. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 3, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 49-51.) MFA 


As applied to autochrome positive. 


1121. Observations sur la technique 
des manipulations des plaques auto- 
chromes. (Société francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 
24, p. 231-242.) MFA 








1122. Munro, L. Walker. Screen - plate 
processes. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 


Appreciation of the Warner-Powrie process. 


1123. Namias, Rodolfo. The preparation 
of non- filter orthochromatic plates by 
bathing. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 52.) MFA 


Experiments with Konig’s formula. 


1124. Eine Neue Lumiéresche Farbraster- 
platte. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 372-373.) MFA 


1125. The New lLumiére screen - plate. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 7, 1908, v.55, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 57-58.) MFA 


Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Oct., 1908, v. 21, 
p. 196-197, MFA. 


1126. A New Lumiére screen-plate process. 

(British journal of photography, London, 

July 24, 1908, v.55, p. 557-558.) MFA 
Abstract of French patent no. 386,147. 


1127. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Zur 
Farbenphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch 
fiir Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
nik fir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 
223-232.) MFA 


Principally devoted to Warner-Powrie process. 


1128. Peaucellier, A. An exposure meter 
for autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, April 3, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 27.) 
MFA 


1129. Permanganate stains on _ auto- 

chromes. (British journal of photogra- 

phy, London, June 19, 1908, v. 55, p. 465.) 
MFA 


1130. Personnaz, Antonin. A propos des 
autochromes. (Société francaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, série 2, 
tome 24, p. 179-183, 368-378.) MFA 


Time of exposure and development for outdoor 
work. 


1131. Poulenc Fréres. Lanterne spéciale 
pour plaques autochromes, construite par 
les Etablissements Poulenc. illus. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 487-488.) 

MFA 


1132. Power, H. D’Arcy. Autochrome 
notes. (Camera craft, San Francisco, Jan., 
1908, v. 15, p. 31-33.) MFA 


Various suggestions for working. 


1133. Color photography. (Camera 
craft, San Francisco, 1908, v. 15, p. 311, 353; 
1909, v. 16, p. 29, 73-74, 186-187, 321, 369.) 


Notes on progress. MFA 
1134. The Lumiére autochrome plate. 


(Camera craft, San Francisco, Jan., 1908, 
v. 15, p. 20-23.) MFA 








58 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1908, continued. 


1135. A new color plate. (Camera 
crait, San Francisco, June, 1908, v. 15, p. 
229-230.) MFA 


1136. A new method of developing 
autochrome plates. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, Sept., 1908, v.15, p. eta be 








Lumiére’s new instructions. 


sas We Progress in autochrome color 
work. (Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 
1908, v. 15, p. 228.) MFA 


1138. Screen-plate color photography. 
(Camera craft, San Francisco, March, 
1908, v. 15, p. 110-111.) MFA 


An epitome of opinions on development of auto- 
chromes. 


1139. Simplified development of auto- 


chromes. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 
June, 1908, v.15, p. 215-216.) MF 


1140. Powrie, John H. The Warner- 
Powrie process of screen plate colour 
photography. illus. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, Jan., 1908, new series, v. 32, 
p. 3-10.) MFA 


Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, p. 928-929, MFA. 


1141. Rawlins, G. E. H. Persulphate v. 
permanganate as the reversing solution 
for autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 5, 1908, v.55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. Ss 











Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Sept., 1908, 


v. 21, p. 109-111, MFA. 


1142. Raymond, R. Paper prints from 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v.55, p.97- 
98.) MFA 


1143. Removing black spots from auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 96.) MFA 


1144. Rockwood, George A. Color pho- 
tography direct in the camera — impres- 
sions of a veteran professional. (Bulletin 
of photography, Philadelphia, July 8, 1908, 
v. 3, p. 30-31.) +MFA 


Autochrome process. 


1145._S.,_J. C. The autochrome process. 

(British journal of photography, London, 

Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 

supplement, p. 72.) MFA 
Deals with sulphide toning. 


1146. Sacco, Giulio. Aberrazioni e rifles- 
sioni nocive prodotte dai filtri di luce negli 
apparechi fotografica. illus. (Reale ac- 
cademia delle scienze di Torino. Atti, To- 
rino, 1907-08, v.43, p. 767-782, 856-874.) 


Translated abstract in British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, p. 53-56, MFA. 


(1151. Schmidt, Hans. 


1147. Schaum, Karl. On the colour of un- 
toned photographic films. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 28, 1908, 
¥.55, D.15/—158,) 


1148. Scheffer, W. Mikroskopische Unter- 
suchungen der Autochromplatten. illus. 
(Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik ftir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, 
Jahrgicz2s 0: 96-110.) MFA 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 25-27, MFA, 
1149, Stripping iutcehre ment (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 87-88.) MFA 


1150. Schinzel, Karl. Methoden der Kata- 
chromie. (Chemiker Zeitung, Cothen, July 
11, 1908, Jahrg. 32, p. 665-668.) tt VOA 

Translation in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 7, 1908, v.55, supplement, p. 61-64, 
under the title: Suggested catalytic methods of screen- 
plate photography. 





Das Dreifarben- 
raster-Verfahren der Deutschen Raster 
Gesellschaft. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1908, Halle 
a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 95-96.) MFA 


1152. Sheppard, Samuel Edward. On the 
optical and sensitising properties of the 
isocyanin dyes. (Photographic journal, 
London, Aug., 1908, new series, v. 32, p. 
300- 318.) MFA 


Latter part of paper in British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 4, 1908, v.55, p. 678-681, MFA. 


1153. Shivas, E. The autochrome process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


Complains that his blacks are blues. 
suggestions. 


1154. Simmen, Charles. An amidol for- 
mula for development of autochromes by 
inspection. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p.9-10.) MFA 


1155. Possibilité de développer les 
plaques autochromes en lumiére rouge, 
jaune ou verte. Variation de leur sensi- 
bilité. Appréciation du temps de pose. 
illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 36— 
43.) MFA 


1156. Smillie, Thomas W. Recent prog- 
ress in color photography. illus. (Smith- 
sonian Institution. Annual report nah . 
Washington, 1908, p. 231-237.) 


1157. Smith, G. Albert. Animated noe 
graphs in natural colours. (Royal Society 
of Arts. Journal, London, Dec. 11, 1908, 
v.57, p. 70-76.) VA 
With discussion. 
Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 


don, Dec. 18, 1908, v.55, p. 960-961, MFA, and in 
Nature, London, Jan. 14, 1909, v.79, p. 314, OA. 


Editorial 





MFA . 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 59 


1908, continued. 


1158. Smith, John H. Leuco dyes v. the 
bleach-out process. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ie 





1159. Sensitisers and desensitisers for 
bleach-out dyes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v.55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. pee: 


1160. The “Uto” bleach-out process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 68-69.) MFA 


1161. Spots on autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 4, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 95.) MFA 
aise printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Jan., 
1909, v. 16, p. 29-30, MFA. 
1162. Stained hands in autochrome work. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 87.) MFA 


1163. Steichen, Eduard J. Colour photog- 





raphy. illus. (Camera work, New York, 
1908, no. 22, p. 13-24.) +MFA 
1164. Colour photography with the 





autochrome plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 17, 1908, v. a 
p. 300-302.) MF 


Notes on development and artificial lighting. 
1165. Stenger, Erich. The Krayn screen- 
plate process. (British journal of photog- 


raphy, London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. Beare 








1166. Linienrasterplatten ftir Farben- 
photographie. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., Feb. 16, 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 87- 
90.) +MFA 
1167. Mosaic or line screen - plates 
from three-colour negatives. (British 


journal of photography, April 3, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, Dp. 30-31) 


1168. Die Transparenz der neuen Farb- 
rasterplatten. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., April 15, 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 193- 
194.) . MFA 


1169. Stenger, Erich, and Frrpinanp LEI- 
BER. On the preparation of copies of 
screen-plate transparencies. illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 1908, 
v. 55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
69-72, 76-79.) MFA 
1170. The preparation of paper prints 
from autochrome plates by means of the 
leuco bases. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 1, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, Dp. 34-35.) ) 








1171. Stieglitz, Alfred. Formalin for ob- 
viating the frilling of autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 53-54.) MFA 


1172. Stobbe, Hans. Die Photochemie 
organischer Verbindungen. (Zeitschrift 
fiir Elektrochemie, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahre. 
14, p. 473-483.) PKA 


1173. Stolze, F. Belichtungsverhaltnisse 
fur Dreifarbenfilter. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1908, 
Jahrg. 15, p. 379-380.) MFA 


1174. ——— Farbenerscheinungen bei Gela- 
tineemulsionen. (Photographische Chro- 
nik, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 431-432.) 

+MFA 


1175. Szczepanik, Jan. Transformation 
photographs on autochrome plates. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
2, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 80.) MFA 


1176. The Thames colour plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1908, v. 
55, p. 765, 802; Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 24, 72.) MFA 


1177. The Thames one-exposure colour 
process. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Dec. 4, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. eneriy 


1178. Thieme, Paul: Alcohol as an after- 
bath in colour-sensitising dry plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 

Describes a variation of procedure recommended 


by Valenta for rapid bath-sensitising of gelatine 
plates. 


1179. Three-colour filters. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, 
v. 55, p. 111-112.) MFA 


Several questions answered editorially and formulas 
for red, green, and blue given. 


1180. Tilney, F. C. Exhibition of photo- 
graphic pictures in colours by T. and O. 
Hofmeister and H. W. Miller. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 2, 
1908, v.55, p. 752-753.) MFA 
1181. Where we stand in pictorial col- 
our photography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 66-68.) 





MFA 

1182. Torchon, Paul. A new method of 
developing autochrome plates. (Bulletin 
of photography, Philadelphia, Aug. 19, 
1908, v. 3, p. 117-118.) +MFA 
Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Nov., 1908, 


v. 21, p. 222-223, MFA. 


1183. —— Sulphide toning in autochrome 
work. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 7, 1908, v.55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 60.) MFA 


60 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1908, continued. 


1184. Traut, H. Beitrage zur Geschichte 
der Dreifarbenphotographie. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Jan. 26, 
1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 49-54.) +MFA 
ee the work of Joseph Alberts from 1874 to 


1185. Tschoerner, Ludwig. Uber Otto 
Pfenningers Photographien in nattrlichen 
Farben. illus. (Photographische Korres- 
pondenz, Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 496- 
502.) MFA 


1186. L’Unichrome. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 5, 1908, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 47.) MFA 
A universal developer especially designed for auto- 
chrome plates. 
1187. Valenta, Eduard. Experiments on 
the sensitising power of some new dyes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 
1188. Two varnish formulae. (British 
journal of photography, London, March 6, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 20.) MFA 
1189. —— Uber die Autochromeplatte. 
illus. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 24-29.) MFA 
Description and development directions. 
1190. Zur Kenntnis der Autochrom- 
platten. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fiir 1908, Halle a. S., 
1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 143-145.) MFA 


1191. Van Deventer, J. G. The Warner- 
Powrie method. (Nature, London, Aug. 
20, 1908, v. 78, p. 376.) OA 


Abstract. 


1192. Wall, Edward John. A diagramma- 
tic explanation of the autochrome process. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 3, 1908, v.55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 55-56.) MFA 
1193. A green-light carbon. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 28-29.) MFA 
1194. The H. & D. number of the auto- 
chrome plate. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, July 3, 1908, v.55, 
Colour photography stipplement, ©. 56.) 
MFA 
1195. The Society of Colour Photog- 
raphers’ exhibition. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 41.) 

















MFA 
1196. Wallace, Robert James. The auto- 
chrome plate. (Popular astronomy, 


Northfield, Minn., 1908, v. 16, p. 83-91.) 
OMA 


Partial reprint in British journal of photography, 
London, March 6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 21-23, MFA. 

Gives results of precise measurements, 


1197. ——- The function of a color - filter 
and isochromatic plate in astronomical 
photography. (Astrophysical journal, Chi- 
cago, 1908, v.27, p. 106-124.) OMA 


1198. Wallon, Etienne. Autochromie et tri- 
chromie. (Société francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 
24, p. 381-402.) MFA 


Also printed in Photo-gazette, Paris, Dec. 25, 1908, 
année 19, p. 23-30, MFA. 


1199. Warburg, J. C. Monsieur Meys’ 
autochrome pictures. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 33-34, tha 


Description of exhibition at Cannes. 


1200. Ward, John J. A remedy for flat 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, p. te 


1201. The Warner - Powrie screen - plate. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 72.) MFA 


1202. Watkins, Alfred. The light filter in 
autochrome photography. (British jour- ~ 
nal of photography, London, Dec. 4, 1908, 
v. 55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
96.) MFA 


1203: A simple autochrome method. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 2, 1908)over5o) se alone photography 
supplement, p. 7374 4.) MFA 
Suggestions for exposure and development. 
Also printed in Bulletin of photography, Philadel- 


phia, Nov. 4, 1908, v. 3, p. 293-296, *MFA, and 
Photo-era, Boston, Feb., 1909, v. 22, p. 83-89, MFA. 


1204. The Watkins special Bee meter for 
autochrome plates, made by the Watkins 
Meter Co., Hereford. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ee 





1205. Worel, Karl. Das Verfahren mit den 
Autochromplatten der Gebrtider Lumiére. 
illus. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik ftir 1908, Halle a. S., 
1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 49-53.) MFA 


1206. Zeiss autochrome accessories. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
10, 1908, v. 55, p. 30-31.) MFA 


Reference to camera and to carrier for light filter. 


1909 
1207. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 


Exposures for colour negatives. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Oct., 1909, new 
series, v. 33, p. 341-342.) MFA 


Also pented in British journal of photography 
London, Jan. 7, 1910, v. 57, p. 2-3, Mrd : 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 61 


1909, continued. 


1208. Adan, R. Nouveau procédé d’obten- 
tion de plaques, pour la photographie des 
couleurs, de M. Szczepanik. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 331-333.) MFA 


1209. Alcide Ducos du Hauron. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 80.) MFA 


Obituary notice. 


1210. The Aurora colour plate. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 23.) MFA 


1211. Autochrome plates. (British journal 
of photography, London, March 26, 1909, 
wD, P. 257.) MFA 


Brief reference to reduction in price. 


1212. Bayley, R. Child. Color plates com- 

pared. illus. (Bulletin of photography, 

Philadelphia, Feb. 10, 1909, v. 4, p. 89-90.) 
+MFA 


Comparison of Thames and Omnicolore plates. 


1213. ——- Comparisons of colour screen- 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 29, 1909, v.56, p.89.) MFA 


Praises the autochrome. 


1214. The complete photographer. 
New York: Doubleday, Page & Co., 1909. 
aye 410 po. 1 1, 60 pl., 5 ports. 3. ed. illus. 
Se. MFE 


Clear account of autochrome principle, p. 283-291. 


1215. Reproduction par contact et par 
réduction des chromotypes sur plaques 
autochromes. (Société francaise de photo- 
graphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 2, 
tome 25, p. 325-329.) 


1216. Bennett, Colin N. The Thames plate 
as a fix-out process. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 1909, 
v. 56, Colour photography supplement, p. 
57-59.) MFA 


Non-reversal duplication process. 


ee ae Thames plates and colour ad- 
justments. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 89-90.) MFA 


1218. The Bleachout process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 5, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 88.) MFA 


Refers to German patent no. 209993 of Dr. H. 
Stobbe. 


1219. Bordeaux, Jules. La photographie 
et les couleurs. (Revue générale, Bru- 
xelles, 1909, v. 90, p. 905+922.) * DM 


1220. Bourke, Walter. An autochrome ex- 
perience. (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 17, 1909, v. 56, p. 735.) MFA 


Asks why the color disappeared from an auto- 
chrome plate after having been finished in the usual 











way. Answers from three correspondents in above 
journal, Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 80. 


1221. Bourrée, M. H. Practical notes on 
the autochrome process. (British journal 
of photography, London, March 5, 1909, 
v. 56, Colour photography supplement, p. 
22.) MFA 


Directions for developing, reducing, and drying. 


1222. Calmels, H. Nouveaux écrans colo- 
rés de Wratten and Wainwright, Ltd. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 409- 
410.) MFA 


1223. Carr, Sydney Herbert. The intensi- 
fication of autochromes. (British journal 
of photography, London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 
56, Colour photography supplement, pag 


1224. Chéron, André. Appareil pour la 
photographie et la projection en couleurs 
par sélection trichrome. illus. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1909, série 2, tome 25, p.117-121.) MFA 
Also printed in Photo-gazetie, Paris, April 25, 1909, 
année 19, p. 109-112, MFA. 
1225. —— A portable camera for one-ex- 
posure colour photography. illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1909, v.56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 20-21.) MFA 


1226. Collodion emulsion. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Sept. 17, 
1909, v. 56, p. 730.) MFA 


Tells how to avoid spots. 


1227. Colour photography at the Dresden 
Exhibition. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, June 4, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 41-42.) MFA 


1228. Comley, Henry J. Color photogra- 
phy. (In: J. B. Schriever, Complete self- 
instructing library of practical photogra- 
phy. Seranton, 1909, 8°). vi8)p. hse 


Detailed instructions for autochromes, three-color 
photography, and pinatype. 


1229. Corke, H. Essenhigh. Studio por- 
traiture with the Thames plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 3, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 65-66.) MFA 


1230. ——- Uto prints from the Thames 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 5, 1909, v. 56, p. are 


1231. Coustet, Ernest. Les plaques omni- 
colores. illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
April 25, 1909, année 19, p. 101-108.) MFA 


Details of exposure and development. 


1232. Crémier, Victor. Pour les débutants 
“Autochromistes.” (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
Sept. 25, 1909, année 19, p. 190-195.) MFA 


Exposure and development. 


62 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1909, continued. 


1233. Some essential points in the 
autochrome process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. oe 


1234. Sur la traduction des couleurs 
par la plaque “autochrome.” (Photo- 
‘ gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 1909, année 20, 
p. 4-12.) MFA 


1235. Dalmas, R., comte de. Produit pour 
inversion des plaques autochromes en 
voyage. (Société francaise de _photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 


25, p. 102-103.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 40, MFA. 


1236. Damry, A. On the intensification of 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 5.) MFA 


1237. Daur, Guido. Mixtures of dyes. as 
sensitisers of gelatine plates. illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 1909, 
v. 56, p. 572-575, 592-595, 610-612, 630-633, 
649-652.) MFA 


An abridged translation of thesis presented at the 
University of Munster. 








1238. Developing panchromatic plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 16, 1909, v. 56, p. 546.) MFA 


Brief reference to acid developer for red sensitive 
plates. German patent granted to R. Krayn. 
1239. Devices for the automatic demonstra- 
tion of facts of light, colour, and photog- 
raphy. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, 1909, v.56, p. 476-480, 499- 
501.) MFA 
Devices used by Dr. Goldberg at the Dresden Exhi- 
bition. 
1240. Dillaye, Frédéric. Le développe- 
ment surveillé des plaques autochromes. 


illus. (In his: Les nouveautés photo- 
graphiques 1909. Paris, 1909. 8°. p. 108—- 
117.) MFA 


1241. Exposé et critique d’un nouveau 
mode de traitement des plaques auto- 
chromes. (In his: Les nouveautés photo- 
graphiques 1909. Paris, 1909. 8°. p.117- 
124.) MFA 


1242. D’Osmond, H. Le portrait instan- 
tané sur autochromes. illus. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, June 25, 1909, année 19, p. 
141-146.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, p. 60-61, MFA. 


1243. Drake - Brockman, H. G. Auto- 
chromes and extremes of contrast. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
1, 1909, 
ment, p. 73.) 


Also printed in Photo-gazette, Paris, 
1910, année 20, p. 86-89, MFA. 





March 25, 


v. 56, Colour photography supple- — 
MFA > 


1244. The Dufay dioptichrome  screen- 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 39.) MFA 


1245. Engelken. Ozo-pinatype in mono- 
chrome and colour photographs. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 7, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photeg are supple- 
ment, p. 36-37.) MFA 


1246. Facsimile reproduction of coloured 
originals. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, April 23, 1909, v. 56, p. sae 


Editorial comment that Dr. Mees’s book omits a 
certain process. Dr. Mees answers in the issue of 
April 30, 1909, v. 56, p. 348. 


1247. The Fading of the autochrome col- 
our screen. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, July 9, 1909, v. 56, p. ga | 


1248. Farbige Kinematographen - Aufnah- 


men (Kinemacolor). (Photographische 
Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 120- 
1Zi3) MFA 


1249. Farmer, Howard. The reproduction 
of autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. seeks 


1250. Fenske, E. The Aurora colour filter- 
plate. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


1251. —— A method of producing positives 
direct on gelatine plates. (British journal 
of photography, London, June 4, 1909, v. 
56, Colour photography supplement, Rank 


1252. Flashlight autochrome portraits. 

(British journal of photography, London, 

Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 

supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
Method of Mr. B. J. Falk. 


1253. Forestier, E. Photographie des cou- 
leurs. Trichromie. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
Oct. 25, 1909, année 19, p. 208-212.) MFA 


Geisler process. 


1254. Four-colour stereoscopic photogra- 
phy. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Jan. 29, 1909, v. 56, p. eels, 


British patent no. 28764 of 1907. For comments 


see issue of Feb. 25, 1909, v. 56, p. 98 


1255. Frank, Max. Die Farbenphotogra- 
phie auf der Dresdener Ausstellung. (Pho- 
tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., Oct. 13, 
1909, Jahrg. 16, p. 513-515.) +MFA 


1256. Friedburg, L. H. Ueber die Photo- 
graphie in Farben. illus. (Technologist, 
New York, 1909, v. 14, p. 137-157.) VA 


Historical. 


WE i, 
ne 3 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY rar) 


1909, continued. 


1257. Fritz, Felix. A suggested modifica- 
tion of the Krayn screen-plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 8. MFA 


1257a. Gargam de Moncetz. Formule de 
sensibilisation chromatique pour le rouge 
extréme et le commencement de l’infra 
rouge. (Académie des sciences. Comptes 
“ieee Paris, Nov. 15, 1909, tome 149, rT) 
851-852.) * EO 


1258. Gebhard, Kurt. Eine Bemerkung zum 
Ausbleichverfahren. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, Feb., 1909, Bd. 46, 

MFA 





p. 63-65.) 
1259. Nachtrag zur Theorie des Aus- 
bleichverfahrens. (Photographische Kor- 


poet, Wien, Dec., 1909, Bd. 46, p. 
557.) MFA 


1260. Notiz zum Ausbleichverfahren. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
June, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 280.) MFA 


1261. Zur Theorie des Ausbleichens 
organischer Farbstoffe. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, April, 1909, Bd. 46, 
p. 185-186.) MFA 


1262. Zur Theorie des Ausbleichver- 
fahrens. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 457-470, 508- 
Sly, 553-557.) MFA 


1263. Gephard, Karl. A contribution to 
the chemistry of the bleach-out process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 


1264. Gilchrist, Charles A. Color photog- 
raphy. illus. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, 1909, v. 4, p. 379-380; v. 5, 
p. 8-9, 38-41.) +MFA 


General article. 


1265. The Goerz autochrome dark - slide. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 5, 1909, v.56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 24.) MFA 


1266. Goldsmith, Alfred Norton. Modern 
practice in color photography. (School of 
Mines quarterly, New York, 1909, v. 30, p. 
130-138.) OA 


1267. Gravier, Charles. 
des couleurs simplifiée. 
de photographie. Bulletin, 
série 2, tome 25, p. 411-412.) 


Simplification of autochrome procedure. 


1268. A Half - guinea autochrome outfit. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 24.) MFA 
Plates, filter, chemicals, measures, etc., supplied 
by The Lumiére N. A. Co. 
1269. The Henderson award. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 











La photographie 
(Société francaise 
Paris, 1909, 

MFA 


1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 80.) MFA 


Brief reference to grant to Mr. C. L. Finlay for 
his work in connection with the Thames plate. 


1270. Die Herstellung des Rasters der Om- 
nicoloreplatte. (Photographische Chronik, 
Haliesa.S., May.5,.1909, Jahre. 16, 9.227.) 

+MFA 


1271. Hitchins, Alfred Bishop. An auto- 
chrome hint. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 64.) MFA 


Method of overcoming blueness. 


1272. Houdaille. Recherches expérimen- 
tales sur la détermination du temps de 
pose des plaques autochromes. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 292-297.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 5, 1909, v.56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 69-71, MFA. 


1273. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
compensation filter for the autochrome 
plate. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 14-15, 17-18.) MFA 
1274. The correct orthochromatic 
light-filter. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. ba A 





Author employs the sector-disc apparatus of Abney 
for measuring the luminosities of the colored papers 
used in making the test chart. 

1275: The effect of illumination on 
exposure and viewing of autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 26-29.) MFA 


1276. rMetallic screens for auto- 
chromes., illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 4, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.47.) MFA 


eae The sensitiveness of dyes to 
light. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 63-64.) MFA 


Use of glycerine, salts of arsenic, and other sub- 
stances to promote bleaching. 











1278. Johnson, George Lindsay. Photo- 
graphic optics and colour photography, in- 
cluding the camera, kinematograph, opti- 
cal lantern, and the theory and practice of 
image formation... London: Ward & 
Co., 1009 cesses alluss 34 MFH 


1279. Jougla, J., the younger. Sur les 
plaques ‘Omnicolores” de la Société 
Jougla. (Société francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 
25, p. 199-203.) MFA 


1280. Klein, Henry Oscar. My experience 
with the autochrome plate. (American 
annual of photography for 1910, New 
York, 1909, v. 24, p. 130-133.) MFA 


64 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1909, continued. 


1281. Knowles, Hugh C. Screen plate 
color photography. (American annual of 
photography for 1910, New York, 1909, 
v. 24, p. 38-41.) MFA 


Discusses different commercial plates. 


1282. The Latest color plate —the Omni- 
colore. illus. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, Feb. 10, 1909, v. 4, p. 88-89.) 

+MFA 


1283. Lefort, V. Les peintres et la photo- 
graphie des couleurs. (Photo - gazette, 
Paris, May 25, 1909, année 19, p. eae 


Relation of color photography to art. 


1284. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Highly 
reflecting lantern screens for autochrome 
and other projections. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 4, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 44-47.) MFA 


1285. A three-colour projection lan- 
tern. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 88.) MFA 


1286. —— Ueber einen neuen Projektions- 
schirm mit metallischer Oberflache fiir 





farbige und lichtswache Bilder. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1909, 
Jahrg. 16, p. 245-248, 256-260.) +MFA 


1287. Lelong, Adrien. 
without a dark-room. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. oe 


Describes developing dish and development. 
1288. A suggested method of obtain- 
ing paper prints from_ screen - plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 


Autochrome work 





1289. Lenses for colour work. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 15, 
1909, v. 56, p. 804.) MFA 


Recommends the Zeiss Apochromatic Tessar. 


1290. Leon, L. C. An unsuspected cause 
of failure in autochrome work. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 64.) MFA 


Chromatic aberration due to unscrewed cell of lens. 


1291. Letouzey, V. Appareil pour voir par 
transparence les plaques a réseau poly- 
chrome, construit par M. E. Lorillon. 
illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 83- 
84.) MFA 


1292. Limmer, Fr. Eine Betrachtung tiber 
die Fixierung von Farbenanpassungsbil- 
dern. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, May, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 226-227.) MFA 





1293. Ein Fortschritt auf dem Gebiete 
der indirekten Farbenphotographie. (Zeit- 
schrift fiir angewandte Chemie, Leipzig, 
1909, Jahrg. 22, p. 14-15.) PKA 


Szcezepanik process. 


1294. Sensibilisatoren ftir das Farben- 
anpassungsverfahren. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, Jahrg. 46, p. 
4-14.) MFA 

Comment on Dr. Smith’s article in British journal 


of photography on sensitizers and desensitizers for the 
bleachout process. 


1295. Die Szczepanik-Hollborn-Vera- 
colorplatte. illus. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, Aug., 1909, Bd. 46, p. 
373-379.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 2, 1909, v.56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 49-51, MFA, 

1296. Eine Zusammenstellung der fiir 
das Farbenanpassungsverfahren wichtigen 
Literatur. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, March, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 104— 
106.) MFA 


Bibliography covering years 1801-1908. 


1297. Loewy, Alfred. Uber Dunkelkam- 
merbeleuchtung, Haltbarkeit der Auto- 
chromplatten und anderes aus der Praxis 











der Autochromphotographie. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, 
Bd. 46, p. 121-123, 159-166.) MFA 


Translation in British journal of photography, 
London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 37-38, FA. 

Deals with darkroom safety light, a three-solution 
pyro formula, intensifying and reducing, tests for 
permanency, and the action of heat upon the plate. 


1298. Lotus, H. Nouveau procédé de fab- 
rication de plaques en couleurs. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, Dec. 25, 1909, année 20, p. 
36-37.) MFA 


Szcezepanik process. 


1299. Lumiére, Auguste. Traitement 
simplifié des plaques autochromes. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 449-451.) 
MFA 


1300. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
A magazine apparatus for the viewing of 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 


Communication to the Société francaise de photo- 





graphie. Apparatus is called the chromodiascope. 
1301. Note sur un dispositif permet- 
tant de reproduire, par contact, des 


chromotypes obtenus sur plaques auto- 
chromes. illus. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 
2, tome 25, p. 457-459.) MFA 


1302. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. Sur 
la correction de la surexposition et de la 
sousexposition au cours du développe- 
ment dans le traitement simplifié des 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 65 


1909, continued. 


plaques autochromes. 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, 
série 2, tome 25, p. 210-213.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 3, 1909, v.56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 67, MFA: 

1303. Ueber die Moglichkeit, den Ex- 
positionsgrad der Autochromplatten absu- 
schatzen und die Zusammensetzung des 
Entwicklers im Laufe der Entwicklung zu 
modifizieren, um die tiber- oder unterex- 
ponierten Bilder zu verbesseren. (Jahr- 
buch ftir Photographie und Reproduc- 
tionstechnik fir 1909, Halle a. S., 1909, 
Jahrg. 23, p. 27-31.) MFA 


1304. Luther, R. A new colour process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 88.) MFA 


Process of Russian inventor Loundin. Claims that 
instantaneous exposures may be given. 

Also printed in Bulletin of photography, Philadel- 
phia, Dec. 29, 1909, v. 5, p. 408, ;MFA. 


1305. Makers’ instructions for the use of 
the “omnicolore” plates. (British journal 
of photography, London, Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 13-14.) 

MFA 


Translated abstract of booklet issued by Messrs. 
Jougla. 


(Société francaise 





1306. Making autochromes by enclosed arc 
light. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 29, 1909, v.56, p.86.) MFA 


Brief reference to filter. 


1307. Malby, H. T., and others. The auto- 
chrome process in many hands. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, March, 1909, new 
series, v. 33, p. 136-142.) MFA 


1308. Mareschal, G. The effect of develop- 
ing solution on the sensitiveness of the 
autochrome plate. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 88.) MFA 


1309. Emploi des plaques auto- 
chromes ayant subi l’action du développe- 
ment. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Oct. 25, 1909, 
année 19, p. 213.) MFA 


1310. Persistance de la_ sensibilité 
chromatique des plaques autochromes. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 410- 











411.) MFA 
7311. Reproduction des plaques en 
couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Dec. 25, 


1909, année 20, p. 37-38.) MFA 


Results of prize contest by the journal La Vulgari- 
sation scientifique. 


1312. Martin-Duncan, F. Some further 
experiments with the autochrome plate. 


(British journal of photography, London, 
April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, eos.) MFA 


Suggestions as to development. Use of special 
Lumiére screen made for microphotography with the 
electric arc. 


1313. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. 
Characteristics of the ‘“omnicolore” screen- 
plate. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, Dp. 9-11.) MFA 


1314. Color and photography. (Ameri- 
can annual of photography for 1910, New 
York, 1909, v. 24, p. 20-23.) MFA 








131s: The photography of coloured 
objects. New York:,. Tennant & Ward 
r1909;. vi, 69° p. “illus. 8°. MFK 


Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, April 16, 1909, v. 56, p. 311, MFA. The Library 
also has 4th edition entered under Eastman Kodak 
Company. 

1316. A report on the present condi- 
tion of sensitometry. (British journal of 
photography, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
p. 685-687.) MF FA 


See section on color sensitometry. 





1317. Meister Lucius & Briining. Instruc- 
tions for the use of Hoechst filter dyes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 79.) . MFA 


1318. Merckens, W. Colour prints on 
paper by the bleachout process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 1-2.) MFA 


Suitable dyes for the purpose. Translation of part 
of an article in the Revue technique et industrielle. 


1319. Miethe, Adolf. Photographische 
Aufnahmen vom Ballon aus. Nach einer 
Serie von Vortragen, die im Auftrag des 
Berliner Vereins ftir Luftschiffahrt gehal- 
ten worden sind. Halle a. S.: Wilhelm 


Knapp, 1909. 3 p.1., 70 p., 1 pl. 8°. (En- 
cyklopadie der Photographie. Heft coe 


Contains a chapter on three-color aerial photogra- 
phy, for a translation of which see British journal of 
aha edee ony: London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 86, MFA. 


1320. Unter der Sonne Oberagyptens 
neben den Pfaden der Wissenschaft. Ber- 
lin: Dietrich Reimer, 1909. 4 pL, mae p. 
illus. 8°. LF 


“These [the illustrations] are not only in mono- 
chrome, but include some fifty examples of colour 
photography from nature by the three-exposure 
method, which Professor Miethe may be said to have 
used more extensively and to better effect than any- 
one else as a result of_his introduction of the iso- 
cyanine sensitisers.”” — From a review in the British 
journal of photography, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 56, MFA, 





1321. Miller, Malcolm Dean. The auto- 
chrome process. (American annual of 
photography for 1909, New York, 1908, 
v. 13, p. 77-78.) ; MFA 


66 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1909, continued. 

1322. Monpillard, Félix. Ecran pour la 
microphotographie sur plaques auto- 
chromes, avec la lumiére oxyhydrique. 


(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 245— 
247.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 61-62, MFA. . 

1323. Etude sur les dominantes colo- 
rees en photographie autochrome. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 404-409, 
419-426.) MFA 


1324. Indoor autochrome portraits by 
flashlight. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p.51-52.) MFA 


From the Bulletin of the Société francaise de 
photographie, 


1325. Mueller, Gustav. On the redevelop- 
ment of autochromes which have practi- 
cally disappeared in the fixing bath. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 40.) MFA 


1326. N., A.J. Imperfect register in three- 
colour work. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 9, 1909, v. 56, p. 290.) 

MFA 


1327. Namias, Rodolfo. The conversion 
of silver images into those of lead and 
other metals and the use of the compounds 
as mordants for obtaining prints in dif- 
ferent colours. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 68- 
69.) MFA 


1328. Lead compounds as fixatives of 
dyes in three-colour projection. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 3, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 91.) MFA 











1329. New Lumiére plate. (Bulletin of 
photography, Philadelphia, Dec. 29, 1909, 
v. 5, p. 408.) ; +MFA 


Brief reference to autostereoscopic plate. 


1330. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. Col- 
oured films on metallic surfaces in relation 
to colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. wae 


Describes the experiments of Joseph Girard. 


1331. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Drei- 
farbenkameras fiir einmalige Exposition 
u. a.— Die Dufay-Platte. illus. (Jahr- 
buch fiir Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik fiir 1909, Halle a. S., 1909, Jahrg. 
23, p. 170-176.) MFA 


1332. Die Omnicolor - Platte. © 
graphische Welt, 
Jahrg. 23, p. 49-51.) 


Formulas for working. 


(Photo- 
Leipzig, April, 1909, 
MFA 


1333. The Omnicolore plate in practice. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 4, 1909, v. 56, Colour photograph 
supplement, p. 42-43.) MF 


1334. The Omnicolore plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 4, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 48.) MFA 


1335. The Omnicolore screen-plate. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 
7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 38-39.) MFA 


1336. The Omnicolore screen-plate. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
3, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 96.) MFA 


“It is very evident that omnicolore transparencies 
must be kept away from strong light if they are to be 
preserved.”’ 


1337. Die Omnicolore-Platte fiir Farben- 


photographie. (Photographische Mittei- 
lungen, Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p.74.) MFA 
1338. Palocsay, Albin von. Neue Erfah- 


rungen aus der Praxis des Autochrom- 
prozesses. illus. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, Dec., 1909, Bd. 46, p. 
569-579.) MFA 


Apparatus for viewing. 


1339. Panchromatic collodion emulsion. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 16, 1909, v. 56, p. 557.) MFA 


Uses pinaverdol and ethyl violet. 


1340. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Color 
photography as a paying proposition. 
(American annual of photography for 
1910, New York, 1909, v. 24, p. satire 


1341. Personnaz, Antonin. Apropos of 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 67-68.) MFA 


Defends autochromes as “art.” 


1342. Pledge, John H. The properties of 
the Dufay dioptichrome screen-plate and 
the new Warner -Powrie screen - plate. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 81-83.) MFA 


1343. Poulenc Fréres. Appareil pour 1’ex- 
amen des vues par transparence et notam- 
ment des vues sur plaques autochromes. 
illus. (Société francaise de. photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 
39-40.) MFA 


1344. Power, H. D’Arcy. Bromide prints in 
two or more colors. illus. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Oct., 1909, v. 16, p. peas 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 67 


1909, continued. 


1345. Simplified development of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 


Uses rodinal or amidol for the first development. 


1346. Powrie, John H. La “Florence helio- 
chromic plate.” illus. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, sé- 
rie 2, tome 25, p. 386-393.) MFA 


1347. Practical methods of autochrome 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 29-31.) MFA 


1348. Quentin, H. Color photography. 
The “omnicolor” plate. (Scientific Ameri- 
can supplement, New York, 1909, v. 67, p. 
359.) TT VA 


1349, Reproduction of screen - plate 
transparencies in paper. (British journal 
of photography, London, Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. eres 








Three negatives are made from autochrome plate 
through appropriate screens and prints made by a 
method such as the three-color carbon process. 


1350. Renwick, F. F. Isolating the filter 
cuts of a screen-plate. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, bier 


1351. Reproductions of autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 96.) MFA 


Warns against entrusting autochromes to photo- 
engravers who are careless in regard to the heat from 
arc lights. 


1352. Revised prices of autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


Prices of different sized plates and of chemicals. 


1353. Scheffer, W. Further notes on the 
“omnicolore” plate. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, March 5, 





1909, v. 56, p. 18-19.) MFA 
1354. Notes on the degree of fineness 
of colour screen-plates. illus. (British 


journal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 62-63.) MFA 


1355. Die Omnicolore- Platte. illus. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1909, Bd. 46, p. 318-322, 482-484.) MFA 


1356. On a new type of Warner- 
Powrie screen-plate. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, June 4, 1909, 
v. 56,-Colour photography supplement, p. 
43-44.) MFA 








1357. —— The structure and properties of 
the “omnicolore” plate. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 5, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 11-13.) MFA 


1358. Schloemann, Eduard. Die neueren 

Forschungen in der Farbenphotographie 

nach Gabriel Lippmann. (Photographische 

Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 355- 

372, 407-414.) MFA 
Bibliography, p. 413-414. 


1359. Seyewetz, A. Die Autochromplatte. 
(Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
1909, Bd. 46, p. 295-300, 309-312.) MFA 


Abstract of paper read before the Congress of 
Applied Photography in Dresden. 
1360. Sforza, Francis. Autochromes and 
the Sterry method. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 95-96.) 
MFA 
States that the Sterry solution is useless as re- 
straining the development of autochrome plates. 
1361. Suggested processes of helio- 
chromy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 64.) MFA 
Hopes for “a sensitive film formed of a perfectly 
combined mixture of three emulsions sensitised for 
the three primary colours...to be developed by the 
most simple treatment.”’ . 
1362. Simplified treatment of autochrome 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 26.) MFA 
Suggestions by the Lumiére N. A. Co. 


1363. Smith, John H. Note on the influ- 
ence of the presence of photographic de- 
veloping agents in the bleachout process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 23.) MFA 


1364. Printing frame for autochrome 
and other colour-screen positives. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 2-5.) MFA 








1365. Spots on autochromes. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 22, 1909, 
¥n00, Da / 6.) MFA 


1366. Stereoscopic autochromes. (British 
iournal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 59.) MFA 


1367. Stobbe, Hans. Bleach-out colour 
photographs. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 56.) MFA 


Abstract of German patent. 


1368. Stolze, F. Belichtung fiir die Schat- 
ten und Belichtungsverhaltnisse ftir Drei- 
farbenfilter. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., March 3, 1909, Jahrg. 16, p. 117- 
118.) +MFA 


68 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1909, continued. 


1369. Streissler, Alfred. Ein neues Ras- 

ter fiir die Farbenphotographie der Gebr. 

Lumie€re. (Photographische Welt, Leip- 

zig, ues 1909, Jahrg. 23, p. 121- 122.) MFA 
Dp: . No. 207750. 


1370. Bean Jan. Protective varnishes 
for the autochrome plate. (British journal 
of photography, London, June 4, 1909, v. 
56, Colour photography supplement, vee 


1371. The Thames colour plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 2, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 56.) MFA 


Eetracts from instructions issued by the company. 


1372. The Thames colour plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 3, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 66.) MFA 
Suggested development for new combined form of 
the plate. 
1373. The Thames colour plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1909, v. 
Sieh. 150,170; 180,.205.) MFA 


1374. Thames Colour Plate Company. 
Monochrome and colour results at one ex- 
posure. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 4, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 48.) MFA 


1375. The Thames Colour Plate Co. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 80.) MFA 


Brief account of their exhibition. 


1376. The Thames Colour Plate, Ltd. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 96.) MFA 


Gives a list of the incorporators. 


1377. Thieme, Paul. Autochrom-Aufnah- 
men auf Reisen. (Photographische Mit- 
teilungen, Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 81-84.) 
MFA 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 40, A, 
1378. Thovert, J. Instantaneous exposures 
on the autochrome plate. (British journal 
of photography, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. a 


1379. Three-colour projection. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 3, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 72.) MFA 
_The mirror in the Ives kromskop is replaced by a 
prism. 
1380. Toch, Maximilian. The Lumiére 
color process simplified. (American pho- 
tography, Boston, May, 1909, v. 3, p.274— 
278.) MFA 
Suggestions for development. 


Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, July, 1909, v. 23, 
p. 20-23, MFA. 


1381. Valenta, Eduard. Einiges tiber Om- 
nicoloreplatte. (Photographische Korres- 
pondenz, Wien, May, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 234— 
236.) MFA 


For colored illustration showing grains of auto- 
chrome, omnicolore, Warner-Powrie, and Thames 
plates, see November number, opp. p. 552. 

1382. Meine Erfahrungen mit der 
“Omnicoloreplatte.” (Jahrbuch fiir Photo- 








graphie und Reproductionstechnik fir 
1909, Halle a. S., 1909, Jahrg. 23, p. 150- 
1553) MFA 
1383. Die Thames Farbenplatte. illus. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
Jan., 1909, Bd. 46, p. 32-35.) MFA 


1384. Vereinfachte Arbeitsanweisung fiir 
die Entwicklung der Autochromplatten. 


(Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
1909, Bd. 46, p. 121.) MFA 
1385. Wall, Edward John. Photography 


in colours. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Nov., 1909, new series, v. 33, p. 379- 
380.) MFA 


Quotes from a four-page pamphlet in Spanish on 
the Seebeck process. 


1386. Warburg, J. C.’ Autochrome prices 
—a protest. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 7, 1909, v.56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 40.) MFA 


1387. Ward, Henry Snowden. Orthochro- 
matics, light-filtering, color photography. 
(Photographic annual, London, 1909, 5th 
ed., p. 30-45.) MFA 


Recipes for various processes, including Lumiére, 
autochrome, omnicolore, Thames, and two-color helio- 
chromy. 


1388. Waterhouse, James. The photo- 
graphic work of Messrs. A. Lumiére et ses 
fils, of Lyons. (Photographic journal, 
London, March, 1909, new series, v. 33, p. 
143-145.) MFA 


1389. ———- Wiinsch’s researches on the pri- 
mary components of white light. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 7, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 34-36.) MFA 


1390. Watkins time thermometer for auto- 
chrome work. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography. supplement, p. 72.) MFA 


1391. Wentzel, Fritz. Experiments in col- 
our-sensitising chloride emulsions. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1909, v. 56, p. 5-7, 22-23, 41-44, wage, 


1392. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Uber Far- 
benphotographie und verwandte naturwis- 
senschaftliche Fragen. Vortrag gehalten 
auf der 80. Naturforscherversammlung zu 
Coln a. Rh...am 24. September, 1908. 
Leipzig: J. A. Barth, 1909. 88p.,3 pl. 8°. 

MFV 


Bibliography, p. 49-51. 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 69 


1909, continued. 


1393. Young, Sidney L. A three-lens one- 
exposure colour camera. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 2, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 32.) MFA 


1394. Zavoda, Bohuslav. A daylight roll- 
holder for three-colour exposures. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 


supplement, p. 87.) MFA 
1395. Zu den neuen Farbrasterplatten. 
illus. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 


Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 122-124.) MFA 


Autochrome, Omnicolore, Thames, Warner-Powrie 
plates. 
1396. Zur Entwicklung der Autochrom- 
platten. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 
Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 347-348.) MFA 


1910 


1397. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
On the extinction of colour by reduction 
of luminosity. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 1, 1910, v.57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ek 

A 


1398. Autochrome_ reversing solution. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, p. 91-92.) MF 


Reference to suggestion by Comte Dalmas. 


1399. Autochrome work. (British journal 
of photography, London, July 22, 1910, v. 
57, p. 563-564.) MFA 


_ Correspondence regarding dark spot in centre of 

picture. 

1400. Beach, F. C. A new system of color 

photography. illus. (American photogra- 

phy, Boston, July, 1910, v. 4, p. 413-414.) 
MFA 


Frederic E. Ives’s process. 


1401. Bennett, Colin N. Note on a pioneer 
screen-ruled roll-film. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 2, 
1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 66-67.) MFA 
Describes a small sample which he thinks is of 
German origin. 
1402. On compensating screen-plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 17-19.) MFA 


1403. Bouldoyre, R. The use of ordinary 
plates in determining exposure for auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 86-87.) MFA 


1404. Bouton, L., and J. Feytaup. La pho- 
tographie stéréoscopique en couleur et ses 
applications scientifiques. (Académie de 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, May 30, 
1910, tome 150, p. 1424-1425.) * EO 





1405. Braham, A. C. The Dufay diopti- 
chrome colour plate. (British journal of 
photography, London, Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. Gus 
MF 


Paper and discussion at the Royal stefan 
Society. Working instructions are given. 


1406. Burnham, J. Appleton. Observations 
on the autochrome process. (Photo-era, 
Boston, May, 1910, v. 24, p. 197-201.) MFA 


1407. Casson, W. A. Exposure and de- 
velopment in colour work. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 4, 1910, 
v. 57, Colour photography supplement, p. 
16.) MFA 


1408. Colour photography at the Royal 
Botanic Society. (British journal of pho- 


togtapny,sondon, = Oct. 7,.- 1910, -¥. S7; 
Colour photography supplement, p. 77.) 
MFA 


System attributed to Mr. E. T. Butler shown to be 
covered by an earlier patent. 


1409. Comley, Henry J. Color photogra- 
phy on paper as a commercial proposition. 
illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, July, 
1910, v. 17, p. 261-266.) MFA 


1410. Corke, H. Essenhigh. Direct color 
photography — newest color plate demon- 
strated. illus. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, Dec. 28, 1910, v. 7, p. 4 
434.) +MFA 


Dufay process. 


1411. The Dufay dioptichrome plate. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 5, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 57-58.) MFA 


Directions for working. 


1412. Screen-plate colour work. (Pho- 

tographic journal, London, Jan., 1910, new 

series, v. 34, p. 4-9 MFA 
With discussion. 


Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Dec. 10, 1909, v. 56, p. 959-960, MFA. 


1413. Coustet, Ernest. Photographie des 
couleurs; les plaques dioptichromes. (Re- 
vue scientifique, Paris, 1910, série 5, année 
48, semestre 1, p. 494-497.) OA 


1414. Les plaques dioptichromes. illus. 
(Photo-gazette, Paris, April 25, 1910, année 
20, p. 101-107.) MFA 


Dufay process. 


1415. Crémier, Victor. 
sur autochromes. illus. (Photo - gazette, 
Paris, 1910, année 21, p. 21-26.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 9-10, M ‘A. 


1416. Dalmas, R., comte de. Sujets en- 
cadrés sur plaques autochromes. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1910, série 3, tome 1, p. 396-398.) MFA 


Also ppatee in Photo-gazette, Paris, Aug. 25, 1911, 
année 21, 187, MFA, and British journal of pho- 
tography, Perndon, Jan. 6, 1911, v.58, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 7-8, "MFA. 











Coucher de soleil 


70 THE NEW YORK ‘PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1910, continued. 


1417. —— Utilisation des plaques auto- 
chromes d’une ancienneté relative de fabri- 
cation. (Société francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1910, série 3, tome 1, 
p. 102-103.) MFA 

Suggests much increased exposure. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32, MFA. 


1418. Dawson, Oliver S., and C. L. FINray. 
Later modifications in the Thames colour 
plate. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 3, 1910, v. 57, p. 42-43.) MFA 


1419. Didier, Léon. Paper prints from 
omnicolore plates by the pinatype process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 8.) MFA 


1420. Dillaye, Frédéric. Les dioptichromes 
“Dufay.” (In his: Les nouveautés photo- 
graphiques 1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. p.130- 
145.) MFA 


1421. ——- Ecrans pour plaques auto- 
chromes exposées a la lumiére artificielle. 
(In his: Les nouveautés photographiques 
1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. p.112-114.) MFA 














1422. Les omnicolores. (In his: Les 
nouveautés photographiques 1910. Paris, 
W104 3°. py. 125-127.) MFA 
1423. Les plaques Thames a réseau 
polychrome. (In his: Les nouveautés 
photographiques 1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. 
p. 127-129.) MFA 
1424. Reproduction par contact des 


chromotypes obtenus sur plaques auto- 
chromes. illus. (In his: Les nouveautés 
photographiques 1910. Paris, 1910.° 8°. p. 
122-124.) MFA 


1425. Traitement simplifié des auto- 
chromes. (In his: Les nouveautés photo- 
graphiques 1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. p.109- 
112.) MFA 


1426. D’Osmond, H. Instantaneous por- 
traiture on Lumiére autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 76-77.) MFA 





1427. Dufay, L. Les plaques dioptichromes. 
illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1910, série 3, tome 1, p. 177- 
181.) MFA 


1428. The Dufay colour plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 4, 
1910, v. 57, p. 847.) MFA 


Correspondence regarding time of exposure. 


1429. The Dufay dioptichrome colour plate. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 6, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 39-40.) MFA 


An abridgment of instructions published by the 
makers. 


1430. Edridge - Green, Frederick William. 
The relation of photography to vision. 
(Photographic journal, London, Jan., 1910, 
new series, v. 34, p. 10-17.) MFA 


1431. Elliott & Fry. Exposures in studio 
portrait photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 4, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. be 


State that long exposures are unnecessary. 


1432. Emmerich, Georg Heinrich, editor. 
Lexikon ftir Photographie und Reproduk- 
tionstechnik. Wien & Leipzig: A. Hart- 
leben, 1910. xiv p., 1 1., 994 p., 35 pl., 1 port. 
TCR. be MFD 


_Considerable space given to color photography. 
Biographies. 
Bound in two volumes; title-pagé in v. 2. 


1433. Estanave, E. Images changeantes a 
deux et trois aspects sur plaque auto- 
stéréoscopique. (Académie des sciences. 
Comptes rendus, Paris, Jan. 10, 1910, tome 
150, p. 93-95.) * EO 


1434. Evans, Frederick H. Colour pho- 
tography v. painting. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 2, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ay 


Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, March, 1911, 
v. 26, p. 119-120, MFA. 


1435. Faupel, Fritz. A German patent for 
a screen-plate process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. Wake 


Abstract. 


1436. Ford, A. D. The Dufay colour plate. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 88.) MFA 


Complains of poor rendering of greens. Editorial 
suggestions. 
1437. Friese, H. Der Dreifarbendruck 
unter besonderer Berticksichtigung der 
Teilplatten mach Lumiereschen Auto- 
chrom - Diapositiven. (Photographische 


Korrespondenz, Wien, 1910, Bd. 47, p. 584— 
588.) MFA 


1438. Gimpel, Léon. Duplicates of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Oct. 7,-1910, 4. 57, College 
photography supplement, p. 75-76.) MFA 


1439. Hanneke, Paul. Erfahrungen mit 
Dioptichromplatten. (Photographische 
Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 47, p. 257- 
262.) MFA 


1440. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Die 
photographischen Lichtfilter. Mit 5 Bei- 
lagen und 18 Abbildungen im Text. Halle 


a. S.: W. Knapp, 1910. viii, 109 p., 3 charts, 
4 pl. 8°. (Encyklopadie der Photographie. 
Heft 74.) PLC 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 71 


1910, continued. 


1441. The reproduction of auto- 
chromes and other screen-plate transpar- 
encies. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 5, 1910, v.57, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 59-61.) MFA 


Applies a simple geometrical method of investiga- 
tion to the conditions which prevail when copying one 
autochrome on another. 


1442. Husnik, Jaroslav. 
duktion von Autochromaufnahmen im 
Dreifarbendruck. illus. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
tur 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 34— 
36.) MFA 


1443. Ives, Frederic Eugene. A new sys- 
tem of trichromatic photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
2, 1910, v.57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 72.) MFA 


Tells how his system differs from Bennetto’s. 


1444. —— A new system of trichromatic 
photography. (Society of Chemical In- 
dustry. Journal, London, May 16, 1910, 
v. 29, p. 542-544.) VOA 


Uses bichromate fish-glue on amylacetate collodion 
film; also dilute chromic dyes capable of local intensi- 
fication or reduction. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 1, 1910, v.57, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 49- $1, FA, 

1445. A new system of trichromatic 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, 1910, v. 57, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 80, 88.) MFA 


Attacks Pfenninger’s claims for Bennetto inven- 
tion. 


1446. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Some photo- 
graphic phenomena bearing upon disper- 
sion of light in space. (Astrophysical 
journal, Chicago, March, 1910, v. 31, p. 157— 
165.) OMA 


The Library also has a separate copy in PED 
p. v. 3, no. 15 


1447. Klein, Henry Oscar. The applica- 
tions of collodion emulsion to three-colour 
photography, process work, isochromatic 
photography and spectrographic work... 
London: A. W. Penrose & Co., Ltd., 1910. 
2500.2: ed. enl. illus. 8°. MFKD 


1448. Koenig, Carl. Duplicates of auto- 
chromes. illus. (British journal of pho- 
Soecaphy, London, Sept. 2, 1910, v. 5/7, 
Colour photography supplement, p. hte 





Ueber die Repro- 





Use of magnesium light as suggested by Lumiére 
and Seyewetz. 


1449. Koenig, Ernst. Colour sensitisers 
and filter dyes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan..7, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. Sethi n 


1450. Dyes in photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 15, 
1910, v.57, p. 529-530.) MFA 





1451. Kopierung von Farbenphotographien 


auf Autochromplatten im Kontakt. illus. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1910, Bd. 47, p. 115-117.) MFA 


Review of work done in the Lumiére laboratory. 


1452. Lederer, Otto. Photo-micrography. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 6, 1910, v.57, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 


1453. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Colour 
photography by the interference method 
with a solid metal mirror. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 7, 1910, 
v.57, Colour photography supplement, Dp. 
8.) MFA 
Abstract of a paper read in Germany. 
1454. Le Mée, Alexandre. Trichrome prints 
by a ferricyanide method. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, June 3, 1910, 
v.57, Colour photography supplement, Dp. 
41.) MFA 


1455. Limmer, Fr. Beitrage zum Farben- 
anpassungsverfahren. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 182- 
185, 280-282, 430-432; 1910, Bd. 47, p. 25- 
31, 70-73, 211-219, 286-291, S35 1346 532- 
536.) MFA 
1456. —— Verfahren zur Herstellung von 


Dreifarbenrasten ftir Farbenphotographie 
nach D. R. P. 216610, Fritz Faupel in Ber- 


Hie alas: (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle’a.'S., Aug. 10, 1910, Jahre. 17, p.399— 
400, 476-477.) +MFA 


1457. Liquid safe-lights for the dark-room. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 14-15.) MFA 


Gives particulars of recent experiments with dyes. 


1458. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
Kontaktkopien von Autochromaufnahmen. 
(Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
1910, Bd. 47, p. 22-24.) MFA 


1459. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. Flash- 
powders for autochrome work. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 74-75. MFA 


1460. Sur l’emploi des poudres éclairs 
comme source de lumiére artificielle dans 
la photographie sur plaques autochromes. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1910, série 3, tome 1, p.285- 
288. ) MFA 

Also printed in Photographic journal, London, 
Sept., 1910, new series, v. 34, p. 315-319, MFA, and 


Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 47, 
p. 324-327, MFA. 


1461. Maisch, Fred D. The autochrome 
plate in its relation to the colour-theory of 
Young and Helmholtz. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1910, v. 
57, Colour photography supplement, p. 5-6, 
13-14.) MFA 


Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, 1909, v. 23, p. 
262-267; 1910, v. 24, p. 8- pt MFA. 





Ii THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1910, continued. 


1462. The Manipulation of autochromes 
when travelling. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 7, 1910, v.57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. ails 


1463. Mayer, Emil. Notes on experience 
in the autochrome process. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 43-44, 
52-53.) MFA 


Deals with under-exposure with a view to making 
hand camera exposures. 


1464. Mazo, E. The Tauleigne - Mazo 
stereo projection and three-colour proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 22-23.) MFA 


1465. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
J. H. Prence. On some experimental 
methods employed in the examination of 
screen-plates. illus. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, May, 1910, new series, v. 34, 
p. 197-221.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1910, v.57, p. 45-48, 53-56, 62-64, 68-70, 
MFA. 


1466. Monpillard, Félix. A propos des 
autochromes: leur emploi pour la repro- 
duction des tableaux dans les musées; 
multiplication des épreuves autochromes 
par contact ou a la chambre noire. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1910, série 3, tome l, p. eee ay 


Also printed in ee journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 5, 1911, v.58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 11-12, MFA. 


1467. On the causes of prevailing tints 
in autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 10-12, 22.) MFA 


1468. Sur un écran pour autochromes 
permettant d’obtenir aisément les nuages 
dans le ciel d’un paysage. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1910, série 3, tome 1, p. 103-104.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32, MFA. 


1469. Sur Vutilisation des plaques 
autochromes avec les lumiéres artificielles 
pour la photographie directe et la repro- 
duction. (Société francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1910, série 3, tome 1, 
p. 104-112.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 25-27, MFA. 











1470. Moreels, R. Two-colour effects in 

prints. (British journal of photography, 

London, July 8, 1910, v.57, p. 514-515.) 
MFA 


1471. Namias, Rodolfo. Panchromatic 
sensitising of plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. here 


1472. Newton, A. J. The evolution of 
photo-mechanical illustration. illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 1910, 
v.57, p. 580, 878; 1911, v. 58, p. 160.) MFA 


1473. Novak, Franz. A dark-room light 
filter. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 4, 1910, v.57, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 18.) MFA 


Transmits green light for working red sensitive 
collodion emulsion. 


1474. Omnicolorplatten. (Photographische 
Welt, Leipzig, Nov., 1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 166— 
167.) MFA 


1475. Palocsay, Albin von. Wichtigere 
Fortschritte und Erfahrungen betreffend 
die Photographie mit Farbenrasterplatten. 
illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik ftir 1910, Halle a. S., 
1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 177-210.) MFA 


Progress during year 1909. 


1476. Parker, G. H. Exposure of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Sept. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 72.) MFA 


1477. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Colour 
photography as a paying proposition. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 6, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 40.) MFA 


1478. Pfaundler, Leopold. Studie tiber das 
Spektrum, Farbenkreise und neuere Dar- 
stellungsweisen der Farbenmischungsge- 
setze. illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1910, Halle 
a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 64-82.) MFA 


1479. Pfenninger, Otto. Kinematograph- 
ische Projektion in Farben. (Jahrbuch 
fur Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
nik fur 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, 

MFA 





p. 29-32.) 
1480. A new system of trichromatic 
photography. (British journal of photog- 


raphy, London, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 80, 87-88.) MFA 


Discussion of the Ives-Bennetto claims. 


1481. Piper, Charles Welborne. Stereo- 
scopic colour transparencies. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 4, 
1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 12-13.) MFA 


1482. Practical application of interference 
colour photography. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 83-86, 
92-95.) MFA 


Detailed description of Lippmann process with 
latest apparatus; also a bibliography. 


a ———— 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 73 


1910, continued. 


1483. Quentin, H. Colour effects in the 
spectroscope. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 4, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 20-21.) 
MFA 
1484. A new Krayn screen - plate. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 77-78.) MFA 


1485. Screen-plate colour photographs 
on paper. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
Reference to patent of Julius Rheinberg. 


1486. A suggested new method of col- 
our photography direct at one exposure. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 15-16.) MFA 
Experiments of R. Berthon with diaphragm plate 
provided with red, green, and violet screens. 
1487. The Tauleigne-Mazo process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 51-52.) MFA 














1488. Recording the colours during ex- 
posure. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 79-80.) MFA 


Suggestions for marking slides. 


1489. Regni, pseud. A new system of tri- 
chromatic photography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Aug. 5, 1910, v. 
57, Colour photography supplement, p. 64.) 
MFA 
Conflicting claims of J. W. Bennetto and F. E. 
ves. 
1490. A Reservoir viewing instrument for 
autochromes. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 3, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 
MFA 
1491. Rheinberg, Julius. The Rheinberg 
colour paper. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 4, 1910, v.57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.24.) MFA 


1492. S., G. L’amélioration des auto- 
chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, July 25, 
1910, année 20, p. 177-179.) MFA 


1493. Saal, Alfred. Autochromplatten. 
(jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fiir 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, 
Jahrg. 24, p. 212-215.) MFA 


Autochromes in the tropics. 


1494. Scheffer,;-W. Notes on the Krayn 
new screen film. illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, Dec. 2, 1910, v. 
57, Colour photography supplement, p. 89- 
90.) MFA 
On the resolving power of the 
illus. (British jour- 


1495. } 
autochrome emulsion. 





nal of photography, London, Sept. 2, 1910, 
v.57, Colour photography supplement, p. 
70-72.) MFA 


1496. La photographie des couleurs 
avec les plaques a réseaux colorés. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1910, série 3, tome 1, p. 70-86.) MFA 


Discussion of different plates. 
1497. Uber das Auflosungsvermégen 
der Autochrom-Emulsion. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1910, 
Bd. 47, p. 588-592.) MFA 


1498. Schilling, Otto. Die Dioptichrom- 
Farbenrasterplatte (System Dufay). 
(Photographische Welt, Leipzig, Sept., 
1910, Jahre.°24, p.129-131.) MFA 


1499. Seyewetz, A. Copies of autochrome 
transparencies. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 7, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 








1500. Sforza, Francis. A suggested method 
of preparing coloured prints by an indirect 
bleach-out process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 4, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 83.) 

M 


1501. Simmen, Charles. Nouveau procédé 
permettant la prise de vues instantanées 
sur plaques autochromes. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1910, série 3, tome 1, p. 275-278.) MFA 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 65-66, MFA, Photographische Mit- 
teilungen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 47, p. 292-295, MFA, 
and Photo-gazette, Paris, Sept. 25, 1910, année 20, 
p. 214-218, MFA. 
1502. Smith, John H. The bleach-out 
process of colour-photography and Uto- 
color paper. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, April, 1910, new series, v. 34, p.141- 
151.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 6, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 34-39, MFA. 

With discussion. 


1503. Some effects on stale and on fresh 
autochrome plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 4, 1910, v.57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ser 


Found that old plates worked well and clearly. 


1504. Stenger, Erich. Deutsche Farben- 
films (System Krayn) der Neuen photo- 
graphischen Gesellschaft. (Photograph- 
ische Chronik, Halle a. S., Nov. 20, 1910, 
Jahre 17, p. 575-577.) +MFA 


1505. Stenger, Erich, and FERDINAND LEIBER. 
Destroyers of colour-sensitiveness as 
means for developing panchromatic plates 
in a bright dark-room light. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 28, 1910, 
v. 57, p. 61-63.) . MFA 


The authors state that the use of metabisulphite 
or sulphuric acid as a preliminary bath is not of much 
service. 


74 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1910, continued. 


1506. Stobbe, Hans. Fulgide dyes in mak- 
ing colour prints by the bleachout process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 91-92.) MFA 


1507. Tauleigne, A. The Tauleigne proc- 
ess of trichromy. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 


1508. Toch, Maximilian. The simplified 
autochrome process. (American annual of 
photography for 1910, New York, 1910, v. 
24, p. 245-246.) MFA 


1509. Villain, Alfred. On the reproduction 
of autochrome transparencies. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 1, 
1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 27-28.) MFA 


1510. Wall, Edward John. Screen plate 
color photography. illus. (In: Photo- 
graphic annual, London, 1910, 6th ed., p. 
9-53.) MFA 

Details for manipulating Autochrome, Omnicolore, 


Dufay, and Thames plates, with a note on the Aurora 
plate. 


1511. Wallace, Robert James. Tri-color 
filters and their cut-outs. illus. (Ameri- 
can annual of photography for 1911, New 
York, 1910, v.25, p. 272-282.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 5-7, MFA. 


1512. Weissermel, W. Die Autochrom- 
platte in der lichtarmen Jahrezeit. (Photo- 
graphische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 
47, p. 5-8.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 


London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 9-10, A. 


1513. Winter, G. Duplicates of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, -Octa7, 1910, we57; Colour 
photography supplement, p. 75.) MFA 


1514. Worel, Karl. Farbenphotographie 
durch Farbenanpassung. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fiir 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, ea 


Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Dec. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 90, MFA. 


1515. X. La reproduction des couleurs des 
photographies en couleurs. (Photo-ga- 
zette, Paris, Jan. 25, 1910, année 20, p. 46— 
49.) MFA 


Messrs. Gimpel and Villain took first prizes. in 
picture contest by the journal La Vulgarisation scien- 
tifique. In this article they explain their methods. 


1516. Yerbury, S. G. The making of por- 
traits in colors. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
eiecor ug., 1010 weer p. 315-318.) MFA 


1911 


1517. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Colour blindness and the _ trichromatic 
theory of colour-vision. illus. (Royal 
Society of London. Proceedings, London, 
1910, series A, v.83, p. 462-473; 1911, se- 
ries AG v. 84, p. 449-464.) * EC 


Also printed in Hehe journal, London, 
July, 1910, new series, v. 34, p. 278-287; Aug., 1911, 
new series, v. 35, p. 281-296, MFA. 


1518. Adrien, Charles. Essais d’hyper- 
sensibilisation au trempé des plaques auto- 
chromes. (Société francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, Dec., 1911, série 3, 
tome 2, p. 400-402.) MFA 
Uses Thovert formula. 
Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 


don, March 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
Menta pe lay MFA, 


1519. Albert, August. Farbenlichtdruck 
und Farbenaufnahmen mit Autochrom- 
platten usw. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1911, Halle 
a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 103-104.) MFA 


1520. Alteneder, J. V. Paper prints from 
autochromes. (American annual of pho- 
tography for 1911, New York, 1910, v.25, 
p. 128) MFA 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 7, MFA. 
1521. Antoine Lumiére. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1911, sé- 
rie 3, tome 2, p. 195-196.) MFA 


Obituary notice. 


1522. Balmitgere, C. A stereoscope for the 
direct observation of colour transparencies 
without reversal. illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, March 3, 1911, 
v.58, Colour photography supplement, p. 
22-23.) MFA 


1523. Bellieni, H. Utilisation, pour la 
photographie ordinaire, des écrans desti- 
nés aux plaques autochromes. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 82-83.) MFA 


1524. Bennett, Colin N. Filter absorptions 
for two-colour. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, July 7, 1911, v.58, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 45.) MFA 


1525. Benoist, L. Sur les contre-écrans 
renforcateurs en photochromie. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 229-234.) MFA 


mies printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 1, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 65— 67, MFA, 
1526. Two hints on the autochrome 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 7.) MFA 


Recommends white glazed paper against sensitive 
film; also permanganate solution after second develop- 
ment. 











COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 70 


1911, continued. 


1527. Blackburn, H. E. The Krayn color 
screen film process. (Camera ‘craft, San 
Francisco, Aug., 1911, v. 18, p. 369-372.) 
MFA 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 1, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 67-68, MFA. 
1528. ——- The Tripak system in brief. 
illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
1911, v.18, p. 221-224.) MFA 


Also Biinted in British journal of photography, 
London, June 2, 1911, v.58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 42-43, MFA, and Photographische Mit- 
teilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 228-231, MFA. 


1529. A Blue cast on autochromes. (Ama- 
teur photographer & photographic news, 
London, 1911, v. 54, p. 191, 265.) +MFA 


1530. Boucher, L. Le ‘“‘Monobloc,” appa- 
reil stéréo-panoramique, muni d’un dis- 
positif spécial facilitant la photographie 
en couleurs. illus. 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1911, série 
3, tome 2, p. 108-111.) MFA 


1531. Butler, Edwin T. Mr. E. T. Butler’s 
methods of colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 3, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 14-16.) MFA 


Paper read before the Society of Colour Photog- 
raphers. 
1532. Carpenter, Ford Ashman. Photo- 
graphing “red snow” in natural colors. 
San Diego: San Diego Society of Natural 
History, 1911. 108-111 p., 1 pl. 4°. 

QEI p.v. 19, no. 11 

Repr.: San Diego Society of Natural History. 
Transactions, v2, no. 3, 1911. 
1533. Chataux, P. S. A note on the de- 
velopment of autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 2, 
111, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 43.) MFA 


Uses pyro for developer. 


1534. Clerc, Louis Philippe. A frequent 
cause of failure in three-colour synthesis: 
excess of red. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, Dp. 35°37.) 


1535. Colour photographs of Saturn. 
(Nature, London, Nov. 2, 1911, v. 88, p. yh 


Belopolsky’s results with plates prepared on - 
Tikhoff. 
1536. Colour prints on paper. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 5, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 39-40.) MFA 
Secret method worked out by A. Hamburger. 


1537. Corke, H. Essenhigh. A new color 
printing process. (Bulletin of photogra- 
phy, Philadelphia, Nov. 22, 1911, v.9, p. 
341-342.) +MFA 


Utocolor. 


(Société francaise de. 


1538. Coustet, Ernest. La photographie 
instantanée des couleurs. (Revue scien- 
tifique, Paris, 1911, v. 49, p.239-240.) OA 


1539. Crémier, Victor. L’automne et l’auto- 
chrome. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 
1911, année 22, p. 11-15.) MFA 


1540. Experiments with the diopti- 
chrome colour screen-plate. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, May 5, 1911, 
v.58, Colour photography supplement, p. 
37-38.) MFA 
1541. Ordinary negatives from auto- 
chrome and other screen-plate transpar- 
encies. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 7, 1911, v.58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 28-29.) MFA 


1542. A Curious case of frilling with auto- 
chromes. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1911, v.58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p.52, 55-56.) MFA 


An inquiry by Sir W. Herschel answered by sev- 
eral correspondents. 


1543. Dalmas, R., comte de. Du développe- 
ment des plaques autochromes en voyage. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 106- 


108.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 5, 1911, v.58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 34-35, MFA, and Photographische Mit- 
teilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 177-179, MFA. 
1544. Observations sur le nouvel em- 
ballage des plaques autochromes. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 271-272.) MFA 


1545. Death of M. Antoine Lumiére. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 5, 1911, v.58, p. 343.) MFA 


1546. Doglibert, F. Suggestion for a new 
photographic colour screen plate. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 1911, 
v. 58, Colour photography supplement, p. 4, 
24.) MFA 


Prismatic surfaces moulded on celluloid. 


1547. Estanave, E. Photographies a cou- 
leurs changeantes. (Académie des sciences. 
Comptes rendus, Paris, May 1, 1911, tone 
152;-p:- 1158-1159.) * EO 


1548. Evans, C. Willard. Developing auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, © 
London, Aug. 4, 1911, v.58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 52.) MFA 


Formula for tank development. 


1549. Farmer, Howard. Autochromes and 
their reproduction on paper. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 6, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 3-4.) MFA 
1550. Flash-light autochrome portraits. 
(British journal of photography, London, ~ 
March 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 23-24.) MFA 
Brief description of process used by B. J. Falk. 











76 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1911, continued. 


1551. Franck, Charles E. Frilling of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 64.) MFA 


1552. Gebhard, Kurt. Theoretical notes on 
the bleachout process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 4, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 50-51, 
54-55.) MFA 


1553. Uber die Veranderung von Farb- 
stoffen im Licht. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. hero 

A 


1554. Gimpel, Léon. Amélioration dans 
la reproduction et l’agrandissement des 
plaques en couleurs. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1911, série 
3, tome 2, p. 101-103.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 1, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 53-54, MFA. 


1555. —— Les anaglyphes sur autochromes. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1911, série 3, tome 2, p.211- 
2125) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 51, MFA. 





1556. —— La photographie en couleurs sur 
papier a la portée de tous. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 407-411.) MFA 


Utocolor process. 


1557. Gravier, Charles. Plates for colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 


Deals principally with development of autochromes. 


1558. La trichromie en 1911. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 411-412.) MFA 


1559. Green spots on autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
22UTIO TW 55, ore one) MFA 


1560. Greene, J. Edward B. Pinachrome 
for color values. (American annual of 
photography for 1912, New York, 1911, 








v. 26, p. 207-208.) MFA 
1561. Hanneke, Paul. Farbenausbleichver- 
fahren. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 
Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 337-340.) MFA 
1562. Die neuen deutschen Farben- 
films. 


(Photographische Mitteilungen, Ber- 
lin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 8-10. MFA 
N. P. G. color films. 


1563. Hinterberger, Hugo. Neuerungen in 
der Fabrikation der Dioptichromplatten 
und der deutschen Farbenfilms. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., March 12, 
1911, Jahrg. 18) pRis0s) +MFA 


1564. A note on making photo-micro- 
graphs of colour screen-plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 





1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
MFA 


ment, p. 60.) 


1565. Die polychromen Streifenraster 
und die neueste Dioptichrom-Dufayplatte. 
(Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
Jan. 29, 1911, Jahrg. 18, p. 58-59.) FMFA 








1566. Die tonrichtige Aufnahme von 
Farbrastern. illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Photo- 
graphie und Reproductionstechnik  ftr 


1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 158- 
161.) MFA 


1567. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Colour paper 
prints. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 2, 1911, v. 58, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 


Explains adaptation of Tripak process. 


1568. Ives’ tripak plate pack. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 5, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 40.) MFA 
1569. The Ives tripak process of col- 
our photography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 2, 1911, v. 58, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. ae 











1570. Tripak color photography. 
(Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 1911, 
v.18, p. 219-220.) MFA 


1571. Ives’ Inventions, Ltd. The Ives tri- 
pak system of colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1911, v.58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 19-22.) MFA 
Copy of working directions issued by the firm. 


1572. J.. M. J. Dufay colour plates. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
3, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 64.) MFA 


Editorial reply to questions concerning troubles. 


1573. Jones, Chapman. On the relation- 
ship between the size of the particle and 
the colour of the image. (British journal 
of photography, London, 1911, v. 58, p. 
339-343, 381-384.) MFA 


Also eine in Photographic journal, London, 
April, 1911, new series, v. 35, p. 159-174, MFA. 
1574. Klein, E. Suggested methods of di- 
rect colour photography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Aug. 4, 1911, v. 
58, Colour photography supplement, p. 49- 
50.) MFA 


Development of H. Vollenbruch’s theory that 2 


silver halide precipitate along with the dye is capable — 


of retaining certain coloring matters throughout de- 

velopment, fixing, and washing. 

1575. Kropf, Fritz. Possible methods of 

colour photography. (British journal of 

photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 

Colour photography supplement, p. 40.) 
MFA 


Observations on methods suggested by R. Luther. 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 77 


1911, continued. 


1576. Kuemmell, G. Die Beschleunigung 
des Ausbleichens von Farbstoffen durch 
aromatische Verbindungen. (Zeitschrift 
fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Pho- 
tophysik und Photochemie, Leipzig, 1910, 
Bd. 9, p. 54-64.) PLC 


Translation in British journal of photography, Nov. 
4, 1910, v.57, Colour photography supplement, p. 81- 
82, MFA. 


1577. Kunz, William H. Color photogra- 

phy. (American annual of photography 

tor 1912, New York, 1911, v. 26, p. 28-32.) 
MFA 


Describes briefly processes in use. 


1578. Lack of register in tri-colour filters. 
’ (British journal of photography, London, 
fan. 2/, 1911, ¥. 58, p. 69.) MFA 


1579. Legeret, E. Using autochrome plates 
in . changing box. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 2, 1911, v.58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 44.) 

M 


1580. Leiber, Ferdinand. Making the best 
of under-exposed autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 57.) MFA 


1581. Le Mée, Alexandre. Paper colour 
prints from screen-plate transparencies. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 7, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 30.) MFA 


1582. The Light of Egypt: natural colour 
photographs of the glorious effects of 
Egyptian sunsets and sunrise. illus. (Il- 
lustrated London news, London, Feb. 25, 
1911, v. 138, supplement.) * DA 


Six pictures by Gervais-Courtellement. 


1583. Limmer, Fr. Das Farbenanpassungs- 
verfahren (Ausbleichverfahren) eine Mo6- 
glichkeit der direkten K6rperfarben Pho- 
tographie. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Jan., 1911, new series, v. 35, p. 16-18.) 

MFA 


1584. Zur Geschichte des Ausbleich- 
verfahrens. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 307-311.) MFA 


1585. Lueppo-Cramer. Das Silber als 
Farbstoff. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 184-188.) MFA 


1586. —— Uber die Farben der Photoha- 
loide. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 33-37.) MFA 


1587. Weitere Untersuchungen tiber 
die Polychromie des Silbers. (Photo- 
_graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1911, 
Bd. 48, p. 403-409.) MFA 


1588. Zur Farbenanpassung der Pho- 
tohaloide. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 270-275.) MFA 











1589. Luther, R. Possible methods of col- 
our photography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, March 3, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 17-19.) 

MFA 


Suggestions by himself and Herr Sforza, 


1590. The Manners process of three-colour 

printing with carbon tissues. (British 

journal of photography, London, July 7, 

1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 

ment, p. 46.) MFA 
British patent no. 25646 of 1910. 


1591. Mareschal, G. Le cinematographe 
en couleurs. illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
Oct. 25, 1911, année 21, p. 221-224.) MFA 


Processes of Geisler and Friese-Greene. 


1592. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
effect of colour filters upon the definition 
of a lens. (Knowledge, London, April, 
1911, new series, v. 8, p. 155.) OA 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 28, 1911, v.58, p. 330, MFA. 
1593. The relation between the colour 
of silver images, and the size of the par- 
ticles which compose them. (Knowledge, 
London, April, 1911, new series, v. 8, p. 
154-155.) OA 


1594. Miethe, Adolf, and B. Sreecert. Uber 
qualitative Verschiedenheiten des von den 
einzelnen Teilen der Mondoberflache re- 


flektieren Lichtes. illus. (Astronomische 
Nachrichten, Kiel, 1911, Bd. 188, p. 10-11, 





239-246.) OMA 
See colored illustration opp. p. 356. 
1595. Monpillard, Félix. Simultaneous 


opening of shutter and firing of flash- 
powder in autochrome photography. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 5, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 


1596. Moreels, R. Two-colour and three- 
colour photography in two exposures of 
the same time. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 7, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 25—28.) 
MFA 
Camera provided with a dark-slide allowing the 
plates to be rapidly exchanged. 
1597. Namias, Rodolfo. Some notes on 
autochrome work. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. Cee 


Suggestions for development and after treatment. 


1598. Natural colour photography: remark- 
able results and how they are obtained. 
(Illustrated London news, London, 1911, 
v. 139, supplement to issue of Dec. uk 


Has colored plate showing different stages. 


1599. Ein Neues Farbraster. illus. (Pho- 
tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., April 9, 
1911, Jahrg. 18, p. 180-181.) +MFA 

Ruth plate. ; 


78 


1911, continued. 


1600. A New colour paper. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, June 2, 1911, 
v. 58, Colour photography supplement, p. 
44.) MFA 


Denver company employs a machine which passes 
the paper through fifteen or more baths. 


1601. A New Uto paper. (British journal 


of photography, London, Nov. 3, 1911, v. 
58, Colour photography supplement, p. 62- 
64.) MFA 


Bleachout paper manufactured by Dr. J. H. Smith. 

Gives full instructions. 
1602. Novak, Franz. Gelbfilter fiir Auto- 
chromblitzlichtaufnahmen. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
Titedolieetialle aco. NO) olahrore2 soa, 
MFA 


190.) 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 1, 1911, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 68, A, 

1603. An Open field for colour photogra- 
phers. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 5, 1911, v. 58, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 10-11.) MFA 


Difficulties to be overcome and helpful suggestions. 


1604. Le Palais de l’autochrome. illus. 
(Photo-gazette, Paris, April 25, 1911, an- 
née 21, p. 117-118.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1911, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 51-52, MFA. 

Description of the studio of Gervais Courtellement, 
Paris, especially of the flashlight apparatus. 

1605. Palocsay, Albin von. Fremde und 
eigene Versuche zur Abktirzung der Ex- 
positionzeit bei Autochromaufnahmen. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1911, Bd. 48, p. 483-494.) MFA 


1606. Shorter exposures with the auto- 
chrome plate. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 11, 1911, v. 58, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 


1607. Wichtiger Fortschritte und Er- 
fahrungen betreffend die Photographie mit 
Farbrasterplatten. illus. (Jahrbuch fir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fur 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahre. 25, p..194— 
228.) MFA 


1608. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Pictures 
from autochromes. (American annual of 
photography for 1912, New York, 1911, v. 








26, p. 121-122.) MFA 
Black and whites from autochromes. 
1609. Personnaz, Antonin. L’autochromie. 


(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 58-61.) 
MFA 


Also printed in Photo-gazette, Paris, April 25, 


1911, année 22, p. 107-110, MFA. 


1610. Pfenninger, Otto. Historisches tiber 
die Farbenkamera. (Jahrbuch fiir Photo- 
graphie und Reproductionstechnik ftir 
1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahre: 25, p. 11-135 
MFA 


THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1611. Prilejaeff, Alexandre. Gelbscheiben 
fiir Autochromplatten. (Photographische 
Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p.294— 
298.) MFA 


1612. Quentin, H. Le procédé Krayn. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 293- 
300.) MFA 


1613. Rheinberg, Julius. Suggestion for a 
new colour screen-plate to act by diffrac- 
tion. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 11, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


1614. ——- Suggestion for a new screen- 
plate. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 24.) MFA 


Discussion of ideas of E. J. Wall, E. Doglibert 
and of the Frauenfelder patent. 


1615. Richard, A. Sur la photographie en 


couleur chez M. G. Marionez. (Société 
d’émulation de Cambrai. Mémoires, Cam- 
brai, 1911, tome 65, p. 485-498.) * EN 


1616. Russian colour-photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
17, 1911, v..$8,-p.82e7 MFA 


Brief reference to Prokudin-Gorsky who claimed 
to have spent his entire fortune in experiments, and 
who petitioned the government to buy 2,000 of his pro- 
ductions. 


1617. Simmen, Charles. Nouveau procédé 
permettant la prise de vues instantanées 
sur plaques autochromes. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 382-383.) MFA 


1618. -—- Quelques mots sur l’hypersensi- 
bilisation des plaques autochromes. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 403-406.) 
MFA 


Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, May 3, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 17-18, MFA, 


1619. Starr, William Ireland. Why not 
make color photographs? (American an- 
nual of photography for 1912, New York, 
1911, v. 26, p. 228-234.) MFA 


i ae experience with autochrome and Dufay 
plates. 


1620. Stenger, Erich. Das “Weiss” auf 
Farbrasterplatten und weisse Farbraster. 
(Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
May 17, 1911, Jahrg. 18, p. 247-248.) } MFA 


1621. —— Zur Kenntnis der Autochrom- 
platte. (Photographische Chronik, Halle 
a. S., 1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 499-502, 527, 543- 
545, 605-607; 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 9-11, 37-39, 
137-140, 247-248, 259-261, 283-286, 360-363, 
395-397, 432-435, 446-448, 569-572, 593-595, 
617-619; 1909, Jahrg. 16, p. 97-99, 104-106, 


132-135, 182-185, 191-193, 207-210, 317-319, 
325-327, 433-437, 469-471, 481-483, 577-580; | 


1910, Jahrg. 17, p. 9-13, 259-261, 283-285, 



































COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 79 


1911, continued. 


331-334, 367-370, 515-518, 527-529; 1911, 
Jahrg. 18, p. 25-26, 35-37, 46-49, 206-208, 
264-266, 307-308, 315-316, 331-332.) +MFA 


After the first few numbers the title reads: Zur 
Kenntnis der Autochromeplatte und 4hnlich gearter 
Erzeugnisse. An excellent review of progress. 


1622. Switkowski, Josef. Three -colour 
prints by the oil process. (British journal 
of photography, London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 
58, Colour photography supplement, p. 12- 
13.) MFA 


1623. “Tabloid” chemicals for screen-plate 
work. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
Produced by Burroughs, Wellcome & Co. 


1624. Thovert, J. Pinachrome as an extra 
sensitiser of autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 7, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 47-48.) MFA 


Also printed in Société francaise de photographie. 
oh Paris, 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 383-389, 


1625. Sensibilisation de plaques auto- 
chromes: influence de la qualité de 1’éclaire- 
ment sur la reproduction photographique 
des couleurs. (Société francaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1911, série 3, 
tome 2, p. 379-381.) MFA 


1626. Tikhoff. Colour photography on 
Mars. (Nature. London, Oct. 19, 1911, 
7..8/, p.. 529:) OA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 64, MFA. 





1627. Uto photographic paper. (Nature, 
London, Nov. 9, 1911, v. 88, p. 50.) OA 
1628. Valenta, Eduard. Uber die “Deutschen 
Farbrasterfilms auf Krayn-Raster” der 
Neuen photographischen Gesellschaft in 
Berlin-Steglitz. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 41-44.) 
. MFA 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 11, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 30-31, MFA. 
1629. Zur Kenntnis des “Utacolorpa- 
pieres.” (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 624-627.) MFA 


1630. Vallot, Emile. 





Hypersensibilisation 
des plaques autochromes. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 389-391.) MFA 


Also printed in Photographische Mitteilungen, 
Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 369-371, MFA. 


1631. A Vertical developing dish for auto- 
chrome plates. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. eS 


Designed by Seyewetz and sold by M. Leune, Paris. 


1632. Wall, Edward John. Die Farbe 
photographischer Bilder. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fir 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 38—- 
41.) MFA 


1633. Suggestion for a new colour 
screen-plate. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. aN 


Reply to F. Doglibert. Cites United States patent 
no, 747961 of Frauenfelder. 


1634. Weimann, Arthur. Monochrome 
Vergrosserung von Autochromen usw. 
(Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
1911, Bd. 48, p. 215-219.) MFA 


1635. Winter, G. Hints on working the 
autochrome process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ory 





1636. Worel, Karl. Fortschritte in der 
Farbenphotographie im: vorigen Jahre. 
(Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik ftir 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, 
Jahrg. 25, p. 3-5.) MFA 


1637. Wychgram, Engelhard. Uber neuere 
Farbraster. illus. (Photographische Mit- 
teilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. Nees 


Dufay and Krayn plates. 


1912 


1638. Autochrome light filter. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 3, 
1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 24.) MFA 


Accurate filters made by Dallmeyer. 


1639. Baker, Thomas Thorne. 
tography by artificial light. Notes on the 
screening of artificial illuminants. illus. 
(Amateur photographer & photographic 
news, London, March 4, 1912, v.55, p. 221- 
Zoe.) +MFA 


Also printed in Photo-era, Nov., 1912, 
v. 29, p. 240-241, MFA. 


Colour pho- 


Boston, 


1640. Balagny, Georges. Application du 
diamidophénol en liqueur acide au dé- 
veloppement des plaques autochromes. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 371- 
378.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 6-8, MFA. 


1641. Bartlett, John. Autochromes and 

art. (Bulletin of photography, Philadel- 

phia, Sept. 11, 1912, v. 11) p. 373-374.) 
+MFA 


20 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1912, continued. 


1642. Bennett, Charles W. Glycerol as 
sensitizer. (Eighth International Congress 
of Applied Chemistry, Washington and 
New York, 1912. Original communica- 
tions, v. 20, section 9, Photochemistry, p. 
121-122.) PKR 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 3, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 3, MFA. 


1643. Bergeron. Bichromatic reversing 
bath. (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 6, 1912, v.59, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 44.) MFA 


Suggested formula for autochromes. 


1644. Blackburn, H. E. The Dufay diopto- 
chrome plate. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
cisco, May, 1912, v. 19, p. 215-220.) MFA 


1645. The Krayn colour films. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
2, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 8.) MFA 


Corrects a misprint in above periodical of Decem- 
ber 8, 1911. 





1646. Boucher, L. Renforcement des auto- 
chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, June 25, 
1912, année 22, p. 157-158.) MFA 


1647. Brandlmayr, Georg. Uber Dreifar- 
bengravure. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1912, Bd. 49, p. 553-555.) MFA 


1648. Broum, Karl H. Die Autotypie und 
der Dreifarbendruck. Die Anwendung des 
Rasters zur Herstellung von Klischees ftir 
den ein- und- mehr-farbigen Buchdruck, 
nebst Anhang: Rastertiefdruck. Halle a. 
Se VV anapp, 1912, vi, 192 p,,.5 ol. 8". 
“ MDS 


1649. Burchardt,-Ernest A. Three-colour 
printing by the bichromated size process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 7, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 26-28.) MFA 
1650. Busy, L. L’autochromie en voyage 
de France au Tonkin. (Photo-gazette, 


Paris, July 25, 1912, année 22, p. 177-178.) 
MFA 


1651. Color photography in relation to new 


art movement in photography. (Bulletin 
of photography, Philadelphia, Oct. 16, 
19126 viel peas. } +MFA 


1652. Colour prints from autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 7, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 31.) MFA 


Commercial apparatus of Messrs. 
Hitchins briefly referred to. 


Balfour and 


1653. Colour prints on paper: a simple 
process in practical form. (British jour- 
nal of photography, Aug. 30, 1912, v. 59, 
p. 669-670.) MFA 


Paget screen-plate process explained. 


1654. A Colour transparency competition. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 6, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 44.) MFA 


Conditions of the Société francaise de photographie. 


1655. Corke, H. Essenhigh. The auto- 
chrome process. (Photographic journal, 
London, Dec., 1912, new series, v. 36, p. 
338-345.) MFA 


1656. Cousin, Ernest. The development of 
colour and other plates exposed through 
ascreen. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 9-10.) MFA 
Paper read before the Société frangaise de photo- 
graphie. 
1657. Crémier, Victor. Hypersensibilisa- 
tion simplifiée des autochromes. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, July 25, 1912, année 22, p. 
171-176.) MFA 


1658. Cust, Leopold. Notes upon the work- 
ing of autochromes. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 1-3, 5-7.) MFA 


1659. Dalmas, R., comte de. Enlévement 
des points noirs sur plaques autochromes. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 158- 
159.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 36, MFA. 

1660. David, Albert. 
cation of autochromes. (British journal 
of photography, London, Sept. 6, 1912, v. 
59, Colour photography supplement, p. 44.) 

MFA 
1661. Intensification of autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 7, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 








1662. Dillaye, Frédéric. L’autochromo- 
scope Elgé. illus. (In his: Les nouveau- 
tés photographiques 1911-1912. Paris, 
1912.. 8°)  peligaiiga MFA 
Viewing apparatus. 

1663. Développement des plaques 


autochromes en lumiére rouge trés vive. 

(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 

letin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. oer 
MF 


Also printed in British journal of ie 
London, Aug. 2, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 37-38, MFA. 

Also in his Les nouveautés photographiques 1911- 
1912, Paris, 1912, p. 115-125, MFA. 


1664. L’écran jaune des plaques auto- 
chromes. (In his: Les nouveautés photo- 
graphiques 1911-1912. Paris, 1912. 8°. p. 
104-109.) MFA 


1665. Les grands contrastes avec 
plaques autochromes. (in his: =456s 
nouveautés photographiques 1911-1912. 
Paris, 1912. 8°. p. 102-104.) MFA 








Chromium intensifi- — 


















COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 81 


1912, continued. 


1666. Direct colour photography. (Ama- 
teur photographer & photographic news, 
London, Oct. 28, 1912, v. 56, supplement, 
p. 3-4.) MFA 


General article on lens and filter. 


1667. The Dufay dioptichrome plate. 

(Amateur photographer & photographic 

news, London, Jan. 22, 1912, v. 55, p. 80.) 
MFA 


1668. Evans, Ulick R. An attachment for 
simultaneous exposure in an _ ordinary 
camera as a means of making the three 
component negatives for the subtractive 
processes of colour photography. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 45-48, 51-52; 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p.4, 12.) MFA 


1669. Farnau, FE. F., and J. M. Lower. Color- 

photography of luminescence. (Eighth 

International Congress of Applied Chem- 

istry, Washington and New York, 1912. 

Original communications, v. 20, section 9, 

Photochemistry, p. 137-138.) PKR 
Use of Dufay plates. 


1670. Finlay, C.L. Lantern slides in nat- 
ural colour by the Paget duplicating 
method. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 49-51.) MFA 


1671. Flashlight for screen colour plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 36.) MFA 


Formula for screen liquid to be used with “Agfa’’ 
blitzlicht powder. 


1672. Florence. Ueber die optische Aus- 
rustung fiir Autochrom und andere Farb- 
rasterplatten - Verfahren. (Photograph- 
ische Chronik, Halle a. S., March 27, 1912, 
Jahrg. 19, p. 165-167.) +MFA 


1673. G., G. S. A method of retouching 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Dec. 6, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 55.) MFA 


1674. Gaumont, Léon. Vues cinémato- 
graphiques en couleurs naturelles. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 370-371.) 
MFA 


1675. Gebhard, Kurt. Zusammenhang 
zwischen Lichtempfindlichkeit und Kon- 
stitution von Farbstoffen. (Jahrbuch fir 
Photographie und Reproduktionstechnik 
tar 1912, Halle a. S., 1912, Jahre. 26, p. 51- 
67. ) MFA 


1676. Gimpel, Léon. Le vérachromoscope. 
illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 229- 
Zoe.) MFA 


1677. Grant, Thomas K. Extra-sensitised 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour 


photography supplement, p. 36.) MFA 
Tells how he worked the Simmen process. 
1678. Hernandez - Mejia, Arturo. The 


colorgraph process of colour cinematogra- 
phy. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Oct. 8, 1912, v. 59, p. 805— 
807.) MFA 


1679. Colour cinematography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 6, 
1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 44.) MFA 


_ Abstract from the Morning telegraph. His inven- 
tion known as the cinecolorgraph. 


1680. Hilliard, F. M. Color photography 
by flashlight. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
cisco, Jan., 1912, v. 19, p. 21-22.) MFA 


1681. Hollyer, Frederick T. The use of 
grey in three-colour printing. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 4, 
1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 48.) MFA 


1682. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
production of pure whites in autochrome 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 





tography supplement, p. 13-14.) MFA 
1683. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Tripak 
color-photography. (Photo-era, Boston, 
Feb., 1912, v. 28, p. 57-58.) MFA 
1684. Ives, Herbert Eugene. The present 
condition of color photography. (Eighth 


International Congress of Applied Chem- 
istry, Washington and New York, 1912. 
Original communications, v. 26, appendix, 
sections 6a—1lb, p. 447-452.) PKR 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 21-22, 26, MFA, and in Journal of physical chem- 
istry, Ithaca, N. Y., 1913, v.17, p. 41-46, PAA. 


1685. Johnson and Sons. Correcting col- 
our-rendering in autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, March l, 
1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 12.) MFA 


Unexposed gelatine plate is developed and dyed in 
“‘photo-tints,” and used as a cover glass for the auto- 
chrome. 


1686. Knott, L. E. Colour plates and the 
holiday. (Amateur photographer & photo- 
graphic news, London, July 8, 1912, v. 56, 
p. 47-48.) +MFA 


Equipment for tour with no special plates mentioned. 


1687. Koenig, Ernst. Die Farben-Photo- 
graphie. Eine gemeinverstandliche Dar- 
stellung der verschiedenen Verfahren’ 
nebst Anleitung zu ihrer Ausfihrung. 
Berlin: Union deutsche Verlagsgesell- 
schaft, 1912.23) p.L, LOA eee Oa 
(Photographische Bibliothek. Bd. Een 


82 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1912, continued. 


1688. Leffmann, Henry. Color photogra- 
phy. (Photo-era, Boston, June, 1912, v. 28, 
p. 237-239.) MFA 


Experiences with photomicrographs. 


1689. Leggett, George H. Three -colour 
negatives at one exposure. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Dec. 6, 1912, 
v. 59, Colour photography supplement, p. 
54-55; Feb. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 


1690. Leiber, Ferdinand. Three - colour 
transparencies. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 5, 1912, v. 59, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 3-4.) MFA 


1691. Le Mée, Alexandre. The new Uto- 
color paper. (Photo-era, Boston, April, 
1912, v. 28, p. 145-147.) MFA 


1692. Lewis, Alfred Holmes. The auto- 
chrome in winter. (Photo-era, Boston, 
Jan., 1912, v. 28, p. 10-12.) MFA 


1693. Lobley, Frank J. Screen-plate col- 
our photography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, April 5, 1912, v. 59, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.16.) MFA 


Abstract of lecture delivered to the Chichester 
Photographic Society. 


1694. Lovelace, Marcus G. Screenless 

color photography. (Wilson’s photo- 

graphic magazine, New York, 1912, v. 49, 

p. 531-536.) MFA 
Directions for Lippmann process. 


Also printed in American annual of photography, 
1913, New York, 1912, v. 27, p. 9-20. 


1695. Lucas, E. G. Handel. The use of 
grey in three-colour printing. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1912, v. 
59, Colour photography supplement, p. 43- 
44, 55-56.) MFA 


1696. McIntosh, J. The autochrome proc- 


ess. (Photographic journal, London, Nov., 
1912, new series, v. 36, p. 320-329.) MFA 
1697. Mackenstein Etablissements. Chro- 
moscope classeur. illus. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 40.) MFA 


1698. Mairot, F. Developing autochromes 
in green light. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 


1699. Maleve, L. To determine the ex- 
posure of autochrome plates. illus. (Bul- 
letin of photography, Philadelphia, May 1, 
1912, v. 10, p. 578-580.) +MFA 


1700. Mareschal, G. Le vérachromoscope. 
illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, May 25, 1912, 
année 22, p. 136-138.) MFA 


1701. Marino, Algeri. Transmission des 
photographies et des images a distance, 


systéme Marino. illus. (La Lumiére élec- 
trique, Paris, 1912, série 2, tome 19, tri- 
mestre 3, p. 261-265.) VGA 


Translated abstract in Scientific American, New 
York, March 22, 1913, v. 108, p. 273, 7A 


Deals with transmission of photographs in color. 


1702. Messer, H. C. Showing autochrome 
transparencies. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Dec. 6, 1912, v. 59, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.54.) MFA 


1703. Miethe, Adolf. Farbenphotographie 

des Vollmondes. illus. (Photographische 

Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1912, Bd. 49, p. 357- 

359.) MFA 
Colored illustration opp. p. 356. 


1704. Monpillard, Félix. Etude micro- 
graphique du réseau des plaques omni- 
colores. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Aug. 25, 
1912, année 22, p. 190-192.) MFA 


1705. L’hypersensibilisation pratique. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 126- 
133) MFA 


1706. More points in autochrome work. 
(Amateur photographer & photographic 
news, London, Nov. 11, 1912, v. 56, supple- 
ment, p. 3-4.) +MFA 


Loading and exposure. 


1707. Das Neue Utocolor - Rapid - Papier. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1912, Bd. 49, p. 308-310.) MFA 


1708. Neues Utocolor- Papier. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1912, 
Bd. 49, p. 160.) MFA 


Formula for fixing bath. 


1709. A New colour photography. With a 
non-screen plate and one exposure. (Ama- 
teur photographer & photographic news, 
London, April 8, 1912, v. 55, p. 356.) #~{MFA 


Rheinberg process. 


1710. A New method of color photography. 
(Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 1912, 





“v.19, p. 277-278.) MFA 


Process of the Brothers Rheinberg. 


1711. Newton, A. J. The use of grey in 
three-colour printing. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1912, v.59, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 48, 56.) MFA 


1712. Newton, A. J., and A. J. Butt. The 
testing of lenses for three-colour and 
process work. (Photographic journal, 
London, March, 1912, new series, v. 36, p. 
91-98.) MFA 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 5, 1912, v.59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 14-15, MFA. 
1713. Palocsay, Albin von. Wichtigere 
Fortschritte und Erfahrungen, betreffend 
die Photographie mit Farbrasterplatten. 
illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und 
Reproduktionstechnik fiir 1912, Halle a. S., 
1912, Jahrg. 26, p. 250-276.) MFA 
Progress from March, 1911 to April, 1912. 





i eee ee a eT 


ea Ae 


OR He ear aS 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 23 


1912, continued. 


1714. Pope, Sir William Jackson. The 
color plate in geology. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, Jan., 1912, v. 19, p.35.) MFA 


1715. Prilejaeff, Alexandre. The choice 
and preparation of compensating light- 
filters for the autochrome plate. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 

ment, p. 58-59, 61-62; 1912, Colour pho- 
fee phy supplement, p. 7-8.) MFA 
For a correction of typographical error see above 


periodical, v. 58, Nov. 3, 1911, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 64, 


1716. Le Procédé diachrome. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, April 25, 1912, année 22, p. 
110-113.) MFA 


1717. Recapitulation of direct color process 
by photography. (Bulletin of photogra- 
phy, Philadelphia, Nov. 6, 1912, v. 11, p. 
686-687.) +MFA 


1718. Rheinberg, Julius. The micro-spec- 
tra method of colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 
3, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 24.) MFA 


Corrects a statement that Drac’s process is similar 
to his own. 


1719, Rheinberg, Julius, and ErNEest RHEIN- 
BERG. The micro-spectra method of colour 
photography by prismatic dispersion. illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, April, 
1912, new series, v. 36, p. 162-191.) MFA 


Also eae in British journal of photography, 
London, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 19-24, 28-31, 33-36, 38-40, MFA, and in Zeit- 
schrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 
1913, Bd. 12, p. 373-408, PLC. 


1720. Schmidt, Fritz. Farbenphotogra- 
phie; eine Sammlung von Aufnahmen in 
naturlichen Farben. Heft 1. Leipzig: 
E. A. Seemann ,1912?). illus. f°. tMFV 


Attractive photographs. 


1721. Starr, William Ireland. Colour pho- 
tographs on the Dufay dioptichrome 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 


tography supplement, p. 10-11.) MFA 
Instructions in detail. 
1722. Str. Das Utocolorverfahren. (Pho- 


tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., July 3, 
1912, Jahrg. 19, p. 333-335.) MFA 


1723. Thieme, Paul. Autochromaufnahmen 
bei nattirlichem und ktinstlichem Licht. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1912, Bd. 49, p. 135-137.) MFA 


1724. Thovert, J. Hypersensitizing auto- 
chrome plates. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, June 19, 1912, v.10, p.829- 
833.) +MFA 


1725. Valenta, Eduard. Die Photographie 
in natirlichen Farben, mit besonderer Be- 
rucksichtigung des Lippmannschen Ver- 
fahrens sowie jener Methoden, welche bei 
einmaliger Belichtung ein Bild in Farben 
liefern. - Halle a. Si: W. Knapp, 1912. xi, 
180 p., 6 pl. 2. ed. 8°. (Encyclopadie der 
Photographie. Heft 2.) MFV 


1726. Uber das Utocolorrapidpapier. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1912, Bd. 49, p. 361-362.) MFA 


mies printed in Photographische Rundschau, Halle 
.S., 1912, Bd. 49, p. 341-342, MFA. 





1727. Le Vérachromoscope. illus. (La 
Nature, Paris, 1912, tome 40, semestre 2, 
supplément, p. 19.) OA 


1728. Wall, Edward: John. The micro- 

spectra method of colour photography by 

prismatic dispersion. (British journal of 

photography, London, June 7, 1912, v. 59, 

Colour photography supplement, p. ty 
M 


me that Charles Cros outlined the process in 
1869. 


1729. Weissermel, W. 
posures by flashlight. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 5, 1912, v.59, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ray 


Autochrome ex- 


Uses a pyrocatechin developer. 


1730. Zur Farbenphotographie mit 
Autochromplatten u. a. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1912, Bd. 49, p. 58— 
59.) MFA 


Autochrome, Dioptichrome, Omnicolore, N. P. G. 
plates. 





1731. Wolf-Czapek, Karl Wilhelm. Far- 

bige Kinematographie. illus. (Photo- 

graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1912, 

Bd. 49, p. 436-440.) MFA 
Briefly describes various processes. 

1732. Wood, Robert Williams. Selective 


absorption of light on the moon’s surface 
and lunar photography. (Astrophysical 
journal, Chicago, July, 1912, v. 36, p.74- 
84.) OMA 


Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Sept. 6, 1912, v.59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 44, MFA. 


1733. Worel, Karl. Mein verbessertes Ver- 
fahren der Photographie in Korperfarben 
durch Farbenanpassung. (Jahrbuch ftir 
Photographie und Reproduktionstechnik 
fir 1912, Halle a. S,, 1912. Jahres Z6ep, o- 
15.) MFA 





1734. Das Utocolorpapier. (Photo- 
graphische Kunst, Munchen, 1911-12, 
Jahrg. 10, p. 203-204.) +MFA 


QA THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1913 


1735. Adrien, Charles. Notes sur la pho- 
tographie en couleurs dans les glaciers. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1913, série 3, tome 4, p. 59-60.) 

MFA 
1736. Bawtree, A. E. A new colour trans- 
parency process. illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, 1913, v. 60, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. Sr ne 


Uses sensitized fish-glue solution. 
Abstract in Amateur photographer & Meri Hees 
news, London, Nov. 10, 1913, v.58, p. 430, ,MFA 


1737. Berger, Arthur. Uber die Farben- 
wiedergabe durch die Autochromplatte. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1913, Bd. 50, p. 357-358.) MFA 


1738. Berton, Rudolf, and Maurice AuptI- 


BERT. Das Kineidochrom. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1913, 
Bd. 50, p. 391-396.) MFA 


Authors’ process of cglor kinematography. 


1739. Blaauw, A. H. De tropische natuur 
in schetsen en kleuren.. Amsterdam: 
Koloniaal Instituut, 1913. 3 pl. (i)x-—xi, 
185 p., 28 col’d pl., 4 maps. illus. 8°. BFK 


-—— = Amsterdam: Koloniaal Insti- 
Prt 1 Jo, 191 pie Zed. allussci8ss 
BFK 


1740. Brown, George Edward. All about 
color photography. illus. (Photo-minia- 
ture, New York, July, 1913, v. 11, p.373- 
411. ) MFA 


General article describing eat known processes. 


1741. Butler, Edwin T. The Butler tri- 
colour single exposure camera. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 6, 
1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 22-23.) MFA 


1742. Calmels, H. Le témoin de sélection 
trichrome de Wratten & Wainwright. 
illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1913, série 3, tome 4, p. 157- 
159.) MFA 


1743. Cobenzl, A. Farbenraster-Photogra- 
phie. illus. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 242-247.) MFA 


Compares various plates used for color photography. 


1744. Farbige Photographien. (Pho- 
tographische Kunst, Miinchen, 1912-13, 
Jahrg. 11, p. 284-287.) +MFA 


Comparison of Autochrome, Omnicolore, 
and Thames plates. 


1745. Coker, Ernest George. Colour pho- 
tography of internal stress in bodies of 





Dufay, 


engineering form. illus. in color. (West 
of Scotland Iron & Steel Institute. Journal, 
Glasgow, 1913, v.20, p. 81-104.) VIA 


1746. Colour photography by the Paget 
duplicating method. (British journal of 


photography, London, April 4, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. Soap 


1747. Cominetti, Annibale. Farbige Kino- 

aufnahmen und deren Projektion. illus. 

(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 

1913, Bd. 50, p. 231-234.) MFA 
Berthon & Audibert patent. 


1748. Coonoor, pseud. On working the 
autochrome plate in India. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 1913, 
v. 60, Colour photography supplement, p. 
3-4.) MFA 


1749. Cooper, James. Amateurs and the 
autochrome. (Photo-era, Boston, Aug., 
1913, v. 31, p. 80-85.) MFA 


Has table and abacus for exposures. 


1750. Cousin, Ernest. Contribution a l’ob- 
tention des reproductions d’autochromes 
sur autochromes. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1913, série 
3, tome 4, p. 330-335.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 7, FA; and in Photographische Mit- 
teilungen, Berlin, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 373-374, MFA. 


1751. Developing autochromes by ruby- 
light. (Photo-era, Boston, Oct., 1913, v. 31, 
p.213;) MFA 


From circular issued by the Gaumont Co. 


1752. Drake-Brockman, H. G. A drying 
cupboard for hyper-sensitised screen- 
plates. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 7, 1913, v. 60, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. cae 


1753. Eder, Josef Maria. Quellenschriften 
zu den frithesten Anfangen der Photogra- 
phie bis zum xvi. Jahrhundert...mit ftinf 
heliographischen Portraten, zwei Licht- 
drucktitelblattern und diversem Buch- 


schmuk. Halle a. S.: Wilhelm Knapp, 
1913. 1.p.L, 1871) p., 5S’ portesaiiteeee 
+ PKB 


Facsimiles of papers by Fabricius, Croll, Boyle, 
Balduin, Schulze, Hellot, Scheele, and Beccaria on 
the chemical action of light. Interesting introduction. 


1754. Enlarged negatives from  auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 44.) MFA 


1755. Fallowfield, Jonathan. Autochrome 
correcting screens. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 1, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ee 


For sale by the above firm. 


1756. Foersterling, K. Lichtfortpflanzung 


in inhomogenen Medien; Theorie der Lipp- | 


mannschen Farbenphotographie. (Physi- 
kalische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1913, Jahrg. 
14, p. 265-270.) PAA 





———— 


er gee. er - 


ot. Sei et STS 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY Q5 


1913, continued. 


1757. Gebhard, Kurt. Notes on the chem- 
istry of the bleaching-out of dyes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
3, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 38-40.) MFA 


1758. Veranderung organischer Farb- 
stoffe im Licht. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 118- 





130.) MFA 
1759. —— Zur Theorie des Ausbleichver- 
fahrens (Utocolorpapier). (Photograph- 


ische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1913, Bd. 50, 
p. 76-77.) MFA 


1760. Gérard, Louise. La retouche des 
autochromes. (Société francaise de photo- 
graphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1913, série 3, tome 
4, p. 337-338.) MFA 


1761. Grange. Black and green spots on 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 1, 1913, v.60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 


1762. Grove, J. M. C. Prismatic fantasies 
of colour on autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 4.) MFA 


1763. Heyne, W. Zur Kinematographie 
in naturlichen Farben. (Photographische 
Rupdschau, Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 22- 
26.) MFA 


1764. Hind, H. Lloyd, and W. B. Ranp es. 
Handbook of photomicrography. New 
fore. Dutton & Co. ,1913.; xii, 292 
p., 44 pl. 8°. OCG 

See chapter 9: Colour screens and colour sensitive 


plates; chapter 13: Colour photomicrography. Good 
reproductions of autochromes. 


1765. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
Christensen (Agfa) screen-plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 4.) MFA 


Suggestions as to light filter and reversing bath. 


1766. The correction of prevailing 
tints in autochromes by coloured screens. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 5, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 
1767. Gelbscheiben fur Autochromauf- 


nahmen. (Photographische Rundschau, 
Pietie a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 79.) MFA 


1768. Steigerung der Empfindlichkeit 
der Autochromplatte. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, pe A 











1769. Ihran, R. Sensitising methylene blue 
for bleach-out pictures in the camera. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 11-12.) MFA 


* 1775. Kuemmell, G. 


1770. Intensifying autochromes. (Photo- 
era, Boston, Aug., 1913, v. 31, p.105.) MFA 


Agfa intensifier. 


1771. Just, Alexander. Neuere Erfahrungen 
auf dem Gebiete des Ausbleichverfahrens. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1913, Bd. 50, p. 168-179.) MFA 

Thiosinamine derivatives as sensitisers. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 26-27, MFA. 


1772. Koenig, Ernst. Farben - Kinemato- 
graphie. (Photographische Rundschau, 
Halle, S.,1915..Bd-50; p..3-5.) MFA 


Kinemacolor and colorgraph processes. 


1773. Ein neues Farbrasterverfahren. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1913, Bd. 50, p. 277-278.) MFA 


Paget plate. 


1774. Ein vereinfachtes Kopierver- 
fahren mit Pinatypiefarbstoffen. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, 
Bd. 50, p. 325-326.) MFA 








Weitere Untersu- 
chungen tber die Beschleunigung des Aus- 
bleichens von Farbstoffen. (Zeitschrift 
flr wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
zig, 1912, Bd. 11, p. 133-136.) PLC 


Translation in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Sept. 6, 1912, v.59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 41-42, MFA. 


1776. Le Mée, Alexandre. Colour prints 


on opal. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 2, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 


tography supplement, p. 19-20.) MFA 
1777. The Leto Photo Materials Co. A 
new colour screen - plate — “The Leto.” 


illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 13-14.) MFA 


1778. Lueppo-Cramer. On reversal of the 
image in making screen-plate colour trans- 
parencies. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Oct. 3, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 37-38.) MFA 


Abstract in Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1914, série 3, tome 5, p. 171-172, MFA. 


1779. Lugdunensis, pseud. A one-exposure 
three-colour camera. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ciel 


1780. Manners, Samuel. Colour prints by 
the Raydex process. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 4, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 16.) 


MFA 
1781. Martin, Karl. Ueber verbesserte Fil- 
ter fiir Autochromaufnahmen. (Jahrbuch 


fur Photographie und Reproduktionstech- 
nik fur 1913, Halle a.cSi919)g Jahre: 27, 
p. 103-104.) MFA 


86 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1913, continued. 


1782. Meesterwerken der kleuren - photo- 
graphie. Eene verzameling van opnamen 
in de natuurlijke kleuren door middel van 
Lumiéres autochroomplaten. Leiden: A. 
WieoSiithori 11912-lo ol 2. parts sinial Vv. 
col’d illus. 4°. Tt MFV 


60 mounted plates and illustrated articles by Fritz 
Schmidt and others. 


1783. Monjauze, G. Emploi des lampes 
électriques a incandescence pour le por- 
trait sur autochromes. illus. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1913, série 3, tome 4, p. 203-204.) MFA 


1784. Monochrome prints from colour 
negatives. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Nov. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 44.) MFA 


Special reference to Paget plates. 


1785. Monpillard, Félix. Colour rendering 
with extra-sensitised autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 2, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 18.) MFA 
1786. Extra sensitising of autochromes 
in practice. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, .jan.-3, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 





1787. Morton, Arthur E. Conversion of 
autochromes into Paget colour slides. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 5, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 45-47.) MFA 


1788. Exposure of colour plates: some 
notes preparatory to a demonstration. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 2, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 17-18.) MFA 


Describes his process for exposing autochrome, Du- 
fay, and Paget plates. 


1789. Influences modifying colour 
rendering. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, July 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 25.) MFA 
Importance of reflection and colour contrasts. 


Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Nov., 
1913, v. 20, p. 535-536, MFA. 








1790. Namias, Rodolfo. Bemerkungen 
und Beobachtungen aus der Praxis der 
Autochromphotographie. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproduktionstechnik 
fur 1913,. Halle a.’ §., 1913, Jahrewee en: 
162-167.) | MFA 


Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, June, 1914, v. 32, 
p. 280-282, MFA. 


1791. —— Fehler bei Autochromaufnahmen 
und deren Abhilfe. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 47- 
48.) MFA 


Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
S., Feb. 9, 1913, Jahrg. 20, p. 71-73, }-MFA. 


1792. Eine Neue Farbenrasterplatte. (Pho- 
tographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, 
Bd. 50, p. 144.) MFA 


Leto plate. 


1793. Photographs that have been made in 
natural colors. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, Dec. 31, 1913, v. 13, p. 835— 
836.) +MFA 


Brief early history. 


1794. Piper, Charles Welborne. The func- 
tions of black and white in colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 


1795. Pledge, John H. The Christensen 
screen-plate. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 3, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 4.) 
MFA 


Photomicrographs of above plate and autochrome. 


1796. The Paget screen-plate. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 1, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


1797. Renger-Patzsch, Robert. Die Far- 
benplatte der Paget Co. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a: SS. 1913, 8a e50e 
363-364.) MFA 


Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
S., Nov. 12, 1913, Jahrg. 20, p. 613-614, ¢MFA. 


1798. Rypinski, M. C. Color ata tie 
(American annual of photography for 1914, 
New York, 1913, v.28, p. 116-126.) MFA 


Briefly describes Dufay, Paget, and Autochrome 
processes. 


1799. Schrott, Paul, Ritter von. Abschwa- 
chen von Autochromplatten. (Photogra- 
phische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1913, Bd. 
50, p. 397-400.) MFA 


Also printed in Société francaise de photographie. 
aoe Paris, 1914, série 3, tome 5, p. 170-171, 





1800. Schwarzer, Ed. Grenzen des Auto- 
chromverfahrens. (Photographische Welt, 
Leipzig, Nov. 15, 1913, Jahrg. 27, p. 161- 
162.) MFA 


1801. Smith, John H. Recent investiga- 
tions in the bleachout process of colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 1, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 29-31.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 400-405, MFA, Photo- 
graphische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 255— 
257, 267-268, MFA, and Société francaise de photo- 


graphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1913, série 3, tome 4, p. 
267-275, MFA. 


1802. Smitten, Howard M. Color plate 
exposures. illus. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, Oct., 1913, v. 20, p. 475-476.) 
MFA 
Dial designed for use with the Wynne meter. - 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p.15, MFA. 


: 
| 





at 





- Autochromplatte. 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY Q7 


1913, continued. 


1803. Sparkle in colour transparencies. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 44.) MFA 


Suggestion for obviating. 


1804. Spoerl, Hans. Utocolor-Rapidpapier. 
(Photographische Kunst, Miinchen, 1912- 
13, Jahrg. 11, p. 173-174.) +MFA 


1805. Steigerung der Empfindlichkeit der 

(Photographische Chro- 

wee tiaile a, >., April 23, 1913, Jahre. 20, 

p. 214.) +MFA 
Von Hitibl’s method. 


1806. Stenger, Erich. The history of the 
reversal process as used in screen-plate 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Sept. 5, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. Ry 


1807. Streissler, Alfred. Das Paget-Far- 
benverfahren. (Photographische Welt, 
merece, Oct. 15, 1913,. Jahre. 27, p. 146- 
148.) MFA 


1808. Das Rheinbergsche Verfahren 
der Farbenphotographie. (Photogra- 
phische Welt, Leipzig, May 15, 1913, Jae 
27, p. 67-68.) MFA 


1809. Substituting white paper for black 
behind autochrome plates. (Photo-era, 
Boston, Feb., 1913, v. 30, p. 95.) MFA 


1810. Thoerner, W. A simple viewing 
cabinet for autochromes. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 1, 
1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 32.) MFA 





1811. Tobler, Friedrich. Einige Erfah- 
rungen bei Autochromaufnahmen in den 
Tropen. (Photographische Rundschau, 
Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 297-300.) MFA 


1812. Union photographique industrielle 
Etablissements Lumiére & Jougla réunis. 
Sensibilisieren von Ausbleichschichten. 
(Chemisch-technisches Repertorium, Co- 
then, May 17, 1913, Jahrg. 37, p.276.) VOA 


D. R. P. 258241. Abstract only. Translation in 
British journal of photography, London, June 6, 1913, 
v. 60, Colour photography supplement, p. 24, MFA. 


1813. Utocolour bleachout paper. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 5, 
1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 36.) MFA 


Brief reference to improved paper. 


1814. Wallace, Robert James. Plain 
versus color-sensitive plates... Questions 
answered by the director of the Research 
Laboratory of the G. Cramer Dry Plate 
Co. (Camera craft, San Francisco, Feb., 
1913, v. 20, p. 66-68.) MFA 


1826. Brizet, André. 


1815. Watkins, Alfred. Exposure of col- 
our plates. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, June 6, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 24.) MFA 


Criticises Morton’s exposure scheme. 


1816. The Watkins colour plate meter. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, D2os,) MFA 


1817. Whitfield, Geoffrey, and C. L. Fin- 
LAY. A demonstration of the Paget colour 
plate. (Photographic journal, London, 
April, 1913, new series, v. 37, p. 142-148.) 
MFA 


With discussion. 


1818. Why are color Biaien not artistically 
satisfactory? (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, July 23, 1913, v. 13, p.111-— 
112) +MFA 


1819. Wychgram, Engelhard. Autochrome 
Tierphotographie an der Nordsee. (Pho- 
tographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, 
Bd. 50, p. 229-231.) "MFA 


1914 


1820. Barker, J. W. The Paget color proc- 
ess — making the positive. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Aug., 1914, v. 21, p. 408— 
409.) MFA 


1821. Barton, E. A. A note on exposure 
of autochrome plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 5, 1914, v. 61, 
Colour photography supplement, p. aoe 


1822. Bawtree, A. E. Lead intensification. 
illus. (Amateur photographer, London, 
May 25, 1914, v. 59, p. 497-498.) +MFA 


Partly reprinted in Camera eres San Francisco, 
June, 1914, v. 21, p. 295-296, MFA 


1823. Biermann, E. A. Individualised auto- 
chromy. (Amateur photographer & pho- 
NS news, London, July 20, 1914, v. 
60, p. 56.) +MFA 


Suggestions for exposure. 


1824. Brand, John. The Raydex process 
of colour photography on paper. (British 
journal of photography, London, March 6, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 9.) MFA 


1825. Breton, André. Photographies en 
couleurs pouvant étre reproduites. Le 
procédé Paget. (La. Nature, Paris, 1914, 
année 42, semestre 2, p. 148-151.) OA 


Exposure and de- 
velopment of autochromes. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, May 1, 1914, 
v. 61, Colour photography supplement, p. 
19-20.) MFA 


28 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1914, continued. 


1827. Broum, Karl H. E/iniges zur Drei- 
farben-Autotypie. (Photographische Kor- 
eee Wien, 1914, Bd. 51, p. ary 


1828. Burton, H. M: Hints for new colour- 
plate workers. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 37-38.) 
MFA 


1829. The Business aspect of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 25-26.) MFA 


1830. Calmels, H. Procédé Paget - Color 
pour la photographie des couleurs a un 
nombre illimité d’exemplaires. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1914, série 3, tome 5, p. 186-197.) MFA 


1831. Carr, Sydney Herbert. Notes on ex- 
posure, etc., in the autochrome process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 48.) MFA 


1832. Carrara, Achille. A new quick-dry- 
ing sensitiser:for three colour and ordinary 
carbon tissues. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 2, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 3-4.) 
MFA 
Ammonium bichromate and ethyl alcohol. 


Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 
1914, v. 21, p. 293-294, MFA. 


1833. Reproduction of autochromes 
on paper by three-colour carbon printing. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 10.) MFA 


Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Aug., 
1914, v. 21, p. 407-408, MFA. 


1834. Crémier, Victor. Chloranol as a de- 
veloper for autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 3, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 26-27.) MFA 


1835. Dawson, Alfred. Three-colour cam- 
eras. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 


Endeavors to explain lack of symmetry in images. 


1836. Dearden, W. Autochrome hints. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 7, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 





1837. The Evolution of screen-plate colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 38-39.) MFA 


1838. An Exhibition of the work of Louis 
Ducos du Hauron in colour photography. 


(British journal of photography, London, 
June 5, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 23-24.) MFA 


Gives a list of early negatives and prints. 


1839. Fischer, R., and H. Siecrist. Uber 
die Bildung von Farbstoffen durch Oxyda- 
tion mittels belichteten Halogensilbers. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 


1914, Bd. 51, p. 18-22, 208-211.) MFA 
1840. Foersterling, K. Zur Theorie der 
Lippmannschen Farbenphotographie. 


(Physikalische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1913- 
14, Jahrg. 14, p. 265-270; Jahre. 15, p. 225— 
234, 940-952.) PAA 


1841. Gebhard, Kurt. Bildung und Zerst6- 


rung von Farbstoffen im Licht. illus. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1914, Bd. 51, p. 384-385.) MFA 


1842. H., P. Zur Paget-Farbrasterplatte. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1914, Bd. 50, p. 124.) MFA 


1843. Hamburger, Aron. The polychro-. 
mide colour process. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, Nov., 1914, new series, v. 38, 
p. 288-294.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 4, 1914, v. - Colour photography 
supplement, p. 45-47; "Jan. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, Dp. 45 MFA, Amateur pho- 
ile tt & photographic news, London, Nov. 2, 1914, 

60, p. 419, MFA, Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Behe: 1915, v. 22, p. 82-83, MFA. 


1844. Hamburger, W. S. Autochrome 
flashlight portraiture. (American photog- 
raphy, Boston, Aug., 1914, v. 8, p. re 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 34-35, MFA. 

1845. Hargreaves, F. J. Focussing screens © 
for color screen plates. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Aug., 1914, v. 21, p. 409- 
410.) MFA 


1846. A new use for the Paget method 

of color photography. (Camera craft, San 

Francisco, March, 1914, v. 21, p. 140-141.) 
MFA 





For testing and demonstrating the orthochromatic 
properties of plates and the efficiency of light filters. 


1847. Hess, Henry. Direct colour photog- 

raphy. (British journal of photography, 

London, Nov. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 

raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
An appreciation of the work of F. E. Ives. 


1848. Hess-Ives Company. Three colour 

prints. (British journal of photography, 

London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 

tography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

1 aaa of French patent no. 461078 of Aug. 4, 
0. 


1849. Heydecker, W. A. Reproduction tri- 
chrome d’autochromes. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1914, 
série 3, tome 5, p. 172.) MFA 


ad “ 
aT 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 89 


1914, continued. 


1850. Hitchins, Alfred Bishop. Some notes 
on autochrome work in professional prac- 
tice. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 5, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 22-23, 27.) MFA 


Also printed in Wilson’s photographic magazine, 
New York, 1914, v. 51, p. 15-17, MFA. 


1851. Honoré, C. Halet. Three colour 
cameras. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1914, v.61, Colour pho- 


tography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
Discusses lack of symmetry in images. 
1852. Ihran, R. Bleachout dyes. (British 


journal of photography, London, June 5, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 24.) MFA 


1853. Ives, Frederick Eugene. Three- 
colour cameras. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.27.) MFA 


Defends his patent against claims of Pfenninger. 


1854. Three-colour prints. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 7, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 32.) MFA 


From negatives made at one exposure in trichro- 
matic cameras patented by the author. 





1855. Judging the quality of natural color 

photography. (Bulletin of photography, 

Philadelphia, July 8, 1914, v. 15, p. 48-49.) 
+MFA 


1856. Karl Wilhelm Wolf-Czapek. port. 
(Photographische Kunst, Mtinchen, 1913- 
14, Jahrg. 12, Tafel 78, opp. p. 249.) {MFA 


1857. Kein, Wold. Retuschieren von Auto- 
chrombildern. (Photographische Rund- 
schau, Halle a. S., 1914, Bd. 51, p.17.) MFA 


1858. Koenig, Ernst. A new colour sensi- 
tiser. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 13-14.) MFA 


A red which is readily miscible with other cyanine 
sensitisers with less prejudicial effect upon the whole 
mixture. 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
1914, v. 21, p. 243-245, MFA. 


1859. Simplified pinatype. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 1, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 20.) MFA 





1860. Lassus Saint-Genies, Jacques de. A 
system of colour photography. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 1, 1914, v. 61, Colour® photography 
supplement, p. 18-19.) MFA 


The colors are filtered and selected by means of a 
three-color diaphragm placed in the lens and by aid 
of a half-tone screen placed immediately in front of 
the sensitive panchromatic plate. 


1861. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 

Color photography. (American photogra- 

phy, Boston, June, 1914, v. 8, p. 358-364.) 
MFA 


Cros — Ducos du Hauron and Autochrome proc- 
esses, 


1862. Colour screen-plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 2, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 40.) MFA 


Abstract of their French patent no. 
March 21531913; 


1863. McCord, Bennett. Why not the auto- 
chrome? (The Camera, Philadelphia, 1914, 
v. 18, p. 679-682.) MFA 


Advantages and drawbacks. 


1864. McIntosh, J. Some special methods 
of dealing with screen plate transpar- 
encies. (Photographic journal, London, 
Jan., 1914, new series, v. 38, p. 5-13.) MFA 

With discussion. 

Abstract in British journal of photography, London, 
March 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 11-12, MFA. Last part of this abstract in 


Camera craft, San Francisco, March, 1914, v. 21, p. 
139-140, MFA. 


1865. Mann, A. Colour photography 
simply explained. A series of articles for 
the beginner on the theory and practice 
of colour photography. (Amateur pho- 
tographer & photographic news, London, 
1914, v. 60, p. 36-37, 60-61, 84-85.) *MFA 


Different processes explained. 


1866. Massiot, G. La lanterne “Frigida,” 
son but, son utilité pour la projection des 
autochromes. illus. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1914, série 3, 
tome 5, p. 224-226.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 40, MFA. 


1867. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
triple projection process of colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 14-15.) MFA 


1868. Miethe, Adolf. Zur Asthetik photo- 
graphischer Farbenaufnahmen. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1914, 
Bd. 51, p. 293-294.) MFA 


1869. Monpillard, Félix. A cabinet for the 
drying of hypersensitised autochrome 
plates. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 36.) MFA 


1870. Morton, Arthur E. On tour with 
screen-plates. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 7, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 30.) MFA 


1871. Sunrise and sunset effects. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 47.) MFA 





467128 of 





90 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1914, continued. 


1872. Murdoch, Helen M. ,Colour photog- 
raphy.; (British journal of photography, 
London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 
Exposure and development in India. 
1873. Colour photography in Ceylon. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 40.) MFA 


Exposure and development. 





1874. A New Paget process for colour 
prints on paper. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, May 1, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.20.) MFA 


1875. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Telepho- 
tography with autochrome plates. (Photo- 
era, Boston, July, 1914, v. 33, p. ferry 


Also printed in British journal of peas 
London, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 31-32, 33-34, MFA. 

1876. Pfenninger, Otto. Three - colour 
cameras. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 5, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

Claims that Ducos du Hauron’s patent 2973 of 
1876, and that of Cros, 9012 of 1892 are the bases 
for Ives patent (4606 of 1892). 

1877. Piper, Charles Welborne. The ray- 
dex colour process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, 
p. 5-6.) MFA 


1878. The Polychromide process of colour 
photography on paper. (British journal 
of photography, London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, 
Colour photography supplement, ey 


1879. Potonniée, G. Biographie de Louis 
de Ducos du Hauron. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1914, sé- 
rie 3, tome 5, p. 149-163.) MFA 
Includes bibliography of works and patents. 


1880. Power, H. D’Arcy. Experiences 
with the Paget color plate. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, March, 1914, v. 21, p. 107- 
109.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 1, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 17-18, MFA. 

1881. Further notes on the Paget 
color plate. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 
April, 1914, v. 21, p. 193-194.) MFA 
1882. The Reproduction of direct colour 
work. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 7, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 29.) MFA 

Reproduction by photo-engraving process. 

1883. Rigg, Gilbert. Color photography 
applied to the demonstration of the micro- 





structure of ores. (Metallurgical and 
chemical engineering, New York, Jan., 
1914, v. 12, p. 30-31.) VOA 
Abstract. 


1884. Rypinski, M. C. Color photography. 
(Illuminating Engineering Society. Trans- 
actions, New York, 1914, v. 9, p. nee 


Brief historical review and details of development. 
Also printed in Scientific American supplement, 
New York, Feb. 27, 1915, v. 79, p. 134-135, VA. 


1884a. Schultess-Young, H.S. Some notes 
on the autochrome and Paget colour proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 41-42, 48.) MFA 


Also printed in The Camera, Philadelphia, 1915, 
v. 19, p. 191-192, MFA. 


1885. Sheahan, David J. The making of 
autochromes. (American annual of pho- 
tography for 1915, New York, 1914, v. 29, 
p. 284-286.) MFA 


1886. Stands for the exhibition of colour 
transparencies. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Sept. 4, 1914, v. 61, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ee 


1887. Szczepanik, Jan, and F. Avsucu. 

Bleach-out process. (British journal of 

photography, London, March 6, 1914, v. 61, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 12.) 

MFA 

Abstract of German patent 264207 of Sept. 10, 1912. 


1888. Thieme, Paul. Die Paget - Prize- 
Platte vom Standpunkte des Amateurs. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1914, Bd. 51, p. 65-67.) MFA 


1889. Tobler, Friedrich. The autochrome 
process in the tropics. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ek 


Discusses keeping qualities of plates and develop- 
ment. 


1890. Valette, T., and R. Ferret. Colour 
prints on fabrics. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.7.) MFA 
Ayres of French patent no. 457446 of May 3, 


1891. Wall, Edward John. Autochrome 
formulae. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Nov. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 42-44.) MFA 


1892. ——_ The present status of color pho- 
tography. (Photo-era, Boston, 1914, v. 33, 
p. 126-129, 171-176.) MFA 
1893. The structure of screen-plates. 





(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, ps 4.) MFA 


1894. —— Zur Geschichte der Farbenpho- 
tographie. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie 
und Reproduktionstechnik ftir 1914, Halle 
a. S., 1914, Jahrg. 28, p. 127-129.) MFA 





eee, 


—_— 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 9] 


1914, continued. 


1895. Watkins, Alfred. Exposure of auto- 
chrome plates. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.27.) MFA 


1896. Weidmann, U. Autochrom-Teleauf- 
nahmen. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 
Berlin, 1914, Bd. 51, p. 204.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 27-28, MFA. 

1897. Weissermel, W. Das neue Pinatypie- 
verfahren. (Photographische Rundschau, 
Halle a. S., 1914, Bd. 51, p. 72-73.) MFA 


1898. Wenz, Emile. Pavillon pour exposer 
les plaques autochromes. illus. (Société 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1914, série 3, tome 5, p. 127-129.) MFA 


1899. Whatmough, W. A. The Raydex 
process at the Society of Colour Photog- 
raphers. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 


1900. Wilkinson, W. T. Dark-room hints 
for panchromatic plates and autochrome 
development. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 28.) MFA 


1901. Woodhead, A. E. Photography in 
colour. (Society of Dyers and Colourists. 
Journal, Bradford, 1914, v. 30, p. 78-84.) 

+ VLG 


1902. Worel, Karl. Das neue, verbesserte 
Utocolorpapier. (Jahrbuch fiir Photogra- 
phie und Reproduktionstechnik fiir 1914, 
Halle a. S., 1914, Jahrg. 28, p. 35-36.) MFA 


1903-1904. Wright, H. W. Canning. The 
raydex colour process. (British journal 
of photography, Jan. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour 


photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 
1915 
1905. Aeonchrome colour plate. (British 


journal of photography, London, Dec. 3, 
1915, v.62, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 48.) MFA 


Brief announcement of company’s organization. 


1906. Allan, Sidney. The new kodachrome 
process of color photography. (Bulletin of 
photography, Philadelphia, May 26, 1915, 
v. 16, p. 654-655.) +MFA 


1907. Arch, John C. Hints on making ray- 
dex colour prints. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. gee en 


1908. Aron, Reinhold. Uber die Farben- 
wiedergabe mit der Lippmannschen 
Methode. illus. (Zeitschrift fiir wissen- 
schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1915, Bd. 
15, p. 65-78, 97-125.) PLC 


1909. Biermann, E. A. Autochrome work. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 1, 1915, v.62, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 2-3.) MFA 

Paper read before the Birmingham Photographic 
Society. Shows departures from established practice. 
1910. Autochromy up to date. (Ameri- 
can annual of photography for 1916, New 
York, 1915, ‘v. 30, p. 170-173.) MFA 


1911. Black, Adam. Colour vision. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
3, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 48.) - MFA 





1912. —— Degeneration of panchromatic 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 37.) MFA 


1913. Objections to panchromatic 
plates. illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Dec. 3, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 45-47.) MFA 


1914. Some notes on the working of 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 36.) MFA 


1915. Blochmann, Richard. Zur deutschen 








Farbenplatte. (Photographische Rund- 
schau, Halle a. S., 1915, Bd. 53, p. 74-77.) 
MFA 


Amateur’s experience with Agfa plates. 


1916. Brown, George Edward. The koda- 
chrome process of colour. portraiture. 
(Photographic journal, London, April, 1915, 
new series, v. 39, p. 141-143.) MFA 


1917. Burton, H. M. Making natural col- 
our lantern slides by the Paget process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 9-10.) MFA 


1918. Carr, Sydney Herbert. The latitude 
of the autochrome plate. (British journal 
of photography, London, Feb. 5, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ot 


Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
1915, v. 22, p. 204-205, MFA, and in Photo-era, 
Boston, May, 1915, v. 34, p. 216, MFA. 

1919. Notes on exposure in the auto- 
chrome process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 1, 1915, v. 62, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.4.) MFA 


1920. Croughton, G. Hanmer. The East- 
man colour transparency process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
p33 MFA 


1921. Davidson, P. G. The pigment diffi- 
culty in the three-colour processes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 7, 
1915, v.62, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 20.) MFA 





9? THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1915, continued. 


1922. Davis, Vivian P. Notes on the im- 
proved raydex colour-print process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 1-2.) MFA 


1923. The raydex process. 
graphic journal, London, Nov., 
series, v. 39, p. 266-272.) MFA 


1924. Dr. Kurt Gebhart. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1915, Bd. 52, p. 63- 
64.) MFA 


(Photo- 
1915, new 





Portrait and obituary notice. 


1925. Domony, R. B. An exposure meter 
for colour and ordinary plates. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 6, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


Wynne Hunter instrument. 


1926. Donaldson, Charles. Portraits in 
color. illus. (American annual of photog- 
raphy for 1916, New York, 1915, v. 30, p. 
78-83.) MFA 


1927. Eder, Josef Maria. Uber farbenemp- 
findliche Platten zur Spektrumphotographie 


im Infrarot, Rot, Gelb und Griin. illus. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1915, Bd. 52, p. 271-277.) MFA 


1928. Fingerhuth, C. Schwarzweisskopien 
von Autochromaufnahmen. (Photograph- 
ische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1915, Bd. 52, 
p. 81-82.) MF 


1929. Gamble, E. H. The difficulty in the 
three-colour process. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 5, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ieee 


Discussion between author and C. Welborne Piper. 
1930. The pigment difficulty in the tri- 
colour process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 28.) MFA 


1931. Genthe, Arnold. Some remarks on 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. aay 


Comments on artistic and commercial possibilities. 


1932. Hanneke, Paul. 
mit farbenempfindlichen Platten. 





Zur Photographie 
(Photo- 


graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1915, 
Bd. 52, p. 167-169.) MFA 
1933. Hess-Ives color photography. (The 


Camera, Philadelphia, 1915, v. 19, p. 725- 
726.) MFA 


1934. Hess-Ives Corporation. The Hicro 
colour process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 34-36.) MFA 


From booklet issued by the company. 


1935. Hofrat Prof. Dr. J. M. Eder. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1915, Bd. 
52, opp. p. 100.) MFA 


Portrait. 


1936. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Three- 
colour photography: with special reference 
to three-colour printing and similar proc- 
esses. Translated by Henry Oscar Klein... 
London: P. Lund, Humphries & Co., Ltd., 
1915. 138 p., 2 cold ploy 3ucoi tease 
illus. “8° MFV 


The Library also has edition of 1904 published in 
London by A. W. Penrose & Co. 


1937. An Important development in color 
photography. (Scientific American, New 
York, 1915, v. 112, p. 341, 350.) VA 


Kodachrome process. 


1938. Jones, Chapman. On colour sensi- 
tised plates. illus. (Nature, London, 1915, 
v.94, p. 676-677, 701-703.) OA 


Also printed in Scientific Pig pe Ries ica 
New York, April 10, 1915, v. 79, p. 


1939. Jones, L. A. Colour bie of two 
component mixtures. illus. (British BL hate 
nal of photography, London, 1915, 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 6-8, 11, 
13-14.) MFA 


1940. Jones, L. A., and others. Relative 
photographic and visual efficiencies of illu- 
minants. illus. (Illuminating Engineering 
Society. Transactions, New York, Dec. 30, 
1915, v. 10, p. 963-986.) VOK 


A study upon ordinary and color-sensitive plates of 
various light sources. 

Also prinieed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 42-44, 47- "48: v. 63, 
supplement, p. 8. FA, 
1941. Kine-Chromo, pseud. The difficulties 
of colour cinematography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 38-39.) 

MFA 


1942. Kodachrome. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, June, 1915, v. 22, p.248.) MFA 


1943. The Kodachrome process of colour 
portraiture. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, May 7, 1915, v. 62, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 17-20.) 
MFA 


1916, Colour photography 


Description and official directions. 


1944. Koenig, Ernst. Farbenempfindliche 

Platten. illus. (Photographische Rund- 

schau, Halle a..S., 1915; Basg2an. beet, 
M 


1945. Liesegang, Raphael Ed. Uber ein 
Badeverfahren zur Herstellung von Lipp- 
mann-Platten. (Photographische Rund- 
schau, Halle a. S;, 1915, Baeza: megs 


1946. —— Uber die Polychromie des Sil- 
bers. (Zeitschrift fir wissenschaftliche 
Photographie, Leipzig, 1915, Bd. 14, p. 343- 
346.) PLC 





1957. 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


1915, continued. 


1947. Lueppo-Cramer. Farbenenipfindlich- 
keit und Tiefenentwicklung. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1915, 
Ba. 52, p. 225-227.) MFA 


1948. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
kodachrome process of color portraiture. 
(American annual of photography for 1916, 
New York, 1915, v. 30, ‘:p. 9-21.) MFA 


1949. Ein Neues Patent fiir ein altes Kon- 
trollverfahren fiir die subtraktive Mehrfar- 
benphotographie. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1915, Bd. 52, p. 115-118.) 

MFA 


Comments on D. R. P. 276,645, Dec., 1912, to 


Baugé, Dumez and Seauve. 


1950. Pan Chromo, pseud. Control in tri- 
chromy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p38.) MFA 


1951. The supports of colour photo- 
graphs. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, ae 30-31.) MFA 
1 Urges experiments to secure an improvement upon 
glass. 


1952. Penrose, Frank. The use of auto- 
chromes in bird photography with examples 
of protective coloration, etc. (Photographic 
journal, London, June, 1915, new series, v. 


39, p. 215-218.) 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 27-28, MFA. 


1953. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Interiors 
in natural colours by reflected light. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, June 
4, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 22-24.) MFA 


Adaptation of autochromes for the work. 





1954. Pfenninger, Otto. The polychromide 
colour process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 3-4.) MFA 


1955. Piper, Charles Welborne. Colour in 
photography and in vision. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Nov. 5, 1915, 
v. 62, Colour photography supplement, p. 
41-42.) MFA 
Also printed in Camera erate, San Francisco, Jan., 
1916, v. 23, p. 29-30, MFA. 
1956. Colour oo PES in colour proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 26-27.) MFA 
Abstract in Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 
1915, v. 22, p. 371-373, MFA. 
Exposure with screen plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 6, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 








o3 


1958. The pigment difficulty in the 
three-colour process. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 5-6, 15-16.) 





MFA 
1959. Pope, Sir William Jackson. Colour 
photography. (Engineering, London, 
March 12, 1915, v. 99, p. 304-305.) VDA 


General lecture. 


Also printed in Scientific American supplement, 
New York, June 12, 1915, v. 79, p. 381, VA 


1960. Power, H. D’Arcy. Color in pictorial 
photography. illus. (American annual of 
photography for 1916, New York, 1915, v. 
30, p. 106-117.) MFA 


Relation of color photography to color vision. 


1961. Process for producing colored photo- 

graphic prints. illus. (Scientific American, 

New York, Dec. 11, 1915, v. 113, p. 524.) 
VA 


Process of Frederic E. Ives. 


1962. Professor Dr. Richard Neuhauss. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1915, Bd. 52, p. 45-46.) MFA 


Obituary notice. 


1963. Schultess-Young, W. A. Color pho- 

tography at its best. (American photogra- 

phy, Boston, Dec., 1915, v. 9, p. 668-676.) 
MFA 


Brief directions for Paget and Autochrome plates. 


1964. Sheahan, David J. The autochrome. 
Possibilities of its use as a pictorial medium. 
(American annual of photography for 1916, 
New York, 1915, v. 30, p. 188-196.) MFA 


Abridgment in British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 15, MFA. 


1965. The Society of Colour Photographers. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1906, v. 53, p. 831-832, 849, 936; 1907, v. 54, 
p. 725, 767, 813, 828, supplement, p. 6, 30, 46, 
54, 71, 73; 1908, v.55, p. 288, supplement, p. 
88; 1910, v. 59, supplement, p. 24, 40; 1911, 
v. 58, p. 88; 1912, v. 59, supplement, p. 12, 
16, 25-26; 1913, v. 60, supplement, p. 12, 14, 
23-24, 27-28, 32; 1914, v. 61, supplement, 
p. 20-22, 28; 1915, v. 62, p. 8.) MFA 


1966. Spiller, William H. Lantern slides in 
natural colors. (Photo-era, Boston, 1915, . 
v. 34, p. 60-61, 113-116.) MFA 


Autochrome and Paget processes. 


1967. Two-colour photography in patent 
suit. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 


Account of setting aside of British patent 26671 
of 1906. 


1968. W., L. T. Colour slides in lantern 
lectures. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 5, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 


Suggestions for overcoming contrast to the bril- 
liancy of the monochrome. 


94 


1915, continued. 


1969. Wall, Edward John. Kodachrome 
and other two-colour processes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 29-30.) MFA 


1970. Weston, A. W. H. Autochromes in 


the reception room. illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, June 4, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ee, 


1971. Xtensis, pseud. Panchromatic plates 
and colour ratios. illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, Sept. 3, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ey 


1916 


1972. Baum, Ernst. Aus der Praxis des 
Autochrom - Portrats vermittels Magne- 
sium-Blitzlicht. (Photographische Kunst, 
Miinchen, 1915-16, Jahrg. 14, p. 89-91.) 
+MFA 


1973. Biermann, E. A. The reproduction of 
colour-screen transparencies. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1916, v. 63, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 4, ies 


1974. Black and white prints from auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1916, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


1975. Brown, George Edward. Practical 
instructions in color-photography. illus. 
(Photo-miniature, New York, March, 1916, 
v. 13, p. 98-138.) MFA 


Autochrome, Paget, 
processes. 


Hicro, and Kodachrome 


1976. Cabinet experiments in colour photog- 
raphy. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 42-44, 47-48.) MFA 


1977. A Camera for two-colour photogra- 
phy. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, June 2, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 21-22.) MFA 


Invention of Percy D. Brewster. 


1978. Capstaff, J. G. The kodachrome 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 30-31.) MFA 


Patent specifications. 


1979. Two-colour subtractive cinema- 
tography. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Sept. 1, 1916, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 34-36.) MFA 


Patent specification. 


1980. Cobenzl, A. Agfa - Farbenplatte. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1916, Bd. 53, p. 323-328.) MFA 





THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1981. Commercial colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 


Oct. 6, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography. 
MFA 


supplement, p. 37-38.) 


Some practical suggestions. 


1982. Darling, Lloyd. Photography in 
natural colors. illus. (Popular science 
monthly, New York, 1916, v. 89, p. 102- 
104.) *DA 


1983. The Death is announced of Herr Rob- 
ert Krayn. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, May 5, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 20.) MFA 


Traubes neues Farbeverfahren 
(Photographische Kunst, 
+MFA 


1984. Dr. 
fiir Diapositive. 
Miinchen, 1916, Jahrg. 15, p. 9.) 


1985. Donaldson, Charles. A bromoil trans- 
fer process of three-colour printing. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, July 7, 
1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 25-26.) MFA 


1986. Three-colour bromoil transfers. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 1, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 





1987. A Double-negative camera which re- 
produces images in natural colors. illus. 
(Scientific American, New York, May 6, 
1916, v. 114, p. 471, 495.) VA 


Apparatus of Percy D. Brewster. 


1988. Eldredge, Arthur G. Parallax in 
Paget plates. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


1989. Farbrasterplatten mit Glaskornern 
von MacDonough (1892) und ein verheim- 


lichtes Quellenzitat. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1916, Bd. 53, p. 23- 
25) MFA 


1990. Festenberg, Hans. 
Praxis der Pinatypie. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1916, Bd. 53, p. 25- 
Zr) MFA 


1991. Fitzsimons, R. J., firm. Color pho- 


tography with autochrom plates... New 
York ,;1916;. 40 p. illus. 19. ed. nar. 16°. 
MFG p.v. 4, no. 7 


1992. Franck, Karl. Die Wirkungen der 
einzelnen Spektralfarben auf die verschie- 
denen lichtempfindlichen Schichten. illus. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1916, Bd. 53, p. 303-307.) MFA 


1993. Fraprie, Frank Roy, editor. 
make prints in colors... Boston: Ameri- 
can Photographic Publishing Co., 1916. 66 
p. 12°. (Practical photography. no. 4.) 


Einiges aus der 


How to _ 


MFF (Practical v.4) _ 










ee a 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


1916, continued. 


1994. Furnald, S. M., and A. J. Newton. A 
ratiometer for use in colour reproduction 
work. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, March 3, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p.9-11.) MFA 


Communication 35 from the Research Laboratory 
of the Eastman Kodak Co. 


1995. Graham, James. System in experi- 
mental work. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, July 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 27-28.) MFA 


1996. Hess-Ives color photography. (Amer- 
ican photography, Boston, Jan., 1916, v. 10, 
p. 35-36.) MFA 


1997. The Hess-Ives hiblock. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 
1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 40.) MFA 


Brief reference to this improvement. 


1998. Hewitt, C. H. Three-colour bromoil 
transfers. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 


1999. Hnatek, Adolf. Versuche zur Anwen- 
dung strenger Selektivfilter bei spektral- 
photometrischen Untersuchungen. (Zeit- 
schrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, 
Leipzig, 1916, Bd. 15, p. 271-288.) PLC 


2000. Is this actual color in photography 
at last? (Popular science monthly, New 
York, 1916, v. 88, p. 417.) *DA 


2001. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Lippmann 
films as means for securing monochromatic 
light in photometry and optical pyrometry. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 1, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 48.) MFA 


2002. Ives, Herbert Eugene, and E. F. 
Kincspury. The theory of the flicker photo- 
meter. illus. (Philosophical magazine & 
journal of science, London, Nov., 1914, se- 
ries 6, v. 28, p. 708-728; April, 1916, series 
6, v. 31, p. 290-321.) OA 


2003. Lectures on colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 3, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 41-42.) | MFA 


Suggestions for giving lectures. 


2004. Lewisohn, John. A phantasy about 
color-photography and colors. (American 
annual of photography for 1917, New York, 
1916, v. 31, p. 182-187.) MFA 


Suggestions for possible improvements. 


2005. Luckiesh, Matthew. A filter for 
spectro-photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, 
Colour photography supplement, p. eed 


95 


2006. Making trichrome negatives. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 5, 
1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 17-18.) MFA 


Practical instructions. 


2007. Marshall, Andrew. Lecturing with 
colour slides. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p.15-16.) MFA 


Practical suggestions. 


2008. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
kodachrome process of color photography. 
(Bulletin of photography, Philadelphia, Jan. 
26, 1916, v. 18, p. 101-105.) +MFA 


2009. Morris, Wayne. Color photography. 
(American annual of photography for 1917, 
New York, 1916, v. 31, p. 55-57.) MFA 


Compares autochrome and Paget processes. 


2010. Painter, F. W. The compensating 
light - filter in the autochrome and other 
screen plate processes. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 3, 1916, v. 63, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ry 


2011. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Methods 
of exhibiting color-photographs. illus. 
(Photo-era, Boston, March, 1916, v. 36, p. 
103-105.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 13-15, MFA. 


2012. Pfenninger, Otto. Colour sensitizing. 
(Penrose’s annual, London, 1916, v. 21, p. 
37-40.) MDSA (Penrose) 


2013. Piper, Charles Welborne. Colour 
vision. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 4.) MFA 


2014. Criticism and colour perception. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 6, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 38-39.) MFA 


2015. The photography of soap bubbles. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 5, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 18-19.) MFA 


2016. Power, H. D’Arcy. Colour in pictorial 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 5.) MFA 


2017. A Review of methods of direct color 
photography. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, 1915, v. 17, p. 644, 675-676, 
707-708, 739, 772; 1916, v. 18, p. 3-4, 35-36, 
67-68, 132, 163-164, 209-210, 227-228, 259- 
260, 291.) +MFA 


2018. Rodman, G. H. The Paget colour 
plate. (Photographic journal, London, 
Dec., 1916, new series, v. 40, p. ee 








96 


1916, continued. 


2019. Salt, E. A.’ Rational panchromatism. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 1-3.) MFA 


2020. Smith, John H. A resumé of the 
work on the bleach-out process of colour 
photography. illus. (Manchester Literary 
and Philosophical Society. Memoirs and 
proceedings, Manchester, 1917, v. 60, no. 9, 
p. 1-15. *EC 
Bibliography. Pictures not given in the reprint. 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 


London, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 39-40, 44, MFA. 


2021. Thiem, W. Uber farbige Blitzauf- 


nahmen. (Photographische Rundschau, 
Halle a. S., 1916, Bd. 53, p. 196-201.) MFA 


2022. Thieme, Paul. Gedanken und Ver- 
suche uber die neue Agfa- Farbenplatte. 
illus. (Photographische Rundschau, 1916, 
Bd. 53, p. 61-66.) MFA 


2023. Valenta, Eduard. Die neue Farbras- 
terplatte der Aktiengesellschaft ftir Anilin- 
fabrikation in Berlin. illus. (Photograph- 
ische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1916, Bd. 53, 
p. 193-198.) MFA 
Describes Christensen patent (D. R. P. no. 224456 
of 1908, and 278043 of 1913) for the Agfa plate. 
2024. Villain, Alfred. Historique de la pho- 
tographie en couleurs sur tissus. (Associa- 
tion générale des chimistes de l’industrie 
textile. Bulletin, Paris, 1916, année 1914, 
p. 15-99.) VLA 


Extensive bibliography, p. 58—59. 


2025. Vinzl, Hans. Wie ich meine Auto- 
chrome entwickle. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1916, Bd. 53, p. 288-296.) 

MFA 


2026. Vom Daguerreotyp zur farbenemp- 
findlichen Platte. Zur Geschichte der 
Vogel - Obernetter - Eosin - Silberplatte. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1916, Bd. 53, p. 20-23.) MFA 


2027. Wall, Edward John. Notes on the 
processes of cinematography. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1916, v. 63, 


Colour photography supplement, p. 19-20, 
22-24.) MFA 


2028. Whidden, Guy C. Color photography 
achieved. illus. (Camera craft, San Fran- 


cisco, Jan., 1916, v. 23, p. 3-8.) MFA 
Hess-Ives process. 
2029. Wieland, H., and others. Ceramic 


colour screen plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 1, 1916, v. 63, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 
Abstract of German patent 291575. MFA 
2030. Wilkinson, W. T. Colour prints on 
paper. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, Dp. 26-27.) MFA 


THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


2031. Williams, A. D. Developing auto- 
chromes. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Jan., 1916, v. 23, p. 19-22.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 3, 1916, 'v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 12, MFA. 


1917 


2032. Anderson, Paul L. The Hess - Ives 
process of color photography. (American 
annual of photography for 1918, New York, 
1917, v. 32, p. 56-63.) MFA 


2033. Belden, Charles J. Making auto- 
chromes by artificial light. (American an- 
nual of photography for 1918, New York, 
1917, v. 32, p. 88-92.) MFA 


2034. A Bibliography on color for photog- 
raphers. (Motion picture news, New York, 
1917, v. 16, p. 298-300, 886.) +MFL 


Short list of selected books and papers, with com- 
ments. 


2035. Briant, Travers J. Colour vision. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1917, v. 64, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 36, 40, 44.) MFA 

Reply to article by C. W. Piper. 
meaning of ‘‘daylight.” 


Discusses the 


2036. Colour prints on silk fabrics. (Brit- 

ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 5, 

1917, v.64, Colour photography supplement, 

p. 4.) MFA 
Method of Vallette et Péret. 


2037. The Commercial side of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 11, 1917, v. 64, p. Meee 


2038. Corbin, Thomas W. Marvels of sci- 
entific invention; an interesting account in 
non-technical language of the invention of 
guns...colour photography, and many 
other recent discoveries of science... Lon- 
don: Seeley, Service & Co., Ltd., ‘1917. 1 

5~251(1) p., 16 pl. diagrs. 8°, V 

Color photography, p. 212-219. 


2039. Davis, Vivian P. A modification of 
the raydex process. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 4, 1917, v. 64, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 17.) 
MFA 
A reply to H. E. Rendall. 


2040. Deisch, Noel. Illumination of the 
subject in determining the colour quality 
of autochromes. (Photographic journal of 
America, Philadelphia, Nov., 1917, v. 54, 
p. 467-4 69.) M FA 

Also printed in British Journal of photography, 


London, Aug, 2, 1918) vo) 65, 
supplement, D. 30-31, MFA. 


Abstract in Camera craft, 
1918, v. 25, p. 244-246, MFA. 


das 


Colour photography ~ 


San Francisco, June, | 



























re 


aA ee 


—. 
oT 


a 1 eS 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY Q7 


1917, continued. 


2041. A Device for testing photographic 
color-filters. (Motion picture news, New 
York, Aug. 4, 1917, v. 16, p. 887-888.) -_MFL 
Spectrum projector of the Bausch & Lomb Optical 
Company. 
2042. Eder, Josef Maria. Colour sensitis- 
ing dyes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 2, 1917, v. 64, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 
1917, v. 24, p. 254-255, MFA. 
2043. Fundamental hue scale for scientific 
colour designation. illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, July 6, 1917, v. 64, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 25-27.) 
MFA 
Result of experiments by the Eastman Kodak 
Company. 
2044. Grabado fotografico en colores. 
ciedad de fomento fabril. 


(So- 
Boletin, Santiago, 


Chile, 1917, afio 34, p. 444452.) VA 
2045. Haines, Robert Thorne. Color pho- 
tography. 


(Photo-era, Boston, Dec., 1917, 
v. 39, p. 290-291.) MF A 

Possibility of coloring salts by cathode rays. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 2, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 29-30, MFA. 

2046. Hirshberg, Leonard Keene. Color 
photography. (American magazine of art, 
Washington, 1917, v.8, p. 281-283.) MAA 


2047. Hodgman, Charles D. Color and 
color photography. (Cleveland Engineer- 
ing Society. Journal, Cleveland, 1917, v. 10, 
p. 127-141.) VDA 
Also printed in Scientific American supplement, 
New York, Dec. 22, 1917, v. 84, p. 399-400, VA. 
2048. Ilford, Ltd. Working formulae for 
the new sensitol colour -sensitising dyes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 2, 1917, v. 64, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 7-8.) MFA 


2049. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Hue differ- 
ence and flicker photometer speed. illus. 
(Philosophical magazine and journal of sci- 
ence, London, Aug., 1917, series 6, v. 34, 
p. 99-112.) OA 
2050. A polarization flicker photometer 
and some data of theoretical bearing ob- 
tained with it. illus. (Philosophical maga- 
zine and journal of science, London, April, 
1917, series 6, v. 33, p. 360-380.) OA 


2051. Visual diffusivity. illus. (Philo- 
sophical magazine and journal of science, 
London, Jan., 1917, series 6, v. 33, p. LED 








2052. Kilmer, T. W. Photography in 
colors — the visual index. (Photo-era, 
Boston, Dec., 1917, v. 39, p. 294-296.) MFA 


Suggestions for making autochromes with soft 
focus lens. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 5, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 25-26, MFA. 


2053. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. 
Notes from the research laboratory, East- 
man Kodak Co. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
nal, Philadelphia, 1917, v. 184, p. 311-312.) 
VA 


Photomicrographs in color. 


2054. Photo-micrographs in colour. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 4, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 


Communication no. 50 from the Research Labora- 
tory of the Eastman Kodak Company. 

Also printed in American photography, 
Aug., 1917, v. 11, p. 448-453, MFA. 


2055. Merillat, Lou. Color photography. 
(Photo-era, Boston, April, 1917, v. 38, p. 
183-186.) ' MFA 


General principles with brief descriptions of the 
newer processes. 
2056. Photo-micrographs in color. (Mining 
and scientific press, San Francisco, Oct. 27, 
1917, v. 115, p. 610.) VA 


2057. Piper, Charles Welborne. Colour 
vision and colour photography. The spec- 
trum and the Young- Helmholtz theory. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1917, v. 64, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 9-10, 21-23, 29-31, 36, 40, 44. Preys 





Boston, 





2058. ‘The development of the science 

of colour. (British journal of photography, 

London, Jan. 5, 1917, v. 64, Colour photog- 

raphy supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 
Historical review. 

2059. Press, A. How are photographs made 


in natural colors? illus. (Popular science 
monthly, New York, 1917, v. 90, p. 254— 


2555) *DA 
2060. The Prizma four-colour process of 
colour cinematography. illus. (British 


journal of photography, London, April 6, 
1917, v. 64, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 14.) MFA 


2061. Le Procédé versicolor Dufay pour la 
photographie des couleurs. illus. (La 
Nature, Paris, Nov. 10, 1917, v.45, p.292- 
294.) OA 


Translation in pares PEN, supplement, 
New York, April 13, 1918, v. 85, p. Ab- 
stract in British journal of pe eae London, 
1918, v. 65, Colour photography supplement, p. 4, 
20-22, MFA. Partial translation in Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Oct., 1918, v. 25, p. 415, MFA. 


2062. Rendall, H. E. A modification in the 
raydex process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, April 6, 1917, v. 64, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 7 


For a reply by Vivian P. Davis see issue of May 4, 
1917, Colour photography supplement, p. 17. 


2063. Struss, Karl. Colour photography. 
(American photography, Boston, Aug., 
1917, v. 11, p. 437-444.) MFA 
Hess-Ives process. 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 


London, 1917, v. 64, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 33-34, S735) MFA, 


98 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


1917, continued, 


2064. The Technicolor process of two-col- 
our cinematography. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Nov. 2, 1917, 
v. 64, Colour photography supplement, p. 
41-43.) MFA 


2065. Villain, Alfred. Color photography 
on fabrics. (Textile American, Boston, 
1917, v. 28, Nov., 1917, p. 21-22.) 3-tf VLA 


1918 


2066. Additive and subtractive colour proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 6, 1918, v. 65, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 45-46.) ‘MFA 


Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
March, 1919, v. 26, p. 119-120, MFA. ! 


2067. Austin, A. C. The autochrome plate 
in photo-lithography. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 5, 1918, v. 65, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 13-14.) 
MFA 


2068. Bull, A. J. Some peculiarities of 

colour and their bearing on photographic 

work. (Photographic journal, London, 

Jan., 1918, new series, v. 42, p.9-13.) MFA 
With discussion. 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 1, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 5-6, A, and in Scientific American 

supplement, New York, 1918, v. 86, p. 69, VA 


2069. Colour photography of the battlefield. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 7, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 24.) MFA 


Account of the work of F. Hurley in Flanders and - 


Palestine. 


2070. Decennia practica — colour photogra- 
phy. illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1917, v. 64, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 2-7, 11-12, 14-16, 18-20, 23- 
24, 27-28, 31-32,- 35-36, 38-39, 43-44, 46-48; 
1918, v.65, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 3-4, 6-8, 12, 14, 18-20, 23-24, 26-27, 31-32, 
35-36, 39-40, 42-44, 47-48; 1919, v. 66, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 3-4, 7-8, 
11-12, 20, 27-28.) MF 
Brings together extracts from the British journal 


almanac of the years 1906 to 1915 covering important 
developments during that time. 


2071. The Douglass process of cinematog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 5, 1918, v. 65, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
2072. Fischer, Otto. Beitrag zur Kenntnis 
der Chinocyanine (Pinacyanole, Dicya- 
nine). (Journal fiir praktische Chemie, 
Leipzig, 1918, N. BF. Bd. 98) p: ma 


2073. Fox method of preparing positives 
for subtractive two-color cinematography. 
(Motion picture news, New York, April 6, 
1918, v. 17, p. 2110-2112.) MFL 


2074. Hess-Ives Corporation. Dichroic 
films for selective transmission and reflec- 
tive of colour rays. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, March 1, 1918, v. 65, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 9-11. ), 
MF 


- Sg of their patent specification 110089 of 
eb., 191 


2075. Ives, Herbert Eugene. The resolu-- 
tion of mixed colours by differential visual 
diffusivity. illus. (Philosophical magazine 
and journal of science, London, May, ay 


series 6, v. 35, p. 413-421.) 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1918, v. 65, ae photography supplement, 
p. 33- 35, 38-39, MFA 


2076. Meggers, W. F. Wave-length meas- 
urements in spectra from 5600 to 9600 A. 
illus. (United States. — Standards Bureau. 
Bulletin, Washington, June 24, 1918, v. 14, 
p. 371-395.) VBDA 


See p. 376-377 for dyes used in photographing red 
and infra red. 


2077. A Pioneer in colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 5, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 16.) MFA 


Refers to Henry Collen. See entry under his name. 


2078. Piper, Charles Welborne. Some 
thoughts on coloured photographs and pho- 
tographs in colour. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 3, 1918, v. 65, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ee 


Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 


Sept., 1918, v.25, p. 370-372, MFA. 


2079. Prizma two-colour cinematography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 1, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 8.) MFA 


Comments on article by A. S. Cory in Motion pic- 
ture news of Jan. 12, 1918. 


2080. Rounds, Will. Avoiding pitfalls in 
making autochromes. (British journal of — 
photography, London, June 7, 1918, v. 65, 
Colour photography supplement, p. sy 


2081. Rundle, B. Autochrome frames and 
a few hints. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 1, 1918, v. 65, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. re 


2082. Seyewetz, A. Dyes in colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 6, 1918, v. 65, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 46-47.) MFA 





4 





photography supplement, p. 36.) 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 99 


1918, continued. 


2083. Storr, B. V. Photographic materials 
and processes. (Society of Chemical In- 
dustry. Reports of the progress of applied 
chemistry, London. v. 1, 1916, p. 298-315; 
v. 2, 1917, p. 495-509; v. 3, 1918, p. 457-466.) 

VOA 


Reviews progress in color processes and cinema- 
tography, especially with reference to patents. 


The above are reprinted in British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1917, v. 64, p. 353-356, 364-366; 
1919, v. 66, p. 13-15, 27-28, 605- 608, MFA. 


2084. Warburg, Agnes B. “War-type” 
(Bromoil-transfero-collotype). (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 4, 
1918, v. 65, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 37-38.) MFA 


2085. Wilkinson, W. T. New method of 


producing tri-color prints. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, April, 1918, v. 25, p. 157— 
159.) MFA 


1919 


2086. Belden, Charles J. Autochrome pho- 
tography by artificial light. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, July 4, 1919, 
v. 66, Colour photography supplement, p. 
25-26.) MFA 


2087. —— Color photography by artificial 
light. (The Camera, Philadelphia, 1919, v. 
23, p. 246-249.) MFA 


2088. Books on colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, June 
6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 24.) MFA 


2089. Butler, C. P. The bleachout process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 4, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 28.) MFA 


2090. Butler, Edwin T. The Butler three- 
colour camera. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 5, 1919, v. 66, aa 


2091. A Combined transparency viewing 
apparatus and retouching stand. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 22-24.) MFA 


_ 2092. Douglass, L. F. Douglass two-colour 


cinematography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 3, 1919, v. 66, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 


Specification of his patent 117864 of 1918 
(British). 


2093. Expert, pseud. Dust and the Paget 
colour process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 7, 1919, v. 66, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 12.) MFA 


2094. Fanstone, Robert M. Colour screen 
hints. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 3, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 40.) MFA 


Suggests greater care in calculating time of ex- 
posure. 


Also printed in Camera craft, 
Feb., 1920, v. 27, p. 68, MFA. 


2095. Essential features in apparatus 
for colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 7, 1919, v. 66, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 41-42.) 

MFA 


Hints on cameras, lenses, filters, and exposure 
meters. 


2096. Lantern - slides by the screen- 
plate process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Dec. 5, 1919, v. 66, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 45-46.) MFA 


2097. Notes on the Paget process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 24.) F 


Also printed in Camera craft, 
Oct., 1919, v.26, p. 403-404, MFA. 


2098. Registering Paget transparencies. 
(British journal of photography, London, 


Nov. 7, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 44.) MFA 


San Francisco, 











San Francisco, 





2099. Godbold, A. Vernon. Fourteen points 

on colour. (British journal of photography, 

London, 1919, v. 66, p. 261-262, 275-276.) 
MFA 


2100. The Gorsky colour process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 7, 
1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 44.) MFA 


Brief reference. 


2101. Gross, Michael. The quest of color. 


(Photo-era magazine, Boston, Feb., 1919, 

v. 42, p. 64-68.) MFA 
Historical. 

2102-2103. H. Essenhigh Corke. (Photo- 


graphic journal, London, March, 1919, new 
series, v. 43, p. 102-103.) MFA 
Obituary. 


2104. Havelock, Bertram E. The light- 
filter in autochrome photography. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 22-23.) MFA 


Also printed in Camera HED 
Oct., 1919, v. 26, p. 402-403, MFA 


San Francisco, 


2105. Ives, Frederic Eugene. A new pho- 
tographic mordant dye process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 1-2.) MFA 

Has also specification of British patent no. 113617 


of 1918 granted to author and the Hess-Ives Corpora- 
tion. 


100 
1919, continued. 


2106. Koegel, P. R. Die Konstitution 
organischer Farbstoffe und ihre Lichtemp- 
findlichkeit unter dem Einfluss von Anethol 
und anderer Sensibilisatoren. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1919, Bd. 
56, p. 224-231, 258-270.) MFA 


2107. Die theoretischen Grundlagen 
eines neuen direkten farbenphotograph- 
ischen Verfahrens mittels Korperfarben. 





(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1919, Bd. 56, p. 332-337.) MFA 
2108. Kropf, Fritz. §Entwicklungsbilder 


und Farbenempfindlichkeit verschiedener 

Silbersalze. illus. (Photographische Kor- 

respondenz, Wien, 1919, Bd. 56, p. 33-42.) 
MFA 


Abstract translation in British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photogra- 
phy supplement, p. 36, MFA. 


2108a. Lucas, E. G. Handel. Three-colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Oct. 3, 1919, v. 66, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 39-40.) MFA 


Suggests that tri-color photography must be de- 
veloped and not scrapped as a “blind alley.” 


2109. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. A 
simplified method of developing autochrome 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 3, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 37.) MFA 


Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Dec., 1919, v. 26, p. 478-479, MFA. 


2110. und, Carl H., and LL. EE. Wise. 
Intermediates used in the preparation of 
photosensitizing dyes. 2: Quaternary ha- 
lides. (Journal of industrial & engineering 
chemistry, Easton, Penn., May, 1919, v. 11, 
p. 458-460.) VOA 


2111. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
H. T. Crarke. A new yellow dye and light 
filters made from it. illus. (Journal of 
industrial & engineering chemistry, Easton, 


Penn., May, 1919, v. 11, p. 454-455.) VOA 


211la. Meugniot. Une méthode simplifiée 
de développement des plaques autochromes. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1919, série 3, tome 6, p. 341- 
343.) MFA 


2112. Miethe, Adolf, and Ericu STENGER. 
Ultraviolettdurchlassige Filter. illus. 
(Zeitschrift ftir wissenschaftliche Photo- 


graphie, Photophysik und Photochemie, 

Leipzig, 1919, Bd. 19, p. 57-68.) PLC 
Has a list of references. 

2113. Mikeska, L. A., and others. Inter- 


mediates used in the preparation of photo- 
sensitizing dyes. 1: Quinoline bases. (Jour- 


‘2117. Paget colour process. 


THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


nal of industrial and engineering chemistry, 
Easton, Penn., May, 1919, v. 11, p. 456-458.) 
VOA 


2114. Namias, Rodolfo. Enciclopedia foto- 
grafica. Milano: Il Progresso fotografico, 
1919. xxii, 1001 p. 6.ed. illus. 8°. MFD 


Chapter 57: La fotografia in colori col processo di 
tricromia fotografica, Chapter 58: La fotografia in 
colori col processo di autocromia Lumiere e processi 
analoghi. 


2115. Newens, Frank R. A demonstration 
of “Raydex.” (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Dec., 1919, new series, v. 43, p. 238—- 
241.) MFA 


2116. Nicholson, John William. Energy 
distribution in spectra. (Nature, London, 
Aug. 21, 1919, v. 103, p. 495-498.) OA 


(British jour- 
nal of photography, London, April 4, 1919, 
v. 66, Colour photography supplement, p. 
14.) MFA 


Suggestions for keeping screens and filters clean. 


2118. Pope, Sir William Jackson. The pho- 
tography of coloured objects. (Manchester 
Literary and Philosophical Society. Me- 
moirs, Manchester, Oct. 24, 1919, v. 64, part 
2, p. XXvili-xxx.) * EC 

Abstract in Nature, London, Nov. 27, 1919, v. 104, 


p. 346, OA. Account of dyestuffs prepared under the 
author’s direction. 


2119. Pseudo-colour processes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 4.) MFA 


Brief references to ‘‘Mars-Star”? and Solgram proc- 
esses. 


2120. Rendall, H. E. Paget colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 7, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 


2121. A review of colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 31-34.) MFA 


Reviews paper printing processes. 





2122. Where we stand in colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 21-22 MFA 
Brief account of developments during war time. 


Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Oct., 1919, v. 26, p. 399-401, MFA, and Photo-era 
magazine, Boston, Oct., 1919, v. 43, p. 186-188, MFA. 


2123. Williams, S. H. <A new process of 
printing on paper in natural colours. (Pho- 
tographic journal, London, March, 1919, 
new series, v. 43, p. 88-95.) MFA 


Abstracts in Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
1919, v. 26, p. 201-202, MFA, and anes tM 
pher, London, March 5, 1919, v. 47, p. 200 A. 


* a 





A 
: e 
. 
* 
iB 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


1919, continued. 


2124. Three-colour Bromoil enlarge- 
ments from negatives of the Joly type. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1919, v.66, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 15-16, 18-20.) MFA 
Paper read before the Royal Photographic Society. 
With discussion. 
Also printed in Camera craft, 





San Francisco, 
Sept., 1919, v. 26, p. 359-361, MFA, without discus- 
sion. 


2125. Wise, Louis E., and others. Syn- 
thesis of photosensitizing dyes; pinaverdol 
and pinacyanol. (Journal of industrial and 
engineering chemistry, Easton, Penn., May, 
1919, v.11, p. 460-463.) VOA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 5, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 34-36, MFA. 


2126. Yerbury,S.G. Is three-colour a blind 
alley? (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 5, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 36.) MFA 


2127. Yoshida, Usaburo. Methyl-violet as 
a red sensitiser of the photographic plate. 
illus. (Kyoto Imperial University. — Col- 
lege of Science. Memoirs, Kyoto, 1917-19, 
v. 3, p. 69-71.) OA 


1920 


2128. Arch, John C. Making and printing 
carbon tissues for three-colour printing. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 


2129. Arturo Hernandez. (British journal 

of photography, London, Nov. 5, 1920, v. 67, 

Colour photography supplement, p. 44.) 
Notice of his death. MFA 


2130. Autochromes of the lunar eclipse. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 28.) MFA 


40-minute exposure in telescopic camera of the 
Société francaise de photographie. 


2131. Barbier, H. Colorants sensibilisa- 
teurs dérivés des quinoléines, quinaldines et 
lépidines contenant les radicaux diméthyl- 
amino et diéthylamino. (Société chimique 
de France. Bulletin, Paris, 1920, série 4, 
tome 27, p. 427-439.) PKA 


2132. Blueness of water effects in the Paget 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour pho- 


tography supplement, p. 15-16.) MFA 
2133. Burka, Samuel M. Hypersensitizing 
commercial panchromatic plates. illus. 


(Franklin Institute. Journal, Philadelphia, 
1920, v. 189, p. 25-46.) VA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1920, v. 67, p. 479-481, 496-499, 514, MFA. 


101 


2134. Capstaff, J. G., and E. R. Buttock. 
A production of panchromatic sensitiveness 
without dyes. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 26, 1920, v. 67, 

p. 719-720.) MFA 


Communication no. 92 from the Research Labora- 
tory of the Eastman Kodak Company. 


2135. Claudy, Carl Harry. Color photog- 
raphy. (The Camera, Philadelphia, 1920, 
v. 24, p. 406-411.) MFA 


Ives’ processes of still and moving pictures. 


Fred- 
eric E. Ives, wizard of color and light, and 
father of the half-tone. port. (Scientific 
American, New York, July 31, 1920, v. 123, 
p. 104, 112, 114.) VA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 


London, Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 34-36, MFA. 





2137. Colour photography; the autochrome 
and Paget methods described, and their 
applicability compared. Duplicating colour 
transparencies. Difficulties in the way of 
colour work on paper. (Amateur photog- 
rapher and photography, London, March 3, 
1920, v. 49, p. 173-174.) +MFA 


2138. Crémier, Victor. Developers for the 
autochrome plate. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.31.) MFA 


2139. Crowther, Raymond E. Photographic 
materials and processes. (Society of Chem- 
ical Industry. Reports of the progress of 
applied chemistry, London, v. 4, 1919, p. 
508-522; v. 5; 1920, p: 505-522.) VOA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 28, 1920, v. 0 p. 327-332; 1921, v. 68, 
p. 478-480, 490- 491, MFA 


2140. Davidson, Winn W. The future of 
color photography. (Photo-era magazine, 
Boston, Feb., 1920, v.44, p. 80-85.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 5, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 9-11, MFA. 


2141. Death of Sir William Abney. port. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 10, 1920, v. 67, p. 755-756.) MFA 


2142. Eastman Kodak Company. The pho- 
tography of colored objects. Rochester, 
N. Y.: Eastman Kodak Co., 19203. 1020p: 
iilus, 4. ed, "8". MFK 


2143. Fanstone, Robert M. Adapting single 
metal slides for the Paget colour process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


2144. —— Binding Paget colour transpar- 
encies. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 4.) MFA 


102 
1920, continued, 
2145. Clearing autochromes and fixing 





after intensification. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 5, 1920, v. 67, 
Colour photography supplement, eone 


2146. —— Colour photography in portrai- 
ture. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 25-27.) MFA 


Suggestions as to lenses, backgrounds, and posing. 


2147. The colour photography of 
stained glass by the screen plate process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 29-31.) MFA 


2148. Flower photography in natural 
colours by the screen-plate process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
6, 1920, v. 67, p. 41-43.) MFA 


2149. —— Identifying three-colour nega- 
tives. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1920, v. 67, p.16.) MFA 


Directions for marking films. 


2150. The intensification of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 5, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 


2151, Lantern slides from Paget col- 

our negatives. (British journal of photog- 

raphy, London, May 7, 1920, v. 67, p. Ore § 
M 














2152. Monochrome prints from Paget 
colour negatives. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.4.) MFA 


25S. A simple holder for three-colour. 
light-filters. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, May 7, 1920, v. 67, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 17-18.) 











MFA 
2154—,2155). Subject and lighting in 
screen-plate colour photography. (British 


journal of photography, London, Feb. 6, 
1920, v. 67, p. 7-8.) MFA 


2156. Hervé. Le portrait sur autochromes 
a l’atelier et en plein air. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1920, sé- 
rie 3, tome 7, p. 34-36.) MFA 


Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, April 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 16, MFA, and Camera craft, San Francisco, 
June, 1921, v. 28, p. 202-203, MFA. 


2157. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Dye-toning 
with ferricyanide and chromic acid bleach. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 4, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 24.) MFA 


2158. A further development of Ives’ 
mordant dye-image process. (British jour- 





THE NEW YORK (PUBLIC LIBRARY 


nal of photography, London, Nov. 5, 1920, 
v. 67, Colour photography supplement, p. 
43.) MFA 


2159. Jové. Notes pratiques sur l’hyper- 
sensibilisation des plaques autochromes. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1920, série 3, tome 7, p. 198—- 
199.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 7, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 4, MFA 


2160. Knoche, Paul. Die physiologischen 
Grundlagen der Farbenphotographie. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1920, Bd. 57, p. 287-290.) MFA 


2161. Koegel, P. R. Dyes for the bleachout 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


2162. Uber die Verwendung der Blii- 
tenfarbstoffe fiir die Farbenphotographie. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1920, Jahrg. 57, p. 86-91.) MFA 


2163. Louis Ducos du Hauron. port. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 
1920, v.67, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 38-39.) MFA 


_ Brief biography with chronological list of his inven- 
tions. 





2164. Lueppo-Cramer. Farbenempfindlich- 
keit und  Entwicklungsart. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1920, 
Bd. 57, p. 129-130.) MFA 


2165. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. Sur 
les propriétés sensibilisatrices d’une nou- 
velle série de matiéres colorantes. illus. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1920, série 3, tome 7, p. 182- 
184.) MFA 


2166. Mills, William Hobson, and P. E. 
Evans. The cyanine dyes. Part 2: The 
synthesis of O-aminocinnamylidenequinal- 
dine methiodide. (Chemical Society. Trans- 
actions, London, 1920, v. 117, p. ana ot: 


2167. Mills, William Hobson, and F. M. 
Hamer. The cyanine dyes. Part 3: The 
constitution of pinacyanol. (Chemical So- 


ciety. Transactions, London, 1920, v. 117, 
p. 1550-1562.) PKA 


2168. Mills, William Hobson, and Sir W. J. 
Pore. Studies in photographic sensitisers. 
illus. (Photographic journal, London, 1920, 
new series, v. 44, p. 183-202, 253-267.) 
MFA 


Part 1: The isocyanine dyestuffs. 
Part 2: The carbocyanines. 


2169. Mills, William Hobson, and R. S. 
WisHart. The cyanine dyes. Part 1: The 
constitution of the isocyanines. (Chemical 
Society. Transactions, London, 1920, v. 117, 
p. 579-587.) PKA 





Ve a Se 


5. 
an 
af 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


1920, continued. 
2170. Newens, Frank R. Raydex three- 
colour photographic printing process. 


(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 3, 1920, v. 67, p. 740.) MFA 


eee of paper read before the Croydon Camera 
ub. 


2171. Offer, Thomas J. Direct colour pho- 
tography of stage plays. (British journal 
of photography, London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, 
Colour photography supplement, p. aE 
MFA 


Practical suggestions. 


2172. Plotnikov, Ivan Stepanovich. Allge- 
meine Photochemie, ein Hand- und Lehr- 
buch ftir Forschung, Praxis und Studium. 
Berlin: Vereinigung wissenschaftlicher 
Verleger, 1920. xiv, 729 p. illus. 8°. PLC 


See p. 689-699, 703: Farbenphotographie. Includes 
a chronology. For translation of section on the 
bleachout process, see British journal of photography, 
March 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 12, MFA. 


2172a. Prokoudine-Gorsky, S. de. Impor- 
tance of colour photography for schools and 
the community in general. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1920, v. 67, 
p. 13-15, 19-20.) MFA 


2173. Rendall, H. E. Approximately cor- 
rect colour photography. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 3, 
1920, v.67, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 45-46.) MFA 

Suggests use of two colors and of a black key plate. 
2174. Experiment in colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour pho- 





tography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 
Suggests lines of development. A 
2175. Rimmer, John Brown. Simplified 


autochrome work. (American photogra- 
phy, Boston, Sept., 1920, v. 14, p. 516-519.) 
MFA 
Also peroted in British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 1920, v. 67, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 59-40, MFA, . 


2176. Toulon, Pierre. Les projections sté- 


réoscopiques par la lumiére polarisée. illus. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1920, série 3, tome 7, p. 112- 
117.) MFA 


2177. Vies, Guilliam de. Autochrome work 
in tropical Africa. (Amateur photographer 
and photography, London, March 24, 1920, 
v. 49, p. 236.) +MFA 


2178. W., L. T. Colour photography by 
the latest process. illus. (Work, London, 
1920, v. 58, p. 290.) VA 
Paget process. 
2179. Wall, Edward John. Truthful colour 
rendering. (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, D. 36.) MFA 


103 
2180. Wilcox, Walter Dwight. Autochrome 
photography... A paper read...at the 


annual meeting of the American Alpine 
Club January 3, 1920, and directed to be 
printed for distribution to the members. 
tCanada:; The American Alpine Club ,;1920). 
Oat:.tl gto MFF p.v. 51, no. 11 


1921 


2181. Adrien, Charles. Note sur la désensi- 
bilisation des autochromes. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
April, 1921, série 3, tome 8, p. 110- 1425 
MFA 


2182. ———- Notes sur la stéréoscopie auto- 
chrome sur plaques 9 x 12 et divers acces- 
soires de chambre noire. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1921, sé- 
rie 3, tome 8, p. 24-26.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. sf 1921 ave Colour photography 
supplement, p. 8, MFA, and Camera ee San Fran- 
cisco, March, 1921, v. 28, p. 94-95, MFA 


2183. The Auto colour camera. (British 
journal of photography, London, March 4, 
1921, v.68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 11-12.) MFA 


Simplicity claimed for the apparatus of F. Donis- 
thorpe. 


2184. Bennett, Colin N. Principles of colour 
photography in simple language. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 6, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 19-20.) MFA 


Reprint of article in the Kinematograph weekly. 
Largely historical. 


2185. Burchardt, Ernest A. Negatives for 
three-colour printing from autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept, 2, 1921; v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 


2186. Clay, Reginald S. A suggestion for 
a new method of photography in colour. 
illus. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, March 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 9-10.) MFA 


Suggests a diffraction grating based upon Newton’s 
rings. 


2187. A Colour camera. (British journal 

of photography, London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, 

Colour photography supplement, p. 8.) 
MFA 


Brief reference to apparatus of Hiram C. Deeks. 


2188. Crabtree, J. I. A method of produc- 
ing reversed dye images. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Nov., 1921, v. 28, p. 374- 
3/7.) MFA 


Communication no. 97 from the Research Labora- 
tory of the Eastman Kodak Co. 


104 


1921, continued. 


2189. Davis, Raymond. A new method for 
the measurement of photographic filter fac- 
tors. Washington: Gov. Prtg. Off., 1921. 
1 p.l., 79-89 p. illus. 4°. (United States. 
— Bureau of Standards. Scientific papers. 
no. 409.) PAH (U.S.) 


2190. Desensitising autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 15, 1921, v. 68, p. 418.) MFA 


2191. Direct colour photography in medi- 
cine. (Lancet, London, May 28, 1921, v. 
200, p. 1146.) WAA 


Brief account of colored lantern slides at the Royal 
Society of Medicine. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 28, MFA. 


2192. Eder, Josef Maria. Pinaflavol, ein 
neuer Sensibilisator ftir Griin. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1921, 


Bd. 58, p. 87-90.) MFA 


2193. Espitallier, M. R. Autochrome de- 
velopment. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
March, 1921, v. 28, p. 95, MFA. 


2194. F., W. B. William de Wiveleslie Ab- 

ney. port. (Photographic journal, Lon- 

don, Jan., 1921, new series, v. 45, p. laa 
Brief biography. MF 


2195. Fanstone, Robert M. Autumn foli- 
age by the screen-plate processes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
1921, v.68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 37-38.) MFA 


2196. Clouds in autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 3, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 

p. 24. ) MFA 


ae. Colour rendering in the screen- 
plate process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 6, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 17-18.) MFA 
Suggestions for overcoming defects. 
2198. Intensifying autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
2, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 45-46.) MFA 


2199. Pictorial photography in colours. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 27-28.) MFA 
Also printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 
N. H., March, 1922, v. 48, p. 143-144, MFA. 
2200. Spotting and taking out defects 
from screen-plate colour transparencies. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 


Also printed in Camera craft, 
Aug., 1921, v. 28, p. 271-273, MFA. 

















San Francisco, 


THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


2201. Fielitz, Otto. Beitrage zur Frage 
des farbenphotographischen Papierbildes. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1921, Bd. 58, p. 311-314, 329-331.) 


2202. Gamble, W. Penrose. A new three- 
colour camera. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 48.) MFA 


Patent of A. Roland Trist. From Penrose’s An- 
nual, 1922. 


2203. Gimpel, Léon. La projection en relief 
a la portée de tous par anaglyphes sur 
plaques autochromes. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1921, série 3, 
tome 8, p. 194-204.) MFA 


2204. Hodgman, Charles D. Color filters 
for photographic uses. (Physical review, 
Lancaster, Penn., 1921, series 2, v. 17, p 


246-249.) PAA 
Gives a long list of dye solutions. 
2205. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Die 


Theorie und Praxis der Farbenphotogra- 
phie mit Autochrom- und anderen Raster- 


farbenplatten. Hallea.S.: W. Knapp, 1921. 
74 p. illus. 5. ed. 8°. (Enzyklopadie der 
Photographie. Heft 60.) MFV 


ones Library also has 1st ed. (1908) and 2d ed. 


2206. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Dyeing sensi- 
tive films for relief prints. (British journal 
of photography, London, Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 
MFA 


2207. New bleach formulae for the Ives 
mordant dye-toning process. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 7, 1921, 
v. 68, Colour photography supplement, ee or 





2208. Ives’s medico-chromograms. (British 

journal of photography, London, April 1, 

1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 

p.16.) MFA 
A two-colour plus process for use in hospitals. 


Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
June, 1921, v. 28, p. 202, MFA. 


2209. Jones, Chapman. Sir William de 
Wiveleslie Abney. (Photographic journal, 
London, July, 1921, new series, v. 45, p. 296- 
310.) MFA 


With bibliography. 


2210. Koenig, Ernst. Pinaflavol, ein neuer 
Sensibilisator ftir Griin. Coe ee 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1921, Bd. 58, p.8 
81.) MFA 
Also printed in British journal of ph otOer ens 
London, April 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 16, MFA, and Camera craft, an 
Francisco, June, 1921, v. 28, p. 203-204, MFA. 


221%. Die Verwendung des Pinaflavols 
in der Farbenphotographie. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1921, 
Bd. 58, p. 193-196.) MFA 





MFA — 





oe Se ee ee ee ea ae es aero 


ol al a ae 



















ee ee a a ee ar a 





K 
; 
ce 
‘sh 
ee. 
ay 
A 
4 
-: 
S 
7 
ag £ 
be 
ae 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


1921, continued. 


2212. Leventon, L. M. ° Improving auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 


For weak negatives suggests binding them up with 
a second color screen. 


2213. Liabeuf, H. Appareil automatique de 
prise de vue par sélection trichrome 13 x 18. 
illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1921, série 3, tome 8, p. 167— 
168.) MFA 


2214. Lighting and exposure in autochrome 
work. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 3, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 22.) MFA 


2215. The Loudine colour process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 40.) MFA 


2216. Louis Ducos du Hauron. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 7, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 4.) MFA 


2217. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. 
sensitising autochromes before develop- 
ment. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 5, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 
Also printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 
N. H., Dec., 1921, v. 47, p. 297-300, MFA. 
2218. Experiments on _ desensitisers. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1921, v. 68, p. 351-354, 370-371.) MFA 


Portion dealing with color-sensitive plates in 
Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 1921, v. 28, p. 
307-309, MFA. 

2219. Panchromatic sensitising dyes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 11, 1921, v. 68, p. 77.) MFA 


2220-21. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. 
Color photography. illus. (Photo-minia- 
ture, New York, July, 1921, v. 16, p. 97- 
T1;) MFA 


“Authoritative summary of progress made,..with 
a clear explanation of the principles underlying the 
methods of today and tomorrow.” 


2222. Namias, Rodolfo. The Bromoil proc- 


ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Feb. 11, 1921, v. 68, p. 77-78.) MFA 


2223. Newens, Frank R. Rambles with the 
Paget colour plate. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 25, 1921, v. 68, p. 
709.) MFA 


Abstract of paper read before the Croydon Camera 
Club. Some corrections are made in the above jour- 
nal, Dec. 2, 1921, p. 724. 

2224. Paget Prize Plate Company. The 
Paget process of colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, p. 724.) MFA 


Some comparisons with the Ilford and Wratten 
plates as to filters. 


De- 








105 


2225. Parolini, C., and G. Perron. Colour 
cinematography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 7, 1921, v. 68, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.4.) MFA 
Abstract of their patent (not as yet accepted). 


2226. Power, H. D’Arcy. Inventors’ re- 
wards in colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 3, 
1921, v.68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 24.) MFA 


2227. The Prizma process. (British journal 
of photography, London, Aug. 5, 1921, v. 68, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 32.) 


Brief reference to camera invented by W. Van 
Dorn Kelley. 


2228. The Prizma process of colour cinema- 
tography. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 6, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 18-19.) MFA 


2229. Rendall, H. E. Remarks on raydex. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June “3, 1921, v.° 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 21-22.) MFA 


2230. Three-colour reflector cameras. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 43-44.) MFA 
Descriptions of patents of Walter White, J. W. 
Bennetto, and E. T. Butler. 
2231. Rose, S. W. Paget colour-screen 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 17, 1921, v. 68, p. 361.) MFA 


Abstract of paper and discussion before the Croy- 
don Camera Club. 


2232. Schitz, C. Détermination automa- 
tique du temps du pose en autochromie. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1921, série 3, tome 8, p. 320- 
s22:) MFA 


2233. Pour corriger la dominante bleue 
des autochromes. (Société francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1921, série 3, 
tome 8, p. 22-24.) MFA 


2234. Screen-plate pictures of the “old 
masters.” (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 


Defects due to discoloration of the varnish. 








2235. Screen-plate renderings of fashion- 
able complexions. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 7, 1921, v. 68, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.40.) MFA 


Face powdering at Deauville. 


2236. Teamer, C.. K.,. and Ex Ea Mitre: 
Three-colour lantern transparencies. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 13-15.) MFA 


2237. Triadochrome colour process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 6, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p: 20:) MFA 
Invention of J. F. Shepherd. No details given. 


106 


1921, continued. 


2238. Two-colour studio portraits. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
Dp. 39-40.) MFA 


Process of J. Newlands Thomson. 


2239. The Uva-chrom process of color pho- 
tography. (Scientific American, New York, 
Sept. 24, 1921, v. 125, p. 225.) VA 


2240. Wagner, R. Pinatypie. (Photo- 


graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1920. 
Bd. 57, p. 330-334.) MFA 
wee printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 


, June, 1921, v. 46, p. 297-300, MFA. 


2241. | Wall, Edward John. Clerk Maxwell’s 
theory and practice. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, 


Colour photography supplement, p. 4748. i 


2242. —— Colour sensitising by mineral 
salts. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 4, 1921, v. 68, p. PESTA 


2243. A forgotten page in the history 
of colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 7, 1921, v. 68, 
Colour photography supplement, p. alle se 
MFA 
A review of Levi L. Hill’s work A treatise on helio- 
chromy. 
2244. Relief processes for colour work. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 5, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 30-32, 34-36.) MFA 


Three processes described in detail with biblio- 
graphical references. 


2245. Wallon, Etienne. L’oeuvre de Louis 
Lumiére. (Société francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1921, série 3, tome 8, 
p. 225-249.) MFA 

p. 237-241: 


2246. Walters, Francis Marion, and Ray- 
MOND Davis. Studies in color sensitive 
photographic plates and methods of sensi- 
tizing by bathing. Washington: Gov. Prtg. 
Of 1921 li gle wesdor ore a ss. 4", 
(United States. — Bureau of Standards. 
Scientific papers. no. 422.) PAH (U.S.) 


2247. Watkins, H. S. Colour photography. 
(Photographic journal, London, June, 1921, 
new series, v. 45, p. 277-287.) MFA 


General principles. Paget, Dufay, Raydex, and 
Autochrome processes. Abstract in British journal 
of photography, London, May 6, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 20, MFA. 

With discussion. 


2248. Watteville, C. de. Gabriel Lippmann. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1921, série 3, tome 8, p. 330- 
341. y MFA 


Frontispiece portrait. 


2249. A Whirler for autochrome plates. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 








Photographie des couleurs. 


THE NEW YORK GPUBLIC LIBRARY 


London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
Description and diagram of drying apparatus. 


2250. Woods, L. Tennant. The Hillotype 
process of colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 4, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
Disa) MFA 


A review of criticisms. 


2251. Wright, H. W. Canning. Exposing 
autochrome plates on interiors in winter. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour bhotara 
supplement, p. 12% FA 


2252. Yerbury, S. G. Three-colour and 
direct heliochromy. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, 
Colour photography supplement, p. sere 


Refers to Hill process. 


1922 


2253. Adolf Miethe. port. (Zeitschrift ftir 
wissenschaftliche Photographie. Leipzig, 
1922, Bd. 21, p. 193-196.) PLC 


A brief biography with list of his principal works. 


2254. Arch, John C. Three-colour repeat- 
ing backs. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 2, 1922, v. 69, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.21.) MFA 


2255. Campbell, H. J. Raydex three-colour 
printing. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 6, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 1-3.) MFA 


2256. Carteron, J. Desensitising in the de- 
velopment of the autochrome plates. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, June 2, 
1922, v.69, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 23-24.) MFA 


2257. Clerc, Louis Philippe. Colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 13, 1922, v. 69, p.16.) MFA 


Development tests on autochromes by the Société 
francaise de photographie. 
2258. -—— Colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 14, 
1922, v. 69, p. 414-415.) MFA 


Brief notes on the exhibition of the Salon du Gout 
Frangais; the new process of the Dufay Company; 
and endeavors to purchase the Uvachrome process. 


2259. Colour cinematography with non- 
intermittent film. illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, Dec. 1, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 46-48.) 

Specification of Edouard Belin. MFA 


2260. Colour prints by dye conversion of 
screen-plate negatives. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 4, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 29-30.) 
M 


Obergassner’s patent. 










; 
. 
| 
| 


chrome work. 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


1922, continued. 


2261. Elmslie, E. K. Developer for auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 


2262. Fanstone, Robert M. Autochrome 
lantern slides. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 1, 1922, v. 69, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 37.) MFA 


2263. Colour photography in small 
sizes. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 43-44.) MFA 


2264. The display of screen-plate trans- 
parencies. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 2, 1922, v.69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 22.) MFA 
2265. Garden photography by the 
screen-plate process. (British journal of 
photography, London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, 











Colour photography supplement, p. 28.) 


MFA 


2266. Making Paget colour negatives 
in a small roll-film camera. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 2, 
1922, v.69, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 24.) MFA 
2267. A plate-holder for the Paget 
colour process. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. aera 








Some causes of failure in auto- 
(British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 5, 1922, v. 69, Colour 
photography supplement, p.17-18.) MFA 


2269. Gamble, William. A new method of 
making colour prints. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. Beas 


2268. 





Improvement of the Lewisohn process. 


2270. Gimpel, Léon. Le centiéme de 
seconde en autochromie et l’instantané noc- 
turne sur plaques noires avec l|’éclairage 
ordinaire par l’ultrasensibilisation de M. F. 


Monpillard. (Société frangaise de photo- 
graphie. Bulletin, Paris, May, 1922, série 
3, tome 9, p. 130-145.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 26-27, MFA. 


2271. The Gorsky camera for colour cine- 
matography. illus. ‘(British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. fae 


2272. Hamburger, Aron. Three - colour 
cameras. (British journal of photography, 


~ London, March 10, 1922, v. 69, p. 147-148.) 


MFA 


Protests against statements made in the book Bye- 


paths of colour photography. 


107 


2273. The Hamburger process of colour 
cinematography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 2, 1922, v. 69, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 23.) MFA 


2274. Herzberg, John. Apparatus for the 
demonstration of additive colour mixture. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


2275. Hewitt, John Theodore. Synthetic 
colouring matters; dyestuffs derived from 
pyridine, quinoline, acridine and xanthene. 
London & New York: Longmans, Green & 
Co., 1922. x1,. 405 p: 8°. -(Monographs 
on industrial chemistry.) VOR 


2276. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Inventions in 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 27, 1922, v. 69, 
p53!) MFA 
Butler’s application for patent on Kromoscope, 
already patented. 
2277. Johnson, George Lindsay. Photog- 
raphy in colours... London: G. Routledge 
& Sons, Ltd., 1922. xiv, 318 p. illus. 4. ed. 
rey. & enl, 12°. : MFV 
Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, June 23, 1922, v. 69, p. 374, MFA. 
The Library also has Ist ed. (1911), 2d ed. (1914), 
new & rev. ed. (1917). 
2278. Koegel, P.R. The bleach-out process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 28.) MFA 


2279. Lacroix, J. Autochromes and sun 
spots. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 1, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 48.) MFA 


2280. Ladd-Franklin, Christine. Tetrachro- 
matic vision and the development theory of 
color. (Science, Utica, N. Y., May 26, 1922, 
Vd Dood D00.) OA 


2281. Massiot, G. Application a la projec- 
tion des autochromes de l’éclairage intégral 
par incandescence. Lanterne “Caméléon.” 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Sept., 1922, série 3, tome 9, p. 271- 
27a.) MFA 


2282. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
G. GuTEKuUNST. Some new sensitizers for 
the deep red. (Journal of industrial and 
engineering chemistry, Easton, Penn., Nov., 
1922, v. 14, p. 1060-1061.) VOA 


2283. A Modified two-colour process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 6, 
1922, v. 69, Colour photography supplement, 
ties) MFA 
Describes British patent 169533 to J. F. Shepherd 
and Colour Photography, Ltd. 
2284. Monpillard, Félix. Extra-sensitising of 
autochrome plates. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, July 7, 1922, v.69, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 25.) MFA 


Copy of a sealed note deposited with the Société 
francaise de photographie in 1913. 


108 


1922, continued. 


2285. Muller, Eugéne. Blueness of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 6, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 38-39.) MFA 


2286. Desensitising in the autochrome 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 


2287. Offer, Thomas J. Colour photo- 
graphs of stage plays. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 13, 1922, v. 69, 
p. 26-27.) MFA 


2288. A One-exposure three-colour camera. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 1, 1922, v. 69, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 33-35.) MFA 


C. E. Bredon’s specification. 


2289. Raleigh, Charles. Reminiscences of 
commercial colour cinematography — its 
possibilities. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, 1922, v. 69, Colour photogra- 
phy supplement, p. 30-32, 35-38.) MFA 


2290. Rendall, H. E. Facts and fallacies in 
colour photography. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, March 3, 1922, 
v. 69, Colour photography supplement, p. 
9-10.) MFA 
Criticism of book by “O. Reg.” 
2291. Screen-plate rendering of the sea. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 2, 1922, v. 69, Colour . photography 
supplement, p. 24.) MFA 





2292. Screen-plates with divisible colour 
elements. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 32.) MFA 


S. Schapovaloff’s specification. 


2293. Shepherd, J. F. Natural colour pho- 
tography. (Photographic journal, London, 
Aug., 1922, new series, v. 46, p. aS ee 


Outline of physical principles of tricolor process. 


2294. Stoakley, F. J. Rise and progress of 
the technique of colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, March 
3, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 12.) MFA 
2295. Thiem, W. Die Farbenplatte und 


das Farbensehen. (Photographische Rund- 
schau, Halle a. S., 1920, Bd: 57):0. earch 


Also printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 
N. H., 1922, v. 49, p. 28-31, 85-87, MFA. 
2296. Thovert, J. La photographie des cou- 
leurs. (Chimie & industrie, Paris, August, 
1922, v. 8, p. 312-315.) VOA 

Present condition of the art and possibilities. 
2297. Traube, Artur. The Uvachrome proc- 
ess. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 


THEONEW YORK, PUBLICCLIGRARY 


2298. The Triadochrome process of making — 


three-colour prints. (British journal of 

photography, London, Feb. 3, 1922, v. 69, 

Colour photography supplement, p. 8.) 
MFA 


2299. Triadochrome three-colour prints by 
transfer and chemical toning. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, April 7, 1922, 
v. 69, Colour photography supplement, p. 
15-16.) MFA 


Describes British patent 175003 to J. F. Shepherd 
and Colour Photography, 


2300. Triple composite plates for three- 
colour negative making. (British journal 
of photography, London, Oct. 6, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. eee 


E. A. Lage’s specification. 


2301. The Trist three-colour camera. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 6, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 3-4.) MFA 


2302. Tutton, Frederic G. Three - colour 
transparencies by combined chemical ton- 
ing and dye printing. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. ae 
MF 


Correction in Dec. 1st number of above supplement, 
p. 48. 


2303. A Two-colour process of additive col- & 
(British jour- 


our cinematography. illus. 
nal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 1922, 
v. 69, Colour photography supplement, p. 
39-40.) MFA 


2304. Ultra-sensitising. 
photography, London, June 16, 1922, v. 69, 


(British journal of 


p. 349.) MFA 


Brief reference to Monpillard’s process for auto- 
chromes. 


2305. A Variation of the screen-plate proc- _ 


ess. illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 


raphy supplement, p. 14-15.) MFA ; 


Invention of Miss Florence M. Warner. 


2306. Wall, Edward John. A chronology 
of the photochromoscope. illus. 
journal of photography, London, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 13-14, 


18-20.) 
2307. ———- Leuco-bases in colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 


London, March 10, 1922, v. 69, p. 146-147.) 
MFA 


Denies novelty for Didier’s process (French patent _ 


524143, 1919). 


2308. Practical color photography. 

Boston: American Photographic Publish- 

ing Co., 1922. vii, 248 p. diagrs. 8°. 
Bibliography, p. 238-240. 


Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Oct. 20, 1922, v. 69, p. 640, MFA. 








(British — 


MFA — 


MFV — 


ee ee 


CLL fe ygeeores Civ sant peers 

























COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 109 


1923 


2309. Adrien, Charles. Lanterne de projec- 
tion portative et écran démontable pour 
autochromes. (Société francaise de pho- 


tographie. Bulletin, Paris, April, 1923, sé- 


rie 3, tome 10, p. 114-116.) MFA 


2310. Backstrom, Helmer. Development 
of autochrome plates in white light with 
ferrous oxalate. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 2.) MFA 


2311. Bartlett, T. W. Notes on exposure 
- and development of autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 6, 
1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 16. ‘| MFA 


2312. Beardsley, A. H. Natural-color pho- 
tography for the amateur. (Photo -era, 
= yvolteboro, N. H., July, 1923, v. 51, p. 30- 
31.) MFA 


Raylo process. 


2313. Bidault des Chaumes, A. La photo- 
graphie en couleurs sur pellicules versi- 
colores par les procédés Louis Dufay. (Gé- 
nie civil, Paris, June 9, 1923, v. 82, p. 543- 
545.) VA 


2314. Bullock, E. R. Chemistry of the 
_kodachrome bleach. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 10, 1923, v. 70, 
p. 491-492.) MFA 


2315. Carrara, Achille. ‘Blueness in screen- 
_ plate photography. (British journal of pho- 
- tography, London, Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Col- 
our photography supplement, p.4.) MFA 


- 2316. De Mille, Cecil Blount. The chances 
of cinematography in natural colors. 
-_ (American photography, Boston, Jan., 1923, 
' v. 17, p. 14-16.) MFA 


5 Also pee in British journal of photography, 
_ London, Feb. 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
_ plement, p. a MFA, 


‘ 2317. Fanstone, Robert M. Adapting a 
film pack adapter as a slide for the Paget 

colour process. illus. (British journal of 

photography, London, July 6, 1923, v. 70, 
- Colour photography supplement, p. 28.) 
f MFA 
2318. After-treatment of defective auto- 
_chromes. (British journal of photography, 
-_ London, April 6, 1923, v. 70, Colour photog- 
_ raphy supplement, p. 15.) MFA 


_ 2319. Autochrome filter attachment. 
4 (British journal of photography,: London, 
Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
. _ plement, p. 4.) MFA 
a - 2320. Autochromes in the dark-room. 
_ (British journal of photography, London, 
_ March 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
_ supplement, p. 12.) MFA 


















Zone Colour contrast and exposure in 
screen-plate colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 4, 
1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 20.) MFA 


Zoce. The lens and colour rendering. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 4, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
plement, Dp. 20.) MFA 


2323. Mounting commercial colour 
transparencies. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 6, 1923, v. 70, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 


2324. Supplementary filters and the 
colour rendering of the autochrome plate. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 3, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 31.) MFA 











2325. Feulgen, R. Ein Verfahren zur Her- 
stellung verzerrungsfreier Gelatinereliefs 
nach dem Chrom-Gelatineverfahren, beson- 
ders fur die Zwecke der subtraktiven Drei- 
farbenphotographie. (Zeitschrift fir wis- 
senschaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1923, 
Bd. 22, p. 98-103.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 6, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 13-15, MFA. 


2326. Fouchet, J. La pose et le développe- 
ment des autochromes. (Société francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, Jan., 1923, 
série 3, tome 10, p. 19-23.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 2, 1923, v. 70, p. 9-10, MFA. 


2327. Gamble, William. Photography in 
colours. (In: L. C. Martin, Colour, and 
methods of colour’ reproduction...with 
chapters on colour printing and colour pho- 
tography, by William Gamble. London: 
Blackie & Son, Ltd, 19237 87. p.160— 
171.) PEX 


Reviews various processes. 


2328. Gannon, Joseph W. The Raylo proc- 
ess. illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 


July, 1923, v. 30, p. 305-310.) MFA 


Two samples of work shown. 


2329. Gimpel, Léon. Application du pro- 
cédé Artigue (a deux plaques) a la repro- 
duction en noir des plaques autochromes. 
(Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, Jan., 1923, série 3, tome 10, p. 
23-26.) MFA 


2330. Hourst, comte. Colour prints from 
autochrome transparencies. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, May 4, 1923, 
v. 70, Colour photography supplement, p. 
19-20.) MFA 


2331. Houstoun, Robert Alexander. Colour 
photography and stereoscopy. (In _ his: 
Light & colour. London, 1923. 8°. p.96- 
116.) PEX 


110 


1923, continued. 


2332. Keller-Dorian, Berthon et Cie. Pro- 
cédé de photographie et de cinématographie 
des couleurs K. D. B. illus. (Société fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, Jan., 
1923, série 3, tome 10, p. 26-29.) MFA 


Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 10-11, MFA, 


2333. Manners, Samuel, and H. E. RENDALL. 
Raydex methods. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1923, v. 70, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 21-22, 25-26.) 


MFA 
2334. Muller, Eugéne. Control methods in 
the development of autochromes. (British 


journal of photography, London, Feb. 2, 
1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 8.) MFA 


2335. Multi-colour printing in a single emul- 

sion. illus. (British journal of photogra- 

phy, London, May 4, 1923, v. 70, Colour 

photography supplement, p.17-19.) MFA 
Patent of W. Van Doren Kelley. 


2336..Naumann, Helmut. Autochrom und 
Agfarraster. illus. (Zeitschrift ftir wissen- 
schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1923, Bd. 
22, p. 85-91.) PLC 


2337. A New method of copying auto- 
chromes on paper in colour. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 7, 
1923, v.70, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 34-36.) MFA 


Patent of Emile Bueno. 


2338. Newens, Frank R. Varying the com- 
pensation filter in screen-plate colour proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 


2339. Northall - Laurie, D. Photomicro- 
graphs in colour taken with polarized light. 
(Photographic journal, London, Feb., 1923, 
new series, v. 47, p. 48-49.) "MFA 


2340. A One-exposure camera for colour 
photography and projection. illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, June 
1, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 23-24.) MFA 


Patent of Gioacchino Russo. 


2341. Rendall, H. E. Dye correction 
methods in three-colour printing. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 3, 
1923, v.70, Colour photography supplement, 
Dene) MFA 
2342. ———- Variable compensation filters. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 


2343. Rowe, Ernest H. He chased the 
rainbow —and put it to work. Frederic 
Eugene Ives, prolific inventor, father of 


THE, NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


(Industry illus- — 
Aug., 1923, p. 
VA 


half-tone engraving. illus. 
trated, Cooperstown, N. Y., 
11, 63-72.) 


2344. Sectional colour sensitive films. (Brit- — 
ish journal of photography, London, April 
6, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography supple- 

ment, p. 16.) MFA © 


2345. Three-colour prints by projection dye- — 
printing. illus. (British journal of photog- — 
raphy, London, Feb. 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour — 
photography supplement, p. 6-7.) MFA — 

Patent of H. C. J. Deeks. 


2346. Tutton, Frederic G. Dye correction — 
methods in three-colour printing. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 7, 
1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 36.) MFA 


2347. Intensification of the colours in ~ 
three-colour carbon transparencies, with its 
possibilities in three-colour prints. (Photo- — 
graphic journal, London, July, 1923, new — 
series, v. 47, p. 325-330.) MFA 


ee printed in British journal of photography, bs 
70, Colour photography = 







































London, July 6, 1923, v. 
supplement, p. 26-27, [F A, 
2348. The Paget colour process. 





(British journal of photography, London, ~ 
Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- — 
plement, p. 3-4.) MFA | 
2349. Ventujol, Emmanuel. Exposure of — 
autochrome plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, Sept. 7, 1923, v. 70, — 
Colour photography supplement, p. ie 


2350. L’héliochromie nouvelle. (So- 
ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, July, 1923, série 3, tome 10, p. 193- — 
197.) 





MFA — 


2351. Wall, Edward John. The chances of } 


color photography in moving pictures. — 
(American photography, Boston, March, — 
1923, v. 17, p. 166-170.) MFA — 


Also printed in British journal of photography, : P 
London, June 1, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 22-23, MFA, ; 
2352: A new system of color photogra- — 
phy. illus. (American photography, Bos# — 
ton, July, 1923, v. 17, p. 402-410.) MFA — 


Raylo process. 
2353. Three-colour prints by projection — 
dye-printing. (British journal of photog- — 
raphy, London, Aug. 3, 1923, v.70, Colour ~ 
photography supplement, p. 29-30.) aE a 

Raylo process. g 
2354. Warburg, J. C. Possibilities in colour 
photography. (Photographic journal, Lon- — 
don, April, 1923, new series, v. 47, p. 192-— 
195. ) - MFA 


2355. Wastell, W. L. F. Colour photogra- 








phy. illus. (In: A. E. Conrady, Photog- 
raphy as a scientific implement. London, 
1923. 8°. p.432-454.) *R-MFS— 


Good review of various processes, with a color plate 
showing the autochrome principle. 





ae a 


ed 
‘3 
A 
‘ 
, 
+ 
4 
fe 









* Bennett, C. N., 


AUTHOR INDEX 





Numbers refer to entries, not to pages 


A 


Aarland, G., 625. 

Abney, Sir W. de W., 99-100, 107-108, 110, 121-122, 
126, 158, 268, 293-295, 323-325, 362-363, 397- 
398, 448, 484, 556, 626-627, 811, 1006, 1207, 
13297, 1517. . 

Acland, S. A., 628. 

Adan, R., 1208. 

Adrien, Charles, 1518, 1735, 2181-2182, 2309. 

Albert, August, 1519. 

Albert, E., 813. 

Albert, Josef, 105. 

Allan, Sidney, 1906. 

Alteneder, J. V., 1520. 

Anderson, P. L., 2032. 

Antisell, Thomas, 45. 

Arch, J. C., 1907, 2128, 2254. 

Aron, Reinhold, 1908. 

Atkinson, E, H. C., 818. 

Aubuch, F. See Szczepanik, Jan, and F. Aubuch. 

Audibert, Maurice. See Berton, Rudolf, and Maurice 
Audibert. 

Auerbach, Herbert, 

Austin, A. C., 2067. 


1007. 


B 


Backstr6m, Helmer, 2310. 

Baker, T. T., 521, 558-560, 631, 698-699, 823, 1639. 

Balagny, Georges, 1009, 1640. 

Balfour, Graham, 159. 

Balmitgere, C., 1522. 

Barbier, H., 2131. See also Lumiére, Auguste, and 
others. 

Barbieri, D., 399. 

Bardorf, 824. 

Barker, J. W., 1820. 

Barker, Johnson, 632. 

Barrett, Thomas, 48. 

Barstow, Montagu, 449. 

Bartlett, John, 1641. 

Bartlett, T. W., 2311. 

Barton, E. A., 1821. 

Bauer, Otto, 825. 

Baum, Ernst, 1972. 

Bawtree, A. E., 1736, 1822. 

Bayley, R. C., 249-251, 826-827, 1010, 1212-1215. 

Beach, F. C., 1400. 

Beardsley, A. H., 2312. 

Beck, Conrad, 828. 

Beckers, Fritz, 633. 

Becquerel, Edmond, 13-14, 37, 79, 176-177, 364. 

Bedding, Thomas, 167.+ 

Belden, C. J., 2033, 2086-2087. 

Belin, Edouard, 700. 

Bellieni, H., 1523. 

1216-1217, 1401-1402, 1524, 2184. 


Bennett, C. W., 1642. 


 Benoist, L., 1525-1526. 
 Bercegol, R. de. 


See Ducos du Hauron, Louis, and 
R. de Bercegol. 


| ' Berger, Arthur, 1737. 






Bergeron, 1643. 


_ Berget, Alphonse, 178-179. 


Berkeley, H. B., 127. 

Berthier, A. A., 252. 

Berton, Rudolf, and Maurice Audibert, 1738. 

Bevan, E. J. See Green, A. G., and others. 

Bidault des Chaumes, A., 2313. 

Biermann, E. A., 1823, 1909-1910, 1973. 

Blaauw, A. H., 1739. 

Black, Adam, 1911- 1914, 

Blackburn, H. E., 829-830, 1011, 1527-1528, 1644- 
1645. 

Blane, A., 365. 

Blochmann, Richard, 1915. 

Boardman, F. R., 701. 

Bolas, T., 400, 412. 

Bonacini, Carlo, 296. 

Boothroyd, Jabez, 206, 366. 

Bordeaux, Jules, 1219. 

Bosch, A., 522. 

Bothamley, C. H., 269. 

Boucher, L., 1530, 1646. 

Bouldoyre, R., 1403. 

Bourke, Walter, 1220. 

Bourrée, M. H., 1221. 

Bouton, L., and J. Feytaud, 1404. 

Bow, R. H., 93. 

Braham, A. C., 702-703, 1405. 

Brand, John, 1824. 

Brandlmayr, Georg, 1647. 

Brasseur, C. L. A., 450, 831. 

Breton, André, 1825. 

Brewster, Sir David, 6. 

Brant wet Gacuoos 

Brizet, André, 1826. 

Brothers, Alfred, 367. 

Broum, K. H., 1648, 1827. 

Brown, E. L., 1012. 

Brown, G. E., 561, 1740, 1916, 1975. 

Bull, A. J., 562, 634, 2068. See also Newton, A. J., 
and A. J. Bull. 

Bull, A. J., and A. C. Jolley, 563. 

Bullock, E. R., 2314. See also Capstaff, J. G., and 
E. R. Bullock. 

Burchardt, E. A., 832, 1649, 2185. 

Burka, S. M., 2133. 

Burnham, J. A., 1406. 

Burton, H. M., 1828, 1917. 

Buss, Otto, 451. 

BUSY.) la LOo0: 

Butler, C. P., 2089. 

Butler, E. T., 635, 704-706, 1531, 1741, 2090. 


Cc 


CG... Ri, 36k 

Cajal, S. R., 833-835. 

Calmels, H., 1013, 1222, 1742, 1830. 

Calmels, H., and L. P. Clere, 636, 836. 

Galvért, PuiCy, 61. 

Campbell, H. J., 2255. 

Campbell, James, 34-35. 

Capstaff, J. G., 1978-1979. 

Capstaff, J. G., and E. R. Bullock, 2134. 

Carpenter, F. A., 1532. 

Carpentier, J., 1015. See also Cros, Charles, and J. 
Carpentier. 


Dilla 


112 


Carr, S. H., 1223, 1831, 1918-1919. 

Carrara, Achille, 1016, 1832-1833, 2315. 

Carter, C. M., 1017. 

Carteron, J., 2256. 

Casson, W. A., 1407. 

Chaboseau, Robert, 1018. 

Chapelain, 564. 

iGhataix 7 bso elLoos: 

Chéron, André, 707, 837, 1019, 1224-1225. 

Chevreul, E., 62. 

Chevrier, Henri, 838-839, 1020. 

Clarke, H. T. See Mees, C. E. K., and H. T. Clarke. 

Clarke, S., 52, 

Claudy, C. H., 840, 1021, 2135-2136. 

Clay, R. S., 2186. 

Clerc, L. P., 369, 565, 841, 1534, 2257-2258. See 
also Calmels, H., and L. P. Clerc. 

Clifton, W. E., 1022. 

Cobenzl, A., 1743-1744, 1980. 

Coker, E. G., 1745. 

Collen, Henry, 63-64. 

Cominetti, Annibale, 1747. 

Comley, H. J., 711, 845-847, 1228, 1409. 

Coonoor, pseud., 1748. 

Cooper, James, 1749. 

Corbin, T. W., 2038. 

Corke, H. E., 523, 1027, 1229-1230, 1410-1412, 1537, 
1655. 

Cornu, A., 180-181. 

Courtellemont, G., 1028. 

Cousin, Ernest, 1656, 1750. 

Coustet, Ernest, 712-713, 849-850, 1029-1032, 1231, 
1413-1414, 1538. 

Crabtree, J. I., 2188. 

Crémier, Victor, 851, 1033, 1232-1234, 1415, 1539- 
1541, 1657, 1834, 2138. 

Cros, Charles, 82, 101, 111-112. 

Cros, Charles, and J. Carpentier, 123. 

Cross, C. F. See Green, A. G., and others. 

Croughton, G. H., 1920. 

Crowther, R. E., 2139. 

Cundall, J. T., 405, 1034. 

Cust, Leopold, 1658. 


D 
Dalmas, R., comte de, 1235, 1416-1417, 1543-1544, 
1659. 
Dalziel, Harvey, 524. 
Damry, A., 1236. 


Darling, Lloyd, 1982. 

Daur, Guido, 1237. 

David, Albert, 1660-1661. 

Davidson, Lascelles, 639.. 

Davidson, P. G., 1921. 

Davidson, W. W., 2140. 

Davis, Raymond, 2189. See also Walters, F. M., and 
Raymond Davis. 

Davis, V. P., 1922-1923, 2039. 

Dawson, Alfred, 1835. 

Dawson, George, 142. 

Dawson, O. S., and C. L. Findlay, 1035, 1418. 

Day, baG7 15. 

Dearden, W., 1836. 

Debenham, W. E., 148. 

Deisch, Noel, 2040. 

De Mille, C. B., 2316. 

Didier, Léon, 852, 1038, 1419. 

Dillaye, Frédéric, 226-227, 253, 640, 1039, 1240- 
1241, 1420-1425, 1662-1665. 

Doglibert, F., 1546. 

Domony, R. B., 1925. 

Donaldson, Charles, 1926, 1985-1986. 

Donath, Bruno, 526, 716. 

Doncaster, E. D., 1040. 

Donisthorpe, Wordsworth, 98. 


THE NEW: YORK’ PUBLIC LIBRARY: : 


D’Osmond, H., 1242, 1426. 
Douglass, L. F., 2092. 
Dove, H. W., 53. i 
Dowier, C. A., 1041. : 
Downes, W. H., 1042. 
Drake-Brockman, H. G., 1043-1045, 1243, 1752. 
Drecker, J., 452. 

Dubois, Louis, 453. 

Dubois-Raymond, Cl., 254. 

Duchenne, Paul, 855-856. 

Ducos du Hauron, Louis, 83. 

Ducos du Hauron, Louis, and R. de Bercegol, 857. 
Dufay, L., 1427. 

Dumoulin, Eugéne, 102. 

Dunmore, Edward, 228. 





eS Ss. SL ee 


“a ee Ps 


E 


Eastman Kodak Co., 2142. 

Eder, J. M., 129, 143, 168, 271, 488-489, 644-645, 
717, 1753, 1927, 2042, 2192. 

Edgson, Hugh, 1048. 

Edridge-Green, F. W., 1430. 

Eldredge, A. G., 1988. 

Elliott and Fry, 1431. 

Elmslie, E. K., 2261. 

Emery, C. F., 1049. 

Emmerich, G. H., 1432. 

Engelken, 1245. 

Espitallier, M. R., 2193. 

Estanave, E., 1433, 1547. 

Evans, C. W., 1548. 

Evans, F. H., 1434. 

Evans, P. E. See Mills, W. H., and P. E. Evans. 

Evans, U. R., 1668. 

Expert, pseud., 2093. 


FE. W. Ba 2138) 

Fabry, Charles, 1053. 

Fairchild, fT. J., 865. 

Fallowfield, Jonathan, 1755. 

Fanstone, R. M., 2094-2098, 2143-2155, ea fetinn ss 
2262-2268, 2317-2325, 

Farmer, Howard. 454-455, 646, 718, 1249, 1549. 

Farmer, Howacl and Guy Symmons, 456, 567. 

Farnau, E. F., and J. M. Lohr, 1669. 

Faupel, Fritz, 1435. 

Fawcett, E. D., 407, 457. 

Fenske, E., 1250-1251. 

Feret, R. See Valette, T., and R. Feret. 

Ferrars, Max, 1054-1055. 

Festenberg, Hans, 1990. 

Feulgen, R., 2325. 

Feytaud, J. See Bouton, L., and J. Feytaud. 

Fielitz, Otto, 2201. 

Fingerhuth, C., 1928. . 4 

Finlay, C. L., 1056, 1670. See also Davos O85 
and C, e Finlay; Whitfield, Geoffrey, and C. L. 
Finlay. 

Fischer, Otto, 2072. 

Fischer, R., and H. Siegrist, 1839. 

Fitzsimons, R. J., 1991. 

Florence, 529, 1672. 

Foersterling, K., 1756, 1840. 

Ford, A. D., 1436. 

Forestier, E., 1253. 

Forrest, Mark, 408-409. 

Fouchet, J., 2326. 

Fourtier, H., 229. i 

Fowler, J. B., 89. 

Fowler, R. J., 65. 

Franck, C. E., 1551 


Se a Fe eee ee Oe ee ee eRe eee re 











COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


Franck, Karl, 1992. 
Frank, Max, 1255. 
Fraprie, F. R., 865, 1993. 
Frederking, H., 866. 
Freshwater, T. E., 647. 
Friedburg, L. H., 1256. 
Friese, H., 1437. 

Fritsch, Gustav, 490, 568. 
Fritz, Felix, 1257. 

Fuerst Brothers, 370. 
Furnald, S. M., and A. J. Newton, 1994. 


G 


G., G. S., 1673. 

Gaedicke, J., 169-170. 

Gage, F. B., 54. 

Gamble, E. H., 1929-1930. 

Gamble, W. P., 2202. 

Gamble, William, 302, 329, 648, 867, 2269, 2327. 

Gannon, J. W., 2328. 

Gargam de Moncetz, 1257a. 

Garrod, Edward, 49. 

Gaumont, Léon, 1674. 

Gebhard, Kurt, 1258-1262, 1552-1553, 1675, 1757- 
1759, 1841. 

Geisler, Louis, 719-720, 868. 

Genthe, Arnold, 1931. 

Gephard, Karl, 1263. 

Gérard, Louise, 1760. 

Gibson, J. S., 272, 330. 

Gilchrist, C. A., 1264. 

Gill, William, 869. 

Gilles, E., 649. 

Gimpel, Léon, 1057-1059, 
2203, 2270, 2329. 

Gitchell, Corwin, 230, 

Glan, Paul, 273. 

Godbold, A. V., 2099. 

Goddé, G., 458. 

Goerz, 1060. 

Goethe, J. W. von, 3. 

Goldberg, E., 1061. 

Goldschmidt, Robert, 1062. 

Goldsmith, A. N., 1266. 

Gothard, Eugen von, 183. 

Goutcher, A. W., 1063. 

Graby, A., 303, 331, 410-411. 

Graham, James, 1995. 

Grange, 1761. 

Grant, T. K., 459, 870, 1064, 1677. 

Gravier, Charles, 332, 492, 532, 721, 871-871a, 1065, 
1267, 1557-1558 

Gray, Edward, 1066. 

Grebe, C., 371. 

Green, A. G., and others, 184. 

Greene, J. E. B., 1560. 

Grills, E., 872-874. 

Grimsehl, E., 1067. 

Gross, Michael, 2101. 

Grotthuss, Theodor von, 722. 

Grove, J. M. C., 1762. 

Gruen, E. F., 650, 723. 

Grun, Ernst, 569. 

Grune, Wilhelm, 84. 

Guébhard, Adrien, 875-876, 1068. 

Gunther, H. E., 171. 

Gutekunst, G. See Mees, C. E. K., and G. Gutekunst. 


1438, 1554-1556, 1676, 


H 


H., P., 1842. 

Haberkorn, Fritz, 724. 
Haines, R. T., 2045. 

Hale, W. H., 460. 
Hamburger, Aron, 1843, 2272. 


Is 


Hamburger, W. S., 1844. 

Hamer, F. M. See Mills, W. H., and F. M. Hamer. 

Hanneke, Paul, 493, 1439, 1561-1562, 1932. 

Hansen, Fritz, 651. 

Harberisser, 877. 

Harding-Warner, W., 160, 185. 

Hargreaves, F. J., 1845-1846. 

Harrison, W. H., 149. 

Harrison, W. J., 150. 

Hatzfeld, Albert, 186. 

Havelock, B. E., 2104. 

Heicke, Richard, 725. 

Henderson, Peter, 39, 66. 

Hernandez-Mejia, Arturo, 1678-1679. 

Herschel, A. S., 144. 

Herschel, Sir J. F. W., 7-9, 11, 73. 

Herschell, Sir W. J., 461. 

Hervé, 2156. 

Herzberg, John, 2274. 

Hess, Henry, 1847. 

Hess-Ives Corporation, 1848, 1934, 2074. 

Hewitt, C. H., 1998. 

Hewitt, J. T., 2275. 

Heydecker, W. A., 1849. 

Heyne, W., 1763. 

Hill, L. L., 17-18. 

Hilliard, F. M., 1680. 

Hind, H. L., and W. B. Randles, 1764. 

Hinterberger, Hugo, 1563-1566. 

Hirshberg, L. K., 2046. 

Hitchcock, Romyn, 231, 462, 494. 

Hitchins, A. B., 1271, 1850. 

Hnatek, Adolf, 1999. 

Hodgman, C. D., 2047, 2204. 

Hollyer, F. T., 1681. 

Holme, Charles, 1069. 

Honoré, C. H., 1851. 

Hopkins (?), 232. 

Houdaille, 1272. 

Hourst, comte, 2330. 

Houstoun, R. A., 2331. 

Howdill, C. B., 414, 463. 

Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von, 333, 415-416, 533, 570- 
571, 726-730, 878, 1070-1076, 1273-1277, 1440- 
1441, 1682, 1765-1768, 1936, 2205. 

Hunt, Robert, 20, 29, 38. 

Husnik, Jaroslav, 109, 464, 652, 1077-1078, 1442. 


I 


Thran, R., 1769, 1852. 

Ilford, Ltd., 2048. 

Ives, F. E., 145-146, 161, 163-164, 172, 187-189, 
209, 221-222, 233-237, 257-258, 274, 304-305, 
334-335, 417, 465-466, 880, 1443-1445, 1567- 
1570, 1683, 1853-1854, 2105, 2157-2159, 2206- 
2207, 2276. 

Ives, H. E., 731, 881-882, 1080, 1446, 1684, 2001, 
2049-2051, 2075. 

Ives, H. E., and E. F. Kingsbury, 2002. 


J 


J., C., 883-884, 

J... Mo j.4.1572: 

Johnson, G. L., 495, 1278, 2277. 

Johnson & Sons, 1685. 

Jolley, A. C. See Bull, A. J., and A. C. Jolley. 

Joly, John, 239, 275, 336. 

Jones, Chapman, 374, 419, 573, 653, 1081-1083, 1573, 
1938, 2209. 

Jones, L. A., 1939-1940. 

Jones, T. H., 1084. 

Jougla, J., 885-886. 

Jougla, J., the younger, 1279. 

Jourdain, P. E. B., 338, 375-376, 420-421, 467. 


114 


Jové, 2159. 
Juhl, Ernst, 1085. 
Just, Alexander, 1771. 


Kaiserling, Carl, 535. 

Kauffmann, Hugo, 536. 

Kein, Wold, 1857. 

Keller-Dorian, Berthon et Cie., 2332. 

Kelvin (1st baron), William Thomson, 277. 

Kenah, A. V., 468-469. 

Kieser, Karl, 654. 

Kilmer, T. W., 2052. 

Kine-Chromo, pseud., 1941. 

Kingsbury, E. F. See Ives, H. E., and E. F. Kings- 
bury. 

Klein, E., 1574. 

Klein, H. O., 574, 655, 887, 1280, 1447. 

Knoche, Paul, 2160. 

Knott, L. E., 1686. 


' Knowles, H. C., 1281. 


Koegel, P. R., 2106-2107, 2161-2162, 2278. 

Koenig, Carl, 1448. 

Koenig, Ernst, 575-579, 656-658, 732-733, 888-891, 
1086, 1449-1450, 1687, 1772-1774, 1858-1859, 
1944, 2210-2211. 

Krone, Hermann, 210. 

Kropf, Fritz, 1575, 2108. 

Kruegener, R., 894. 

Kuchinka, Eduard, 470, 581. 

Kuemntell, G., 659, 1576, 1775. 

Kunz, W. HH. 1577. 


L., 424. 

Labatut, 190. 

Lacan, Ernest, 67. 

Lacroix, J., 2279. 

Ladd-Franklin, Christine, 2280. 

Lambert, F. C., 308, 378. 

Lang, William, 151. 

Lasareff, P., 895. 

Lassus Saint-Genies, Jacques de, 1860. 

Laurvik, J. N., 1087. 

Law, E. F., 1088. 

Lea, M. C., 153-154. 

Lederer, Otto, 1452. 

Leffmann, Henry, 1688. 

Lefort, V., 1283. 

Legeret, E., 1579. 

Leggett, G. H., 1689. 

Legier, Alphonse, 735. 

Lehmann, J. M., 660, 736-737, 898-899, 1089-1091, 
1284-1286, 1453. 

Leiber, Ferdinand, 900, 1580, 1690. See also Stenger, 
Erich, and Ferdinand Leiber. 

Lelong, Adrien, 1287-1288. 

Le Mée, Alexandre, 1454, 1581, 1691, 1776. 

Leonel G., 1290. 

Le Roy, G. A., 901-902. 

Leto Photo Materials Co., 1777. 

Letouzey, V., 1291. 

Leventon, L. M., 2212. 

Levy, Max, 583. 

Lewis, A. H., 1692. 

Lewisohn, John, 2004. 

Liabeuf, H., 2213. 

Liesegang, R. E., 1093, 1945-1946. 

Limmer, Fr., 1094, 1292-1296, 1455-1456, 1583-1584. 

Lippmann, Gabriel, 191-192, 211-215, 241, 278-279, 
339, 379, 661-663, 738-739. 

Litchfield, Charles, 1095. 


THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


Lobley, F. J., 1693. 

Locquin, René, 1096-1097. 

Loebel, Leopold, 585, 664. 

Loescher, Fritz, 425. 

Loewy, Alfred, 1297. 

Lohmeyer, R., 1098. 

Lohr, J. M. See Farnau, E. F., and J. M. Lohr. 

Lotus, H., 1298. 

Lovelace, M. G., 1694. 

Lucas, E. G. H., 1695, 2108a. 

Luckiesh, Matthew, 2005. 

Lueppo-Cramer, 426, 471, 903-904, 1585-1588, 1778, 
1947, 2164. 

Lugdenensis, pseud., 1779. 

Lumiére, Auguste, 666, 1299. 

Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis Lumiére, 259-260, 340, 
472, 586-588, 665, 905, 1099-1100, 1300-1301, 
1458, 1861-1862. 

Lumiére, Auguste, and others, 906-907, 1101-1102, 
1302-1303, 1459-1460, 2109, 2165, 2217-2219. 

Lund, C. H., and L. E. Wise, 2110. 

Luther, R., 1103, 1304, 1589. 


M 


McCord, Bennett, 1863. 

McFarland, J. H., 261. 

McIntosh, J., 1104-1105, 1696, 1864. 

Mackenstein, H., 910. 

Mackenstein Etablissements, 1697. 

Mairot, F., 1698. 

Maisch, F. D., 1461. 

Malby, H. T., and others, 1307. 

Maldiney, 667. 

Maleve, L., 1699. 

Mann, A., 1865. 

Manners, Samuel, 1780. 

Manners, Samuel, and H. E. Rendall, 2333. 

Mareschal, G., 224, 341, 428, 668, 741, 911, 1106- 
1108, 1308-1311, 1591, 1700. 

Marino, Algeri, 1701. 

Marriage, Ernest, 1109. 

Marshall, Andrew, 2007. 

Martel, Charles, 55. 

Martin, Karl, 1781. 

Martin-Duncan, F., 912-914, 1110-1111, 1312. 

Martiny, Gaston, 915. 

Mascart, E. E. N., 193. 

Massiot, G., 1112, 1866, 2281. 

Maxwell, J. C., 47, 56. 

Mayer, Emil, 1463. 

Mazo, E., 1464. 

Mees, C. E. K., 742, 916-917, 1113-1117, 1313-1316, 
1592-1593, 1867, 1948, 2008, 2053-2054, 2220. 

Mees, C. E. K., and H. T. Clarke, 2111. 

Mees, C. E. K., and G. Gutekunst, 2282. 

Mees, C. E. K., and J. H. Pledge, 918, 1465. 

Mees, C. E. K., and S. E. Sheppard, 743. 

Mees, C. E. K., and S. H. Wratten, 919, 1118. 

Meggers, W. F., 2076. 

Meister Lucius & Briining, 589, 1317. 

Meldola, R., 282. 

Mente, Otto, 920. 

Merckens, W., 1318. Ses also Smith, J. H., and W. 
Merckens. 

Mercury, pseud., 30. 

Merillat, Lou, 2055. 

Meslin, G., 216. 

Messer, H. C., 1702. 

Meugniot, 211la. 

Miethe, Adolf, 473, 498-499, 538, 590-594, 
1320, 1703, 1868, 2112. 

Miethe, ‘Adolf, ‘ane B. Seegert, 1594. ie 

Mikeska, L. ae and others, 2113. 

Miller, E. E. See Teamer, C. K., and E. E. Miller. 

Miller, M. D., 1321. 


1319- 











4) 


P 
; 


COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


Millochau, G., 921. 

Mills, W. H., and P. E. Evans, 2166. 
Mills, W. H., and F. M. Hamer, 2167. 
Mills, W. H., and Sir W. J. Pope, 2168. 


Mills, W. H., and R. S. Wishart, 2169. 
Monjauze, G., 1783. 


Monpillard, Félix, 343-344, 381, 430, 501, 595, 669- 
671, 744-745, 922, 1120-1121, 1322-1324, 1466- 
1469, 1595, 1704-1705, 1785-1786, 1869, 2284. 

Moreels, R., 1470, 1596. 

Morris, Wayne, 2009. 

Morse, S. F. B., 32. 

Morton, A. E., 1787-1789, 1870-1871. 

Mueller, Gustav, 1325. 

Muller, Eugéne, 2285-2286, 2334. 

Munro, L. W., 1122. 

Murdoch, Helen M., 1872-1873. 


N 


hae. J., 1326, 

Namias, Rodolfo, 382, 431-432, 672, 1123, 1327-1328, 
1471, 1597, 1790-1791, 2114, 2222. 

Naumann, Helmut, 2336. 

Neame, S. E., 746. 

Neuhauss, Richard, 262, 283, 345-347, 383, 474-475, 
502, 540, 596, 675, 747, 924-925. 

Newens, F. R., 2115, 2170, 2223, 2338. 

Newton, A. J., 749-751, 926, 1472, 1711. 
Furnald, S. M., and A. J. Newton. 

Newton, A. J., and A. J. Bull, 598, 1712. 

Nicholson, J. W., 2116. 

Niepce de Saint Victor, C. F. A., 22, 40, 57, 74-75. 

Niewenglowski, G. H., 242, 284, 384, 1330. 

Noack, 349. 


See also 


Me Norman, Albert, 541, 752. 


a ea 


Northall-Laurie, D., 2339. 
Novak, Franz, 753, 1473, 1602. 
Nutting, P. G., 503. 


O 


Obermayer, Albert, Edler von, 676, 928-929, 1127, 
Peods 


_ Obernetter, E., 165. 


Oe a eee 





erter, I. J., 2171, 2287. 
Ogonowski, E., conte, 195. 


Pp 


Paage, A., 80. 

Paget Prize Plate Co., 2224. 

Painter, F. W., 2010. 

Palocsay, Albin von, 1338, 1475, 1605-1607, 1713. 

Pan Chromo, pseud., 1950-1951. 

Parker, G. H., 1476. 

Parolini, C., and G. Perron, 2225. 

Payne, Arthur, 677, 933. 

Pearce, C. E., 155. 

Peaucellier, A., 1128. 

Hector, S., 755+ 

Penrose, Frank, 1952. 

Perkins, H. F., 1340, 1477, 1608, 1875, 1953, 2011. 

Perron, G. See Parolini, C., and G. Perron. 

Personnaz, Antonin, 1130, 1341, 1609. 

Pfaundler, Leopold, 477, 599, 756, 934, 1478. 

Pfenninger, Otto, 757-758, 1479-1480, 1610, 
1954, 2012. 

Pim, Greenwood, 132. 

Piper, C. W., 937, 1481, 1794, 1877, 1955-1958, 2013- 
2016, 2057-2058, 2078. 


1876, 


- Plaskett, J. S., 505. 
4 Plé, Charles, 58. 


Lig 
Pledge, J. H., 939, 1342, 1795-1796. See also Mees, 
C. E. K., and J. H. Pledge. 

Plotnikov; 1.) S53, 2272. 

Poirée, Georges, 940. 

Poitevin, L. A., 69. 

Pope, Sir W. J., 1714, 1959, 2118. 
Werk and site \ View) oeope: 

Potonniée, G., 1879. 

Poulenc fréres, 1131, 1343. 

Power, H. D’A., 543-544, 600, 1132-1139, 1344-1345, 
1880-1881, 1960, 2016, 2226. 

Powrie, J. H., 679, 1140, 1346. 

Precht, J., 601-603, 680. 

Press, A., 2059. 

PretzleAve Dito. 

Prilejaeff, Alexandre, 1611, 1715. 

Prokoudine-Gorsky, S. de, 760, 2172a. 

Pumphrey, Alfred, 545. 


See also Mills, 


Q 
Quentin, H., 434, 944-945, 1348-1349, 1483-1487, 
1612. 
R 
R., H., 604. 


Raleigh, Charles, 2289. 

Randles, W. B. See Hind, H. L., and W. B. Randles. 

Rawlins, G. E. H., 1141. 

Rayleigh (3d baron), J. W. Strutt, 162, 166. 

Raymond, R., 947, 1142. 

Reeb, Henri, 950. 

Regni, pseud., 1489. 

Reising, H., 681. 

Rendall, H. E., 2062, 2120-2121, 2173-2174, 2229- 
2230, 2290, 2341-2342. See also Manners, Sam- 
uel, and H. E. Rendall. 

Renger-Patzsch, Robert, 1797. 

Renwick, F. F., 1350. 

Reynolds, E. J., 70. 

Rheinberg, Julius, 605, 761, 1491, 1613-1614, 1718. 

Rheinberg, Julius, and Ernst Rheinberg, 1719. 

Richard, A., 1615. 

Richard, G. A., 289. 

Rigg, Gilbert, 1883. 

Riley, P. M., 951. 

Rimmer, J. B., 2175. 

Rockwood, G. A., 1144. 

Rodman, G. H., 2018. 

Rood, O. N., 138. 

Rose, S. W., 2231. 

Ross, William, 41-42. 

Rothé, E., 606, 682, 952. 

Rounds, Will., 2080. 

Rowe, E. H., 2343. 

Rundle, B., 2081. 

Rypinski, M. C., 1798, 1884. 


Si tar 492: 

So Jena aae 

Saal, Alfred, 1493. 

Sacco, Giulio, 1146. 

Sachse, J. F., 290. 

Saint Florent, E. de, 94, 312, 607. 
Sallwuerk, Edmund von, 762. 
Salt, E. A., 2019. 

Sanger Shepherd & Co., 546. 
Satori, Karl, 608. 
Saville-Kent, W., 763. 


116 


Sawyer, J. R., 124. 

Schaum, Karl, 1147. 

Scheffer, W., 1148-1149, 1353-1357, 1494-1497. 

Schilling, Otto, 1498. 

Schinzel, Karl, 683, 1150. 

Schitz, C., 2232-2233. 

Schloemann, Eduard, 1358. 

Schmidt, Hans, 684-685, 764-768, 953, 1151. 

Schmitz, Fritz, 1720. 

Schrott, Paul, Ritter von, 1799. 

Schuett, F., 291. 

Schultess-Young, W. A., 1884a, 1963. 

Schultz-Sellack, Carl, 86-87. 

Schwarzer, E., 1800. 

Scoble, W. A., 769. 

Scott, Albert W., 198. 

Seddig, M., 770. 

Seebeck, J. T., 4-5. 

Seegert, B. See Miethe, Adolf, and B. Seegert. 

Selle, Gustav, 609. 

Senior, Edgar, 412, 506, 610. 

Seyewetz, A., 1359, 1499, 2082. 
Auguste, and others. 

Sforza, Francis, 1360-1361, 1500. 

Sheahan, D. J., 1885, 1964. 

Shearer, J. S., 479. 

Shepherd, E. S., 387-389, 436, 507, 547. 

Shepherd, J. F., 2293. 

Sheppard, S. E., 955, 1152. See also Mees, C. E. K., 
and S. E. Sheppard. 

Shivas;"E.,) 1153. 

Siegrist, H. See Fischer, R., and H. Siegrist. 

Simmen, Charles, 1154-1155, 1501, 1617-1618. 

Sims, W. A., 956. 

Smillie, T. W., 1156. 

Smith, G.A., 1157. 

Smith, J. H., 771, 957-958, 1158-1160, 1363-1364, 
1502, 1801, 2020. 

Smith, J. H., and W. Merckens, 772-773, 959. 

Smith, J. H., & Co., 774. 

Smith, Stephen, 313. 

Smitten, H. M., 1802. 

Snappschotte, J. Focus, pseud., 264. 

Snelling, H. H., 23-24. 

South, C. W., 611. 

Spiller, John, 95, 103. 

Spiller, W. H., 1966. 

Spoerl, Hans, 686, 1804. 

St., 508. 

Staats, Georg, 157. 

Stark, J, 961. 

State ov else lolol. 

Steadman, F. M., 962. 

Steichen, E. J., 1163-1164. 

Stenger, Erich, 687-689, 963-966, 1165-1168, 1504, 
1620-1621, 1806. See Precht, J. (entries 603, 
680); see Miethe, A. (entry no. 2112). 

Stenger, Erich, and Ferdinand Leiber, 1169-1170, 
1505. 

Stieglitz, Alfred, 1171. 

Stoakley, F. J., 2294. 

Stobbe, Hans, 1172, 1367, 1506. 

Stokes, G. G., 139. 

Stolze, F., 218, 549, 690, 1173-1174, 1368. 

Storr;-B- V., 20383. 

Stryel7zes 

Streissler, Alfred, 1369, 1807-1808. 

Struss, Karl, 2063. 

Strutt, J. W., 71. 

Sutton, Thomas, 90. 

Swan, J. We 150: 

Swinton, A. A. C., 125. 

Switkowski, Josef, 1622. 

Symmons, Guy. See Farmer, Howard, and Guy 
Symmons. 

Szezepanik, Jan, 612, 1175, 1370. 

Szczepanik, Jan, and F. Aubuch, 1887. 


See also Lumiére, 


THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


T., H., 480. 

Talbot, H. F., 12. 

Talboys, A. E., 550. 

Tallent, A. A. K., 354, 412, 481. 
Tauleigne, A., 1507. 

Taylor, J. T., 72. 

Teamer, C. K., and E. E. Miller, 2236. 
Testud de Beauregard, 44. 

Thames Colour Plate Co., 1374. 
Thiem, W., 2021, 2295. 

Thieme, Paul, 1178, 1377, 1723, 1888, 2022. 
Thoerner, W., 1810. 

Thomas, R. W., 85. 

Thorp, Thomas, 438. 

Thovert, J., 1378, 1624-1625, 1724, 2296. 
Thwing, C. B., 200. 

Tikhoff, 1626. 

Tillman, S. D., 59. 

Tilney, F. C., 969, 1180-1181. 
Tiphaigne de la Roche, C. F., 1. 
Tobler, Friedrich, 1811, 1889. 

Toch, Maximilian, 1380, 1508. 
Torchon, Paul, 1182-1183. 

Toulon, Pierre, 2176. 

Townsend, C. F., 693. 

Traube, Artur, 614, 694, 971-972, 2297. 
Traut, H., 1184. 

Trillat, A., 440. 

Triplice, 551. 

Tschoerner, Ludwig, 1185. 

Tutton, F. G., 2302, 2346-2348. 


U 


Union photographique industrielle établissements Lu- & 
miére & Jougla réunis, 1812. 
United States. — Patents Committee, 36. 


V 


Valenta, Eduard, 243, 355, 441, 615, 787, 973, 1187-— 
1190, 1381-1383, 1628-1629, 1725-1726, 2023. 

Valette, T., and R. Feret, 1890. 

Vallot, Emile, 1630. 

Van Beek, H., 482. 

Van der Weyde, 81. 

Van Deventer, J. G., 1191. 

Ventujol, Emmanuel, 2349-2350. 

Versnaeyen, M. K., 115-116. 

Vidal, Léon, 106, 117-118, 201, 219, 244, 314-317, — 
356, 390-394, 512-513, 552, 788-789. . 

Vies, Guilliam de, 2177. 

Vieuille, G., 357. 

Villain, Alfred, 1509, 2024, 2065. 

Vinzl, Hans, 2025. 

Vogel, H. W., 91, 96-97, 133-134, 140-141, 147, 174, 
202-203, 245, 317, 358-359. 






W 


WAL Ss 0925 

W., J., 790-791. : 

W., L. T., 1968; 2278: 

Wagner, R., 2240. 

Wall, E. J., 265-266, 292, 483, 553-554, 616-619, 
792-802, 974-990, 1192-1195, 1385, 1510, 1632— 
2244, 2306-2308, 2351-2353. ; 

Wallace, R. J., 514, 991, 1196-1197, 1511, 1814. 5 
1633, 1728, 1891-1894, 1969, 2027, 2179, 2241— 




















Waller, Augustus, 10. 

Wallon, Etienne, 318, 360, 442,.515, 621, 992-995, 
1198, 2245. 

Walter, Gustav, 803. 

Walters, F. M., and Raymond Davis, 2246.’ 

arburg, Agnes B., 2084. 

Warburg, J. C., 1199, 1386, 2354. 


Ward, J. J., 1200. 

Warnerke, Leon, 225, 247. 

pwastell, W. L. F., 2355. 

Waterhouse, James, 104, 622, 1388-1389. 
Watkins, Alfred, 444, 996-997, 1202-1203, 1815, 1895. 
Watkins, H. S., 2247, 

Watteville, C. de, 2248. 

Weidert, Fr., 623. 

Weidmann, V., 1896. 

_ Weimann, Arthur, 1634. 

- Weissermel, W., 1512, 1729-1730, 1897. 

- Wentzel, Fritz, 1391. 

_ Wenz, Emile, 1898. 

Weston, A. W. H., 1970. 

-Whatmough, W. A., 1899. 

_ Whidden, G. C., 2028. 

_ Whitfield, Geoffrey, and C. L. Finlay, 1817. 
Wieland, H., and others, 2029. 

- Wiener, O. H., 175, 267, 361, 395, 1392. 

_ Wilcox, W. D., 2180. 

_ Wilkinson, W. T., 1900, 2030, 2085. 
Williams, A. D., 2031. 

_ Williams, S. H., 2123-2124. 

Wilson, E. L., 248. 

Winstanley, D., 204. 

_ Winter, G., 1513, 1635. 

Wise, L. E. See Lund, C. H., and L. E. Wise. 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


Diy 


Wise, L. E., and others, 2125. 

Wishart, R. S. See Mills, W. H., and R. S. Wishart. 

Wolf-Czapek, K. W., 998-1001, 1731. 

Wood, Sir H. T., 320-322. 

Wood, R. W., 396, 445-446, 624, 1732. 

Woodhead, A. E., 1901. 

Woods, C. R., 135. 

Woods, L. T., 2250. 

Worel, Karl, 516, 555, 695, 804, 1002-1004, 1205, 
1514, 1636, 1733-1734, 1902. 

Wratten, S. H. See Mees, C. E. K., and S. H. Wrat- 
ten. 

Wratten & Wainwright, 1004. 

Wright, H. W. C., 1903, 2251. 

Wuensch, C. E., 2. 

Wychgram, Engelhard, 1637, 1819. 


x 


Wo, LOLS 
Xtensis, pseud., 1971. 


Me 


Yerbury, S. G., 805-806, 1516, 2126, 2252. 
Yoshida, Usaburo, 2127. 
Young, S. L., 1393. 


Z 


Zander, C. G., 696, 807-808. 
Zavoda, Bohuslav, 1394. 
Zenker, Wilhelm, 205, 447. 


SUBJECT INDEX 


Numbers refer to entries, not to pages 





A 


Abney, Sir W. de W., 114, 128, 163, 548, 2141, 2194, 


2209. 
Abney’s color disc, 699. 
Actinometers, 996-997, 
Additive process, 2066. 
Aeonchrome plate, 1905. 
Aerial photography, 1319. 


Agfa plate, 1765, 1795, 1915, 1980, 2022-2023, 2336. 


Albert, Joseph, 114, 120, 1184. 
Albumin, 123, 215. 
Allochrome plates, 697. 


Amateur work, 428, 469, 550, 617, 664, 679, 1066, 


1232, 1268, 1686, 1749, 1865, 
Anethol, 2106. 
Aniline. See Coal tar colors. 
Animals, photography of, 1819. 
Anti-frilling dish, 1014. 


Art and color photography, 159, 762, 817, 1017, 1283, 


1341, 1434, 1641, 1651, 1868, 1931. 


Astronomical uses, 1197, 1535, 1594, 1626, 1703, 1732, 


2130,-2279. 
Aurora plate, 1210, 1250, 1510. 


Autochromes, 586-588, 593, 621, 665-666, 668, 811, 
846, 849, 866, 870-871a, 884, 894, 909, 911-912, 
938, 948, 962, 964, 978-979, 994-995, 998-999, 
1012, 1015, 1018, 1029, 1055, 1068, 1070-1073, 
1078, 1134, 1137, 1144, 1175, 1190, 1192, 1196, 
1198, 1205, 1214, 1233-1234, 1280, 1307, 1321, 
1359, 1395, 1406, 1416, 1512, 1519, 1609, 1619, 
1621, 1655, 1696, 1730, 1737, 1798, 1800, 1850, 
1863, 1918, 1970, 1991, 2000, 2046, 2114, 2180, 


2247-2355, 
Actinometers, 996, 
Anaglyphs, 1555. 
Backing, 1809. 
Blacks, 1153, 2329. 
Blacks and whites from, 1608, 1974. 
Bluish tones, 1039, 1044, 1271, 1529, 2233, 2285. 
Changing box, 1579. 
Cloud effects, 2196. 
Color, 1023, 1323, 1467, 1762. 


Comparison with other processes, 789, 897-898, 970, 
1003, 1086, 1213, 1744, 1861, 1884a, 2009, 2137, 


2336. 
Contrast, 1243, 1665. 
Dark room, 1131, 1297, 1900. 
Dark slide, 1265. 
Daylight development, 1065, 1106, 1287, 2310. 
Defects, 1220, 1290, 1659, 1791, 2268, 2318. 
Desensitizing, 2181, 2217, 2256, 2286. 
Deterioration, 1799. 
Difficulties, 915, 2080. 
Drying, 2249. 
Enlargements, 1634, 1754. 


Exposure, 862, 950, 1028, 1032-1033, 1052, 1054, 
1064, 1095, 1128, 1130, 1194, 1203-1204, 1232, 
1272, 1275, 1403, 1463, 1476, 1605-1606, 1699, 
1706, 1723, 1749, 1788, 1821, 1823, 1826, 1831, 


1895, 1919, 2214, 2232, 2311, 2349. 
Exposure in artificial light, 2033. 
Exposure (instantaneous), 1501, 1617, 2270. 
Fading, 1247. 


Filters, 1095, 1105, 1202, 1273, 1306, 1602, 1611, 


1638, 1715, 1766-1767, 2104, 2319, 2324. 


[118]. 


Autochromes, continued. 


Flashlight, 1324, 1459-1460, 1604, 1729. © 

Flatness, 1200. 

Flowers, 864. 

Frilling, 1171, 1542, 1551. 

Grain, 828, 914, 939, 1021, 1148, 1381. 

Hypersensitization, 1518, 1618, 1624-1625, 1630, 
1657, 1677, 1724, 1768, 1785-1786, 1869, 2159, 
2284, 2304. 

Illumination of subject, 2040, 2086, 2214. 

Improvements, 2212. : 

Intensification, 819, 1064, 1079, 1081, 1223, 1236, 
1660-1661, 1770, 2145, 2150, 2198. 

Landscapes, 993, 1049, 1468. 

Lantern slides, 1010, 1109, 1966, 2262. 

Lens (soft-focus), 2052. 

Metallic screens, 1276. 

Mounting, 1020, 1060. ; 4 

Old plates, 1417, 1503. a 

Optics, 1672. = 

Outfits, 858, 1268. 

Packing, 1544. 

Pinatype prints, 1038. 

Portraits, 1242, 1550, 1783, 1844, 1972, 2156. 

Price, 1211, 13525-1385. 

Printing frame, 1364. 

Projecting, 1284, 1866, 2203, 2281. q 

Reproduction, 827, 937, 1142, 1170, 1215, 1249, 
1301, 1351, 1424, 1437-1438, 1466, 1499, 1509, 
1513, 1520, 1549, 1652, 1833, 1849, 2185, 233759 

Residues, 819,  F 

Retouching, 1673, 1760, 1857. 

Reversing, 819, 875-876, 1141, 1235, 1398, 1643. 

Rock sections, 1024. 

Screens, 1664. s 

Stains and spots, 819, 1064, 1129, 1143, 1161, 1365, 
1399, 1559, 1761. 

Stereoscopic, 851, 1366, 2182. 

Stripping, 1149. 

Sulphide toning, 1145, 1183. 

Sunsets, 1415. 

Telephotography, 1875. 

Theory, 1075, 1461. 

Thermometer, 1390. 

Underexposure, 1580. 

Use in ordinary photography, 1523, 1541. 

Varnish, 902, 927, 1370. 

Viewing: 859, 1096, 1164, 1275, 1300, 1338, 1343, 
1421, 1490, 1662, 1702, 1810, 1898, 2081. 4 

Washing, 1048, 

Whites, 941. 

Working of, 780, 820-821, 826, 838-840, 865, 901, 
905-908, 910, 943, 960, 985, 1009, 1022, 1028, 
1036-1037, 1041, 1045, 1048, 1050, 1063-1066, 
1074, 1077, 1084, 1097, 1100, 1102, 1106, 1108, 
1120-1121, 1132, 1136, 1138-1139, 1154, 1155, 
1162, 1164, 1182-1183, 1186, 1189, 1203, 1221, 
1228, 1232, 1240-1241, 1267, 1287, 1299, 1302— 
1303, 1308-1310, 1312, 1325, 1345, 1347, 1360, 
1362, 1380, 1384, 1396, 1425, 1492, 1495, 1497 
1508, 1510, 1533, 1548, 1557, °1597, 1632,920em 
1640, 1646, 1658, 1663, 1685, 1698, 1751, 1790, 
1826, 1834, 1836, 1885, 1891, 1909, 1910, 1914, 
1963, 1975, 2025, 2031, 2109, 2111a, 2138, 2175 
2193, 2205, 2257, 2261, 2311, 2320, 2326, 2334, 

Zeiss accessories, 1206. 





























COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


Autochromes for amateurs, 1066, 1749. 
Autochromes and art, 1042, 1341, 1956, 1964. 
Autochromes in astronomy, 2130, 2279. 


Autochromes from autochromes, 822, 1057-1059, 1441- 


1442, 1448, 1451, 1458, 1750. 
Autochromes in autumn, 1539. 
Autochromes of birds, 1952. 
Autochromes of interiors, 1953, 2251. 
Autochromes in microphotography, 1312, 1322. 
Autochromes in museums, 1466. 
Autochromes in travelling, 1028, 1043, 1107, 1377, 
1462, 1543, 1650. 
Autochromes in tropics, 1493, 1748, 1811, 1889, 2177. 
Autochromes in winter, 1692, 2251, 
Autochromoscope, 1662. 
Autotype, 702, 783, 1648, 1827. 


B 


Backs (repeating), 2254. 

Balduinus, C. Adolphus, 1753. 

Battlefield photography, 2069. 

Baumgartner’s process, 298. 

Beccaria, Giovanni Battista, 1753. 

Becquerel’s process, 15, 26, 35, 50, 68, 101, 136, 248, 
267-269, 282, 364, 467. 

See also Author index. 

Bennetto’s process, 287-288, 310, 326-327, 402, 1443, 
1480, 1489. 

Berton and Gambs process, 849. 

Bibliography, 2034, 2088. 

Bichromated size process, 845, 1649. 

Bierstadt, E., 255. 

Bird photography, 1952. 

Black and white prints from autochromes, 1928, 1974. 

Blacks, 501. 

Bleachout process, 502, 516, 540, 555, 571, 596, 643, 
659, 675, 694, 713, 730, 747, 771, 773-774, 776, 
797, 849, 895, 924-925, 931, 957, 959, 1000- 
1003, 1094, 1117, 1160, 1218, 1230, 1258-1263, 
1292, 1294, 1296, 1318, 1363, 1367, 1455, 1500, 
1502005 14.) 1537.-1552,. 1556, 1561, 1576, 1583= 
1584, 1601, 1627, 1629, 1691, 1707-1708, 1722, 
1726, 1733-1734, 1757, 1759, 1769, 1771, 1775, 
1801, 1804, 1812-1813, 1852, 1887, 1902, 2020, 
2089, 2161, 2278. 

Blue, 451, 919. 

Body colors, 361, 2107. 

Bonnaud’s process, 115. 

Boyle, Robert, 1753. 

Brasseur and Sampolo’s process, 299, 450, 476. 

Brewster’s (P. W.) camera, 1977, 1987. 

Burroughs, Wellcome & Co., 1623. 

Butler’s process, 435, 706, 1531, 1741, 2090, 2276. 


Cc 


Cadett plates, 387-388. 

Cajal’s process, 849. 

Camera, History, 1610. 

Camera, Reflector, 757, 2230. 

Camera, Single-exposure, 635, 639, 683, 690, 706, 
710, 740, 758, 1006, 1113-1114, 1225, 1393, 1486, 
1668, 1689, 1709, 1779, 1854, 2288, 2340. 

Campbell, James, 26. 

Carbon processes, 513, 703, 766, 800, 830, 988, 2128. 

Catalysis, 1150. 

Cathode rays, 2045. 

Cellerier’s process, 148, 152, 156. 

Celloidine paper, 312. 

Ceramic screen-plates, 2029. 

Ceylon, taking photographs in, 1873. 

Chamby, M., 77. 

Chassagne’s process, 293, 297, 301-302, 320-321. 


119 


Chloranol, 1834. 

Chlorophyl, 161. 

Christensen screen-plate. See Agfa plate, 

Chromodiascope, 1099, 1300. 

Chromoscope, 1697, 2276, 2306. 

Chronométre, 111. 

Cinematography, 401, 708, 1082, 1157, 1248, 1479, 
1501, o1674,° 1678, 1679, 1731,-1738,. 1747, 17463; 
1772, 1941, 2027, 2060, 2071, 2083, 2092, 2225, 
2259, 2273, 2289) 2al6, 2332, 2351. 

Coal tar colors, 165, 184, 355. 


. Collen, Henry, 2077. 


See also Author index. 

Collodion, 138, 570, 615, 1226, 1447, 1473. 

Color curves, 842. 

Color discs, 397. 

Color meters, 880. 

Color scale, 2043. 

Color sensitiveness, 471, 489, 743, 770, 965, 1947, 
1992, 2164. 

Color sensitizers, 437, 441, 464, 498, 610, 619, 622, 
636, 645, 654, 700, 728, 739, 823, 961, 977, 984, 
991, 1159, 1178, 1316, 1391," 1449; 51642, 1705, 
1724, 1786, 1805, 1832, 1858, 1938, 2012, 2106, 
2131, 2133, 2165, 2246, 2282, 2304. 

See also Dyes. 

Color theory, 2-3, 47, 55-56, 99, 104, 124, 158, 205, 
207, 218, 262, 295, 313, 324, 328, 362, 413, 415, 
419,504, 568, 715, 722, 727, 756, 934, 1115, 1219, 
1314, 1389, 1397, 1430, 1478, 1911, 1939, 1955, 
1960, 2013-2014, 2035, 2047, 2051, 2068, 2075, 
2099, 2160, 2242, 2274, 2280, 2295. 

Comley’s camera, 847. 

Cooper-Hewitt lamp, 569. 

Corke ei 2.2102: 

Cornu, 338. : 

Crime and color photography, 1025. 

Croll, Oswald, 1753. 

Cros’s process, 82, 113, 116-117, 172, 332, 478, 551, 
640, 1728, 1861, 1876. 

See also Author index. 

Crum, Walter, 70. 

Crystalline reflection, 139, 162. ; 

Cyanin, 503, 579, 726, 973, 1118, 1152, 2072, 2166- 
2169. 


D 


Daguerrotype (colored), 81. 

Dansac-Chassagne process. See Chassagne’s process. 
Dark rooms, 693, 714, 1297, 1457, 1473. 

Davidson, Lascelles, 401, 581. 

Daylight, 680. 

Deeks’s process, 2187, 2345. 

De Lubicz’s process, 449. 

Delvalez, 467. 
Desensitizers, 1159, 
2256, 2286. 
Diachrome process. 

Diaphragms, 609. 

Dichroic films, 2074. 

Dichrooscope, 53. 

Dicyanine, 745. 

Diffraction process, 375, 396, 445-446, 624, 731, 881. 

Direct processes, 270, 376, 379, 420, 452, 487, 493, 
502, 600, 738, 774, 853, 958, 1666, 1717, 1847, 
201s, ce aes 

Dittmar’s process, 309, 348, 467. 

Donisthorpe printing process, 854, 2183. 

Drac process, 710, 781, 1718. 

Drying apparatus, 1752, 1869, 2249, 

Ducos du Hauron, Alcide, 1209. 

Ducos du Hauron, Louis, 537, 879, 1838, 1879, 2163, 
2216. 


1505, 2181, 2190, 2217-2218, 


See Traube’s process. 


120 


Ducos du Hauron’s process, 83, 116, 120, 140, 172, 
332, 357, 360, 428, 442, 470, 478, 515, 640, 849, 
857, 1861, 1876. 

Dufay process, 1046, 1244, 1331, 1342, 1405, 1410- 
1411, 1413- 1414, 1420, 1427-1429, 1436, 1439, 
1498, 1510, 1540, 1563, 1565, 1572, 1619, 1637, 
1644, 1667, 1669, 1721, 1744, 1788, 1798, 2061, 
2247, 2258, 2313. 

Dyes, 108, 289, 371, 512, 533, 536, 559-560, 576, 903, 
O55e 7 1047, male. LIOs lessen Leds Lols—lLoloy 
1449-1450, 1553, 1574, 1675, 1758, 1852, 2042, 
2048, 2082, 2105-2106, 2110-2111, 2113, 2118, 
2125, 2131, 2157-2158, 2161-2162, 2204, 2206— 
2207, 2219, 2275, 2341, 2346. 


E 


Eastman transparency process, 1920. 

Eclipse, 78, 782. 

Eder, Josef Maria, 467, 534, 1935. 

Educational uses, 2172a. 

Edward’s process, 89. 

Egyptian scenes, 1320, 1582. 

Electric light, 1193. 

Enlargements, 725. 

Eosine, 130, 133. 

Exhibitions, 566, 718, 723, 793, 795, 861, 983, 1008, 
1051, 1180, 1199, 1227, 1239, 1255, 1375, 1886, 
2011, 2213, 2258, 2264. 

Exposure, 1407, 1895, 1919, 2094, 2311. 

Exposure meters, 1128, 1204, 1802, 1815-1816, 1925, 
2095. 

Exposures (instantaneous), 303, 331, 354, 764, 1242, 
1304, 1378, 1426, 1501, 1538, 1617, 2270. 


F 


Fabricius, Georgius, 1753. 

Fabrics, color prints on, 1890, 2024, 2036, 2065. 

Ferricyanide method, 1454. 

Film (screen-ruled), 1401. 

Films (colored), on metallic surfaces, 1330. 

Films (untoned), color of, 1147. 

Films, marking of, 2149. 

Pigment, 655. 

Filters, 374, 490, 499, 521, 538, 562-563, 580, 589- 
590, 598, 618, 669, 689, 698-699, 709, 753, 877, 
919, 942, 987, 1011, 1105, 1146, 1173, 1179, 1197, 
1202, 1273-1274, 1306, 1317, 1368, 1440, 1511, 
1524, 1592, 1602, 1638, 1781, 1846, 1999, 2005, 
2010, 2041, 2095, 2104, 2111-2112, 2153, 2189, 
2204, 2319, 2324, 2338, 2342. 

Fish glue, use of, 1736. 

Fixing, 51, 77. 

Flashlights, 990, 1252, 1324, 1459-1460, 1550, 1595, 
1604, 1671, 1680, 1729, 1844, 2021. 

Florence plate, 1346. 

Flowers, 864, 2148. 

Focussing screens, 1845. 

Foliage, 2195. 

Four-color process, 717, 721, 727, 807, 1254. 

Fraschbourg’s process, 581. 

Freshwater, T. E., 328. 

Friese-Greene’s process, 386, 1591. 

Fulgide, 1172, 1506. 


G 


Gaedicke, J., 171. 

Garchey’s process, 435. 

Garden’s, 2265. 

Gebhart, Kurt, 1924. 

Geisler’s process, 341, 967, 1253, 1591. 
See also Nachet-Geisler process. 


THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 


Gelatin, color phenomena, 1174. 
Geology, use in, 1714. 
Gervais-Courtellement, 1582, 1604. 
Gilbert’s process, 815. 

Giphantia (title), 1 

Glaciers, 1735. 

Glycerol, 1642. 

Glycinroth, 433. 

Goethe, J. W. von, 491. 

Gorsky process, 2100, 2271. 
Gradation, 653, 1098. 

Grain structure, 393-394, 835, 939, 1381, 1573, 1593. 
Grating films, 438. 

Gray’s process, 232. 

Grays, 501, 1681, 1695,)17135 
Green, 392, 863, 2192. 
Grenier-Villard process, 352. 
Gum process, 777. 

Gurtner’s process, 581. 


H 


Hallotype, 45-46. 

Hamburger’s process, 1536. 

Heliochromes, 20, 22, 34. 

Hellot, Jean, 1753. 

Henberger’s patent, 786. 

Henderson award, 1269. 

Henry, Charles, experiments, 300. 

Hering’s theory, 934. 

Hernandez, Arturo, 2129. 

Herschel, Sir J. F. W., 68. 

Hesekiel’s process, 424, 637. 

Hess-Ives process, 1933-1934, 1975, 1996-1997, 2028, 
2032, 2063. 

Hicro process. See Hess-Ives process. 

Hill process, 16-19, 21, 23-24, 26-28, 30-33, 36, 43, 
155, 528, 2243,922505) 22525 

History, 72, 102, 125, 127, 144, 150, 170, 177-178, 
186, 240, 245, 255, 308, 322, 367, 399, 412, 462, 
487, 495, 514, 543, 644, 712, 804, 970, 1007, 1083, 
1093, 1184, 1256, 1472, 1584, 1610, 1753, 1793, 
1806, 1837, 1884, 1894, 2017, 2026, 2058, 2070, 
2083, 2101, 2172, 2184, 2220, 2294, 2306. 

Hofmann’s process, 439. 

Hollborn plate, 1295. 

Homocol sensitizer, 691. 

Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von, 311, 520. 

Huebl’s process, 652. 

See also Author index. 
Hunt, Robert, 68. 
See also Author index. 
Hydroquinone, 444. 


Illuminants, 1940, 2040. 
Images (three-color), symmetry, 1835, 1851. 
India, Taking photographs in, 1872. 
Indirect processes, 376, 381, 450. 
Industrial applications, 453. 
Interference bands, 166. 
Interiors, 1953. 
Irradiation, 567. 
Isenmann’s process, 630. 
Isochromatic plates, 1197. 
Ives, Frederic E., 203, 207-208, 220, 230, 238, 530, 
932, 1847, 1876, 2136, 2343. 
Processes, 209, 238, 266, 304-306, 316, 335, 367, 


373, 377, 418, 422-423, 461, 470, 1400, 1443— 4 


1445, 1480, 1489, 1961, 2135, 2158, 2207-2208. 3 
See also Author index. es 
Ives, H. E., Duplication method, 968. 






i i id ac 





COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 


J 


Joly’s process, 254, 266, 290, 307, 323, 329-330, 338, 
353, 405, 413, 427, 443, 457, 461, 468-469, 479, 
605, 673, 679, 951, 2124. 

See also Author index. 

Jougla process. See Omnicolor. 

Jumeaux process, 757. 

Jupiter lamp, 734. 


K 


Kitz, 467. 

Kodachrome process, 1906, 1916, 1937, 
1948, 1969, 1975, 1978, 2008, 2314. 

Koenig’s process, 616« 

See also Author index. 

Kopp’s process, 217. 

Krayn, Robert, 1983. 

Krayn’s process, 403, 849, 892-893, 974, 1165, 1257, 
1484, 1494, 1504, 1527, 1612, 1628, 1637, 1645. 


1942-1943, 


L 


Landscapes, 343, 556, 993, 1049, 1468. 

Lantern slides, 389, 1010, 1109, 1670, 1917, 1966, 
1968, 2007, 2096, 2236, 2262. 

Laroche’s process, 92. 

feaCarey-.13/, 151,267, 292. 

Lead intensification, 1822. 

Lectures, suggestions for, 2003. 

Lehman’s patent, 861. 

Lenses, 484, 582, 812, 940, 1092, 1289, 1592, 1712, 
2095. 232. 

Lenses (soft-focus), 2052. 

Leto plate, 1777, 1792. 

Leuco bases, 576, 585, 1158, 1170, 2307. 

Lewisohn process, 2269. 

Lieber process, 975. 

Light: 

Chemical action, 4-12, 37-38, 40, 52, 69, 74, 79, 
86-87, 91, 93, 95-97, 121-122, 129, 141, 143, 
149, 157-158, 175, 190, 193, 402, 440, 503, 644, 
660, 680, 1585-1587, 1753, 1839, 1841. 

Dispersion, 1446. 

Polarized, 180, 2339. 

Lippmann, Gabriel, 246, 531, 2248. 

Lippmann process, 176, 178-179, 186, 189, 194, 196, 
197, 200, 202, 210, 216, 222, 224-225, 231, 235- 
236, 242-243, 249-253, 256, 262, 269, 277, 
282-283, 291-292, 317-318, 329, 345-347, 358, 
365, 370, 383, 385, 395, 405-407, 412, 420, 426, 
458, 461, 467, 474-475, 478, 496, 506, 584, 599, 
604, 606, 661, 676, 709, 736-737, 789, 802, 833- 
834, 898-899, 945, 952, 966, 968, 989, 1003, 
1080, 1089, 1091, 1358, 1453, 1482, 1694, 1725, 
1756, 1840, 1908, 1945, 2001. 

See also Author index. 

Loewenstamm and Hoffert, 641. 

London Camera Club, 507. 

Loundin’s process, 1304, 2215. 

Lueppo-Cramer, 451. 

See also Author index. 

Lumiére, Antoine, 1521, 1545. 

Lumiére, Antoine, and Louis Lumiére, 962, 1388. 

Lumiére, Louis, 2245. 

Lumiére processes, 223, 225, 235-236, 247, 285, 459, 
480, 497, 740, 843, 1124-1126, 1329, 1369, 1862. 

See also Autochromes; also Author index. 

Luminescence, photographs of, 1669. 

Luther, R., methods, 1575. 


121 


M 


McDonough’s process, 263, 280-281, 408-409, 427, 
443, 457, 461, 468-469, 479, 494, 679, 1989. 

Manners’ process, 1590. 

Marionez’s process, 1615. 

Mars-Star process, 2119. 

Mascart, E. E. N., 338. 

Maxwell, J. C., 338, 413, 504, 2241. 

Medicine, use in, 2191, 2208. 

Meister Lucius & Briining, 577, 595, 671, 678, 745. 

Melano’s chromoscope, 380, 429, 442. 

Meslin, 467. 

Metallography, 1088, 1745, 1883. 

Methyl-violet, 2127. 

Meyer, Bruno, 594. 

Meyer’s camera, 342. 

Mezaro’s patent, 792. 

Microphotographs, 922, 1021, 1088, 1312, 1322, 1452, 
1564, 1688, 1704, 1764, 2053-2054, 2056, 2339. 

Micro-spectra process. See Rheinberg’s process. 

Miethe, Adolf, 518, 557, 2253. 

Miethe’s Egyptian scenes, 1320. 

Miethe’s process, 485, 510, 519, 522, 525, 542, 549, 
561, 642. 

See also Author index. 


N 


N. P. G. process, 685, 765, 767, 1562, 1730. 
Nachet-Geisler process, 719, 868. 
Nachet’s stereochromoscope, 266, 315, 391. 
Natural history records, 763, 1110-1111. 
Neuhauss, Richard, 1962. 
Neuhauss’s process, 467, 486, 493. 
Newton’s rings, 2186. 
Niepce de Saint Victor, C. F. A., 25-26, 35, 61-62, 
65, 68, 88, 136, 248. 

See also Author index. 

Niewenglowski’s heliochromoscope, 266, 284. 


O 


Ocean photography, 2291. 

Oil of pinks, 60. 

Omnicolor, 824, 885-886, 920, 981, 1212, 1231, 1270, 
1279, 1282, 1305, 1313, 1332-1337, 1348, 1353, 
1355, 1357, 1381-1382, 1387, 1395, 1419, 1422, 
1474, 1510, 1730, 1744. 

One-plate processes, 930. 

Opal, photographs on, 1776. 

Optics, 417, 454-455, 465-466, 481, 483, 1278, 1672. 

Orthochromatic plates, 434, 890, 1123, 1846. 


FP 


Paget process, 1653, 1670, 1746, 1773, 1784, 1787- 
1788, 1796-1798, 1807, 1817, 1820, 1825, 1830, 
1842, 1846, 1874, 1880-1881, 1884a, 1888, 1917, 
1963, 1966, 1975, 1988, 2009, 2018, 2093, 2097- 
2098, 2117, 2120, 2132, 2137, 2143-2144, 2151- 
2152, 2178, 2223-2224, 2231, 2247, 2266-2267, 
2317, 2348. 

Panchromatic plates, 433, 608, 664, 697, 890, 1016, 
1238, 1339, 1471, 1900, 1912-1913, 1971, 2019, 
2133-2134, 2219. 

Paper prints, 545-546, 553, 577, 592, 632, 772-773, 
1170, 1288, 1318, 1327, 1344, 1349, 1491, 1520, 
1536, 1581, 1600, 1653, 1833, 1874, 2030, 2121, 
2123, 2201, 2260, 2330. 

Penrose ratiometer, 887. 

Perscheid’s process, 581. 

Pfenninger, Otto, 932, 1185, 1853. 

Photometry, 2001-2002, 2049-2050. 


122 


Photomicrographs. See Microphotographs. 

Pietzner’s process, 803. 

Pinachrome, 575, 589, 597, 613, 633, 787, 888, 1560, 
1624. 

Pinacyanol, 658, 745, 787, 888, 2072, 2125. 

Pinaflavol, 2192, 2210-2211. 

Pinatype, 656, 657, 671, 678, 732, 741, 784, 788, 799- 
800, 829, 844, 852, 860, 872, 889, 891, 935, 936, 
1038, 1228, 1245, 1774, 1859, 1897, 1990, 2240. 

Pinaverdol, 2125. 

Plates, 145-146, 161, 165, 206, 265, 489, 499, 643, 
916, 1124, 1814, 1818, 1944. 

See also names of plates, as: Autochromes, Thames, 
Dufay, ete. 
Keeping properties, 888. 
Preservation, 760. 
Plates (composite), 2300. 
Poitevan’s process, 67, 76, 169, 267, 904. 
See also Author index. 

Pollock’s process, 435. 

Polychromide process, 1843, 1878, 1954. 

“Popular” works, 2038. 

Portraits, 539, 590, 692, 701, 746, 796, 1242, 1252, 
1324, 1431, 1516, 1550, 1844, 1926, 1972, 2146, 
2156022335; 2230; 

Positives on gelatine plates, 1251. 

Pouncy’s process, 142. 

Powel, Samuel, 160. 

Powrie-Warner process. See Warner-Powrie process. 

Prieur and Dubois’ process, 430, 581. 

Prismatic dispersion, 837, 944, 992, 1019. 

Prizma process, 2060, 2079, 2227-2228. 

Professional work, 646, 679, 869, 1340, 1409, 1477, 
1829, 1850, 1931, 1981, 2037. 

Projection apparatus, 526, 601, 674, 681, 1112, 1224, 
1284-1286, 1328, 1379, 1464, 1866-1867, 2176, 
2203, 2281, 2309. 

Prokudin-Gorsky’s process, 

Purkinje effect, 1090. 

‘““Pyro-Reeb,” 943. 

Pyrometry (optical), 2001. 


1616. 


R 


Raehlmann, 794. 

Ratiometer, 1994. 

Raydex process, 1780, 1824, 1877, 1899, 1903-1904, 
1907, 1922-1923, 2039, 2062, 2115, 2170, 2229, 
DOA TAZA aS 

Rayleigh, Lord, 338, 420, 467. 

Raylo process, 2312, 2328, 2352-2353. 

Reade, Dr., 70. 

Red, 100, 433, 622, 698, 714, 729, 769, 787, 1257a, 
1534, 1858, 2127, 2282. 

Refraction compensator, 932. 

Registration, 613, 1326, 1578. 

Reichel’s process, 351, 614, 686. 

Relief processes, 501, 2206, 2244, 2325. 

Research, 1995, 2124. 

Retouching stand, 2091. 

Reversal of dye images, 2188. 

Rheinberg’s processes, 1485, 1491, 1709-1710, 1718- 
1719, 1728, 1808. 

Rock sections, 1024. 

Roll-holders, 1394. 

Rothe’s process, 604. 

See also Author index. 

Ruth plate, 1599. 


Ss 


Sampolo’s process. See Brasseur and Sampolo’s 
process, 

Sanzol reduction process, 949. 

Scheele, Carl Wilhelm, 1753. 


Schmidt camera, 967, 980. 


THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 





























Schuett, F., 467. 

Schulze, Johann Heinrich, 1753. 

Scientific requirements, 294, 448, 738, 794, 1603, 
2103 m2126; 

Screen plate processes, 1101, 1116, 1151, 1166-1169, 
1281, 1288, 1350, 1354, 1402, 1412, 1435, 1456, 
1465, 1475, 1485, 1607, 1613-1614, 1620, 1623, 
1633, 1693, 1713, 1743 1752: 1792, 1806, 1837, 
1862, 1870, 1893, 1957, 1989, 2023, 2154, 2197, 
2205, 2292, 2305,°2315, 2ociaeoose 

See also names of plates, as: Watner-Powrie, Lu- 
miére, Paget, etc. 

Screens, 144, 233, 265, 271, 276, 314, 337, 356, 398; 
404, 479, 567, 583, 629, 664, 670, 720, 744, 818, 
922, 1004, 1013, 1525, 1566, 1648, 1656, 1664, 
1755, 1766, 2094. 

Screens (celluloid), 1546. 

Seebeck, Johann Thomas, 267. 

Seebeck’s process, 1385. 

Selle, Gustav, 816. ° 

Selle’s process, 286, 435. 

Sensitol dyes, 2048. 

Shepherd, E. S., 946. 

Shepherd, E. Sanger, process, 374, 378, 460-461, 541, 
544-546, 551-552, 581, 627-628, 746, 752, 785, 
843, 1040. 

Silver salts, 607, 1839, 1946, 2108. 

Sinop process, 805-806. 

Slavik’s process, 623, 637. 

Smith-Merckens process, 771, 774. 

Smith’s (J. H. & Co.), process. 
ess. 

Smith’s screen plate, 958. 

Soap bubbles, 2015. 

Society of Colour Photographers, 705, 711, 976, 1195, 
1965. 

Solgram, 611, 638, 775, 2119. 

Sparkle, avoidance of, 1803. 

Spectrotelescope, 273. 

Spectrum, 13-14, 97, 107, 110, 135, 143, 488, 605, 
631, 699-700, 878, 921, 1483, 1927, 2057, 2076, 
2116. 

Stage plays, 2287. 

Stained glass windows, 463, 2147. 

Stereochromoscope, 244. 

Stereoscopic photography, 933, 1067, 1103, 1254, 1329, 
1404, 1433, 1464, 1481, 1522, 1530, 2176, 2182, 
2331. 

Stripping films, 1119. 

Studios, 651, 759. 

Subtractive process, 900, 1949, 2066, 2073. 

Sunrise and sunset effects, 1871. 

Szcezepanik’s process, 482, 572, 771, 774, 776, 779, 
959, 1208, 1293, 1295, 1298. 


See Bleachout proc- 


fi 


Tauleigne-Mazo process, 1464, 1487, 1507. 

Technicolor process, 2064. 

Telephotography, 1875, 1896. a 

Thames process, 523, 1027, 1035, 1056, 1104, 1176- 
1177, 1212, 1216-1217, 1229-1230, 1269, 1371- 
1376, 1381, 1383, 1387, 1395; 1418, 14237°1510; 
1744. 

Thermometers, 1390. 

Thin membranes, 300. 

Thorpe’s process, 435, 509. 

Three-color back, 855-856. 

Three-color printing, 325, 333, 349, 359, 363, 432, 
473, 521, 524, 650, 748, 778, 783, 806, 832, 956, 
1833, 1848, 1936, 1985- 1986, 1998, 2084-2085, 
2128, 2185, 2341, 23450235475 

Three- Baise prism process, 98, 112. 

Three-plate processes (early), 63-64, 228, 292. 

Thwing, C. B., 467. 

Tissue process, 874. 








COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 123 


Transmission, electric, 1701. 


Transparencies, 416, 752, 784-785, 863, 1026, 1169, 
1291, 1481, 1654, 1690, 1736, 1778, 1864, 1973, 


2091, 2200, 2302, 2323, 2347. 


Traube’s process, 748, 798, 971-972, 1031, 1716, 1984. 


Triadochrome process, 2237, 2298-2299, 
Tripak process, 1528, 1567-1571, 1683. 
Triple projection process, 1867. 

Trist’s camera, 2202, 2301. 


Two-color process, 786, 1387, 1470, 1524, 1967, 1977, 
1979, 1987, 2064, 2073, 2173, 2238, 2283, 2303. 


U 


Uto process. See Bleachout process. 
Uva-chrom process, 2239, 2258, 2297. 


V 


Valenta, Edouard, 527. 
Valenta’s process, 236, 467. 
See also Author index. 
Vallot process, 493. 
Varnish, 1188, 1370. 
Vaucamps, 565. 
Verachromoscope, 1676, 1700, $727, 
Veracolor plate, 1295. 
Verak’s process, 198. 
Veress’s process, 168, 170-171, 173, 183. 
Verrill’s process, 511. 
Vidal, Léon, 755, 790-791. 
Vidal’s process, 89-90, 92, 106. 
Views, books of, 1320, 1582, 1720, 1739, 1782. 
Vogel, H. W., 368, 372. 
Vogel’s process, 99, 104, 126, 134, 147, 188, 2026. 
Vollenbruch’s theory, 1574. 


WwW 


Wall, E.. J., 328, 620, 

War time developments, 2122. 

Warner-Powrie process, 679, 814, 818, 867, 873, 883, 
896-897, 913, 917, 926, 928, 954, 982, 986, 1122, 
1127, 1140, 1191, 1201, 1356,.1381,. 1395. 

Warner’s (Miss), process, 2305. 

Warnerke, Leon, 131. 

Weather conditions, 831. 

Whites, 941, 1682. 

Wiener, Otto, 181. 

Wiener’s theory, 348, 461, 467. 

Wolf-Czapek, Karl Wilhelm, 1856. 

Wood’s process, 390, 405, 425, 477, 673, 731. 

Worel’s process, 493, 508, 517, 600. 

Wothly’s process, 185. 

Wratten and Wainwright, 697, 1013, 1222, 1742. 


xX 
X-rays, 135. 


Y 


Yellow, 863, 2111. 
Young-Helmholtz theory, 727, 756, 1461, 1517, 2057. 


Z 


Zander’s process, 696, 721, 807-810. 

Zenker’s theory, 262, 338, 345, 347, 420, 451, 461, 
467, 506, 599, 676, 

Zink’s photo-polychromoscope, 266. 




















